Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout3.00 NTC SubmittalsCaerus Operating LLC 1001 Seventeenth Street Suite 1600 Denver, CO 80202 June 22, 2023 Philip Berry, ACIP Planner III Garfield County – Community Development [delivered via email] RE: Wheeler Gulch Solar (LIPA-02-23-8946) – reply to NTC letter Dear Mr. Berry, I’m writing today in response to your letter dated May 30, 2023, which notified me that the application for an Administrative Review Land Use Change Permit application for a Large Solar Energy System (Wheeler Gulch Solar) within the Resource Lands Gentle Slope zone district (the Application) was Not Technically Complete (NTC). Your letter indicated that the “following items are required to bring the application into Technical Completeness.” 1. The Stormwater Master Plan associated with the CDPHE permits provided in Appendix B. 2. Phase II environmental analysis following up on the findings of the provided Phase I document. Relating to Item 1 above, I provided you the Stormwater Master Plan CDPHE permit on May 31, 2023, and you have acknowledged the receipt of the permit and that such permit satisfies condition 1. Regarding Item 2, the recommendation in the provided Phase I report from Wheeler Gulch’s engineer (HDR Engineering) that a Phase II environmental analysis be completed, was based on HDR’s ability to access, and analyze “available information.” At the time of the Phase I report the information about the remediation, soil testing and closing process approved by CDPHE in the 1998-2002 timeframe was not available to HDR. Accordingly, HDR recommended the Phase II analysis to obtain information about soil contaminants that may remain. I recently have recovered a copy of the documents from CDHPE associated with remediation and closing of this site based on its prior use as a holding pond. These documents have been reviewed by HDR and pursuant to the attached letter from HDR you will note that a Phase II analysis is no longer recommended. This is based on the CDPHE approved closing documents that include data from soil samples which demonstrate that contaminant levels are below threshold levels that would define this site as containing a Recognized Environmental Condition (REC). Please see the attached memo from HDR dated June 21, 2023. The HDR memo rescinds the recommendation that a Phase II analysis be completed and indicates that a revised Phase I report to that effect is forthcoming. The documents in support of the HDR memo are quite Philip Berry June 22, 2023 3 lengthy and so they are available at this link for download, rather than attaching them to an email. Please let me know if you require hard copies and I will deliver those to your office. As a result of this new information obtained, and the revised HDR recommendation I’m asking the County to waive its request for a Phase II analysis and for the Application to be deemed Technically Complete at this time. Assuming this will be acceptable to the County, I’m also requesting that the following be completed by your office at your earliest convenience: 1. Prepare and deliver written notice that the Application is complete. 2. Advise Applicant to begin the public notification process as outlined in section 4 of the Garfield County Land Use Development Code. 3. Schedule and confirm the earliest possible date for hearing of this matter by the Board of County Commissioners. Thanks for your consideration. I’ll look forward to your reply and working with you to move the Application through the approval process in the near future. Sincerely, Jason Eckman, Environmental Site Lead Attachments: HDR memorandum CDPHE approval of closing documents with soil sample data at this link. 9844180312212023Q4.12.3O PM Page 1 of 1 Jacklyn K. Harmon, Garfield County, Colorado Rec Fee: $13.00 Doc Fee: $0.00 eRecorded STATEMENT OF AUTHORIW pursuant to c.R,s. $38-30-172, the undersigned executes th¡s statement of Authority on behalf of whee¡erGulch Solâr LLC ¿ Limited LiabllllylQgrnpqly {corporat¡on, l¡m¡red l¡abll¡ty company, general partnership, registered limited liability partnershlp, reg¡stered limited liability limited partnership, limlted partnership assoc¡ation, government agency, trust or other), an entity other than an indlvidual, capable of holding title to real property (the "Entity"), and statês as follows: The name of the Entity is Wheolêr Gulch Solar LLC and is formed under the laws of Oelåwâre The mailing address for the Entity is '1001 17rh st. sulté 1600, Denver, co 80202 The name ândlor pos¡tion of the person authorized to execute Instruments convey¡ng, encumbering, or otherwise affecting t¡tle to real property on behalf of the Entity is Jason Eckman, Surtaco Rggulatory Lead The limitations upon the authority of the person named above or holding the position described above to bind the Fntity are as follows iif no limitât¡ons, insert "None")None other matters concerning the manner in which the Entity deals with åny interest in real property are (if no other matter, leave thls section blank): EXECUTED th¡s i ,,.Ì:'i day S¡gnature Name (printed): Title (if any): The foregoing instrume by of -1.,i ,ìi.l;ii.-rl 2a-¿.!-. I STATE OF COUNTY OF was acknowledged before me th¡s i.i-j'l-'day of on behalf of 20,:'-"1 Public) CHR¡STINE BULLOCH NOTARY PUEUC STATE OF COLORADO NOÍARY tD 2019103.1092 MY COÀ,IMISSION EXP¡RES SËPÎEÀ{BER 5,2023 I ir::.r'lr't:-. )ss. ) it Witness my hand and offic.ial seal. Mycommiss¡on expires: -,i ""',,í:1. : .;,ilr' (Date) JsEArl Gørfuld. County ü.f/;<,rv tt] 984419 031222023 A4i2:3O PM Page 1 of 1 Jacklyn K. Harmon, Garfield County, Colorado Rec Fee: $13-00 Doc Fee: $0.00 eRecorded STATEMENT OF AUTHORITY Pursuant to C.R.S. 538-30-172. the undersigned executes this Statement of Authority on behalf of Caerus Piceance a L¡m¡ted Liab¡lity Company (corporation, l¡mited liability company, general partnership, registered limited liability partnership, registered limited liability l¡m¡ted partnership, limited partnership assoc¡at¡on, government agency, trust or other), an ent¡ty other than an individuaf capable of holding title to real property (the "Ent¡ty"), and states as follows: The name of the Entíty ¡s Cãerus Piæance LLC and is formed under the l¡rys çf Delaware The mailing add ress for the Entity is 1001 17th Street, Suite 1600, Denver, CO 80202 The name and/or position of the person authorized to execute inslruments conveying, encumbering or otherwise affecting title to real property on behalf of the Ent¡ty is Jsson Eckman-Surface Regulatory Lead The limitations upon the author¡ty of the person named above or holding the pos¡tion described above to bind the Ent¡ty are as follows (if no limitations, ¡nsert "None"):None Other matters concerning the manner ¡n which the Entity deals with any ¡nterest in real property are (íf no other matter, leave this section blank): EXECUTED this -t¿i day of Mnvt.t^20 L\ S¡gnature: Name (printed): T¡tle {¡f any): f.alarrvln De.nrlen STATE OF COUNTY OF of )ss. ) 2aæ a W¡tness my hand and official spal. . - r . ñ. t My commission expires: n lølZtrZ¿|. Ar¡¿'þ I A\*,¿lrlO/ (óate) (Notary Public) ISEAL] MY Gørficld County Notice List  6S‐96W‐33 Lots 5&6  6S‐96W‐34 Lots 3&10  6S‐96W‐33 Lots 5&6   Elevation Resources, LLC  6S‐96W‐34 Lots 3&10  Page 1 of 4 March 17, 2023  # Section Lessee or Current WI Owner with Address  1 6S‐96W‐33 Carol Eaton Preston   4912 SW Firewood Road  Lake Oswego, OR 97035  2 6S‐96W‐34 CAERUS CROSS TIMBERS LLC  1001 17th Street, Suite 1600  Denver, CO 80202  3 6S‐96W‐34 CAERUS PICEANCE LLC  1001 17th Street, Suite 1600  Denver, CO 80202  4 6S‐96W‐34 Charles and Jean Mcuistion  278 Cedar St.  Grand Junction, CO 81503  5 6S‐96W‐34 Conley Resources LLC  PO Box 99  Parker, CO 80134  6 6S‐96W‐33 Dana Porter Ivers  PO BOX 1409  Ridgway, CO 71432  7 6S‐96W‐33  6S‐96W‐34  Edward D. Powell  6186 W. Coal Mine Pl   Littleton, CO 80128  8 6S‐96W‐34 Etta and Joe Waddell  300 Zuni Dr.  Grand Junction, CO 81503  9 6S‐96W‐33 Grand Valley Minerals Company  1001 17th Street, Suite 1600  Denver, CO 80202  Notice List  6S‐96W‐33 Lots 5&6  6S‐96W‐34 Lots 3&10  6S‐96W‐33 Lots 5&6   Elevation Resources, LLC  6S‐96W‐34 Lots 3&10  Page 2 of 4 March 17, 2023  # Section Lessee or Current WI Owner with Address  10 6S‐96W‐33  6S‐96W‐34  Hank Starr  126 E. Sycamore  Bloomfield, New Mexico 87413  11 6S‐96W‐34 Jackie Bunch and Paul Bunch  15180 W. Teel Road  Sapulpa, OK 74066  12 6S‐96W‐34 Jeanne Schwarz  25 Shallowbrook Dr.  O'Fallon, IL 62269  13 6S‐96W‐33  6S‐96W‐34  Joe D. Dillon And Debra K. Dillon  9869 E. Opalite Place  Tucson, AZ 85749  14 6S‐96W‐34 La Garita Land & Mineral Co Ltd.  PO Box 1697  Boulder, CO 80306  15 6S‐96W‐33  6S‐96W‐34  Lana M. Blazek  366 N. Starcrest Dr.  Salt Lake City, UT 84116  16 6S‐96W‐33 Mary E. O’Neil Family Generation Skipping Trust  ℅ Dana P. Ivers  PO Box 1409  Ridgway, CO 71432  17 6S‐96W‐34 OFFICE OF NATURAL RESOURCES  PO Box 25627  Denver, CO 80225  18 6S‐96W‐33  6S‐96W‐34  Pauline Threlkfeld   7738 East 3rd Street  Scottsdale, AZ 85851  Notice List  6S‐96W‐33 Lots 5&6  6S‐96W‐34 Lots 3&10  6S‐96W‐33 Lots 5&6   Elevation Resources, LLC  6S‐96W‐34 Lots 3&10  Page 3 of 4 March 17, 2023  # Section Lessee or Current WI Owner with Address  19 6S‐96W‐33  6S‐96W‐34  Raymond Andrew Powell  126 E. Sycamore  ℅ Hank Starr  Bloomfield, NW 87413  20 6S‐96W‐34 Richard and Janet McQuiston   PO BOX 3011   West Palm Beach, FL 33402  21 6S‐96W‐33 Robin C. Delp Revocable Trust  U/A Dated May 9, 2016  P.O. Box 190266  Anchorage, AK 99519  22 6S‐96W‐33 Schuyler E. Cone6279 N. Coolville Ridge Athens,  OH 45701  23 6S‐96W‐34 Scott WIlliams  1502 S. Boulder, #17D  Tulsa, OK 74119  24 6S‐96W‐33  6S‐96W‐34  Sharine Enderson  PO Box 761  Tonopah, AZ 85354  25 6S‐96W‐33 Sherrill LeDonne  424 32 Road, #366  Clifton, CO 81520  26 6S‐96W‐34 Shirley and Ronald Houskeeper  850 West Owls Way  Washington, UT 84780  27 6S‐96W‐33 The Robert Wilson Miner Trust  ℅ Robert W. Miner Jr, Trustee  PO BOX 190266  Anchorage, AK 99519  Notice List  6S‐96W‐33 Lots 5&6  6S‐96W‐34 Lots 3&10  6S‐96W‐33 Lots 5&6   Elevation Resources, LLC  6S‐96W‐34 Lots 3&10  Page 4 of 4 March 17, 2023  # Section Lessee or Current WI Owner with Address  28 6S‐96W‐34 The Threlkeld Family Trust   7738 East 3rd Street  Scottsdale, AZ 85851  29 6S‐96W‐34 W. Eli McRorey Irrevocable Trust f/b/o Lee  McRorey  P.O. Box 3627   Tulsa, OK 74101  30 6S‐96W‐34 W. Eli McRorey Irrevocable Trust f/b/o Ronald  McRorey  P.O. Box 3627   Tulsa, OK 74101  31 6S‐96W‐34 William and Janice McQuiston  127 Carol Ct.  Grand Junction, CO 81503    1620 Grand Avenue Glenwood Springs, CO 81601 Phone: 970-945-1169 Fax: 844-269-2759 www.titlecorockies.com Commitment Ordered By: Frank Jimenez Caerus Operating LLC, a Colorado limited liability 143 Diamond Avenue Parachute, CO 81635 Phone: 970-285-2606 Fax: email: fjimenez@caerusoilandgas.com Inquiries should be directed to: Authorized Officer or Agent Title Company of the Rockies 1620 Grand Avenue Glenwood Springs, CO 81601 Phone: 970-945-1169 Fax: 844-269-2759 Commitment Number:0603715-C Buyer's Name(s):Purchaser with contractual rights under a purchaser agreement with the vested owner identified at item 4 below Seller's Name(s):Caerus Piceance LLC, a Colorado limited liability company Property:3701 County Road 215, Parachute, CO 81635 Section: 33 Township: 6 Range: 96 LOT 5, SEC 34 PT OF LOTS 3 & 10, County of Garfield, State of Colorado. TITLE CHARGES These charges are based on issuance of the policy or policies described in the attached Commitment for Title Insurance, and includes premiums for the proposed coverage amount(s) and endorsement(s) referred to therein, and may also include additional work and/or third party charges related thereto. If applicable, the designation of “Buyer” and “Seller” shown below may be based on traditional settlement practices in Garfield County, Colorado, and/or certain terms of any contract, or other information provided with the Application for Title Insurance. Owner’s Policy Premium: Loan Policy Premium: Additional Lender Charge(s): Additional Other Charge(s): Tax Certificate: Total Endorsement Charge(s): TBD Charge(s): TOTAL CHARGES: $0.00 $0.00 Additional Search Hours $1,125.00 $250.00 $1,375.00 Service Beyond Expectation in Colorado for: Eagle, Garfield, Grand, Pitkin and Summit Counties. (Limited Coverage: Jackson, Lake, Park and Routt Counties) Locations In: Avon/Beaver Creek, Basalt, Breckenridge, Grand Lake and Winter Park. (Closing Services available in Aspen and Glenwood Springs). CM-2 (ALTA Commitment for Title Insurance (6-17-06)(WLTIC Edition (9/26/07) ALTA Commitment For Title Insurance (Adopted 06-17-06) (Revised 08-01-2016) COMMITMENT FOR TITLE INSURANCE ISSUED BY WESTCOR LAND TITLE INSURANCE COMPANY NOTICE IMPORTANT-READ CAREFULLY: THIS COMMITMENT IS AN OFFER TO ISSUE ONE OR MORE TITLE INSURANCE POLICIES. ALL CLAIMS OR REMEDIES SOUGHT AGAINST THE COMPANY INVOLVING THE CONTENT OF THIS COMMITMENT OR THE POLICY MUST BE BASED SOLELY IN CONTRACT. THIS COMMITMENT IS NOT AN ABSTRACT OF TITLE, REPORT OF THE CONDITION OF TITLE, LEGAL OPINION, OPINION OF TITLE, OR OTHER REPRESENTATION OF THE STATUS OF TITLE. THE PROCEDURES USED BY THE COMPANY TO DETERMINE INSURABILITY OF THE TITLE, INCLUDING ANY SEARCH AND EXAMINATION, ARE PROPRIETARY TO THE COMPANY, WERE PERFORMED SOLELY FOR THE BENEFIT OF THE COMPANY, AND CREATE NO EXTRACONTRACTUAL LIABILITY TO ANY PERSON, INCLUDING A PROPOSED INSURED. THE COMPANY'S OBLIGATION UNDER THIS COMMITMENT IS TO ISSUE A POLICY TO A PROPOSED INSURED IDENTIFIED IN SCHEDULE A IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TERMS AND PROVISIONS OF THIS COMMITMENT. THE COMPANY HAS NO LIABILITY OR OBLIGATION INVOLVING THE CONTENT OF THIS COMMITMENT TO ANY OTHER PERSON. COMMITMENT TO ISSUE POLICY Subject to the Notice; Schedule B, Part I-Requirements; Schedule B, Part II-Exceptions; and the Commitment Conditions, WESTCOR LAND TITLE INSURANCE COMPANY, a South Carolina Corporation (the “Company”), commits to issue the Policy according to the terms and provisions of this Commitment. This Commitment is effective as of the Commitment Date shown in Schedule A for each Policy described in Schedule A, only when the Company has entered in Schedule A both the specified dollar amount as the Proposed Policy Amount and the name of the Proposed Insured. If all of the Schedule B, Part I-Requirements have not been met within six (6) months after the Commitment Date, this Commitment terminates and the Company's liability and obligation end. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, WESTCOR LAND TITLE INSURANCE COMPANY has caused its corporate name and seal to be hereunto affixed and by these presents to be signed in facsimile under authority of its by-laws, effective as of the date of Commitment shown in Schedule A. Issued By: WESTCOR LAND TITLE INSURANCE COMPANY Title Company of the Rockies, LLC 10 W Beaver Creek Blvd., Suite 221, PO Box 980 Avon, CO 81620-0980 Phone: (970) 949-9497 Westcor Land Title Insurance Company ALTA Commitment -2006 (6-17-06) (Reverse side of Cover) CONDITIONS The term mortgage, when used herein, shall include deed of trust, trust deed, or other security instrument.1. If the proposed Insured has or acquired actual knowledge of any defect, lien, encumbrance, adverse claim2. or other matter affecting the estate or interest or mortgage thereon covered by this Commitment other than those shown in Schedule B hereof, and shall fail to disclose such knowledge to the Company in writing, the Company shall be relieved from liability for any loss or damage resulting from any act of reliance hereon to the extent the Company is prejudiced by failure to so disclose such knowledge. If the proposed Insured shall disclose such knowledge to the Company, or if the Company otherwise acquires actual knowledge of any such defect, lien, encumbrance, adverse claim or other matter, the Company at its option may amend Schedule B of this Commitment accordingly, but such amendment shall not relieve the Company from liability previously incurred pursuant to paragraph 3 of these Conditions and Stipulations. Liability of the Company under this Commitment shall be only to the named proposed Insured and such3. parties included under the definition of Insured in the form of policy or policies committed for and only for actual loss incurred in reliance hereon in undertaking in good faith (a) to comply with the requirements hereof, or (b) to eliminate exceptions shown in Schedule B, or (c) to acquire or create the estate or interest or mortgage thereon covered by this Commitment. In no event shall such liability exceed the amount stated in Schedule A for the policy or policies committed for and such liability is subject to the insuring provisions and Conditions and Stipulations and the Exclusions from Coverage of the form of policy or policies committed for in favor of the proposed Insured which are hereby incorporated by reference and are made a part of this Commitment except as expressly modified herein. This Commitment is a contract to issue one or more title insurance policies and is not an abstract of title4. or a report of the condition of title. Any action or actions or rights of action that the proposed Insured may have or may bring against the Company arising out of the status of the title to the estate or interest or the status of the mortgage thereon covered by this Commitment must be based on and are subject to the provisions of this Commitment. The policy to be issued contains an arbitration clause. All arbitrable matters when the Amount of5. Insurance is $2,000,000 or less shall be arbitrated at the option of either the Company or the Insured as the exclusive remedy of the parties. You may review a copy of the arbitration rules at< http://www.alta.org/>. (Reverse side of Cover) Westcor Land Title Insurance Company Joint Notice of Privacy Policy of Westcor Land Title Insurance Company and Title Company of the Rockies, LLC Westcor Land Title Insurance Company (“WLTIC”) and Title Company of the Rockies, LLC value their customers and are committed to protecting the privacy of personal information. In keeping with that philosophy, we each have developed a Privacy Policy, set out below, that will endure the continued protection of your nonpublic personal information and inform you about the measures WLTIC and Title Company of the Rockies, LLC take to safeguard that information. This notice is issued jointly as a means of paperwork reduction and is not intended to create a joint privacy policy. Each company's privacy policy is separately instituted, executed, and maintained. Who is Covered We provide our Privacy Policy to each customer when they purchase a WLTIC title insurance policy. Generally, this means that the Privacy Policy is provided to the customer at the closing of the real estate transaction. Information Collected In the normal course of business and to provide the necessary services to our customers, we may obtain nonpublic personal information directly from the customer, from customer-related transactions, or from third parties such as our title insurance agent, lenders, appraisers, surveyors and other similar entities. Access to Information Access to all nonpublic personal information is limited to those employees who have a need to know in order to perform their jobs. These employees include, but are not limited to, those in departments such as closing, legal, underwriting, claims and administration and accounting. Information Sharing Generally, neither WLTIC nor Title Company of the Rockies, LLC shares nonpublic personal information that it collects with anyone other than those individuals necessary needed to complete the real estate settlement services and issue its title insurance policy as requested by the consumer. WLTIC or Title Company of the Rockies, LLC may share nonpublic personal information as permitted by law with entities with whom WLTIC or Title Company of the Rockies, LLC has a joint marketing agreement. Entities with whom WLTIC or Title Company of the Rockies, LLC have a joint marketing agreement have agreed to protect the privacy of our customer's nonpublic personal information by utilizing similar precautions and security measures as WLTIC and Title Company of the Rockies, LLC use to protect this information and to use the information for lawful purposes. WLTIC or Title Company of the Rockies, LLC , however, may share information as required by law in response to a subpoena, to a government regulatory agency or to prevent fraud. Information Security WLTIC and Title Company of the Rockies, LLC , at all times, strive to maintain the confidentiality and integrity of the personal information in its possession and has instituted measures to guard against its unauthorized access. We maintain physical, electronic and procedural safeguards in compliance with federal standards to protect that information. The WLTIC Privacy Policy can be found on WLTIC's website at www.wltic.com COMMITMENT FOR TITLE INSURANCE Issued by as agent for Westcor Land Title Insurance Company SCHEDULE A Reference:Commitment Number: 0603715-C 1.Effective Date: March 23, 2022, 7:00 am Issue Date: April 04, 2022 2. Policy (or Policies) to be issued: ALTA Owner's Policy (6-17-06)Policy Amount: Amount to be Determined Premium:Amount to be Determined Proposed Insured:Purchaser with contractual rights under a purchaser agreement with the vested owner identified at item 4 below 3.The estate or interest in the land described or referred to in this Commitment is Fee Simple. 4. The Title is, at the Commitment Date, vested in: Caerus Piceance LLC, a Colorado limited liability company 5. The land referred to in this Commitment is described as follows: FOR LEGAL DESCRIPTION SEE SCHEDULE A CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE For Informational Purposes Only - APN: R008110 Countersigned Title Company of the Rockies, LLC This page is only a part of a 2016 ALTA® Commitment for Title Insurance issued by Westcor Land Title Insurance Company. This Commitment is not valid without the Notice; the Commitment to Issue Policy; the Commitment Conditions; Schedule A; Schedule B, Part I-Requirements; and Schedule B, Part II-Exceptions. Copyright 2006-2016 American Land Title Association. All rights reserved. The use of this Form (or any derivative thereof) is restricted to ALTA licensees and ALTA members in good standing as of the date of use. All other uses are prohibited. Reprinted under license from the American Land Title Association. Commitment for Title Insurance (8-1-2016) Technical Correction 4-2-2018 Schedule B - Part II Page 1 By: Mike Mulligan Commitment No: 0603715-C SCHEDULE A (continued) LEGAL DESCRIPTION The Land referred to herein is located in the County of Garfield, State of Colorado, and described as follows: The SE1/4NE1/2 of Section 33 (also known as Lot 5), Township 6 South, Range 96 West of the 6th Principal Meridian, County of Garfield, State of Colorado. AND A parcel of land situate in the NW1/4 and in the SW1/4 of Section 34, Township 6 South, Range 96 West of the Sixth Principal, County of Garfield, State of Colorado, being more particularly described as follows: Commencing at a found stone for the northwest corner of said Section 34 and considering the line between U.S.C.G.S. Stations Hurlburt and Sage to bear N 38°46'25" W with all bearings contained herein to be relative thereto; thence S 00°52'36" W along the west line of G.L.O. Lot 2 (NW1/4NW1/4) of said Section 34 a distance of 1332.07 feet to the northwest corner of G.L.O. Lot 3 (SW1/4NW1/4) of said Section 34 and True Point of Beginning of the parcel described herein; thence S 88°37'31" E along the north line of said G.L.O. Lot 3 (SW1/4NW1/2) a distance of 483.92 feet to a point on the westerly right of way line for County Road No.215 realigned as found described in Book 561 at Page 765 of the records of the Garfield County Clerk and Recorder; thence along the westerly right of way line for said County Road No.215 realigned the following 2 courses: 1) S 33°04'06" E a distance of 1287.99 feet; 2) 205.90 feet along a curve concave to the northeast, having a radius of 1550.00 feet, a delta angle of 07°36'39" and a long chord bearing S 36°52'26" E a distance of 205.74 feet to a point on the east line of said G.L.O. Lot 3 (SW1/4NW1/4). thence S 01°27=22-a W along said east line a distance of 106.42 feet to the northeast corner of G.L.O. Lot 10 (NW1/4SW1/4) of said Section 34; thence S 01°29'23" W along the east line of said G.L.O. Lot 10 (NW1/4SW1/4) a distance of 115.01 feet; thence leaving said east line N 88°01'00" W a distance of 380.13 feet; thence S 01°58'00" W a distance of 634.10 feet; thence N 88°04'00" W a distance of 714.70 feet; thence S 01°56'00" W a distance of 559.70 feet; thence N 88°04'00" W a distance of 209.60 feet to a point on the west line of said G.L.O. Lot 10 (NW1/4SW1/4); thence N 00°52'13" E along said west line a distance of 1293.90 feet to the west quarter corner of said Section 34; thence N 00°52'36" E along the west line of said G.L.O. Lot 3 (SW1/4NW1/4) a distance of 1332.07 feet to the northwest corner of said G.L.O. Lot 3 ( SW1/4NW1/4) and point of beginning. EXCEPTING THEREFROM that portion of County Road 215 that crosses the subject property including the Roadway Survey Parcels and Slide Parcels contained within the subject property conveyed to The Board of County Commissioners of Garfield County, Colorado in Special Warranty Deed recorded December 30, 1986 in Book 702 at Page 424 and as corrected in instrument recorded June 15, 1987 in Book 714 at Page 1. This page is only a part of a 2016 ALTA® Commitment for Title Insurance issued by Westcor Land Title Insurance Company. This Commitment is not valid without the Notice; the Commitment to Issue Policy; the Commitment Conditions; Schedule A; Schedule B, Part I-Requirements; and Schedule B, Part II-Exceptions. Copyright 2006-2016 American Land Title Association. All rights reserved. The use of this Form (or any derivative thereof) is restricted to ALTA licensees and ALTA members in good standing as of the date of use. All other uses are Commitment for Title Insurance (8-1-2016) Technical Correction 4-2-2018 Schedule A Page 3 Commitment No: 0603715-C For each policy to be issued as identified in Schedule A, Item 2, the Company shall not be liable under this commitment until it receives a specific designation of a Proposed Insured, and has revised this commitment identifying that Proposed Insured by name. As provided in Commitment Condition 4, the Company may amend this commitment to add, among other things, additional exceptions or requirements after the designation of the Proposed Insured. This page is only a part of a 2016 ALTA® Commitment for Title Insurance issued by Westcor Land Title Insurance Company. This Commitment is not valid without the Notice; the Commitment to Issue Policy; the Commitment Conditions; Schedule A; Schedule B, Part I-Requirements; and Schedule B, Part II-Exceptions. Copyright 2006-2016 American Land Title Association. All rights reserved. The use of this Form (or any derivative thereof) is restricted to ALTA licensees and ALTA members in good standing as of the date of use. All other uses are Commitment for Title Insurance (8-1-2016) Technical Correction 4-2-2018 Schedule A Page 4 Commitment No: 0603715-C COMMITMENT FOR TITLE INSURANCE Issued by Westcor Land Title Insurance Company SCHEDULE B, PART I Requirements The following are the requirements to be complied with prior to the issuance of said policy or policies. Any other instrument recorded subsequent to the effective date hereof may appear as an exception under Schedule B of the policy to be issued. Unless otherwise noted, all documents must be recorded in the office of the clerk and recorded of the county in which said property is located. All of the following Requirements must be met: 1. The Proposed Insured must notify the Company in writing of the name of any party not referred to in this Commitment who will obtain an interest in the Land or who will make a loan on the Land. The Company may then make additional Requirements or Exceptions. 2. Pay the agreed amount for the estate or interest to be insured. 3. Pay the premiums, fees, and charges for the Policy to the Company. 4. Documents satisfactory to the Company that convey the Title or create the Mortgage to be insured, or both, must be properly authorized, executed, delivered, and recorded in the Public Records. Resolution or Statement of Authority by Caerus Piceance LLC, a Colorado limited liability company,5. authorizing the transaction, executed by the managers or members set forth in the Operating Agreement. NOTE: Review Operating Agreement for authority of party(ies) to act on behalf of said limited liability company and complete the transaction contemplated herein. NOTE: Please be advised that our search did not disclose any open Deeds of Trust of record. If you should have knowledge of any outstanding obligation, please contact the Title Department immediately for further review prior to closing. Deed from Caerus Piceance LLC, a Colorado limited liability company to Purchaser with contractual rights6. under a purchaser agreement with the vested owner identified at item 4 below. NOTE: Duly executed real property transfer declaration, executed by either the Grantor or Grantee, to accompany the Deed mentioned above, pursuant to Article 14 of House Bill No. 1288-CRA 39-14-102. THE COMPANY RESERVES THE RIGHT TO CONDUCT AN ADDITIONAL SEARCH OF THE RECORDS IN THE OFFICE OF THE CLERK AND RECORDER FOR GARFIELD COUNTY, This page is only a part of a 2016 ALTA® Commitment for Title Insurance issued by Westcor Land Title Insurance Company. This Commitment is not valid without the Notice; the Commitment to Issue Policy; the Commitment Conditions; Schedule A; Schedule B, Part I-Requirements; and Schedule B, Part II-Exceptions. Copyright 2006-2016 American Land Title Association. All rights reserved. The use of this Form (or any derivative thereof) is restricted to ALTA licensees and ALTA members in good standing as of the date of use. All other uses are Commitment for Title Insurance (8-1-2016) Technical Correction 4-2-2018 Schedule B - Part I Page 5 Commitment No: 0603715-C COLORADO FOR JUDGMENT LIENS, TAX LIENS OR OTHER SIMILAR OR DISSIMILAR INVOLUNTARY MATTERS AFFECTING THE GRANTEE OR GRANTEES, AND TO MAKE SUCH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS AS IT DEEMS NECESSARY, AFTER THE IDENTITY OF THE GRANTEE OR GRANTEES HAS BEEN DISCLOSED TO THE COMPANY. NOTE: THIS COMMITMENT IS ISSUED UPON THE EXPRESS AGREEMENT AND UNDERSTANDING THAT THE APPLICABLE PREMIUMS, CHARGES AND FEES SHALL BE PAID BY THE APPLICANT IF THE APPLICANT AND/OR ITS DESIGNEE OR NOMINEE CLOSES THE TRANSACTION CONTEMPLATED BY OR OTHERWISE RELIES UPON THE COMMITMENT, ALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE RULES AND SCHEDULES OF RATES ON FILE WITH THE COLORADO DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE. This page is only a part of a 2016 ALTA® Commitment for Title Insurance issued by Westcor Land Title Insurance Company. This Commitment is not valid without the Notice; the Commitment to Issue Policy; the Commitment Conditions; Schedule A; Schedule B, Part I-Requirements; and Schedule B, Part II-Exceptions. Copyright 2006-2016 American Land Title Association. All rights reserved. The use of this Form (or any derivative thereof) is restricted to ALTA licensees and ALTA members in good standing as of the date of use. All other uses are Commitment for Title Insurance (8-1-2016) Technical Correction 4-2-2018 Schedule B - Part I - continued Page 6 Commitment No: 0603715-C SCHEDULE B, PART II Exceptions THIS COMMITMENT DOES NOT REPUBLISH ANY COVENANT, CONDITION, RESTRICTION, OR LIMITATION CONTAINED IN ANY DOCUMENT REFERRED TO IN THIS COMMITMENT TO THE EXTENT THAT THE SPECIFIC COVENANT, CONDITION, RESTRICTION, OR LIMITATION VIOLATES STATE OR FEDERAL LAW BASED ON RACE, COLOR, RELIGION, SEX, SEXUAL ORIENTATION, GENDER IDENTITY, HANDICAP, FAMILIAL STATUS, OR NATIONAL ORIGIN. Schedule B of the policy or policies to be issued will contain exceptions to the following matters unless the same are disposed of to the satisfaction of the Company. Any loss or damage, including attorney fees, by reason of the matters shown below: Any facts, right, interests, or claims which are not shown by the Public Records but which could be1. ascertained by an inspection of said Land or by making inquiry of persons in possession thereof. Easements or claims of easements, not shown by the Public Records.2. Any encroachment, encumbrance, violation, variation, or adverse circumstance affecting the Title that3. would be disclosed by an accurate and complete land survey of the Land. 4. Any lien, or right to a lien for services, labor or material heretofore or hereafter furnished, imposed by law and not shown by the Public Records. 5. Defects, liens, encumbrances, adverse claims or other matters, if any created, first appearing in the Public Records or attaching subsequent to the effective date hereof, but prior to the date of the proposed insured acquires of record for value the estate or interest or mortgage thereon covered by this Commitment. 6. (a) Taxes or assessments that are not shown as existing liens by the records of any taxing authority that levies taxes or assessments on real property or by the Public Records; (b) proceedings by a public agency that may result in taxes or assessments, or notices of such proceedings, whether or not shown by the records of such agency or by the Public Records. Right of the Proprietor of a vein or lode to extract and remove his ore therefrom, should the same be found7. to penetrate or intersect the premises hereby granted, as reserved in United States Patent recorded November 19, 1941 in Book 201 at Page 636. Right of way for ditches or canals constructed by the authority of the United States, as reserved in United8. States Patent recorded November 19, 1941 in Book 201 at Page 636. Any and all water and water rights, reservoir and reservoir rights, ditches and ditch rights, and the9. enlargements and extensions thereof, and all laterals, flumes and headgates used in connection therewith. This page is only a part of a 2016 ALTA® Commitment for Title Insurance issued by Westcor Land Title Insurance Company. This Commitment is not valid without the Notice; the Commitment to Issue Policy; the Commitment Conditions; Schedule A; Schedule B, Part I-Requirements; and Schedule B, Part II-Exceptions. Copyright 2006-2016 American Land Title Association. All rights reserved. The use of this Form (or any derivative thereof) is restricted to ALTA licensees and ALTA members in good standing as of the date of use. All other uses are Commitment for Title Insurance (8-1-2016) Technical Correction 4-2-2018 Schedule B - Part II Page 7 Commitment No: 0603715-C Any rights, interests or easements in favor of the State of Colorado, the United States of America, or the10. general public, which exist or are claimed to exist in, over, under and/or across the waters and present and past bed and banks of the Parachute Ditch. An undivided one-half (1/2) interest in oil, gas and other mineral rights, as reserved by Emily Davenport in11. the Deed recorded March 12, 1904 in Book 61 at Page 438, and any and all assignments thereof or interests therein. An undivided one-quarter (1/4) interest in oil, gas and other mineral rights, as reserved by Charles E. Ogden12. aka Charles Ogden in the Deed recorded August 20, 1956 in Book 294 at Page 590, and any and all assignments thereof or interests therein. An undivided one-half (1/2) interest in oil, gas and other mineral rights, as reserved by Rea L. Eaton in the13. Deed recorded September 26, 1659 in Book 295 at Page 334, and any and all assignments thereof or interests therein. Terms, agreements, provisions, conditions and obligations as contained in Right of Way Grant recorded14. May 24, 1958 in Book 309 at Page 27. An undivided (40%) interest in all oil, gas and other mineral rights, as conveyed to Battlement Mesa, Inc.15. by Deed recorded June 22, 1982 in Book 601 at Page 658, and any and all assignments thereof or interests therein. Terms, agreements, provisions, conditions and obligations as contained in Access License Agreement16. recorded December 30, 1996 at Reception No. 502910, October 9, 1997 at Reception NJo. 514816, October 9, 1997 at Reception NJo. 514818, October 9, 1997 at Reception NJo. 514832. Terms, agreements, provisions, conditions and obligations as contained in Deed Restriction and Notation17. recorded November 4, 1998 at Reception No. 534876. Easements, rights of way and all other matters as shown on the Plat filed October 20, 1999 at Reception No.18. 553995. Terms, agreements, provisions, conditions and obligations as contained in Right of Way and Easement19. Agreement recorded September 9, 2005 at Reception No. 681873. Easement and right of way for electric transmission and distribution line purposes, as granted to Public20. Service Company of Colorado, by instrument recorded March 16, 2006 at Reception No. 694082, said easement being more particularly described therein. Terms, agreements, provisions, conditions and obligations as contained in Right of Way Easement21. Agreement recorded June 22, 2006 at Reception No. 700546. Terms, agreements, provisions, conditions and obligations as contained in Easement and Reight of Way22. Agreement recorded March 5, 2009 at Reception No. 764210. This page is only a part of a 2016 ALTA® Commitment for Title Insurance issued by Westcor Land Title Insurance Company. This Commitment is not valid without the Notice; the Commitment to Issue Policy; the Commitment Conditions; Schedule A; Schedule B, Part I-Requirements; and Schedule B, Part II-Exceptions. Copyright 2006-2016 American Land Title Association. All rights reserved. The use of this Form (or any derivative thereof) is restricted to ALTA licensees and ALTA members in good standing as of the date of use. All other uses are Commitment for Title Insurance (8-1-2016) Technical Correction 4-2-2018 Schedule B - Part II - continued Page 8 Commitment No: 0603715-C Easement and right of way for pipeline purposes, as granted to WPX Energy Rocky Mountain, LLC, by23. instrument recorded August 13, 2012 at Reception No. 822701 and amended March 25, 2013 at Reception No. 833085, said easement being more particularly described therein. Easement and right of way for pipeline purposes, as granted to Bargath, LLC, by instrument recorded24. February 8, 2013 at Reception No. 831115, said easement being more particularly described therein. Easement and right of way for utilities purposes, as granted to Public Service Company of Colorado, by25. instrument recorded March 6, 2014 at Reception No. 846946 and Reception No. 846947, said easement being more particularly described therein. Any and all leases and or tenancies and any and all parties claiming by, through, or under such leases and or26. tenancies. This page is only a part of a 2016 ALTA® Commitment for Title Insurance issued by Westcor Land Title Insurance Company. This Commitment is not valid without the Notice; the Commitment to Issue Policy; the Commitment Conditions; Schedule A; Schedule B, Part I-Requirements; and Schedule B, Part II-Exceptions. Copyright 2006-2016 American Land Title Association. All rights reserved. The use of this Form (or any derivative thereof) is restricted to ALTA licensees and ALTA members in good standing as of the date of use. All other uses are Commitment for Title Insurance (8-1-2016) Technical Correction 4-2-2018 Schedule B - Part II - continued Page 9 Commitment No: 0603715-C DISCLOSURE STATEMENTS Note 1: Colorado Division of Insurance Regulations 3-5-1, Paragraph C of Article VII, requires that "Every Title entity shall be responsible for all matters which appear of record prior to the time of recording whenever the Title entity conducts the closing and is responsible for recording or filing of legal documents resulting from the transaction which was closed.” (Gap Protection) Note 2: Exception No. 4 of Schedule B, Section 2 of this Commitment may be deleted from the Owner's Policy to be issued hereunder upon compliance with the following conditions: The Land described in Schedule A of this commitment must be a single-family residence, which includes a1. condominium or townhouse unit. No labor or materials may have been furnished by mechanics or materialmen for purpose of construction on2. the Land described in Schedule A of this Commitment within the past 13 months. The Company must receive an appropriate affidavit indemnifying the Company against unfiled mechanic's3. and materialmen's liens. Any deviation from conditions A though C above is subject to such additional requirements or Information4. as the Company may deem necessary, or, at its option, the Company may refuse to delete the exception. Payment of the premium for said coverage.5. Note 3: The following disclosures are hereby made pursuant to §10-11-122, C.R.S.: The subject real property may be located in a special taxing district;(i) A certificate of taxes due listing each taxing jurisdiction shall be obtained from the County Treasurer or the(ii) County Treasurer's authorized agent; and Information regarding special districts and the boundaries of such districts may be obtained from the(iii) County Commissioners, the County Clerk and Recorder, or the County Assessor. Note 4: If the sales price of the subject property exceeds $100,000.00, the seller shall be required to comply with the disclosure or withholding provisions of C.R.S. §39-22-604.5 (Non-resident withholding). Note 5: Pursuant to C.R.S. §10-11-123 Notice is hereby given: (a) If there is recorded evidence that a mineral estate has been severed, leased or otherwise conveyed from the surface estate then there is a substantial likelihood that a third party holds some or all interest in oil, gas, other minerals, or geothermal energy in the property, and (b) That such mineral estate may include the right to enter and use the property without the surface owner's permission. Note 6: Effective September 1, 1997, C.R.S. §30-10-406 requires that all documents received for recording or filing in the clerk and recorder's office shall contain a top margin of at least one inch and a left, right and bottom margin of at least one-half inch the clerk and recorder may refuse to record or file any document that does not conform. Note 7: Our Privacy Policy: We will not reveal nonpublic personal customer information to any external non-affiliated organization unless we have been authorized by the customer, or are required by law. Note 8: Records: Regulation 3-5-1 Section 7 (N) provides that each title entity shall maintain adequate documentation and records sufficient to show compliance with this regulation and Title 10 of the Colorado Revised Statutes for a period of not less than seven (7) years, except as otherwise permitted by law. Note 9: Pursuant Regulation 3-5-1 Section 9 (F) notice is hereby given that “A title entity shall not earn interest on fiduciary funds unless disclosure is made to all necessary parties to a transaction that interest is or has been earned. Said disclosure must offer the opportunity to receive payment of any interest earned on such funds beyond any administrative fees as may be on file with the division. Said disclosure must be clear and conspicuous, and may be made at any time up to and including closing.” Be advised that the closing agent will or could charge an Administrative Fee for processing such an additional Page 10 services request and any resulting payee will also be subjected to a W-9 or other required tax documentation for such purpose(s). Be further advised that, for many transactions, the imposed Administrative Fee associated with such an additional service may exceed any such interest earned. Therefore, you may have the right to some of the interest earned over and above the Administrative Fee, if applicable (e.g., any money over any administrative fees involved in figuring the amounts earned). Note 10: Pursuant to Regulation 3-5-1 Section 9 (G) notice is hereby given that “Until a title entity receives written instructions pertaining to the holding of fiduciary funds, in a form agreeable to the title entity, it shall comply with the following: The title entity shall deposit funds into an escrow, trust, or other fiduciary account and hold them in a1. fiduciary capacity. The title entity shall use any funds designated as “earnest money” for the consummation of the transaction2. as evidenced by the contract to buy and sell real estate applicable to said transaction, except as otherwise provided in this section. If the transaction does not close, the title entity shall: Release the earnest money funds as directed by written instructions signed by both the buyer and seller;(a) or If acceptable written instructions are not received, uncontested funds shall be held by the title entity for(b) 180 days from the scheduled date of closing, after which the title entity shall return said funds to the payor. In the event of any controversy regarding the funds held by the title entity (notwithstanding any termination3. of the contract), the title entity shall not be required to take any action unless and until such controversy is resolved. At its option and discretion, the title entity may: Await any proceeding; or(a) Interplead all parties and deposit such funds into a court of competent jurisdiction, and recover court(b) costs and reasonable attorney and legal fees; or Deliver written notice to the buyer and seller that unless the title entity receives a copy of a summons(c) and complaint or claim (between buyer and seller), containing the case number of the lawsuit or lawsuits, within 120 days of the title entity's written notice delivered to the parties, title entity shall return the funds to the depositing party.” Page 11 Commitment No: 0603715-C Title Company of the Rockies Disclosures All documents received for recording or filing in the Clerk and Recorder's office shall contain a top margin of atleast one inch and a left, right and bottom margin of at least one half of an inch. The Clerk and Recorder will refuseto record or file any document that does not conform to the requirements of this section. Pursuant to C.R.S.30-10-406(3)(a). The company will not issue its policy or policies of title insurance contemplated by this commitment until it has beenprovided a Certificate of Taxes due or other equivalent documentation from the County Treasurer or the CountyTreasurer's authorized agent: or until the Proposed Insured has notified or instructed the company in writing to thecontrary. Pursuant to C.R.S. 10-11-122. No person or entity that provides closing and settlement services for a real estate transaction shall disburse funds as apart of such services until those funds have been received and are available for immediate withdrawals as a matter ofright. Pursuant to C.R.S. 38-35-125(2). The Company hereby notifies the proposed buyer in the current transaction that there may be recorded evidence that the mineral estate, or portion thereof, has been severed, leased, or otherwise conveyed from the surface estate. If so, there is a substantial likelihood that a third party holds some or all interest in the oil, gas, other minerals, or geothermal energy in the subject property. Such mineral estate may include the right to enter and use the property without the surface owner's permission. Pursuant to C.R.S. 10-11-123. If this transaction includes a sale of property and the sales price exceeds $100,000.00, the seller must comply withthe disclosure/withholding requirements of said section. (Nonresident withholding) Pursuant to C.R.S. 39-22-604.5. Notice is hereby given that: The subject property may be located in a special taxing district. A Certificate of Taxesdue listing each taxing jurisdiction shall be obtained from the County Treasurer or the County Treasurer's authorizedagent. Information regarding special districts and the boundaries of such districts may be obtained from the Board ofCounty Commissioners, the County Clerk and Recorder, or the County Assessor. Pursuant to C.R.S. 10-11-122. Notice is hereby given that: Pursuant to Colorado Division of Insurance Regulation 8-1-2; "Gap Protection" -When this Company conducts the closing and is responsible for recording or filing the legaldocuments resulting from the transaction, the Company shall be responsible for all matters which appear on therecord prior to such time or recording or filing; and "Mechanic's Lien Protection" - If you are the buyer of a single family residence, you may request mechanic'slien coverage to be issued on your policy of Insurance. If the property being purchased has not been the subjectof construction, improvements or repairs in the last six months prior to the date of this commitment, therequirements will be payment of the appropriate premium and the completion of an Affidavit and Indemnity bythe seller. If the property being purchased was constructed, improved or repaired within six months prior to thedate of this commitment the requirements may involve disclosure of certain financial information, payment ofpremiums, and indemnity, among others. The general requirements stated above are subject to revision andapproval by the Company. Pursuant to C.R.S. 10-11-122. Notice is hereby given that an ALTA Closing Protection Letter is available, upon request, to certain parties to the transaction as noted in the title commitment. Pursuant to Colorado Division of Insurance Regulation 8-1. Nothing herein contained will be deemed to obligate the Company to provide any of the coverages referred to herein unless the above conditions are fully satisfied. Page 12 Master Stormwater Management Plan NPR COR400643 SWMP REVISIONS Date Description Initials 1/30/2018 Revised entire SWMP and Appendices to reflect current Caerus practices KMV 1/14/2019 Revised entire SWMP and Appendices to reflect NEW Permit Requirements KMV 5/29/2019 Updated QSM and updated Non-Structural Control Measures KMV 7/9/2019 Updated Master SWMP structure to mirror Revised Site-Specific Supplement Form structure KMV 7/23/2019 Updated Appendix Placement within SWMP KMV 7/29/2019 Updated Permit Contacts KMV 8/19/2019 Voluntary External Audit conducted by Summit Services Group KMV 8/23/2019 Updated Site Description and Appx. D to include list of Site-Specific Acres of Disturbance Report. Provided a more detailed description of where and how to find the immediate receiving water/Stream Crossings. KMV 8/27/2019 Updated Section 4.0 Material Handling and Section 5.0 Potential Pollutant Sources. Updated Culvert specification. KMV 12/13/2019 Updated QSM List KMV 1/06/2020 Updated clarifying language to the Temporary Stabilization Section 9.1 KMV i Contents 1.0 Stormwater Management Plan (SWMP) .................................................................................................. 1 1.1 Site-Specific Records .......................................................................................................................... 1 1.2 SWMP Review, Revisions and Retention........................................................................................... 2 1.3 Termination Notice............................................................................................................................... 3 2.0 Qualified Stormwater Manager(s) (QSM) ................................................................................................ 4 2.1 Permit Operator and Owner ................................................................................................................ 4 3.0 Spill Prevention and Response Plan ....................................................................................................... 5 4.0 Material Handling ....................................................................................................................................... 6 4.1 Material Delivery and Storage ............................................................................................................. 6 4.2 Waste Management and Disposal ...................................................................................................... 6 4.3 Vehicle Cleaning, Fueling, Maintenance, and Tracking Controls ...................................................... 7 5.0 Potential Sources of Pollution ................................................................................................................. 8 6.0 Implementation of Control Measures (CM) .......................................................................................... 10 6.1 Erosion, Drainage, and Sediment Control Measures ....................................................................... 10 6.2 Phasing and Implementation ............................................................................................................. 11 7.0 Site Description ........................................................................................................................................ 15 7.1 Sequence of Major Activities ............................................................................................................. 15 7.1.1 Well Pads and Roads .......................................................................................................... 15 7.1.2 Pipelines ............................................................................................................................... 17 7.1.3 Compressor Stations, Treatment Facilities, or Other Facilities. ......................................... 19 7.2 Allowable Sources of Non-Stormwater Discharge ........................................................................... 20 7.3 Dewatering ......................................................................................................................................... 21 7.3.1 Stormwater Dewatering ....................................................................................................... 21 7.3.2 Pipeline Dewatering ............................................................................................................. 21 7.4 Area Estimates .................................................................................................................................. 21 7.5 Description of Soils ............................................................................................................................ 21 7.6 Description of Existing Vegetation .................................................................................................... 21 7.7 Receiving Water ................................................................................................................................ 24 8.0 Master SWMP Permit Area Map and Individual Stormwater Site Map(s) ......................................... 25 ii 9.0 Final stabilization and long-term stormwater management .............................................................. 26 9.1 Temporary Stabilization ..................................................................................................................... 26 9.2 Final Stabilization ............................................................................................................................... 26 10.0 Site Inspection reports ............................................................................................................................ 28 10.1 Inspection Schedule .......................................................................................................................... 28 10.1.1 Minimum Inspection Schedule for active construction ....................................................... 28 10.1.2 Post-Storm Event Inspections at Temporarily Idle Sites .................................................... 29 10.1.3 Completed Sites .................................................................................................................. 29 10.1.4 Winter Conditions Inspections Exclusion ............................................................................ 29 10.2 Inspection Scope ............................................................................................................................... 29 10.3 Documenting Inspections and Maintenance .................................................................................... 30 11.0 Routine Maintenance ............................................................................................................................... 31 12.0 Corrective Action ..................................................................................................................................... 32 List of Appendices Appendix A Water Quality Control Division General Permit Appendix B Qualified Stormwater Manager(s) (QSM) Training and Meeting Record(s) Appendix C Control Measure Manual Appendix D Description of SWMP Permit Coverage Area, with Area Map Appendix E Soils Table Appendix F Method(s) for Determining Vegetative Cover Appendix G Master Reclamation Plan Appendix H Final Stabilization Vegetation Monitoring Record(s) or Final Stabilization Certification(s) Appendix I Site-Specific Record(s): Site Map(s), Inspection Record(s), and Maintenance Record(s) 1 1.0 Stormwater Management Plan (SWMP) This Master Stormwater Management Plan (Master SWMP) satisfies the requirements set forth by the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment (CDPHE) Water Quality Control Division (WQCD) General Permit No. COR400000, for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activities. WQCD issued the permit on October 31, 2018 and is effective April 1, 2019. This Master SWMP has been prepared in compliance with the Clean Water Act (CWA) amendments of 1987, Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) regulations 40 CFR, Part 122.26, and Colorado Discharge Permit System (CDPS) regulations 5CCR 1002-61. The objectives of the Master SWMP are to: 1. Identify all designated Qualified Stormwater Managers (QSM), by Name and Title, that are responsible for implementing the SWMP in its entirety; 2. Provide reference to the Caerus Oil and Gas, LLC (Caerus) Spill Prevention, Control and Countermeasure (SPCC) Plan, required under section 311 of the Clean Water Act (CWA) and Caerus Incident Response Plan (IRP); 3. Identify all potential sources of pollution which may reasonably be expected to affect the quality of stormwater discharges associated with construction activity; 4. Describe the practices to be used to reduce the pollutants in stormwater discharges associated with construction activity and handling of significant materials with the use of Control Measures; and ensure the practices are selected and described in accordance with good engineering practices, including the installation, implementation and maintenance requirements; 5. Provide a high-level overview of the Master SWMP permitted area by defining the nature of the construction activity, proposed schedule for sequence of major construction activities, soil information, identification of major vegetative communities, allowable non-stormwater discharges, identification of ultimate Receiving Waters, and reference to description of all stream crossings located within the construction site boundary; 6. Detail practices commonly implemented for Final Stabilization and Long-Term Stormwater Management; 7. Detail inspection process; 8. Be properly prepared and updated to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the Construction Stormwater Permit; 9. Work hand in hand with the Site-Specific Records, as described in the following section; and 10. Serve as an education tool and comprehensive reference/guide for stormwater management to inspectors, surveyors, engineers, and Caerus employees and contractors. Caerus construction activities fall under one of two types; Exploration and Production (E&P) and Midstream Services (also referred to as Gas Gathering). E&P sites involve the construction of well pads, roads, and other facilities. Midstream Services sites involve the construction of pipelines and compressor, treatment, and other facilities. This Master SWMP is intended to address stormwater management for any and all of these sites within this Master SWMP’s Permit Coverage Area. 1.1 Site-Specific Records While the Master SWMP contains all of the general permit area information, the Site-Specific Records contain information specific to each disturbance (each well pad, compressor station, section of road/pipeline, etc.). The following information can be found on the Supplement Form: 2 • Geographic Description • Identify the nature of the construction activity; • Disturbed Acre(s); • Soil Classification Information; • Description of vegetation ecosystem type, with method for assessing percent cover, and percent cover for pre-existing vegetative; • Description and location of any concrete or asphalt batch plants; • Description of any anticipated allowable sources of non-stormwater discharge, including those being discharged under a division low risk discharge guidance policy; • Identification of Immediate Receiving Waters; • Description of all stream crossings and the associated Control Measures; • Industry and Caerus approved standards and methods for temporary and final stabilization, including seeding and seed prep information; and • Documented Use Agreements for utilization of Control Measures located outside of Caerus permitted areas of disturbance. The Master SWMP and Site-Specific Records are managed in a digital format. Storing documents in digital form via the Asset Compliance Tracking System (ACTS) has increased Caerus’ compliance accuracy, response time and provided an additional layer of quality control. The Master SWMP and Site-Specific Records will be printed on demand as needed and will be readily available during an inspection. Site-Specific Records include a Supplement Form, Site Map(s), Inspection Record(s), and Maintenance/Corrective Action, see Appendix I. 1.2 SWMP Review, Revisions and Retention When Control Measures or site conditions change, the Master SWMP and/or the Site-Specific Records will be amended to accurately reflect actual field conditions. The date and general description of changes will be documented. Examples include, but are not limited to, removal of Control Measures, identification of new potential pollutant sources, the addition of new Control Measures, modification of Control Measure installation/implementation specifications or maintenance procedures, and/or when the plan proves ineffective in controlling pollutants in stormwater runoff. Changes to the Master SWMP shall be noted on the SWMP Revisions log at the front of this plan. Changes to individual site conditions will be noted in the Site-Specific Records on the applicable Inspection Report and/or Supplement Form. All changes to the Master SWMP and Site-Specific Records shall be made prior to actual changes in the site conditions, except for responsive SWMP changes, which shall be made immediately after changes are made in the field. At a minimum, the Master SWMP will be reviewed annually. The Master SWMP and the Site-Specific Records will be maintained electronically at the Caerus Oil and Gas, LLC facility located at 143 Diamond Ave. Parachute, Colorado 81635. These documents will be retained for a period of three years following the expiration or inactivation of the Permit Coverage Area. These reports will be made available to WQCD or EPA upon request and at the time of inspection. 3 1.3 Termination Notice Caerus Piceance, LLC shall submit a notice of termination (NOT) application to the CDPHE upon final stabilization of areas covered by the Permit. When all disturbed surfaces have been finally stabilized (as described in Section 9.0 of the SWMP) and temporary erosion and sediment control measures have been removed from the permitted area, the site may be qualified for Permit coverage termination. Confirmation of Permit termination will be provided by the CDPHE through the Colorado Environmental Online Services (CEOS) gateway for environmental permitting. All Permit documentation will be maintained at the Caerus Oil and Gas, LLC field office in Parachute for a period of at least three years following termination of Permit coverage. 4 2.0 Qualified Stormwater Manager(s) (QSM) The Qualified Stormwater Manager(s) (QSM) are responsible for implementing the SWMP in its entirety, reviewing compliance documentation, conducting compliance inspection(s) and have signing authority on compliance documentation. Caerus has selected these individuals for their knowledge and skills in principles and practices of erosion and sediment control and pollution prevention. • Construction: o Matt Fenton, Civil Construction Lead o Jesse Wolf, Contract Civil Construction Foreman o Jesse Rippee, Construction Superintendent o Sam Hager, Contract Construction Foreman o Rodger Hager, Construction Foreman o Mike Knox, Construction Superintendent • Environmental: o Lindsey Rider, EH&S Lead o Brett Middleton, EH&S Lead o Kathy Vertiz, Environmental Consultant o Tristan Schmalz, Environmental Consultant All Caerus QSMs have completed Stormwater Management & Erosion Control (SMEC) training, have on the job experience with stormwater management/Control Measure implementation and maintenance and/or have completed in-house Stormwater Compliance Training. Meeting dates and attendee lists, as well as, copies of Stormwater Management & Erosion Control During Construction (SMEC) Certifications are kept in Appendix B. 2.1 Permit Operator and Owner Caerus is the Operator and Owner of the CDPS General Permit. They are the party that has operational control over the day-to-day activities at the project site(s) and ensures compliance with the permit requirements. Caerus has ownership of, a long-term lease of, or easements on the property on which the construction activity is occurring. The Responsible Official for Caerus will provide signature certification through CEOS. 5 3.0 Spill Prevention and Response Plan The Oil Pollution Prevention Regulations (40 CFR 112) requires Caerus to prepare and implement a Spill Prevention, Control and Countermeasure Plan (SPCC Plan) for facilities (as defined in 40 CFR 112.2) that have discharged or could reasonably be expected to discharge oil into or on navigable waters of the United States or adjoining shorelines. The plan describes the engineering and administrative controls employed at/by the facility to comply with the requirements set forth. Where sized secondary containment is required, containment capacity is provided to contain the volume of contents of the largest container inside the containment area, plus (if exposed to the weather) enough freeboard to hold precipitation from a 25-year, 24-hour storm event, as displayed on the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration’s (NOAA) 14-Point Precipitation Frequency Atlas. The containment systems and procedures utilized are designed to be capable of containing oil and have been constructed so that any discharge from a container, such as a tank, will not escape the containment system before cleanup occurs. For specifics on permanent, temporary, mobile and portable containers, please refer to the current version of the SPCC Plan, which will be made available during an inspection. If contracted activities, such as drilling and completion operations are occurring on a disturbance, all applicable chemical storage protocols are to fall under the contracting companies SPCC Plan and Spill Response procedures. Caerus has developed, trained on and implemented an Incident Response Plan (IRP). Caerus personnel will activate the IRP in the event of a significant incident, involving Caerus property, that adversely affects or has the potential to adversely affect the health and safety of employees, the general public, or the environment. Incidents are to be reported immediately to Gas Control, 970-285-2615, upon discovery. If the incident poses a risk to human health, personnel will be immediately cleared from the area. If safe to do so, Caerus personnel will try to control the situation with available equipment until emergency response personnel arrive, or until all attempts have been exhausted. For specifics on incident response and cleanup procedures, please refer to the current version of the IRP. Spill Kits and Environmental Response Trailers have been strategically placed throughout the field to facilitate quick spill response and aid in cleanup efforts. Spill Kits are inspected and replenished on a quarterly basis. The most current map of Spill Kit locations can be found in the Oil Spill and Contingency Plan (OSCP) Section 4.0 Resources - Equipment & Supplies for Oil Spill Response. A qualified Caerus Representative will report all Colorado reportable environmental hazards and chemical spills/releases to the applicable entity. If an incident requires reporting to CDPHE WQCD under the General Permit No. COR400000, for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activities, a Qualified Stormwater Manager will make the appropriate notification. Below is the contact information for CDPHE: Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment (CDPHE) 1-877-518-5608 (24 hour) In general, spill prevention and response procedures provide guidance on how to cleanup spills and ensure that materials and wash water cannot discharge from the site, and never into a storm drain system or state waterway. 6 4.0 Material Handling Proper handling, storage and disposal of materials can prevent pollutants from entering stormwater. Material management reduces the risk of spills or other accidental exposure of materials and substance. 4.1 Material Delivery and Storage The good housekeeping practices listed below will be followed on-site during construction and oil and gas operations: • An effort will be made to store only enough product required for task completion. • All materials stored on site will be stored in a neat and orderly manner in appropriate containers and, where possible, under a roof or other enclosure, and/or within secondary containment areas to avoid contact with stormwater. Bulk storage, 55 gallons or greater, for petroleum products and other liquid chemicals shall have secondary containment, or equivalent protection to prevent spilled material from entering state waters. • Products will be kept in their original containers with the original manufacturer's label. • Substances will not be mixed with one another unless recommended by the manufacturer. • Whenever possible, all of the product will be used before disposing of the container. • Manufacturer’s recommendations for proper use and disposal will be followed. Additional information on material delivery and storage is available in the Control Measure Manual, see Appendix C. 4.2 Waste Management and Disposal As required by Caerus’ Master Service Agreement(s) and drilling contract(s), contracting companies and/or vendors are required to manage all waste generated by their activities at Caerus facilities, in compliance with local, state, and federal guidelines. Typical waste management procedures are provided below: • Proper bins will be provided for trash collection and disposal and will be in compliance with local, state, and federal guidelines. • Samples of the impacted soil will be collected, and a complete characterization analysis will be performed. When applicable, the impacted soil will be sent to a licensed disposal facility or managed in place following proper remediation procedures. • Potentially impacted stormwater that accumulates within secondary containment(s) will be vacuumed up via Vac Truck and processed at Caerus Water Treatment Facilities. • The contractor will provide portable toilets. Sanitary waste will be regularly collected by a licensed sanitary waste management contractor and disposed of in an approved manner. 7 On well pads, concrete may be used as an interior conductor pipe ballast. Concrete washout water can NOT be discharged to surface waters or to storm sewer systems. Concrete washout water from washing of tools, concrete mixer chutes, and masonry operations discharged to the ground, may be authorized by this permit, provided that (CDPHE, 2018): 1. The source is identified in the SWMP; 2. Control Measures are included in the SWMP to prevent impacts to groundwater; and 3. These discharges do not leave the site as surface runoff or to surface waters. Concrete washout locations are depicted on the site-specific maps. Additional waste management procedures, including solid waste, hazardous waste, contaminated soil, concrete washout, and septic and sanitary waste, are included in the Control Measures Manual. 4.3 Vehicle Cleaning, Fueling, Maintenance, and Tracking Controls As required by Caerus’ Master Service Agreement(s) and drilling contract(s), contracting companies and/or vendors are required to service all vehicles and equipment prior to entering Caerus facilities. However, in the event maintenance procedures are required at Caerus facilities, all fluids transferred must utilize secondary containment and drip pans and/or absorbent diapers to minimize a release of materials and properly dispose or recycle spent materials in compliance with local, state, and federal guidelines. While on site, equipment will be parked, serviced, and fueled within designated areas. Equipment fueling on pipeline rights-of-way will be completed where necessary during active construction. Periodic inspections of equipment and control procedures will be implemented. Selected equipment may be fueled in place using fuel trucks. Vehicle tracking of sediments is not expected to be a problem as a result of proper construction scheduling and implementation of Control Measures. Construction vehicles will remain on-site throughout earth- moving activities. All other vehicles typically remain in stabilized areas and do not enter the construction area until that area is stabilized. If vehicle tracking does become a pollutant source, Control Measures could include but are not limited to; scheduling to reduce site access, stabilized construction entrances, and or vehicle cleaning. If tracking occurs or is allowed to occur, at a minimum, stormwater runoff will flow to at least one Control Measure to minimize sediment discharge. Control Measures that filter, settle or strain sediment may be implemented. Sites in the interim reclamation phase typically have stabilized unpaved working surfaces, such as compacted gravel surfacing or compacted soils. Grading is also typically used as a Control Measure to help water drain away from driving pathways and prevent pooling in high traffic areas. In addition to the typical practices listed above, the Control Manual provides more detailed information on vehicle cleaning, fueling, maintenance, and tracking controls. 8 5.0 Potential Sources of Pollution Potential sources of pollution are associated with all phases of the project from the start of construction through to final stabilization. The most common source of pollution during construction is sediment resulting from the erosion of recently cleared and/or graded areas, such as cut/fill slopes and soil stockpiles. However, there may be other potential pollution sources at any given site. Control Measures will be implemented to prevent the inadvertent transportation of sediment off the construction site. The following items are potential sources of pollutants by sequence of major activities (See Section 7.1 for more detail on sequence of major activities). Each of the potential sources of pollutants will be controlled using one or more of the following types of Control Measures: Erosion Controls, Drainage Controls, Sediment Controls or Non-Stormwater Controls. Descriptions and details for each of these types of Control Measures are provided in the Control Measures Manual. Actual Control Measures used at each site are shown on the Site Map(s). Construction (Active and Complete): • All Disturbed and Stored Soils: Erosion Controls, Drainage Controls, Sediment Controls. • Vehicle Tracking of Sediments: Sediment Controls, Non-Stormwater Controls. • Management of Contaminated Soils: Non-Stormwater Controls. • Loading and Unloading Operations: Non-Stormwater Controls. • Outdoor Storage Activities (Building Materials, Fertilizers, Chemicals, etc.): Non-Stormwater Controls. • E&P Waste (Produced Water, Condensate, Cuttings Mgmt, etc.): Non-Stormwater Controls. • Pipeline coating with fusion bond epoxy coating, tape and primer: Non-Stormwater Controls and Sediment Controls • Vehicle and Equipment Maintenance and Fueling: Non-Stormwater Controls. • Significant Dust or Particulate Generating Processes: Non-Stormwater Controls. • Routine Maintenance Activities Involving Fertilizers, Pesticides, Detergents, Fuels, Solvents, Oils, etc.: Non-Stormwater Controls. • On-Site Waste Management Practices (Waste Piles, Liquid Wastes, Dumpsters, etc.): Non-Stormwater Controls. • Concrete Truck/Equipment Washing, Including the Concrete Truck Chute and Associated Fixtures and Equipment: Non-Stormwater Controls. • Dedicated Asphalt and Concrete Batch Plants: There will be no asphalt or concrete batch plants located within the Permit Coverage Area of this SWMP. • Non-Industrial Waste Sources Such as Worker Trash and Portable Toilets: Non-Stormwater Controls. Interim/Final Reclamation: • All Disturbed and Stored Soils: Erosion Controls, Drainage Controls, Sediment Controls. • Vehicle Tracking of Sediments: Sediment Controls, Non-Stormwater Controls. • Vehicle and Equipment Maintenance and Fueling: Non-Stormwater Controls. • Significant Dust or Particulate Generating Processes: Non-Stormwater Controls. 9 • Non-Industrial Waste Sources such as Worker Trash and Portable Toilets: Non-Stormwater Controls. • E&P Waste (Produced Water, Condensate, Cuttings Mgmt, etc.): Non-Stormwater Controls. • Outdoor Storage Activities (Building Materials, Fertilizers, Chemicals, etc.): Non-Stormwater Controls. 10 6.0 Implementation of Control Measures (CM) A key component of this Master SWMP is employing Control Measures to protect water quality. Local factors will be evaluated to determine what Control Measures are suitable and practical at each disturbance. Control Measures will be employed in different combinations during construction activities and phases, as conditions warrant. Since this Master SWMP is likely to cover more than one ecosystem (as described in Section 7.4), the selection of Control Measures (including type, quantity, sequence/combination, etc.) will vary at each site within the Master SWMP Permit Area. Specific Control Measures to be employed at each well pad, road, pipeline, or other facility are identified on the Site Map(s), which are kept with the Site-Specific Records, see Appendix I. A Stormwater Manual of Control Measures is provided as Appendix C. The Control Measure Manual has been prepared to provide Caerus personnel, contractors, and subcontractors with information on the proper selection, design, installation, and maintenance of Control Measures to manage oil and gas related stormwater and to meet federal and state SWMP implementation requirements. The main objectives of the Control Measure manual are to: • Serve as an easy-to-use guide for selecting, designing, installing, and maintaining Control Measures. • Function as a reference for construction plans and specifications. • Ultimately lead to the avoidance of any net increase in off-site erosion and sedimentation of Waters of the U.S. The Control Measures within the Control Measure Manual are organized into four main types of controls for easy reference: Erosion Controls, Runoff Controls, Sediment Controls, and Non-stormwater Controls. Currently, Caerus does not utilize Control Measures outside of their permitted area. Therefore, Caerus does not have any use-agreement with other operators for compliance with the permit conditions. 6.1 Erosion, Drainage, and Sediment Control Measures The primary method for controlling erosion, drainage, and sediment transport consists of minimizing and phasing disturbance of the soil and ground cover. However, many other methods can also be used. All stormwater-related Control Measures will fall under at least one of the following three types of controls: • Erosion Control. Any source control practice that protects the soil surface and/or strengthens the subsurface in order to prevent soil particles from being detached by rain or wind, thus controlling raindrop impact, sheet, and/or rill erosion. • Runoff Control. Any practice that reduces or eliminates gully, channel, and stream erosion by minimizing, diverting, or conveying runoff. • Sediment Control. Any practice that traps the soil particles after they have been detached and moved by wind or water. Sediment Control Measures are usually passive systems that rely on filtering or settling the particles out of the water or wind that is transporting them prior to leaving the site boundary. Control Measures may also be classified as either structural or non-structural controls: • Structural Control. Handles sediment-laden stormwater prior to it leaving each site. Structural Control Measures are used to delay, capture, store, treat, or infiltrate stormwater runoff. Some 11 examples of structural Control Measures include sediment traps, diversions, and silt fences. Most Runoff Controls and Sediment Controls can also be classified as Structural Controls. • Non-structural Control. Reduces the generation and accumulation of pollutants, including sediment, from a construction site by stabilizing disturbed areas and preventing the occurrence of erosion. Some examples of non-structural Control Measures include revegetation, mulching, and surface roughening. These types of stabilization techniques are not only the most effective method for reducing soil loss, but they are also normally the most cost effective due to low initial cost and reduced maintenance requirements. Most, but not all, Erosion Controls can also be classified as Non-structural Controls. The Site Map(s) show the proposed locations of all erosion, drainage, and sediment Control Measures (both structural and non-structural). Detailed descriptions, design criteria, construction specifications, and maintenance information for all Control Measures are provided in the Control Measure Manual. 6.2 Phasing and Implementation Various Control Measures will be implemented and maintained during different phases of the project. A description of each phase is as follows: • Preconstruction. The preconstruction phase involves the installation of downgradient Control Measures (temporary and/or permanent) of the disturbance and at planned discharge points. Control Measures commonly used are vegetation buffers (no installation required for this Control Measure), wattles, diversions, berms, sediment basins and traps. • Construction (Active). The active construction phase involves the stripping and stockpiling of topsoil, the excavation and backfill for access roads, pipelines, and well pads, and the installation of additional Control Measures (preferably permanent Control Measures) to control erosion and sedimentation (such as Surface Roughening topsoil piles and the installation of roadside channels, culverts, wattles, diversions, berms, sediment basins and traps). • Construction (Complete). The construction complete phase involves stabilizing topsoil stockpiles and any unused areas with seeding and/or mulch or other Erosion Control Measures. Operational areas that are not vegetated, are typically stabilized with compaction and gravel. • Interim Reclamation. The interim reclamation phase primarily involves seeding of all disturbed areas not needed during operation of the well pads. However, this phase also involves the installation of any additional permanent Control Measures that may be needed, as well as the continued maintenance and inspections of all Control Measures until final stabilization occurs. Final stabilization occurs once all surfaces are built on, paved or graveled, and/or a uniform stabilized vegetative cover with a density of 70 percent of pre-disturbance levels has been established or when an equivalent permanent, physical erosion reduction method has been employed. A further explanation of final stabilization is provided as section 9.0 of this plan. • Final Reclamation. For pipelines, this phase involves seeding of all disturbed areas, and the installation of any additional permanent Control Measures that may be needed, as well as the continued maintenance and inspections of all Control Measures until final stabilization occurs. For roads, well pads, facilities, etc., this phase occurs when operation of the area is no longer necessary, and the disturbance is returned to original contours. This phase will include the installation of any additional Control Measures required during facility decommissioning as well as the spreading of any remaining topsoil, the application of seed, and the inspection/maintenance of all Control Measures until final stabilization occurs. Stormwater runoff from all disturbed areas will flow to at least one Control Measure to minimize sediment in the discharge. The Control Measure may contain or filter sediment from the discharging flow. Temporary controls, such as wattles, may be used to control sediment and erosion during preconstruction, 12 construction (active and complete) activities. Permanent controls, such as diversions and sediment traps, may also be used during the initial phases of the project. Permanent controls are preferred during interim reclamation and final stabilization. Temporary controls may be converted into permanent controls, such as revegetating a diversion. The primary control used during interim and final stabilization will be revegetation. Seeding will occur as soon as possible after disturbance of an area is complete. If the seeding is not successful, the area will either be reseeded, or other controls will be put in place until reseeding can occur. Specific Non-Structural Control Measures “Specific” non-control measures (CMs) used for effluent limitations will meet the following requirements. • Vehicle tracking controls shall either be implemented to minimize vehicle tracking of sediment from disturbed areas, or the areas where vehicle tracking occurs shall have measures in place that contain or filter flows in order to prevent the bypass of flows without treatment. Caerus plan for meeting the requirement: A Rumble Strip/Vehicle Track Pad (typically a vehicle tracking pad constructed of rock aggregate or cattle guards) may be used to mitigate the transport of mud/sediment adhering to vehicle tires prior to entering the adjacent county road. Sweeping may be utilized to remove tracked sediment on the paved surface, and if practicable the road may be stabilized with base course or gravel to reduce erosion. • Stormwater runoff from all disturbed areas and soil storage areas for which permanent or temporary stabilization is not implemented, will flow to at least one CM to minimize sediment in the discharge. This may be accomplished through filtering, settling, or straining, and the CM will be selected, designed, installed and adequately sized in accordance with good engineering, hydrologic and pollution control practices. The control measure(s) will contain or filter flows in order to prevent the bypass of flows without treatment and will be appropriate for stormwater runoff from disturbed areas and for the expected flow rate, duration, and flow conditions (i.e., sheet flow). Caerus plan for meeting the requirement: Stormwater runoff from disturbed surfaces and soil storage areas for which permanent or temporary stabilization measures are not implemented will flow to at least one CM (e.g., temporary berm, roadside ditch, sediment trap, etc.) to minimize sediment in the discharge. Note: The Caerus Control Measure Manual in Appendix C of the SWMP includes design and sizing guidelines for many of the sediment CMs used to meet the requirement. • Outlets that withdraw water from or near the surface shall be installed when discharging from basins and impoundments, unless infeasible. Caerus plan for meeting the requirement: This CM is not applicable. Should it become a requirement, the SWMP will be updated to reflect the change. • Maintain pre-existing vegetation or equivalent control measures for areas within fifty (50) horizontal feet of receiving waters as defined by the Permit, unless infeasible. Caerus plan for meeting the requirement: To the extent feasible (i.e., taking into consideration safety, topography, drainage systems, industry standards for infrastructure, etc.) new construction will maintain pre-existing vegetation for areas within 50 horizontal feet of receiving waters. If pre-existing vegetation cannot be maintained equivalent CMs (e.g., temporary 13 vegetation, mulch, erosion control blanket, etc.) will be implemented and maintained for those areas. Note: In the planning phase of construction activity Caerus will determine the best route for maintaining pre-existing vegetation or equivalent CMs for areas of construction within 50 horizontal feet of receiving waters. If determined infeasible to meet this requirement, an alternative compliance strategy will be designed, documented, and implemented. • Minimize soil compaction for areas where infiltration control measures will be used or where final stabilization will be achieved through vegetative cover. Caerus plan for meeting the requirement: To minimize soil compaction for areas (i.e., cut and fill slopes) where infiltration CMs will be used or where final stabilization will be achieved through vegetative cover Caerus will restrict vehicle and equipment access to the operational surface of the road. • Unless infeasible, topsoil shall be preserved for those areas of a site that will utilize vegetative final stabilization. Caerus plan for meeting the requirement: For surfaces that may be disturbed by construction activities, topsoil will be preserved (i.e., stripped, stockpiled, and managed for erosion and sedimentation) at designated staging areas for later use. • Minimize the amount of soil exposed during construction activity, including the disturbance of steep slopes. Caerus plan for meeting the requirement: The amount of soil exposed during construction activity, including steep slope disturbances, has been minimized to the extent practicable when taking into consideration access road safety, topography, drainage systems, industry standards for infrastructure (e.g., pipelines), landowner and agency requirements, etc. Construction phasing, including temporary stabilization, interim reclamation, and short-term reclamation of disturbed surfaces have been and may be used to manage/minimize exposed soil during construction activity. • Bulk storage, 55 gallons or greater, for petroleum products and other liquid chemicals must have secondary containment, or equivalent protection, in order to contain spills and to prevent spilled material from entering State waters. Caerus plan for meeting the requirement: Caerus will use secondary containment, or equivalent protection, for the bulk (55 gallons or greater) storage of petroleum products and other liquid chemicals. Secondary containment structures may be earthen berms , lined retaining walls, double-walled fuel tanks, drip pans, etc. • Control measures designed for concrete washout waste must be implemented. This includes washout waste discharged to the ground as authorized under the Permit and washout waste from concrete trucks and masonry operations contained on-site. Caerus must ensure the washing activities do not contribute pollutants to stormwater runoff or receiving waters. Discharges that may reach groundwater must flow through soil that has buffering capacity prior to reaching groundwater, as necessary to meet the effluent limitations in the Permit. The concrete washout location shall not be located in an area where shallow groundwater may be present and would result in buffering capacity not being adequate, such as near natural drainages, springs, or wetlands. The Permit authorizes discharges to the ground of concrete washout wastes. 14 Caerus plan for meeting the requirement: Caerus will implement Waste Management Control Measures suitable for the proper containment and disposal of Concrete Washout material. The site map will include the location of the Concrete Washout and routine inspections will be conducted per the permit and SWMP. • Temporary stabilization for earth disturbing activities on any portion of a site where ground disturbing construction activity has permanently ceased, or temporarily ceased for more than 14 calendar days. Caerus plan for meeting the requirement: See section 9.1 Temporary Stabilization. Documented Use Agreement A Documented Use Agreement between Caerus Piceance, LLC (Caerus) and the owner or operator of any CMs located outside of the permitted area utilized by Caerus construction site for compliance with the Permit, but not under the direct control of Caerus (permittee). The SWMP will include all information required of and relevant to any such CMs located outside of permitted areas, including locations, installation specifications, design specifications, and maintenance requirements. See Site-Specific Records for documentation, Appendix I. 15 7.0 Site Description The name of the permit coverage area, permit number, and location of the permit coverage area are documented in Appendix D, Description of SWMP Permit Coverage Area. Activities at the Permit Coverage Area will likely involve the construction of: • Well pads • Access roads • Pipelines • Compressor stations • Treatment Facilities • Other Facilities The above construction activities are only typical and may vary once construction begins. Up-to-date information on the construction of well pads, roads, pipelines, etc. will be kept with the Site-Specific Records 7.1 Sequence of Major Activities Site-Specific, scheduling, surface use agreements, and/or other constraints can and/or may dictate changes in construction sequences. Significant sequence changes are addressed in the Site-Specific Records. Specific details on the construction and maintenance of Control Measures mentioned below are provided in the Stormwater Manual of Control Measures. 7.1.1 Well Pads and Roads Construction activities for well pads and roads are generally completed in the following sequence: Preconstruction: 1. Surveys. Topographic, vegetation, wildlife and archeology, as dictated. 2. Temporary Control Measures. Where physical access is available, installation of terminal perimeter and temporary sediment controls, such as wattles, may be employed. Actual Control Measures used at each site are shown on the Site and kept with the Site-Specific Records. Construction (Active): 3. Vegetation Clearing. Vegetation will be cleared/grubbed and placed along the perimeter at the terminal discharge edges/points in a windrow and/or dam beyond the edge of excavation and at any run-on-protection discharge points, and/or chipped or other depending on landowner requirements. 16 4. Diversions and Detention Ponds. After vegetation clearing and prior to topsoil stockpiling, diversions may be placed for run-on-protection (ROP) to prevent the greater landscape from discharging onto the planned disturbance. Temporary sediment Control Measures shall be placed at the discharge points of the ROP until permanent erosion controls can be installed along the entire length of the ROP. Diversions are to be installed along the terminal discharge edge inside of the vegetation windrows to convey site water/sediment to terminal discharge points where rough detention pond are to be installed. The detention pond outlets will withdraw water from or near the surface. Temporary sediment Control Measures will be implemented until permanent Detention Ponds and erosion, drainage, and sediment Control Measures can be installed. 5. Topsoil Stripping/Conservation. Accessible topsoil is to be removed from areas that are to be excavated, covered in subsoils, or turned into stabilized unpaved surfaces. If initial topsoil stockpile areas are insufficient to accommodate the quantities of topsoil being generated, the excess is to be placed at either end of the subsoil stockpile and segregated as much as possible. After major earthwork, grading, and erosion/drainage/sediment controls are complete, any areas that can be identified for immediate interim reclamation shall receive topsoil and revegetation seeding. 6. General Rough Grading. The site location will be graded to provide suitable surfaces for vehicle traffic and/or building sites and may be graded to establish surface drainage patterns and promote dewatering of high traffic areas, such as berms or roadside ditches. Primary objective will be to minimize the amount of soil exposed during this phase, including the disturbance of steep slopes. Scheduling, temporary and final stabilization efforts will help ensure soil exposure amounts and timing is limited. 7. Facility Specific Grading. Individual facilities may require additional excavation to allow for construction of foundations. Excess soil will typically be used in general site grading. 8. Foundation Construction. To support facilities (such as tanks, processing equipment, etc.), foundations will be constructed. Foundations may consist of select backfill, concrete spread footings, or piles. Finished support elevations are to be installed twelve to eighteen inches (12- 18”) above finished grade or the lowest point of the facility. 9. Facility Construction. Tanks, processing equipment, etc. will be constructed. Construction (Complete): 10. Stock Pile Soils Stabilized. Surface Roughening and/or Vegetative seed mix and/or mulching may be applied. 11. Stabilization of Unused Areas. Areas not needed for facilities, roads, parking, or materials staging will generally be stabilized. Vegetative seed mix and/or mulching may be applied. 12. Working Surface Stabilized. Soil will typically be compacted and/or gravel surfaced. Interim Reclamation: 13. Gravel Surfacing. Areas used for access, parking, or materials staging will typically be gravel surfaced. 14. Reclamation of Unused Areas. Areas not needed for facilities, roads, parking, or materials staging will generally be reclaimed. Salvaged topsoil will be spread when possible, and the vegetative seed mix will be applied. 15. Application of Erosion Stabilization. Depending on terrain (e.g. steep slopes and drainage crossings) additional measures may be applied to increase stability of the reclaimed area. 17 Final Reclamation: 16. Reclamation of Post-Operation Areas. When operation of well pad or road is no longer necessary, the area will be decommissioned, and all newly disturbed areas will be reclaimed. Any remaining topsoil will be spread, and the vegetative seed mix will be applied. This may occur after termination of this permit and under the coverage of a new construction permit. 7.1.2 Pipelines Construction activities for pipelines are generally completed in the following sequence: Preconstruction: 1. Surveys. Topographic, vegetation, wildlife and archeology, as dictated. 2. Mark Right-Of-Way. The construction right-of-way (ROW) will be marked prior to construction with laths and/or flagging. Laths/flagging will be maintained throughout construction and will typically not be removed until after reclamation activities have been completed. 3. Temporary Control Measures. Caerus’ Construction and EHS Departments will determine locations to install preconstruction temporary erosion control devices. Caerus’ contractors will maintain the erosion control structures as directed by the Construction and/or EHS Departments throughout all phases of construction, or until permanent erosion Control Measures are installed. Actual Control Measures used for each site are shown on the Site Map(s), which are kept with the Site-Specific Records. Construction (Active): 4. Vegetation Clearing. Vegetation may be cleared and placed in a windrow at the edge of the work area to be used later in reclamation activities, removed from the construction site, or burned/chipped depending, on landowner requirements. Details for windrows are provided within the Stockpiling CM of the Control Measure Manual. 5. Topsoil Stripping. Accessible topsoil (from the entire width of the right-of-way) will be removed and temporarily stockpiled along the up-hill side of the right-of-way (if terrain grades will allow) for later use in reclamation activities. 6. General Grading. For pipeline segments that occur in relatively rough terrain, general grading will be conducted to create a safe and workable ground surface. This is generally done to form a relatively level work surface on steep cross slopes and to reduce slopes in undulating terrain (arroyo and wash crossings). The site location will be graded to provide suitable surfaces for vehicle traffic and/or building sites, and may be graded to establish surface drainage patterns, such as berms or roadside ditches as necessary. 7. Trench Excavation. The trench needed for pipeline installation is almost always off-set in the ROW. The surveyors may indicate the location of the trench on their pipeline lateral. Generally, the trench will be in the first third of the ROW. The remaining two thirds of the ROW will be used for working space. The trench depth and width will vary with the number of pipes to be installed and the pipe diameter. Generally, a 4-foot deep trench will be excavated by track-mounted excavators. The ditch will be excavated and sloped in accordance with OSHA specifications. The cover from top of pipe to ground level will be a minimum of 36 inches. Where rock is encountered, tractor-mounted mechanical rippers or rock trenching equipment may be used to facilitate excavation. The trench will be excavated, and subsoil material stockpiled within the confines of the approved right-of-way limits. Trench spoil will be stored in a separate location from the previously segregated topsoil. 8. Pipe Installation. Pipe installation will include stringing, bending for horizontal or vertical angles in the alignment, welding the pipe segments together, coating the joint areas to prevent corrosion, and then lowering-in and padding. 18 9. Stringing. Pipe will be hauled by truck to the pipeline ROW. Each joint of pipe will be unloaded and placed parallel to the ditch. 10. Bending. After the joints of pipe are strung along the ditch, individual joints of pipe may need to be bent to accommodate horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Field bends will be made utilizing a hydraulically operated bending machine. Where the deflection of a bend exceeds the allowable limits for a field-bent pipe, factory (induction) bends will be installed. 11. Welding. After the pipe joints are bent, the pipe is lined up end-to-end and clamped into position. The pipe is then welded in conformance with 49 CFR Part 192, Subpart E. “Welding of Steel Pipelines” and API 1104, “Standard for Welding Pipelines and Related Facilities”. 12. Welding Inspection. Welds will be visually inspected by a qualified inspector. Any defects will be repaired or cut out as required under the specified regulations and standards. 13. Coating. To prevent corrosion, the pipe will be externally coated with fusion bonded epoxy coating prior to delivery. After welding, field joints will be coated with fusion bond epoxy coating, tape and primer, or shrink sleeves. Before the pipe is lowered into the ditch, the pipeline coating will be visually inspected and tested with an electronic detector, and any faults or scratches will be repaired. 14. Lowering-In and Padding. Once the pipe coating operation has been completed, a section of the pipe will be lowered into the ditch. Side-boom tractors may be used to simultaneously lift the pipe, position it over the ditch, and lower it in place. Inspection is generally conducted to verify that minimum cover is provided; the trench bottom is free of rocks, debris, etc.; external pipe coating is not damaged; and the pipe is properly fitted and installed into the ditch. Specialized padding machines will be used to sift soil fines from the excavated subsoil to provide rock-free pipeline padding and bedding. In rocky areas, padding material or a rock shield will be used to protect the pipe. Topsoil will not be used to pad the pipe. At the completion of lowering-in and padding activities the contractor may install trench breakers around the pipelines to minimize subsurface water flow. Details for trench breakers are provided within the Control Measure Manual. 15. Backfilling. Backfilling will begin after a section of the pipe has been successfully placed in the ditch and final inspection has been completed. Backfilling will be conducted using a bulldozer, rotary auger backfill, padding machine or other suitable equipment. Backfilling the trench will use the subsoil previously excavated from the trench. Backfill will be graded and compacted, where necessary for ground stability, by being tamped or walked in with a wheeled or track vehicle. Compaction will be performed to the extent that there are no voids in the trench. Any excavated materials or materials unfit for backfill will be utilized or properly disposed of in conformance with applicable laws or regulations. 16. General Grading. If general grading was conducted to facilitate pipeline construction, these materials will be replaced and graded to recreate the preconstruction topography. Final Reclamation: 17. Cleanup. Cleanup activities will be initiated as soon as practicable after backfilling activities have been completed. All construction-related debris will be removed and disposed of at an approved disposal facility. 18. Subsoil and Topsoil Placement. Subsoil will be evenly re-contoured across the right-of-way to pre-construction conditions. After the subsoil has been re-spread the contractor will spread the previously segregated topsoil back across the right-of-way. The topsoil will be evenly spread to original contours. 19. Vegetation. After any remaining topsoil is spread, the vegetative seed mix will be applied. The area will be revegetated according to private landowner Surface Use Agreements and/or according to the BLM/Forest Service reclamation requirements. Details for revegetation are provided within the Control Measure Manual (Appendix C) and the Master Reclamation Plan (Appendix G). 19 20. Application of Erosion Stabilization. Depending on terrain (e.g. steep slopes and drainage crossings) additional measures may be applied to increase stability of the reclaimed area. Possible erosion stabilization methods are provided within the Control Measure Manual. Actual locations and measures used are shown on the Site Map(s), which are kept with the Site-Specific Records. 7.1.3 Compressor Stations, Treatment Facilities, or Other Facilities. Construction activities for compressor stations, treatment facilities, and other facilities are generally completed in the following sequence: Preconstruction: 1. Surveys. Topographic, vegetation, wildlife and archeology, as dictated. 2. Temporary Control Measures. Where physical access is available, installation of terminal perimeter and temporary sediment controls, such as wattles, silt fence and/or other as necessary. Actual Control Measures used for each site are shown on the Site Map(s), which are kept with the Site-Specific Records. Construction (Active): 3. Vegetation Clearing. Vegetation will generally be cleared/grubbed and placed along the perimeter at the terminal discharge edges/points in a windrow and/or dam beyond the edge of excavation and at any run-on-protection discharge points, and/or chipped or other depending on landowner requirements. 4. Diversions and Detention Ponds. After vegetation clearing and prior to topsoil stockpiling, diversion may be placed for ROP to prevent the greater landscape from discharging onto the planned disturbance. Temporary sediment Control Measure(s) shall be placed at the discharge points of the ROP until permanent erosion controls can be installed along the entire length of the ROP. Diversions are to be installed along the terminal discharge edge inside of the vegetation windrows to convey site water/sediment to terminal discharge points where rough detention pond are to be installed. The detention pond outlets are to receive temporary sediment Control Measure(s) until permanent detention pond and erosion, drainage, and sediment Control Measures can be installed. 5. Topsoil Stripping/Conservation. Accessible topsoil is to be removed from areas that are to be excavated, covered in subsoils, or turned into stabilized unpaved surfaces. If initial topsoil stockpile areas are insufficient to accommodate the quantities of topsoil being generated, the excess is to be placed at either end of the subsoil stockpile and segregated as much as possible. After major earthwork, grading, and erosion/drainage/sediment controls are complete, any areas that can be identified for immediate interim reclamation shall receive topsoil. 6. General Rough Grading. The site location will be graded to provide suitable surfaces for building sites and vehicle traffic, and may be graded to establish surface drainage patterns, such as berms or roadside ditches as necessary. 7. Excavation. Soil will be excavated to allow for the construction of foundations. Trenches will be excavated for all underground piping and conduit. Excess soil will typically be used in general site grading. 8. Foundation Construction. Foundations will be constructed to support facility buildings. Foundations may consist of select backfill, concrete spread footings, piles, etc. Finished support elevations are to be installed twelve to eighteen inches (12-18”) above finished grade or the lowest point of the facility. 9. Facility Construction. Buildings, tanks, processing equipment, etc. will be constructed. Utilities will be installed. 20 Construction (Complete): 10. Stock Pile Soils Stabilized. Surface Roughening and/or Vegetative seed mix and/or mulching will typically be applied. 11. Stabilization of Unused Areas. Areas not needed for facilities, roads, parking, or materials staging will generally be stabilized. Vegetative seed mix and/or mulching will typically be applied. 12. Working Surface Stabilized. Soil will generally be compacted and/or gravel surfaced. Interim Reclamation: 13. Landscaping. If necessary, certain areas will be spread with topsoil and landscaped. 14. Gravel Surfacing. Areas used for access, parking, or materials staging will typically be gravel surfaced. 15. Reclamation of Unused Areas. Areas not needed for facilities, roads, parking, or materials staging will generally be reclaimed. Salvaged topsoil will typically be spread, and the vegetative seed mix will be applied. 16. Application of Erosion Stabilization. Depending on terrain (e.g. steep slopes and drainage crossings) additional measures may be applied to increase stability of the reclaimed area. Possible erosion stabilization methods are provided within the Control Measures Manual. Actual locations and measures used are shown on the Site Map(s), which are kept with the Site-Specific Records. Final Reclamation: 17. Reclamation of Closed Facilities. When facilities are no longer necessary, the buildings may be demolished, according to approved procedures. All construction materials will be removed, and the newly disturbed areas will be reclaimed. Any remaining topsoil will be spread, and the approved seed mix will be applied. 7.2 Allowable Sources of Non-Stormwater Discharge Allowable sources of non-stormwater discharge within the Permit Coverage Area include the following: • Discharges from uncontaminated springs, that do not originate from the area of land disturbance. • Discharges to the ground of concrete washout water, concrete washout is described and discussed in section 4.2. • Landscape irrigation return flow. There are several locations where pipelines cross through irrigated fields. These locations will be treated similarly to any water crossing with the use of an appropriate control which will be noted in the Site-Specific Records. • Construction dewatering. Construction dewatering is described and discussed in Section 7.3. • Emergency firefighting water. Water and additive used to put out any type of fire is considered an allowable source of non-stormwater discharge. No other non-stormwater discharges are allowed under the Stormwater Construction Permit. Other types of non-stormwater discharges must be addressed in a separate permit issued for that discharge or discharges currently covered by a Water Quality Control Division Low Risk Guidance Document, i.e. Discharges of Uncontaminated Groundwater to Land. 21 7.3 Dewatering Dewatering refers to the mechanical removal of water from an excavation or other structure. Dewatering of pipelines at the completion of hydrostatic testing may be required. Other forms of testing pipe quality are to use nitrogen, air or gas pressure. 7.3.1 Stormwater Dewatering The discharge of pumped stormwater (not including groundwater or other non-stormwater sources) from excavations, ponds, depressions, etc., to surface water, or to a municipal separate storm-sewer system is allowed by the Stormwater Construction Permit, as long as the dewatering activity and associated Control Measures are identified in the SWMP (including location of the activity), and Control Measures are implemented in accordance with the Control Measure Manual. Stormwater that collects in open depressions or trenches during construction activities will be dewatered into an existing sediment control, such as a detention pond, a sediment trap, or simply into a well- vegetated area to percolate into the ground and catch suspended sediment. The Caerus Dewatering Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) requires documentation for each dewatering event. Dewatering records can be found, if a dewatering event occurs, within the Caerus site specific records and can be provided upon request. Additional information on stormwater dewatering is provided in the Control Measure Manual. 7.3.2 Pipeline Flushing New Department of Transportation (DOT) pipelines maybe hydrostatically tested with water upon completion of construction to ensure integrity. Once the hydrostatic testing has been completed, the utilized water will be flushed into permitted Frac Tanks, pits/ponds or injection wells. Caerus’s Water Department has developed and implemented policies and procedures to ensure proper handling of the water. 7.4 Area Estimates The Permit Coverage Area mirrors Caerus’ Natural Gas Operating Areas. This permit coverage area encompasses a large geographic area, in which disturbance areas and acreage will vary over time. The Inspection Report tracks the current acres of disturbance. Acres of disturbance are all areas where ground disturbance has occurred within the construction site boundary and stabilization control measures have been implemented and are awaiting Final Stabilization. The total acres of disturbance for the permit, is reported in Appendix D, Description of SWMP Permit Coverage Area, on the Acres of Disturbance Report, this report is provided by ACTS. This report details by disturbance, within the permitted area, how many acres are currently disturbed. 7.5 Description of Soils Soils within the Permit Coverage Area are distributed according to the major soil forming factors including; climate (effective moisture and temperature), parent material, topographic position, and slope. A detailed description of the soils in the permit coverage area can be found in Appendix E. 7.6 Description of Existing Vegetation The existing percent vegetative ground cover and a detailed description of pre-existing vegetation, including determination method, for each disturbance within the Permit Coverage Area is provided within the Supplement Form, which is kept with the Site-Specific Records. Caerus will implement one of two methods for determining pre-disturbance vegetative cover: Line-Point Intercept or Ocular Vegetation Cover. Procedures for both methods can be found in Appendix F, Method(s) for Determining Vegetative Cover. 22 Caerus will strive to maintain pre-existing vegetation or equivalent Control Measures for areas within 50 horizontal feet of any receiving water, unless infeasible. Conditions of infeasibility will be documented on the Site-Specific Records. Adequate Erosion and Sediment Control Measures will be implemented between the receiving water and Caerus disturbances. A brief description of the existing vegetation within each ecosystem (Mutel, 1992) is as follows: 1. Grasslands a. Plains Grasslands. Plains grasslands are dominated by a mixture of blue grama (Chondrosum gracile) and buffalograss (Buchloe dactyloides). Interspersed are occasional shrubs and bright flowered forbs, most of which are members of the pea and sunflower families. Taller grass species cover 10 to 25 percent of the ground of little-grazed, moist sites. Most are perennial bunch-grasses up to three feet tall. Needle-and-thread (Stipa comata), sand dropseed (Sporobolus cryptandrus), side-oats grama (Bouteloua curtipendula), western wheatgrass (Pascopyrum smithii), Junegrass (Koeleria macrantha), and red three-awn (Aristida purpurea) are other common species. Common forbs consist of prickly pear (Opuntia polyacantha), pasture sage (Artemisia frigida), and yucca (Yucca glauca). b. Mountain Grasslands and Meadows. Natural wet meadows and fens are dominated by moisture-loving species, primarily members of the sedge and rush families. Spike-rush (Eleocharis palustris), sedges, Canadian reedgrass (Calamagrostis canadensis), and tufted hairgrass (Deschampsia cespitosa) are common. Natural dry meadows are filled with members of the grass family. Bunchgrasses dominate at low elevations. Needle-and-thread, mountain muhly (Muhlenbergia montana), Junegrass, blue grama, and species of wheatgrass and bluegrass are common. Successional meadows contain a combination of weedy, introduced plants and plants typical of dry, rocky slopes, such as common dandelion (Taraxacum officinale), golden banner (Thermopsis divaricarpa), Colorado locoweed (Oxytropic sericea), mountain pussytoes (Antennaria parvifolia), showy daisies (Erigeron speciosus), stonecrop (Sedum lanceolatum), and some sedges (Carex ssp.). Mountain grasslands, where Thurber fescue (Festuca thurberi) and mountain muhly were once the dominant grasses, are now largely dominated by blue grama, Canada bluegrass (Poa compressa), foxtail barley (Critesion jubatum), and other species as a result of grazing. 2. Riparian Ecosystems a. Lowland Riparian Ecosystems. The lowland riparian ecosystem is dominated by the plains cottonwood (Populus deltoidea ssp. occidentalis), the valley cottonwood (Populus deltoidea ssp. wislizenii) and the peach-leaved willow (Salix amygdaloides). Common shrubs and herbaceous plants include snowberry (Symphoricarpos occidentalis), sandbar willow (Salix exigua), bulrush (Schoenoplectus lacustris), broad-leaved cat-tail (Typha latifolia), prairie cord-grass (Spartina pectinata), and western wheatgrass. b. Mountain Riparian Ecosystems. The mountain riparian ecosystem is dominated by quaking aspen (Populus tremuloides), lanceleaf cottonwood (Populus X acuminata), narrowleaf cottonwood (Populus angustifolia), and Colorado blue spruce (Picea pungens). Common shrubs include alder (Alnus incana), river birch (Betula fontinalis), chokecherry (Padus virginiana), common gooseberry (Ribes inerme), bush honeysuckle (Distegia involucrata), and mountain maple (Acer glabrum). The lush riparian herbaceous understory includes forbs, grasses, sedges, rushes, climbing vines, mosses, lichens, and liverworts. Weedy invaders are also common. 3. Shrublands. Shrub communities include semidesert shrublands found in dry lowlands, sagebrush shrublands that occupy a wide range of elevation from the Colorado Plateau to high mountain valleys, and montane shrublands other than sagebrush, characteristic of foothills and mountain regions. 23 a. Semidesert Shrublands. Common shrubs include Great Basin big sagebrush (Seriphidium tridentatum), greasewood (Sarcobatus vermiculatus), rabbitbrush (Chrysothamnus), four- winged saltbush (Atriplex canescens), and shadscale (Atriplex confertifolia). Common grasses and forbs include galletagrass (Hilaria jamesii), blue grama, alkali sacaton (Sporobolus airoides), nodding eriogonum (Eriogonum cernuum), copper mallow (Sphaeralcea coccinea), and prince’s plume (Stanleya pinnata). b. Sagebrush Shrublands. Common shrubs include Great Basin big sagebrush, mountain big sagebrush (Seriphidium vaseyanum), rabbitbrush, and serviceberry (Amelanchier alnifolia). Common grasses and forbs include nodding eriogonum, copper mallow, and Indian Paintbrush (Castilleja spp.). c. Montane Shrublands. Common shrubs include mountain mahogany (Cercocarpus), Gamble oak (Quercus gambelii), rabbitbrush, serviceberry, and skunkbrush (Rhus aromatica). Common grasses and forbs include needle-and-thread, western wheatgrass, copper mallow, and Indian Paintbrush. 4. Pinyon-Juniper Woodlands. Pinyon-juniper woodlands consist of scattered Utah juniper interspersed with big sagebrush. Pinyon pine is a minor component. Several other shrub species also occur in this community, including snowberry, bitterbrush (Purshia tridentata), snakeweed (Gutierrezia sarothrae), and serviceberry. In general, the sparse herbaceous layer consists of graminoids such as cheatgrass (Anisantha tectorum), Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis), western wheatgrass, Indian ricegrass (Oryzopsis hymenoides), and squirreltail (Elymus elymoides). Forbs include Tracy’s thistle (Cirsium tracyi), mariposa lily (Calochortus nuttallii), western wallflower (Erysimum capitatum), tapertip onion (Allium acuminatum), yarrow (Achillea lanulosa), stemless four-nerve daisy (Tetraneuris acaulis), and sharpleaf twinpod (Physaria acutifolia). All of these are native species, except for cheatgrass (an invasive, non-native annual species) and Kentucky bluegrass (a widely naturalized non-native perennial species). 5. Montane Forests a. Ponderosa Pine Forests. These forests are dominated by the ponderosa pine (Pinus ponderosa) and the Rocky Mountain juniper (Savina scopulorum). Common shrubs and herbaceous plants include the wax currant (Ribes cereum), blue grama, side-oats grama, Junegrass, needle-and-thread, spike fescue (Leucopoa kingii), and sulphur flower (Eriogonum umbellatum). b. Douglas Fir Forests. These forests are dominated by the Douglas fir (Pseudotsuga menziesii). Common shrubs and herbaceous plants include common juniper (Juniperus communis), kinnikinnik (Arctostaphylos), mountain maple (Acer glabrum), mountain lover (Paxistima myrsinites), heart-leaved arnica (Arnica cordifolia), and false Solomon’s seal (Maianthemum spp.) c. Aspen forests. Quaking aspen generally occur on north-facing slopes, and along drainage swales. The aspen forest generally has an understory of Wood’s rose (Rosa woodsii), Colorado blue columbine (Aquilegia caerulea), showy daisy, Thurber fescue, white geranium (Geranium richardsonii), common lupine (Lupinus argenteus), Fendler meadowrue (Thalictrum fendleri), and American vetch (Vicia americana). d. Lodgepole Pine Forests. These forests are dominated by the lodgepile pine (Pinus contorta). Common shrubs and herbaceous plants include broom huckleberry (Vaccinium scoparium), common juniper, kinnikinnik, sticky-laurel (Ceanothus velutinus), and heart- leaved arnica. 6. Subalpine Forests a. Engelmann Spruce and Subalpine Fir. Engelmann spruce (Picea engelmannii) and subalpine fir (Abies bifolia) trees are the dominant species in this type of forest, however lodgepole pine, aspen, and sedge-bluegrass have been known to invade in areas which have 24 been severely burned. Understory growth is patchy and consists primarily of dense, low- growing blueberry (Vaccinium myrtillus) and broom huckleberry bushes. Moisture-loving shrubs and herbs such as broad-leaved arnica (Arnica latifolia) and heart-leaved arnica, Jacob’s ladder (Polemonium pulcherrimum), curled lousewort (Pedicularis racemosa), elk sedge (Carex geyeri), and lesser wintergreen (Pyrola minor) are interspersed among the huckleberry. b. Limber and Bristlecone Pine Woodlands. Limber pine (Pinus flexilis) and bristlecone pine (Pinus aristata) trees are the only tree species that can invade this harsh ecosystem. Common species among the sparse understory consist of common juniper, kinnikinnik, sticky- laurel, Junegrass, stonecrop, Colorado locoweed, and whitlow-wort (Draba spp.). Lichens cover exposed rock surfaces. 7. Alpine Tundra. Tundra vegetation consists of a low growth of shrubs, cushion plants, and small forbs with brilliantly colored flowers, and of lush meadows of narrow-leaved sedges and grasses. These plants cover gentle slopes and rock crevices filled with soil. Rock surfaces are partially covered with more primitive plants – lichens and mosses. Shrubs consist of arctic willow (Salix arctica), barrenground (Salix brachycarpa), planeleaf (Salix planifolia), and snow (Salix reticulate ssp. nivalis). Common grasses are alpine bluegrass (Poa arctica), tufted hairgrass (Deschampsia cespitosa), and kobresia (Kobresia myosuroides). The most common forbs are alpine avens (Acomastylis rossii), American bistort (Bistorta bistortoides), marsh marigold (Psychrophila leptosepala), old-man-on-the-mountain (Rydbergia grandiflora), moss pink (Silene acualis), rock selaginella (Selaginella densa), and alpine sandwort (Lidia obtusiloba). All plant species are slow- growing perennials except for the rare annual koenigia, a tiny member of the buckwheat family. 8. Urban Areas. Urban areas contain an increased density of human-created structures in comparison to the areas surrounding it. Depending on the area, vegetation may account for anywhere between 20 and 70 percent of the total land cover, with the remaining portion being constructed materials. Types of vegetation within urban areas may be any combination of the above ecosystems and may include areas of blue grass yards and parks. 9. Cropland. Cropland vegetation may consist of wheat, corn, soybeans, or a variety of many other crops. Cropland may either lie fallow (bare of any crops) or contain crops at any stage of growth from seedlings to mature plants. 7.7 Receiving Water Runoff from disturbed areas during construction will be controlled and/or routed through the use multiple Control Measures, as described later in this plan, prior to being discharged to receiving waters. However, it may be expected that runoff from certain areas will infiltrate into the earth and is not expected to contribute to receiving waters. A detailed description of the Ultimate Receiving Water(s) in the permit coverage area can be found in Appendix D, Description of SWMP Permit Coverage Area. The Immediate Receiving Water(s) to Caerus permitted disturbances are provided in the Site-Specific Records. The Supplement Form lists, by number, all Stream Crossing and provides a detailed description of implemented Control Measures. The Site Map reflects the number and placement of all Stream Crossing detailed in the Supplement Form. 25 8.0 Master SWMP Permit Area Map and Individual Stormwater Site Map(s) An overall Master SWMP Permit Area Map is provided as Appendix D which depicts the permitted area boundaries. Stormwater Site Map(s) of each disturbance (well pad, access road, section of pipeline, etc.) are provided with the Site-Specific Records, see Appendix I. The most current version of the Site Map will reflect current site conditions. Any changes to the design of individual sites or the Control Measures used at those sites will be noted on the Site Map(s) as those changes occur. Site Map(s) include the following information: • Construction site boundaries; • Direction of flow arrows that depict stormwater flow directions on-site and runoff direction; • All areas of ground disturbance including areas of borrow and fill; • Areas used for storage of soil; • Locations of all waste accumulation areas, including areas for liquid, concrete, masonry, and asphalt; • Locations of dedicated asphalt, concrete batch plants and masonry mixing stations; • Locations of all structural Control Measures; • Locations of all non-structural Control Measures; • Locations of springs, streams, wetlands and other state waters, including areas that require pre- existing vegetation be maintained within 50 feet of a receiving water, where determined feasible in accordance with Part I.B.1.a.i.(d).; and • Locations of all stream crossings located within the construction site boundary. Figures showing typical location of Control Measures along roadways and pipelines are provided as part of the Control Measure Manual. 26 9.0 Final stabilization and long-term stormwater management The CDPS has set forth temporary and final stabilization requirements. Caerus will implement and maintain Industry Standards for all temporary and final stabilization efforts. 9.1 Temporary Stabilization The permit requires that temporary stabilization be implemented for earth disturbing activities that have permanently ceased, or temporarily ceased for more than 14 calendar days. If temporary stabilization measures are not appropriate, adequate sediment Control Measures will be implemented. Approved Industry temporary stabilization Control Measures include but are not limited to; cross-contour ripping, surface roughening, mulching, tacking, tracking, terracing, etc. Common Industry sediment Control Measures include but are not limited to; dust control, diversions, sediment traps, wattles, etc. It is not uncommon for the Industry to leave the steep cut and fill slopes unstabilized, as long as there are adequate perimeter controls in place. Colorado Oil and Gas Conservation Commission (COGCC) requires that disturbances shall be reclaimed as early and as nearly as practicable to their original condition or their final land use as designated by the surface owner and shall be maintained to control dust and minimize erosion to the extent practicable. Appendix C includes detailed information on each of the previously discussed Control Measures. The main objective is to conserve topsoil and organics, and to quickly stabilize areas of disturbance. Caerus utilizes multiple layers of Control Measures to protect water quality. The Site-Specific Records will indicate which Control Measures have been put into place to meet the stabilization requirements. 9.2 Final Stabilization As soon as practicable after construction activities have been completed on a disturbed area. All disturbed areas (except for the surface of dirt roads, and areas used during operation of a well) will generally be stabilized with temporary and or final stabilization Control Measures. Soil compaction will be minimized in areas of revegetation. The most common measure used to achieve final stabilization is revegetation. Mulching, seeding, surfacing with gravel, and/or other methods may also be used. Structural controls (such as diversions, berms, and sediment traps) may be revegetated and used as permanent measures to control pollutants in stormwater discharges that will occur after construction operations have been completed. Appendix C includes detailed information on each of the previously discussed Control Measures. In addition, a Master Reclamation Plan is provided as Appendix G, which provides guidance as to possible methods and materials needed to accomplish revegetation on differing site conditions. The specific Control Measures used at each site are shown on the Site Map(s) which are kept with the Site-Specific Records. Caerus has created and executed the Seeding Report Form (see Appendix G). This form is used by Caerus Reclamation contractors to record the following criteria: • Seed mix; • Seed application method; • Seed application rate; • Soil amendments; • Soil preparation; 27 • Soil stabilization methods; • Timing of installation, and • Acres of treatment If a site cannot immediately be interim reclaimed upon completion of site construction due to, for example, the need for a large working surface for well activities or the need to leave cuttings exposed for remediation purposes, the site will be placed into the construction complete phase. This phase prepares the area for final stabilization, and it typically occurs immediately upon completion of earthwork activities. All disturbed areas not in use or needed for well activities will be stabilized, usually with hydraulic mulch and/or seed, but other Control Measures may be used. Final stabilization means that all ground surface disturbing activities at the site have been completed, and all disturbed areas have been either built on, paved, or a uniform vegetative cover has been established with an individual plant density of at least 70 percent of pre-disturbance levels, or equivalent permanent, physical erosion reduction methods have been employed. For purposes of this permit, establishment of a vegetative cover capable of providing erosion control equivalent to pre-existing conditions at the site will be considered final stabilization. Areas developed as stabilized unpaved surfaces as needed for operation of the facility after interim reclamation, will also qualify as “finally stabilized.” This includes dirt road surfaces and the portions of the well pad surfaces that cannot be revegetated due to operational necessity, but does not include slopes, ditches, and other areas where revegetation. Stabilized unpaved surfaces will be prepared in such a way as to prevent ongoing erosion issues. Coverage under the Stormwater Construction Permit may be inactivated for any disturbance or a portion/section of that disturbance (i.e. the access road to a well pad) when the area has reached final stabilization and all temporary erosion and sediment Control Measures associated with that area have been removed. An area will be considered finally stabilized when the above final stabilization criteria have been met, even though the site may be disturbed again in the future for interim or final reclamation. However, future land disturbances that follow final stabilization and result in disturbance of one acre or greater (such as final reclamation) will require permit coverage at that time. Once a location has reached final stabilization, a Final Stabilization Vegetation Monitoring Record or Final Stabilization Certification will be placed in Appendix H and all Site-Specific Record(s) will be pulled from Appendix I. 28 10.0 Site Inspection reports Inspection and maintenance are an extremely important part of the Stormwater Construction Permit. Caerus will ensure that all stormwater management controls are constructed or applied in accordance with governing specifications or good engineering practices. Experienced earthwork contractors will be used during construction activities. In addition, all workers on the site will be trained as to the location and use of the selected Control Measures. The goal is to minimize the potential for inadvertent removal or disturbance of Control Measures and to prevent the off-site transport of sediment and other pollutants. 10.1 Inspection Schedule Inspections are required to start within 7 days of the commencement of construction. Once final stabilization of the site has occurred, and the QSM has completed a passing final stabilization vegetation monitoring, inspections are no longer required under the CDPS. Specific information regarding inspection schedules are provided in the following sections. 10.1.1 Minimum Inspection Schedule for active construction The minimum inspection schedule applies to those disturbances under active construction, which includes the period from when the ground is initially disturbed to when construction activity is completed, including the preparation of areas that will be temporarily or permanently stabilized. During the active construction period, a thorough inspection of the site stormwater management system (which includes all utilized Control Measures) must be conducted at least once every 7 calendar days, or at least once every 14 calendar days. If minimum inspection frequency is every 14 calendar days, a post-storm event inspection must be conducted within 24 hours after the end of any precipitation or snowmelt event that causes surface erosion. With Colorado’s distance from major sources of moisture (the Pacific Ocean and the Gulf of Mexico), precipitation is generally light. Prevailing air currents lose much of their moisture falling as rain or snow on the mountaintops and westward-facing slopes. Precipitation west of the Continental Divide is more evenly distributed throughout the year than in the eastern plains. For most of western Colorado, the greatest monthly precipitation occurs in the winter months, while June is the driest month. The frequency of thunderstorms increases during the fall and winter months and decreases rapidly in the spring. (Climate.colostate.edu). Due to these climatic conditions, Caerus may conduct 7 calendar day inspections during the months April (spring monsoons) and September through October (fall monsoons). If monsoon patterns are not as expected (noted trends above), the range of months may change. Inspection frequency will be documented on the inspection form. There are three exceptions to the minimum inspection schedule which are described in detail within the next three sections: post-storm event inspections at temporarily idle sites (inspections required within 72 hours after a storm), inspections at completed sites (inspections required monthly), and inspections during certain winter conditions (inspections may not be required). Any use of an exception is temporary and does not eliminate the requirement to perform routine maintenance due to the effects of a storm event or other conditions that may impact Control Measure performance, including maintaining vehicle tracking controls and removing sediment from impervious areas. Inspections, as described above, are required at all other times. 29 10.1.2 Post-Storm Event Inspections at Temporarily Idle Sites Temporarily idle sites are those where there are no construction activities occurring following a storm event. At such sites, post-storm event inspections must be conducted prior to restarting construction activities at the site, but no later than 72 hours following the storm event, and the delay noted in the inspection report. Routine inspections still must be conducted as needed, and at a minimum of every 14 calendar days. 10.1.3 Completed Sites Once construction activities that disturb the ground surface are complete and the site has been prepared for the construction complete phase, interim reclamation, or final reclamation (completion of appropriate soil preparation, amendments and stabilization practices), the site (or portion of the site) is considered Completed (for purposes of the stormwater permit). Note: only construction activities that result in a disturbance of the ground surface must be completed. Construction activities that can be conducted without disturbance of the ground surface, such as certain well completion activities, would not prohibit a site from otherwise qualifying as Completed. Completed disturbances still require permit coverage until the final stabilization criteria have been met. Completed Sites qualify for a reduced inspection schedule, as the potential for pollution is reduced if the site has been adequately prepared and/or seeded. However, because slopes and other disturbed areas may not be fully vegetated, erosion in these areas still occurs which requires maintenance activities such as regrading and seeding of problem areas. As such, inspections must continue in order to address these situations. During the Completed Site period, a thorough inspection of the site stormwater management system (which included all utilized Control Measures and potential pollutant sources) is required every 30 days. The Site-Specific Records will be amended to indicate those areas that will be inspected at this reduced frequency. 10.1.4 Winter Conditions Inspections Exclusion Inspections are not required at sites where construction activities are temporarily halted, snow cover exists over the entire site for an extended period, and melting conditions posing a risk of soil erosion do not exist. This temporary exclusion is applicable only during the period where melting conditions do not exist and applies to the routine 7-day, 14-day and 30-day inspections, as well as the post-storm-event inspections. It is typical that when snow cover exists, even at a Completed Site, significant potential for erosion and Inspection records (see Section 10.0) will document when winter conditions exist and when inspections have resumed. 10.2 Inspection Scope Inspections will be conducted by a Qualified Stormwater Manger (QSM) on the following areas: • Construction site perimeter; • All disturbed areas; • Designated haul roads; • Material and waste storage areas exposed to precipitation; • Locations where stormwater has the potential to discharge offsite; • Locations were vehicles exit the site; and • All Control Measure utilized at the site. These areas will be inspected to determine if there is evidence of, or the potential for, pollutants leaving the construction site boundaries, entering the stormwater drainage system, or discharging to state waters. 30 All Control Measures will be evaluated to determine if they still meet the design and operational criteria in the SWMP and if they continue to adequately control pollutants at the site. Any Control Measures not operating in accordance with Appendix C of this SWMP will be addressed as soon as possible to minimize the discharge of pollutants, and the Site-Specific Records will be updated. 10.3 Documenting Inspections and Maintenance Caerus will document inspection results, maintenance activities, corrective action activities and maintain a record of the results for a period of 3 years following expiration/termination of Permit Coverage Area. Although the site may have a phased construction schedule, all construction areas may be inspected at the same time and on one form. Each well pad, road, pipeline, or other facility which is inspected shall be clearly documented on the inspection form. All compliance Inspections will be completed by a qualified stormwater manager. The following details will be recorded on the Inspection report: • Date of inspection; • Name and title of inspector • Weather conditions at the time of the inspection; • Phase of construction at the time of inspection; • Description of the minimum inspection frequency utilized when conducting the inspection; • Deviations from the minimum inspection schedule; • Estimated acreage of disturbance at the time of inspection; • Location(s) of discharges of sediment or other pollutants from the site; • Location(s) of Control Measures needing maintenance; • Location(s) and identification of inadequate Control Measures; • Location(s) and identification of additional Control Measures needed that were not in place at time of inspection; • Necessary changes to the SWMP • Signed statement after adequate corrective action(s) and maintenance have been taken, or where a report does not identify any incidents requiring corrective action or maintenance: “I verify that, to the best of my knowledge and belief, all corrective action and maintenance items identified during the inspection are complete, and the site is currently in compliance with the permit.” A copy of or a hand drawn Site Map shall be included, if necessary, to show the location(s) of any observed condition (as listed above). 31 11.0 Routine Maintenance Maintenance activities will help ensure that all Control Measures are functioning at prescribed levels and will be in proper working order during a runoff event or spill condition. Any maintenance deemed necessary after required inspections will be corrected as soon as possible to minimize the discharge of pollutants. Since Caerus utilizes third-party contractors to complete stormwater inspections, there may be a short delay between the time the stormwater inspector discovers the issue in the field and when it is communicated to Caerus staff (generally, the notification will be received within 24-hours). In addition, it is important that all proper safety precautions are followed, such as a “one call” for utilities, if the maintenance involves excavation of sediment located above a buried pipeline, and consideration for weather and other potential hazards that could make maintenance more difficult or dangerous, and these considerations may delay the start of work. The process to begin maintenance will be initiated immediately after receiving notification that it is needed, which includes planning (in some cases, a larger fix or re-working of a location may be needed to prevent stormwater issues from occurring in the future; multiple departments may need to be involved), selecting a maintenance contractor, which may include requesting bids from multiple contract companies, and establishing a time line for work. Maintenance will include, but is not limited to: • Pickup or otherwise prevention of litter, construction debris, and construction chemicals from becoming a pollutant source prior to anticipated storm events. • Removal of sediment from wattles, sediment traps, and pulling roadside ditches. Detailed maintenance requirements for each Control Measure is identified in Appendix C. When maintenance is required, the following process will typically be followed: 1. Perform inspections according to the minimum inspection schedule discussed in Section 10.2. 2. Note the need for maintenance on the inspection form. 3. If inspection is completed by a third-party inspector, the issues will be communicated to Caerus Staff via Work Orders which are generated from the inspection form automatically. 4. If necessary, collect the additional materials and/or resources needed to perform the maintenance activity. 5. Select a contractor to perform maintenance. 6. Ensure safety precautions are followed, including a one-call prior to completing groundbreaking activities 7. Perform maintenance and note the date performed and the action taken on the Workorder Closure Report. 8. Re-inspect the area to ensure compliance (note that additional inspections to check work are not always documented). Maintenance items will be tracked to closure via ACTS Work Order Report. Workorder closure date and general comments for work completed will be recorded either on an inspection form or the Workorder Closure Report. After adequate maintenance has been completed and recorded, or where a report does not identify any incidents requiring corrective action, the report will contain a signed statement indicating the site is in compliance with the permit to the best of the signer’s knowledge and belief. 32 12.0 Corrective Action During the compliance inspection, a QSM will assess the adequacy of the implemented Control Measures at the site, and the need for changes to those Control Measures to ensure they are functioning effectively. Repairs and/or adjustments to any erosion and sediment control that is deteriorating or found to be performing inadequately (i.e., need to replace or add a new Control Measure), require documentation for each occurrence. Upon discovery of an inadequate Control Measure, a QSM will attempt to take necessary steps to minimize or prevent the discharge of pollutants form the disturbance. Corrective Action will include, but is not limited to: • Cleaning out sediment from behind a sediment barrier Control Measure, that is greater than half the height of the sediment barrier. • Reseeding of any bare spots where vegetation has failed to establish. • Repair breach in a berm. Documentation requirements if infeasible to install or repair Control Measure immediately after discovery: • Describe why it is infeasible to initiate the installation or repair immediately; • Provide a schedule for installing or repairing the Control Measure and returning it to an effective operating condition, as soon as possible. When corrective action is required, the following process will typically be followed: 1. Perform inspections according to the minimum inspection schedule discussed in Section 10.2. 2. Note the need for corrective action on the inspection form. 3. If inspection is completed by a third-party inspector, the issues will be communicated to Caerus Staff via phone call and Corrective Action Report which are generated from the inspection form automatically. 4. If necessary, collect the additional materials and/or resources needed to perform the corrective action activity. 5. Select a contractor to perform required work. 6. Ensure safety precautions are followed, including a one-call prior to completing groundbreaking activities 7. Perform required work and note the date performed and the action taken on the Corrective Action Closure Report. 8. Re-inspect the area to ensure compliance (note that additional inspections to check work are not always documented). Corrective Action item will be tracked to closure via ACTS Workorder Report. Corrective Action closure date and general comments for work completed will be recorded either on an inspection form or the Workorder Closure Report. After adequate corrective action has been completed and recorded, or where a report does not identify any incidents requiring corrective action, the report will contain a signed statement indicating the site is in compliance with the permit to the best of the signer’s knowledge and belief. 33 References CDPHE, 2019a. CDPS General Permit, Authorization to Discharge under the Colorado Discharge Permit System. Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment. Water Quality Control Division. Issued October 31, 2018; effective April 1, 2019. CDPHE, 2019b. Colorado Discharge Permit System (CDPS) Fact Sheet to Permit Number COR400000. January 2019 CDPHE, 2019c. Colorado Discharge Permit System (CDPS) General Permit COR400000 Guidance Document. January 2019 CDPHE, 2017. Low Risk Discharge Guidance, Discharges of Uncontaminated Groundwater to Land. Issued September 2009, Revised August 8, 2017. Mutel, C.F., and Emerick, J.C., 1992. From Grassland to Glacier - The Natural History of Colorado and the Surrounding Region. USEPA, 2017. NPDES Stormwater Regulations, 40 CFR Parts 122.26. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Effective February 16, 2017. Appendix A General Permit 4300 Cherry Creek Drive South, Denver, CO 80246 303-692-3500 www.colorado.gov/cdphe/wqcd CERTIFICATION TO DISCHARGE UNDER CDPS GENERAL PERMIT COR400000 STORMWATER ASSOCIATED WITH CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES Certification Number: COR400643 This Certification to Discharge specifically authorizes: Owner Caerus Piceance LLC Operator Caerus Piceance LLC to discharge stormwater from the facility identified as NPR Caerus To the waters of the State of Colorado, including, but not limited to: Garden Gulch, Parachute Creek Facility Activity : Oil and Gas Exploration and Well Pad Development Disturbed Acres: 200 acres Facility Located at: Parachute Creek and Garden Gulch Uninc CO 81650 Garfield County Latitude 39.51666 Longitude -108.1666 Specific Information (if applicable): Certification is issued and effective: 9/6/2019 Expiration date of general permit: 3/31/2024 This certification under the permit requires that specific actions be performed at designated times. The certification holder is legally obligated to comply with all terms and conditions of the permit. This certification was approved by: Meg Parish, Section Manager Permits Section Water Quality Control Division 4300 Cherry Creek Drive South, Denver, CO 80246 303-692-3500 www.colorado.gov/cdphe/wqcd Lindsey Rider, EH&S Lead Caerus Piceance LLC 143 Diamond Ave Parachute, CO 81635 Lindsey Rider, EH&S Lead Caerus Piceance LLC 143 Diamond Ave Parachute, CO 81635 DATE: 2019-09-06 MEMO RE: Modification Certification, Colorado Discharge Permit System Permit No., COR400000, Certification Number: COR400643 DIVISION CONTACTS: Joseph Sturgeon, 303-691-4019, Joseph.Sturgeon@state.co.us ATTACHMENTS: Certification COR400643 On 2019-09-06 the Water Quality Control Division received a request to modify this certification by: update permit information. The Water Quality Control Division (the Division) has reviewed the application submitted for the NPR Caerus facility and determined that it qualifies for coverage under the CDPS General Permit for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activities (the permit). Enclosed please find a copy of the permit certification, which was issued under the Colorado Water Quality Control Act. FEE INFORMATION: 200 acres There is no fee It is the responsibility of the permittee to submit a termination application when the permit is no longer needed. Fees are assessed and invoiced for every permit that is active July 1 of the fiscal year. Permits for which termination applications are received by June 30 of the current fiscal year will not be invoiced for the new fiscal year. CERTIFICATION RECORDS INFORMATION: The following information is what the Division records show for this certification. For any changes to Contacts – Owner, Operator, Facility, or Billing – a “Notice of Change of Contacts form” must be managed through the Division’s new platform called the Colorado Environmental Online Services (CEOS). The Notice of Change of Contacts form must be electronically signed by both the owner and the operator. Facility: NPR Caerus Garfield County Construction Activities Oil and Gas Exploration and Well Pad Development Owner (receives all legal documentation pertaining to the permit certification): Lindsey Rider, EH&S Lead Caerus Piceance LLC 143 Diamond Ave Parachute, CO 81635 Phone number: 970-285-2711 Email: lrider@caerusoilandgas.com Operator (receives all legal documentation pertaining to the permit certification): Lindsey Rider, EH&S Lead Caerus Piceance LLC 143 Diamond Ave Parachute, CO 81635 Phone number: 970-285-2711 Email: lrider@caerusoilandgas.com Facility Contact (contacted for general inquiries regarding the facility): Kathy Vertiz, Environmental Consultant Caerus Piceance LLC 143 Diamond Ave Parachute, CO 81635 Phone number: 970-812-7560 Email: kvertiz@caerusoilandgas.com Billing Contact (receives the invoice pertaining to the permit certification): Lindsey Rider, EH&S Lead Caerus Piceance LLC 143 Diamond Ave Parachute, CO 81635 Phone number: 970-285-2711 Email: lrider@caerusoilandgas.com 4300 Cherry Creek Drive South, Denver, CO 80246 303-692-3500 www.colorado.gov/cdphe/wqcd R CERTIFICATION TO DISCHARGE UNDER CDPS GENERAL PERMIT COR400000 STORMWATER ASSOCIATED WITH CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES Certification Number: COR400643 This Certification to Discharge specifically authorizes: Owner Caerus Piceance LLC Operator Caerus Piceance LLC to discharge stormwater from the facility identified as Piceance Area To the waters of the State of Colorado, including, but not limited to: to Garden Gulch to Parachute Creek Facility Activity : Oil and gas production Disturbed Acres: 200 acres Facility Located at: Parachute Creek and Garden Gulch Uninc CO 81650 Garfield County Latitude 39.51666 Longitude -108.1666 Specific Information (if applicable): Certification is issued 4/1/2019 Certification is effective 4/1/2019 Expiration date of general permit : 3/31/2024 This certification under the permit requires that specific actions be performed at designated times. The certification holder is legally obligated to comply with all terms and conditions of the permit. This certification was approved by: Meg Parish, Unit Manager Permits Section Water Quality Control Division Michael Rynearson, Ops VP Caerus Piceance LLC 1001 17 St Ste 1600 Denver, CO 80202 DATE: 12/19/2017 MEMO RE: Transfer of Certification, Colorado Discharge Permit System Permit No., COR030000, Certification Number: COR03C052 DIVISION CONTACTS: Debbie Jessop 303-692-3590 ATTACHMENTS: Certification General Permit On 12/18/2017, the Division received a request to transfer the certification for Piceance Area from Marathon Oil Co to Caerus Piceance LLC and determined that it qualifies for coverage under the CDPS General Permit for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction (the permit). FEE INFORMATION: The Annual Fee for this certification is $350 [category 7, subcat II-J Construction Stormwater Construction 1-30 acres per CRS 25-8- 502]. This will be invoiced in July. CERTIFICATION RECORDS INFORMATION: The following information is what the Division records show for this certification. For any changes to Contacts – Legal, Facility, or Billing – a “Notice of Change of Contacts form” must be submitted to the Division. This form is also available on our web site and must be signed by the legal contact. Facility: Piceance Area GarfieldCounty Construction Activities Oil and gas production Legal Contact (receives all legal documentation pertaining to the permit certification): Michael Rynearson, Ops VP Caerus Piceance LLC 1001 17 St Ste 1600 Denver, CO 80202 Phone number: 720-880-6407 Email: mrynearson@caerusoilandgas.com Facility Contact (contacted for general inquiries regarding the facility): Michael McKee,EHS Engr Caerus Piceance LLC 1001 17 St Ste 1600 Denver, CO 80202 Phone number: 720-880-6322 Email: mmckee@caerusoilandgas.com Billing Contact (receives the invoice pertaining to the permit certification): Michael McKee, EHS Engr Caerus Piceance LLC 1001 17 St Ste 1600 Denver, CO 80202 Phone number: 720-880-6322 Email: mmckee@caerusoilandgas.com ADMINISTRATIVE CONTINUATION EXPLANATION: The Division is currently developing a renewal permit and associated certification for the above permitted facility. The development and review procedures required by law have not yet been completed. The Construction Stormwater General Permit, which expired June 30, 2012, is administratively continued and will remain in effect under Section 104(7) of the Administrative Procedures Act, C.R.S. 1973, 24-4-101, et seq (1982 repl. vol. 10) until a renewal permit/certification is issued and effective. The renewal for this facility will be based on the application that was received 12/18/2017 All effluent limits, terms and conditions of the administratively continued permit are in effect until the renewal is complete. 4300 Cherry Creek Drive S., Denver, CO 80246-1530 P 303-692-2000 www.colorado.gov/cdphe John W. Hickenlooper, Governor | Larry Wolk, MD, MSPH, Executive Director and Chief Medical Officer CERTIFICATION TO DISCHARGE UNDER CDPS GENERAL PERMIT COR-0300000 STORMWATER ASSOCIATED WITH CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES Certification Number: COR03C052 This Certification to Discharge specifically authorizes: Caerus Piceance LLC to discharge stormwater from the facility identified as Piceance Area To the waters of the State of Colorado, including, but not limited to: Garden Gulch- Parachute Creek Facility Industrial Activity : Oil and gas production Facility Located at: Parachute Creek and Garden Gulch Uninc CO 81650 Garfield County Latitude 39.51666 Longitude -108.1666 Specific Information (if applicable): Disturbed Acreage >5 acres Total Acreage >5 acres Modified and reissued date: 12/18/2017 Effective date: 12/18/2017 Expiration date: This authorization expires upon effective date of the General Permit COR030000 renewal unless otherwise notified by the division. Modification # 1 transferred permit from Marathon Oil Co to Caerus Piceance LLC This certification under the permit requires that specific actions be performed at designated times. The certification holder is legally obligated to comply with all terms and conditions of the permit. This certification was approved by: Lillian Gonzalez, Unit Manager Permits Section Water Quality Control Division Page 1 of 2 form last revised December 2011 DIVISION USE ONLY WQCD Division Initiated Modification Requested by___________ Date requested__________ Date entered____________ MODIFICATION APPLICATION Please print or type all information. All items must be filled out completely and correctly. If the form is not complete, it will be returned. All modification dates are established by the Division. This form is for modifying an established permit or certification. Terminations, Change of Contacts, Transfer of Permit, and Withdrawl of Permit Application and/or modification requests must be submitted on the appropriate form: MAIL ORIGINAL FORM WITH INK SIGNATURES TO THE FOLLOWING ADDRESS: Colorado Dept of Public Health and Environment Water Quality Control Division 4300 Cherry Creek Dr South WQCD-P-B2 Denver, CO 80246-1530 FAXED or EMAILED FORMS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED. • PART A. IDENTIFICATION OF PERMIT Please write the permit number to be modified PERMIT NUMBER _________________________ • PART B. PERMITEE INFORMATION (application must be signed by the legal contact listed here) Company Name Mailing Address City State Zipcode Legal Contact Name Phone Number Title Email • PART C. FACILITY/PROJECT INFORMATION Facility/Project Name Location (address) City County Local Contact Name Phone Number Title Email COLORADO WATER QUALITY CONTROL DIVISION MODIFICATION APPLICATION www.coloradowaterpermits.com Page 2 of 2 form last revised December 2011 •PART D. DESCRIPTION OF MODIFICATION REQUESTED: •PART E. CERTIFICATION Required Signatures “I certify under penalty of law that I have personally examined and am familiar with the information submitted in this application and all attachments and that, based on my inquiry of those individuals immediately responsible for obtaining the information, I believe that the information is true, accurate and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine or imprisonment. “I understand that submittal of this application is for coverage under the State of Colorado Discharge Permit System until such time as the application is amended or the certification is transferred, inactivated, or expired.” Signature of Legally Responsible Party Date Signed Name (printed) Title *This modification application shall be signed, dated, and certified for accuracy by the permittee. In all cases, it shall be signed as follows: 1.In the case of a corporation, by a principal executive officer of at least the level of vice-president, or his or her duly authorized representative, if such representative is responsible for the overall operation of the operation from which the discharge described herein originates; 2.In the case of a partnership, by a general partner; 3.In the case of a sole proprietorship, by the proprietor; 4.In the case of a municipal, state, or other public operation, by either a principal executive officer, ranking elected official, or other duly authorized employee. If adding outfalls to an existing permit, include outfall number, latitude and longitude of the outfall, flow, receiving waters, and any treatment (see application for new permit for guidance). W e s t F o r k East Fork E Middl e F or k Northwat er Cr e ek Trapper Cre ek Parachute CreekConn CreekDavis Gu lch Allenwater CreekWheeler GulchDeep GulchForked Gu lchCorral GulchLittle CreekWillow CreekSheep Kill GulchSchatte CreekGarden G ul c h Cascade CanyonSpring GulchHouse Log GulchBull Gulc h Wolf CreekCircle Dot GulchCrystal CreekCache CreekTrail GulchStarkey G ulc h First An v i l C r e e kGardner GulchBaker Gulch He lm G u l c h Grassy GulchMiddle WaterRas p b e r r y C r e e k Red Gulch Cabin WaterBear Cabin GulchMiddle ForkJV GulchSheep Gulch Camp GulchW Forked GulchR u l i s o n G u l c h C o t t o n w o o d G u l c h Bear Run Timber GulchPete Spring Gu lch Shor t Wa te rWest ForkCottonwood GulchEast For k Parachute CreekGrassy GulchMi d d l e F o r k 5 S 95 W 6 S 96 W 6 S 95 W 5 S 96 W 5 S 94 W 6 S 97 W 6 S 94 W 5 S 97 W 4 S 96 W 7 S 97 W 4 S 97 W 7 S 94 W 4 S 95 W 7 S 95 W 4 S 94 W 7 S 96 W Copyright:© 2013 National Geographic Society, i-cubed Legend TWN_CO NPR µ Colordo Discharge Permit NPR COR03C052 Appendix B Qualified Stormwater Manager(s) (QSM) Training and Meeting Record(s) SMEC Training: • 2/12/2019 – SMEC Training Altitude Training Associates o Attendees: Jessy Rippee, Jesse Wolf, Rodger Hager, Lindsey Rider and Kathy Vertiz Stormwater Management for Oil & Gas Operations Colorado: • 5/15/2019 - SMEC Training Altitude Training Associates o Attendees: Brett Middleton, Jake Janicek, Kathy Vertiz, Matt Fenton, Mike Knox, and Sam Hager QSM: • 2/13-2/14/2019 – QSM Training Altitude Training Associates o Attendees: Lindsey Rider and Kathy Vertiz Control Measure Manual: • 2/7/2019 – Review Meeting #1 o Attendees: Matt Fenton, Jessy Rippee, Jesse Wolf, Sam Hager, Rodger Hager, Lindsey Rider and Kathy Vertiz • 2/21/2019 – Review Meeting #2 o Attendees: Matt Fenton, Jessy Rippee, Jesse Wolf, Rodger Hager, Lindsey Rider and Kathy Vertiz • 2/28/2019 – Review Meeting #3 o Attendees: Matt Fenton, Jessy Rippee, Jesse Wolf, Sam Hager, Rodger Hager, Lindsey Rider and Kathy Vertiz • 3/7/2019 – Review Meeting #4 Contractor Compliance Meeting: • TBD Altitude Training Associates Awards this Certificate of Completion to Who on February 13 & 14, 2019 Successfully Completed The Following Training Class: Qualified Stormwater Manager Certification Number: 049 Expiration: February 14, 2022 Instructor Altitude Training Associates Kathy Vertiz Altitude Training Associates Awards this Certificate of Completion to Who on February 13 & 14, 2019 Successfully Completed The Following Training Class: Qualified Stormwater Manager Certification Number: 042 Expiration: February 14, 2022 Instructor Altitude Training Associates Lindsey Rider Altitude Training Associates Awards this Certificate of Completion to Who on February 13 & 14, 2019 Successfully Completed The Following Training Class: Qualified Stormwater Manager Certification Number: 045 Expiration: February 14, 2022 Instructor Altitude Training Associates Tristan Schmalz Altitude Training Associates Awards this Certificate of Completion to Who on February 12, 2019 Successfully Completed The Following 8 Hour Training Class: Stormw ater Management & Erosion Control (SMEC) Instructor Altitude Training Associates Completion of this course has earned the recipient 0.8 CEU’s Jessy Rippee Altitude Training Associates Awards this Certificate of Completion to Who on February 12, 2019 Successfully Completed The Following 8 Hour Training Class: Stormw ater Management & Erosion Control (SMEC) Instructor Altitude Training Associates Completion of this course has earned the recipient 0.8 CEU’s Jesse Wolf Altitude Training Associates Awards this Certificate of Completion to Who on February 12, 2019 Successfully Completed The Following 8 Hour Training Class: Stormw ater Management & Erosion Control (SMEC) Instructor Altitude Training Associates Completion of this course has earned the recipient 0.8 CEU’s Kathy Vertiz Altitude Training Associates Awards this Certificate of Completion to Who on February 12, 2019 Successfully Completed The Following 8 Hour Training Class: Stormw ater Management & Erosion Control (SMEC) Instructor Altitude Training Associates Completion of this course has earned the recipient 0.8 CEU’s Lindsey Rider Altitude Training Associates Awards this Certificate of Completion to Who on February 12, 2019 Successfully Completed The Following 8 Hour Training Class: Stormw ater Management & Erosion Control (SMEC) Instructor Altitude Training Associates Completion of this course has earned the recipient 0.8 CEU’s Roger Hager Altitude Training Associates Awards this Certificate of Completion to Who on May 15, 2019 Successfully Completed The Following Training Class: Stormwater Management for Oil & Gas Operations Colorado Instructor Altitude Training Associates Brett Middleton Altitude Training Associates Awards this Certificate of Completion to Who on May 15, 2019 Successfully Completed The Following Training Class: Stormwater Management for Oil & Gas Operations Colorado Instructor Altitude Training Associates Jake Janicek Altitude Training Associates Awards this Certificate of Completion to Who on May 15, 2019 Successfully Completed The Following Training Class: Stormwater Management for Oil & Gas Operations Colorado Instructor Altitude Training Associates Kathy Vertiz Altitude Training Associates Awards this Certificate of Completion to Who on May 15, 2019 Successfully Completed The Following Training Class: Stormwater Management for Oil & Gas Operations Colorado Instructor Altitude Training Associates Matt Fenton Altitude Training Associates Awards this Certificate of Completion to Who on May 15, 2019 Successfully Completed The Following Training Class: Stormwater Management for Oil & Gas Operations Colorado Instructor Altitude Training Associates Mike Knox Altitude Training Associates Awards this Certificate of Completion to Who on May 15, 2019 Successfully Completed The Following Training Class: Stormwater Management for Oil & Gas Operations Colorado Instructor Altitude Training Associates Sam Hager Appendix C Control Measure Manual Revised March 2019 Control Measure Manual Contents 1.0 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 1 2.0 Planning ......................................................................................................................................................... 2 3.0 Types of Best Management Practices ....................................................................................................... 3 4.0 Principles and practices of erosion control ............................................................................................. 6 5.0 Erosion control concepts............................................................................................................................ 7 6.0 Selection and implementation of controls................................................................................................ 8 7.0 Inspection and maintenance ...................................................................................................................... 9 8.0 References .................................................................................................................................................. 10 Erosion Control Measures .................................................................................................................................. 12 Armoring (AR) ......................................................................................................................................................... 13 Erosion Control Blanket (ECB) .............................................................................................................................. 18 Landforming (LF) .................................................................................................................................................... 23 Land Grading (LG) .................................................................................................................................................. 26 Mulching (M) ........................................................................................................................................................... 34 Retaining Wall (RW) ............................................................................................................................................... 38 Revegetation (RV) .................................................................................................................................................. 43 Soil Stabilizers (SS) ................................................................................................................................................ 46 Stabilized Unpaved Surface/Gravel Surfacing (GS) ............................................................................................. 48 Subsoil Segregation (SubS) ................................................................................................................................... 50 Surface Roughening (SR) ...................................................................................................................................... 52 Terracing (T) ........................................................................................................................................................... 56 Topsoil Conservation and Segregation (TopS) ..................................................................................................... 60 Vegetated Buffer (VB) ............................................................................................................................................ 64 Drainage Control Measures ................................................................................................................................ 66 Berm (B)/Working Surface Perimeter Berm ...................................................................................................... 67 Culvert (C) .............................................................................................................................................................. 71 Diversion (D) ......................................................................................................................................................... 81 Drainage Dip (DD) .................................................................................................................................................. 86 Low Water Crossing (LWC) ................................................................................................................................... 89 Pipeline Water Crossing (PWC) ............................................................................................................................. 92 Roadside Ditches (RSD) ........................................................................................................................................ 99 Slope Drain (SD) ................................................................................................................................................. 101 Trench Breakers (TB) .......................................................................................................................................... 103 Water Bar (WB) ................................................................................................................................................... 106 Wing Ditch (WD) .................................................................................................................................................. 111 Sediment Control Measures ............................................................................................................................ 114 Check Dam (CD)/Velocity Checks ...................................................................................................................... 115 Detention Pond (DP) ........................................................................................................................................... 119 Filter Berm (FB) ................................................................................................................................................... 123 Rumble Strip (RS)/Vehicle Track Pads .............................................................................................................. 125 Sediment Trap (ST) ............................................................................................................................................. 128 Slash (SL) ............................................................................................................................................................ 136 Straw Bale Barrier (SBB)..................................................................................................................................... 138 Wattles (W) .......................................................................................................................................................... 142 Non-Stormwater Control Measures ................................................................................................................ 145 Dust Control (DC) ................................................................................................................................................ 146 Material Delivery and Storage (MDS) ................................................................................................................. 148 Scheduling (S) ..................................................................................................................................................... 150 Spill Prevention and Control (SPC) .................................................................................................................... 152 Vehicle and Equipment Maintenance (VEM) ..................................................................................................... 156 Waste Management (WM) .................................................................................................................................. 159 Figures Site Isometrics SI-1 Site Isometric – Flat and Gently Sloping Terrain SI-2 Site Isometric – Steep Terrain Site Plans SP-0 Site Plan – Preconstruction SP-1 Site Plan – Flat and Gently Sloping Terrain SP-2 Site Plan – Steep Terrain Details D-1 Access Road Intersection – Well Pad below Road D-2 Access Road Intersection – Well Pad above Road D-3 Well Pad D-4 Road Parallel to Gathering Line and Stream D-5 404 Stream Crossing DIVERSION (D) NOT TO SCALE CULVERT WELL HEADS DETENTION POND (DP) CUT SLOPE EROSION CONTROL FILL SLOPE EROSION CONTROL CULVERT (C) NAT U R A L D R A I N A G E FRACING PIT DRILLING PIT SURFACE WATER FLOW SURFACE WATER FLOW TURNOUT (TO) SEDIMENT CONTROL (i.e. CHECK DAM (CD)) CROWN INSLOPE RUN ON DIVERSION (ROD) EROSION CONTROL (i.e. EROSION CONTROL BLANKET (ECB)) BERM (B) RUN ON DIVERSION (ROD) WELL HEADS FRACING PIT DRILLING PIT DETENTION POND (DP)BERM (B) CROWN INSLOPE SEDIMENT CONTROL (i.e. SEDIMENT TRAP (ST)) (TYP.) LEGEND RIPRAP (R) VEGETATED BUFFER (VB) CHECK DAM (CD) SEDIMENT TRAP (ST) GROUND SURFACE CONTOUR (BEFORE CONSTRUCTION) FLOW SURFACE WATER FLOW CUT SLOPE FILL SLOPE ROADSIDE DITCH (RSD) DIVERSION (D) OR (ROD) BERM (B) TOPSOIL STOCKPILE (TS) EROSION CONTROL BLANKET (ECB) WATTLE (W) SEDIMENT CONTROL OPTIONS CHECK DAM (CD) FILTER BERM (FB) SEDIMENT TRAP (ST) SILT FENCE (SF) WATTLE (W) EROSION CONTROL OPTIONS EROSION CONTROL BLANKET (ECB) HYDRAULIC MULCHING (HM) MULCHING (M) RETAINING WALL (RW) REVEGETATION (RV) RIPRAP (R) SURFACE ROUGHENING (SR) TERRACING (T) WATTLE (W) EROSION CONTROL (i.e. WATTLE (W)) (TYP.) GATHERING LINE GATHERING LINE DRWN:DATE: Storm Water Manual of Best Management Practices Encana, Parachute, Colorado SITE ISOMETRIC FLAT AND GENTLY SLOPING TERRAIN 05/30/08 FIGURE SI-1E.S.S./GOL WATTLE (W)(TYP.) TOPSOIL STOCKPILE (SP) SEDIMENT RESERVOIR (SEDR) WATTLE (W)(TYP.)VEGETATED BUFFER OR SEDIMENT CONTROL (i.e. WATTLE (W))(TYP.)SEDIMENT RESERVOIR (SEDR) SEDIMENT CONTROL (i.e. SEDIMENT TRAP (ST)) (TYP.) EROSION CONTROL (i.e. WATTLE (W)) (TYP.) CUT SLOPEEROSION CONTROL(S)(i.e. TERRACING)VEGETATED BUFFER (VB)WELL HEADSFRACINGPITDRILLINGPITFILL SLOPEEROSION CONTROL(S)(i.e. TERRACING)TOPSOIL STOCKPILE (SP)DIVERSION (D)RUN ON DIVERSION (ROD)STREAMBERM (B)ROADSIDEDITCH (RSD)ROADSIDEDITCH (RSD)BERM (B)DETENTIONPOND (DP)SEDIMENT CONTROL(i.e. SEDIMENT TRAP (ST)) (TYP.)CUT SLOPEFILL SLOPEROADSIDE DITCH (RSD)DIVERSION (D) OR (ROD)BERM (B)TOPSOIL STOCKPILE (TS)WATTLE (W)LEGENDRIPRAP (R)VEGETATED BUFFER (VB)SEDIMENT TRAP (ST)FLOWGATHERING LINEEROSION CONTROL(i.e. RIPRAP (R))INSLOPESEDIMENT CONTROL OPTIONSCHECK DAM (CD)FILTER BERM (FB)SEDIMENT TRAP (ST)SILT FENCE (SF)WATTLE (W)EROSION CONTROL OPTIONSEROSION CONTROL BLANKET(ECB)HYDRAULIC MULCHING (HM)MULCHING (M)RETAINING WALL (RW)REVEGETATION (RV)RIPRAP (R)SURFACE ROUGHENING (SR)TERRACING (T)WATTLE (W)DRWN:DATE:Storm Water Manual ofBest Management PracticesEncana, Parachute, ColoradoSITE ISOMETRICSTEEP TERRAIN06/06/08FIGURE SI-2E.S.S./GOLSEDIMENT CONTROL(i.e. WATTLES (W)) (TYP.)EROSION CONTROL(i.e. WATTLES (W)) (TYP.)SEDIMENT CONTROL(i.e. SEDIMENT TRAP (ST)) (TYP.)SEDIMENT RESERVOIR (SEDR) NOT TO SCALENATURAL DRAINAGESURFACEWATERFLOWSURFACEWATERFLOWRUN ON DIVERSION (ROD)LEGENDPROPOSED ROADAND WELL PADSGROUND SURFACECONTOUR (BEFORECONSTRUCTION)DIVERSION (D) OR (ROD)VEGETATED BUFFER (VB)SEDIMENT TRAP (ST)RIPRAP (R)CHECK DAM (CD)WATTLE (W)RUN ON DIVERSION (ROD)COUNTY ROADSEDIMENT RESERVOIR (SEDR)SEDIMENT CONTROL(i.e. SEDIMENT TRAP (ST)) (TYP.)SEDIMENT CONTROL OPTIONSCHECK DAM (CD)FILTER BERM (FB)SEDIMENT TRAP (ST)SILT FENCE (SF)WATTLE (W)EROSION CONTROL OPTIONSEROSION CONTROL BLANKET(ECB)HYDRAULIC MULCHING (HM)MULCHING (M)RETAINING WALL (RW)REVEGETATION (RV)RIPRAP (R)SURFACE ROUGHENING (SR)TERRACING (T)WATTLE (W)VEGETATED BUFFERVEGETATED BUFFERVEGETATED BUFFERDRWN:DATE:Storm Water Manual ofBest Management PracticesEncana, Parachute, ColoradoSITE PLANPRECONSTRUCTION05/30/08FIGURE SP-0E.S.S./GOLWATTLE (W)SEDIMENT RESERVOIR (SEDR)WATTLE (W)EROSION CONTROL(i.e. WATTLE (W))(TYP.)SEDIMENT CONTROL(i.e. SEDIMENT TRAP (ST)) (TYP.)EROSION CONTROL(i.e. WATTLE (W))(TYP.) DETENTIONPOND (DP)FRACINGPITDRILLINGPITDIVERSION (D)ROADSIDEDITCH (RSD)BERM (B)NOT TO SCALECULVERT (C)WELL HEADSDETENTIONPOND (DP)CUT SLOPEEROSION CONTROLFILL SLOPEEROSION CONTROLCULVERT (C)CULVERT (C)CULVERT (C)BERM (B)TOPSOIL STOCKPILE (SP)NATURAL DRAINAGED-1FRACINGPITDRILLINGPITSURFACEWATERFLOWSURFACEWATERFLOWWELL HEADSTURNOUT (TO)SEDIMENT CONTROL(i.e. CHECK DAM (CD)) (TYP.)CROWNCROWNINSLOPEINSLOPEINSLOPEINSLOPECROWNRUN ON DIVERSION (ROD)EROSION CONTROL(i.e. WATTLE (W))(TYP.)GROUND SURFACECONTOUR (BEFORE CONSTRUCTION)CUT SLOPEFILL SLOPEROADSIDE DITCH (RSD)DIVERSION (D) OR (ROD)BERM (B)TOPSOIL STOCKPILE (TS)EROSION CONTROLBLANKET (ECB)WATTLE (W)LEGENDD-2D-3D-4D-5RIPRAP (R)VEGETATED BUFFER (VB)CHECK DAM (CD)SEDIMENT TRAP (ST)GROUND SURFACECONTOUR (BEFORECONSTRUCTION)FLOWRUN ON DIVERSION (ROD)BERM (B)STABILIZED CONSTRUCTIONENTRANCE (SCE)COUNTY ROADROADBERM (B)VEGETATEDBUFFEROR SEDIMENTCONTROL(i.e. WATTLE(W))SURFACEWATERFLOWD-6GATHERING LINEGATHERING LINESEDIMENT CONTROL OPTIONSCHECK DAM (CD)FILTER BERM (FB)SEDIMENT TRAP (ST)SILT FENCE (SF)WATTLE (W)EROSION CONTROL OPTIONSEROSION CONTROL BLANKET(ECB)HYDRAULIC MULCHING (HM)MULCHING (M)RETAINING WALL (RW)REVEGETATION (RV)RIPRAP (R)SURFACE ROUGHENING (SR)TERRACING (T)WATTLE (W)EROSION CONROLON STEEP SLOPESDRWN:DATE:Storm Water Manual ofBest Management PracticesEncana, Parachute, ColoradoSITE PLANFLAT AND GENTLY SLOPING TERRAIN06/06/08FIGURE SP-1E.S.S./GOLSEDIMENTRESERVOIR (SEDR)WATTLE (W) (TYP.)TOPSOIL STOCKPILE (SP)EROSION CONTROL ONFILL SLOPES NEAR CULVERTSSEDIMENT RESERVOIR (SEDR)EROSION CONTROL(i.e. EROSION CONTROLBLANKET (ECB))SEDIMENT CONTROL(i.e. SEDIMENT TRAP (ST))(TYP.)WATTLE (W) (TYP.)WATTLE (W) (TYP.)SLASH (SL) DIVERSION (D)CUTFILLWELL PADBERM (B)EROSION CONTROL(i.e. TERRACING (T))ROADSIDE DITCH (RSD)BERM (B)EROSION CONTROLWHEN CLOSE PROXIMITYTO SCREAMSTREAMCUT SLOPEEROSION CONTROLVEGETATED BUFFER (VB)WELL HEADSFRACINGPITDRILLINGPITFILL SLOPEEROSION CONTROLDETENTIONPOND (DP)DIVERSION (D)RUN ON DIVERSION (ROD)SEDIMENT CONTROL(i.e. SEDIMENT TRAP (ST)) (TYP.)STREAMBERM (B)ROADSIDEDITCH (RSD)ROADSIDEDITCH (RSD)SEDIMENT CONTROL(i.e. SEDIMENT TRAP (ST)) (TYP.)BERM (B)VEGETATED BUFFER (VB)RUN ON DIVERSION (ROD)FRACING PITTOPSOIL STOCKPILE (SP)WATTLE (W)EROSION CONTROLWHEN IN PROXIMITYTO STREAMCUT SLOPEFILL SLOPEROADSIDE DITCH (RSD)DIVERSION (D) OR (ROD)BERM (B)TOPSOIL STOCKPILE (TS)EROSION CONTROLBLANKET (ECB)WATTLE (W)LEGENDRIPRAP (R)VEGETATED BUFFER (VB)CHECK DAM (CD)SEDIMENT TRAP (ST)GROUND SURFACECONTOUR (BEFORECONSTRUCTION)FLOWWATTLE (W) (TYP.)SEDIMENT CONTROL OPTIONSCHECK DAM (CD)FILTER BERM (FB)SEDIMENT TRAP (ST)SILT FENCE (SF)WATTLE (W)EROSION CONTROL OPTIONSEROSION CONTROL BLANKET(ECB)HYDRAULIC MULCHING (HM)MULCHING (M)RETAINING WALL (RW)REVEGETATION (RV)RIPRAP (R)SURFACE ROUGHENING (SR)TERRACING (T)WATTLE (W)NOT TO SCALEEROSION CONTROL(i.e. TERRACING (T))EROSION CONTROL(i.e. WATTLE (W)) (TYP.)EROSION CONTROL(i.e. RIPRAP (R))GATHERING LINEDATE:DRWN:Storm Water Manual ofBest Management PracticesEncana, Parachute, ColoradoSITE PLANSTEEP TERRAIN06/06/08FIGURE SP-2E.S.S./GOLTOPSOIL STOCKPILE (SP)SEDIMENTRESERVOIR (SEDR)DIVERSION (D) NOT TO SCALECUTSLOPEFILLSLOPECUTSLOPEFILLSLOPEROAD (§ 8%)PAD ACCESSROADCROWNROADSIDE DITCH (RSD)ROADSIDEDITCH (RSD)ROADSIDE DITCH (RSD)VEGETATEDBUFFER (VB)VEGETATEDBUFFER (VB)SEDIMENT CONTOL(i.e. CHECK DAM (CD)) (TYP.)SURFACEWATERFLOWSURFACEWATERFLOWSURFACEWATERFLOWTURNOUT(TO)ROADSIDEDITCH (RSD)CROWNCOUNTY ROADSTABILIZEDCONSTRUCTIONENTRANCE (SCE)TURNOUT (TO)VEGETATED BUFFEROR SEDIMENT CONTROL(i.e. WATTLE(W)) (TYP.)GATHERING LINESLASH AND/OREROSION CONTROLSEDIMENT CONTROL OPTIONSCHECK DAM (CD)FILTER BERM (FB)SEDIMENT TRAP (ST)SILT FENCE (SF)WATTLE (W)EROSION CONTROL OPTIONSEROSION CONTROL BLANKET(ECB)HYDRAULIC MULCHING (HM)MULCHING (M)RETAINING WALL (RW)REVEGETATION (RV)RIPRAP (R)SURFACE ROUGHENING (SR)TERRACING (T)WATTLE (W)DATE:DRWN:Storm Water Manual ofBest Management PracticesEncana, Parachute, ColoradoACCESS ROAD INTERSECTIONWELL PAD BELOW ROAD06/06/08FIGURE D-1E.S.S./GOLSEDIMENT CONTROL(i.e. WATTLE(W)) (TYP.) SEDIMENT CONTROL(i.e. CHECK DAM (CD))NOT TO SCALEVEGETATEDBUFFER (VB)FILLSLOPEROADSIDE DITCH (RSD)SLOPE DRAIN (SD)IF DISCHARGEIS ON STEEP SLOPESCROWNROAD SLOPESEDIMENT CONTROL(i.e. SEDIMENT TRAP (ST)& CHECK DAM (CD))FILLSLOPECUTSLOPEBERM (B)PAD ACCESSROADROADSIDE DITCH (RSD)SURFACEWATERFLOWROADSIDE DITCH (RSD)SURFACEWATERFLOWROADSIDE DITCH (RSD)TURNOUT (TO)INSLOPEINSLOPEVEGETATEDBUFFER (VB)SEDIMENT CONTROL(i.e. WATTLE (W))CULVERT (C)SLASH AND/OREROSION CONTROLEROSION CONTROL(i.e. RIPRAP (R))SEDIMENT CONTROL OPTIONSCHECK DAM (CD)FILTER BERM (FB)SEDIMENT TRAP (ST)SILT FENCE (SF)WATTLE (W)EROSION CONTROL OPTIONSEROSION CONTROL BLANKET(ECB)HYDRAULIC MULCHING (HM)MULCHING (M)RETAINING WALL (RW)REVEGETATION (RV)RIPRAP (R)SURFACE ROUGHENING (SR)TERRACING (T)WATTLE (W)GATHERING LINEDATE:DRWN:Storm Water Manual ofBest Management PracticesEncana, Parachute, ColoradoACCESS ROAD INTERSECTIONWELL PAD ABOVE ROAD06/06/08FIGURE D-2E.S.S./GOLEROSION CONTROLIN FILL SLOPESNEAR CULVERTSEROSION CONTROL(i.e. EROSION CONTROL BLANKET (ECB)) TOPSOIL STOCKPILE (SP)RUN ONDIVERSION (ROD)DIVERSION (D)FRAC OR DRILL PITCUTFILLWELL PADDETENTIONPOND (DP)BERM (B)EROSION CONTROL(i.e. TERRACING (T))DIVERSION (D)BERM (B)WELL PADWIDE BERM (B)WITHIN ROADWAYPAD ACCESS ROADFRACINGPITDIVERSION (D) WITH CHECK DAMS (CD)DIVERSION (D)FILL SLOPEEROSION CONTROLROADSIDEDITCH (RSD)BERM (B)SURFACEWATERFLOWCUT SLOPEEROSION CONTROLSURFACEWATERFLOWDETENTIONPOND (DP)DRILLINGPITBERM (B)SEDIMENTCONTROL(i.e. SEDIMENTTRAP (ST)) (TYP.)BERM (B)SEDIMENTRESERVOIR(SEDR)SURFACEWATERFLOWRUN ONDIVERSION (ROD)WELL HEADSVEGETATED BUFFER (VB)INSLOPEEROSION CONTROL(i.e. TERRACING (T))SLASH AND/OREROSION CONTROLGATHERING LINESEDIMENT CONTROL(i.e. WATTLE (W))EROSION CONTROL(i.e. WATTLE (W)) (TYP.)SEDIMENT CONTROL OPTIONSCHECK DAM (CD)FILTER BERM (FB)SEDIMENT TRAP (ST)SILT FENCE (SF)WATTLE (W)EROSION CONTROL OPTIONSEROSION CONTROL BLANKET(ECB)HYDRAULIC MULCHING (HM)MULCHING (M)RETAINING WALL (RW)REVEGETATION (RV)RIPRAP (R)SURFACE ROUGHENING (SR)TERRACING (T)WATTLE (W)DATE:DRWN:Storm Water Manual ofBest Management PracticesEncana, Parachute, ColoradoWELL PADFIGURE D-306/06/08E.S.S./GOLNOT TO SCALETOPSOIL STOCKPILE (SP)WATTLE (W)WATTLE (W) STREAM ROADSIDE DITCH (RSD) VEGETATED BUFFER (VB) EROSION CONTROL ON STEEP SLOPES FILL SLOPE EROSION CONTROL (i.e. EROSION BLANKET (ECB) AND REVEGETATION (RV)) CUT SLOPE GATHERING LINE CULVERT (C)ROAD SLOPE SLASH AND OR EROSION CONTROL ROADSIDE DITCH (RSD) GATHERING LINE SLASH AND/OR EROSION CONTROL CUT FILL ROAD INSLOPE CULVERT (C) SLOPE DRAIN (SD) IF DISCHARGE IS ON STEEP SLOPES STREAM INSLOPE VEGETATED BUFFER (VB) SURFACE WATER FLOW SEDIMENT CONTROL (i.e. SEDIMENT TRAP (ST)) EROSION CONTROL (i.e. RIPRAP (R)) CULVERT PROTECTION (CP) EROSION CONTROL (i.e. RIPRAP (R)) SEDIMENT CONTROL OPTIONS CHECK DAM (CD) FILTER BERM (FB) SEDIMENT TRAP (ST) SILT FENCE (SF) WATTLE (W) EROSION CONTROL OPTIONS EROSION CONTROL BLANKET (ECB) HYDRAULIC MULCHING (HM) MULCHING (M) RETAINING WALL (RW) REVEGETATION (RV) RIPRAP (R) SURFACE ROUGHENING (SR) TERRACING (T) WATTLE (W) BACKFILL WINDROW EROSION CONTROL (i.e. RIPRAP (R)) EROSION CONTROL (i.e. RIPRAP (R)) DATE:DRWN: Storm Water Manual of Best Management Practices Encana, Parachute, Colorado ROAD PARALLEL TO GATHERING LINE AND STREAM FIGURE D-406/06/08 E.S.S.\GOL NOT TO SCALE CULVERT (C)EROSION CONTROL(i.e. RIPRAP (R))SEDIMENT CONTOL (i.e. CHECK DAM (CD)OR SEDIMENT TRAP (ST))ABOVE FLOOD PLAINEROSION CONTROL (i.e. EROSION CONTROLBLANKET (ECB) AND WATTLES (W))STREAMROAD (§ 8%)TURNOUTVEGETATEDBUFFER (VB)INSLOPEINSLOPEPLAN VIEWEROSION CONTROL(i.e. RIPRAP (R))EROSION CONTROL(i.e. RIPRAP (R))CULVERT (C)ROADEROSION CONTROL ONSTEEP SLOPESFILLSECTION VIEWROAD (§ 8%)PROFILE VIEWSLIGHT MOUND OVER CULVERTCULVERT (C)ROADROAD40' MIN.FILL SLOPEROADSIDEDITCH (RSD)SURFACEWATERFLOWSURFACEWATERFLOWEROSION CONTROLON STEEP SLOPESROADSIDEDITCH (RSD)SLOPE DRAIN (SD) IFDISCHARGE IS ONSTEEP SLOPESSEDIMENT CONTROL OPTIONSCHECK DAM (CD)FILTER BERM (FB)SEDIMENT TRAP (ST)SILT FENCE (SF)WATTLE (W)EROSION CONTROL OPTIONSEROSION CONTROL BLANKET(ECB)HYDRAULIC MULCHING (HM)MULCHING (M)RETAINING WALL (RW)REVEGETATION (RV)RIPRAP (R)SURFACE ROUGHENING (SR)TERRACING (T)WATTLE (W)EROSION CONTROL(i.e. RIPRAP (R))VEGETATED BUFFER (VB)EROSION CONTROL (i.e. RIPRAP(R))DATE:DRWN:Storm Water Manual ofBest Management PracticesEncana, Parachute, Colorado404 STREAM CROSSINGFIGURE D-506/06/08E.S.S./GOLNOT TO SCALE TEMPORARYBRIDGEFLUMESEDIMENT CONTROL(i.e. WATTLE (W))VEGETATION BUFFERMOVABLE SEDIMENT CONTROL(i.e. WATTLE W/ HANDLES)VEGETATION BUFFERTRENCH BREAKER (TB)(I.E. SAND BAGS)GATHERING LINETRENCHSTREAMMOVABLE SEDIMENT CONTROL(i.e. WATTLE W/ HANDLES)SEDIMENT CONTROL(i.e. WATTLE (W))GATHERING LINERIGHT-OF-WAYTRENCH BREAKER (TB)(i.e. SAND BAGS) (TYP.)SEDIMENT CONTROL OPTIONSCHECK DAM (CD)FILTER BERM (FB)SEDIMENT TRAP (ST)SILT FENCE (SF)WATTLE (W)EROSION CONTROL OPTIONSEROSION CONTROL BLANKET(ECB)HYDRAULIC MULCHING (HM)MULCHING (M)RETAINING WALL (RW)REVEGETATION (RV)RIPRAP (R)SURFACE ROUGHENING (SR)TERRACING (T)WATTLE (W)NOTE: AFTER TRENCH ISBACK-FILLED, REVEGETATEENTIRE RIGHT-OF-WAY ANDCOVER WITH SLASH AND/OROTHER EROSION CONTROL..DATE:DRWN:Storm Water Manual ofBest Management PracticesEncana, Parachute, ColoradoGATHERING LINECROSSING STREAM(DURING CONSTRUCTION CONDITION)FIGURE D-606/06/08E.S.S./GOLNOT TO SCALE Page 1 1.0 Introduction The primary purpose of the Control Measures Manual is to provide Caerus Oil and Gas, LLC (Caerus) personnel, contractors, and subcontractors with information on the proper selection, design, installation, maintenance and corrective action of Control Measures to manage oil and gas (O&G) related stormwater and to meet federal and state Stormwater Management Plan (SWMP) implementation requirements. This Control Measure Manual also satisfies the Colorado Oil and Gas Conservation Commission’s (COGCC) requirements for a Post-Construction Stormwater Program. The Control Measures found in this manual are operating practices that may be used to control erosion, drainage, and sedimentation associated with stormwater runoff from areas disturbed by clearing, grading, and excavating activities related to site preparation and construction of oil and gas production facilities. Although the Control Measures in this manual were derived from both common industry practices and from practical field experience, they may not be applicable for certain sites and field conditions. Control Measures may be modified, as necessary, to accommodate varied environments and site conditions. Personnel responsible for stormwater management, whether it is design, construction, maintenance, or environmental compliance, should have a thorough knowledge of the applicable erosion and sediment control measures and the related specifications. The main objectives of this manual are to: • Serve as an easy-to-use guide for selecting, designing, constructing, and maintaining Control Measures. • Function as a reference for construction plans and specifications. • Ultimately lead to the avoidance of any net increase in off-site erosion and sedimentation of waters of the U.S. • To clearly describe structural and non- structural practices used at construction sites to minimize erosion and sediment transport, including interim and permanent stabilization practices In the preparation of this document, emphasis was placed on the selection and practical application of Control Measures, given a variety of basic physical circumstances. The series of figures within this document are provided as a tool to quickly evaluate which Control Measures may be useful at a given construction site, whether new or existing. This document anticipates that the user will be prudent and exercise good judgment in evaluating site conditions and deciding which Control Measures or combination of Control Measures is to be used at a specific site. If the Control Measures selected are not effective to prevent discharges of potentially undesirable quantities of sediment to a regulated water body, Control Measures may be modified, or different or additional Control Measures should be employed. Page 2 2.0 Planning Planning for the inclusion of appropriate Control Measures should occur early in the site development process, and can be divided into five separate steps: • Site Assessment – Collect the information from the site regarding topography, soils, drainage, vegetation, and other predominant features. Also make note of any existing erosion that is present. Analyze the information to anticipate erosion and sedimentation problems. • Avoidance and Minimization – Avoiding or minimizing disturbances on construction sites are the best protection measures against erosion and sedimentation problems. Inclusion of these measures will also decrease the amount of Control Measures required during construction. • Construction Scheduling and Phasing – Develop a construction schedule and phasing plan that minimizes the amount of area exposed thus minimizing erosion and impacts to the area from development. • SWMP and/or Post-Construction SWMP (PCSWMP) – Develop and implement a SWMP and/or PCSWMP that specifies effective Control Measures, taking into consideration the information generated from the site assessment and the construction schedule and phasing. • Inspections and Maintenance – Inspection, maintenance and corrective action of Control Measures are required by the SWMP and PCSWMP. Evaluate the Control Measures that will be implemented and allocate the necessary resources to provide for timely and thorough inspections and maintenance. Page 3 3.0 Types of Best Management Practices Control Measures within this manual are classified as one of the following: Erosion Control – Any source control practice that protects the soil surface and/or strengthens the subsurface in order to prevent soil particles from being detached by rain or wind, thus controlling raindrop, sheet, and/or rill erosion. Erosion controls are always used when adjacent to any waterway. The erosion controls discussed within this Control Measure Manual include the following: • Armoring (AR) • Erosion Control Blanket (ECB) • Gravel Surfacing (GS) • Landforming (LF) • Land Grading (LG) • Mulching (M) • Retaining Wall (RW) • Revegetation (RV) • Soil Stabilizers (SS) • Subsoil Segregation (SubS) • Surface Roughening (SR) • Terracing (T) • Topsoil Conservation and Segregation (TopS) • Vegetated Buffer (VB) Drainage Control – Any practice that reduces or eliminates gully, channel, and stream erosion by minimizing, diverting, or conveying runoff through engineered systems. The drainage controls discussed within this Control Measure Manual include the following: • Berm (B) • Culvert (C) • Diversion (D) • Drainage Dip (DD) • Low Water Crossing (LWC) • Pipeline Water Crossing (PWC) • Roadside Ditches (RSD) • Slope Drain (SD) • Trench Breaker (TB) • Water Bar (WB) • Wing Ditch (WD) Sediment Control – Any practice that traps the soil particles after they have been detached and moved by wind or water. Sediment control measures are usually passive systems that rely on filtering or settling the particles out of the water or wind that is transporting them prior to leaving the site boundary. The sediment controls discussed within this Control Measure Manual include the following: • Check Dam (CD) • Detention Pond (DP) • Filter Berm (FB) • Rumble Strip (RS) • Sediment Trap (ST) • Straw Bale Barrier (SBB) • Wattles (W) Page 4 Non-Stormwater Control – Any general site and materials management measure that indirectly aids in minimization of erosion and pollution of water. Types of pollution sources include, but are not limited to, litter, oil and grease, hazardous material spills, and sediment. The non-stormwater controls discussed within this Control Measure Manual include the following: • Dewatering (DW) • Dust Control (DC) • Material Delivery and Storage (MDS) • Scheduling (S) • Spill Prevention and Control (SPC) • Vehicle and Equipment Maintenance (VEM) • Waste Management (WM) Control Measures are also be classified as either structural or non-structural controls: Structural Control – Handles sediment-laden stormwater prior to it leaving each site. Structural Control Measures are used to delay, capture, store, treat, or infiltrate stormwater runoff. Some examples of structural Control Measures include sediment traps, and diversions. Most Drainage Controls and Sediment Controls can also be classified as Structural Controls. • Armoring (AR) • Berm (B) • Check Dam (CD) • Culvert (C) • Detention Pond (DP) • Diversion (D) • Drainage Dip (DD) • Filter Berm (FB) • Retaining Wall (RW) • Roadside Ditches (RSD) • Rumble Strip (RS) • Sediment Trap (ST) • Slope Drain (SD) • Straw Bale Barrier (SBB) • Terracing (T) • Trench Breaker (TB) • Water Bar (WB) • Wattles (W) • Wing Ditch (WD) Non-structural Control – Reduces the generation and accumulation of pollutants, including sediment, by stabilizing disturbed areas and preventing the occurrence of erosion. Some examples of non-structural Control Measures include revegetation, mulching, and surface roughening. These types of stabilization techniques are not only the most effective method for reducing soil loss, but they are also normally the most cost effective due to low initial cost and reduced maintenance requirements. Most, but not all, Erosion Controls can also be classified as Non-structural Controls. The non-structural controls discussed within this Control Measure Manual include the following: • Armoring (AR) • Dust Control (DC) • Erosion Control Blanket (ECB) • Gravel Surfacing (GS) • Landforming (LF) • Land Grading (LG) Page 5 • Low Water Crossing (LWC) • Mulching (M) • Revegetation (RV) • Slash (SL) • Soil Stabilizers (SS) • Surface Roughening (SR) • Vegetated Buffer (VB) Page 6 4.0 Principles and practices of erosion control Types of erosion Splash Energy from the raindrop dislodges soil particles and initiates the erosion process. Sheet Uniform removal of saturated soil particles. Rill Long, narrow incisions in the soil caused by increased runoff velocities. Gully Deep, wide incisions caused by concentrated flow. Streambank Bank sloughing, toe cutting in a natural drainage pattern. Factors affecting erosion Soil type The primary soil property that affects erosiveness is the cohesiveness of the soil. While there are other factors, this is the most dominant factor when considering temporary erosion controls. The generalized soil triangle shows the break between soils that can be considered cohesive or non-cohesive soils. This rule of thumb has to be applied with good professional judgment. Vegetation Vegetation is the primary permanent erosion control for un-stabilized exposed surfaces. Anytime the existing vegetation is removed, there is immediate potential for wind and water erosion. Therefore, any un-vegetated surface should be treated with an appropriate Control Measure to prevent surface erosion. The appropriate Control Measure depends on the other factors affecting erosion. Climate The key climatic factors affecting erosion are rainfall intensity, duration, and return frequency, which in turn determine soil particle detachment and transport in runoff. Other climatic properties, such as temperature and growing season, have more to do with reestablishing permanent erosion controls. Topography The slope and length of slope have a direct influence on the transport of dislodged sediment and soil particles down slope. Even very erosive soils on flat slopes will not produce large amounts of sediment because there is not sufficient potential gravitational force to accelerate the surface runoff to velocities that will suspend and transport sediments. As slopes become steeper, the velocity of flow of surface runoff increases with a subsequent increase in sediment loads. That is why velocity management is a critical part of any erosion control practice. Page 7 5.0 Erosion control concepts Surface protection Protecting the soil surface will help minimize the amount of soil that is detached and transported as sediment. Minimization of concentrated flows Concentrated flows generate more energy and velocity than sheet flows. Greater depths and velocity generate more erosion and suspension of eroded materials. If concentrated flows develop, Control Measures, such as check dams, can be used to reduce the velocity. Where concentrated flows are directed to uniform surfaces, level spreaders can be used to reestablish sheet flows. Velocity reduction Velocity reduction is a key component of Control Measure implementation strategies. Control measures such as rock check dams, wattles, etc., are placed perpendicular to the direction of flow, whether sheet flow or concentrated flow, to slow the velocity of the water. The Control Measure type will be selected based on the anticipated depth, velocity, and frequency of flows over the surface or in the channel. Sediment capture Effective sediment control measures are designed and implemented to slow the runoff velocity and retain the sediment-laden water to allow soil particles to fall from suspension and settle out of the runoff. This will facilitate transport reduction and thereby the quantities of sediment that leave the site. Runoff management Runoff management tools are designed to utilize proper grading, diversions, barriers, or interceptor ditches to minimize concentrated flows and divert runoff away from denuded slopes or other critical areas. This can be done by minimizing slope steepness and length through the use of terraces, interceptor berms or ditches or diversion ditches. The concept is to divert clean runoff before it becomes sediment laden. Page 8 6.0 Selection and implementation of controls Implementation of Control Measures will be successful if used appropriately, taking into account a number of factors. The following are guidelines recommended in determining the appropriate Control Measures for the site: • Determine the limits of clearing and grubbing. If the entire site will not undergo excavation and grading, the boundaries of cut-and-fill operations should be defined. Buffer strips of natural vegetation may be utilized as a control measure. • Define the layout of buildings and roads. This will have been decided previously as part of the general development plan. If building layout is not final, the road areas stabilized with pavement and the drainage features related to roads should be defined as they relate to the plan. • Determine permanent drainage features. The location of permanent channels, storm sewers, roadside swales, and stormwater quality controls such as ponds, wetlands, grassed-lined swales, buffer strips, and areas of porous pavement, if known, should be defined. • Determine extent of temporary channel diversions. If permanent channel improvements are a part of the plan, the route, sizing, and lining needed for temporary channel diversions should be determined. Location and type of temporary channel crossings can be assessed. • Determine the boundaries of watersheds. The size of drainage basins will determine the types of sediment controls to be used. Areas located off site that contribute overland flow runoff will be assessed. Measures to limit the size of upland overland flow areas, such as run-on diversions, may be initially considered at this stage. • Select erosion controls. All areas exposed will require a control measure be defined dependent on the duration of exposure. These can be selected based on the schedule of construction. • Select sediment controls. Areas greater than 5 acres may require the installation of sediment basins. Consideration can be given to dividing large drainage basins into sub-areas, each served by a sediment basin. • Determine staging areas. The schedule of construction will determine what areas will be disturbed at various stages throughout the development plan. The opportunity for staging cut-and-fill operations to minimize the period of exposure of soils can be assessed. The sequence for installing sediment controls and erosion controls can also be determined at this time. • Identify locations of topsoil and other stockpiles. • Identify location of construction roads, access points, and material storage areas. Once Control Measures have been selected, each control should be incorporated into a site-specific plan drawing as a requirement of the SWMP or PCSWMP. Page 9 7.0 Inspection and maintenance All Control Measures will be properly inspected and maintained throughout the life of the entire operation according to the “Maintenance and Corrective Action Specifications” section in each of the following Control Measures. In general, the maintenance program should provide for inspection of Control Measures on a regular basis in accordance with the SWMP or PCSWMP. Inspection of Control Measures should also occur as soon as possible after major rainfall events, particularly at sensitive areas in proximity to a perennial drainage. The inspection should include repair or replacement of the Control Measures, where needed, to ensure effective and efficient operation. Page 10 8.0 References Arizona Department of Transportation (ADOT), Erosion and Pollution Control Manual. February 2005. California Stormwater Quality Association, Stormwater Best Management Practice (BMP) Handbook – Construction. January 2003. <http://www.cabmphandbooks.com/Construction.asp> Canadian Association of Petroleum Producers, Canadian Energy Pipeline Association, and Canadian Gas Association. October 2005. Pipeline Associated Watercourse Crossings 3rd Edition. Prepared by TERA Environmental Consultants and Salmo Consulting Inc. Calgary, AB. City of Knoxville, Stormwater Engineering, Knoxville BMP Manual - Best Management Practices. July 2003. <http://www.ci.knoxville.tn.us/engineering> Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT), Erosion Control and Stormwater Quality Guide. 2002. <http://www.dot.state.co.us/environmental/envWaterQual/wqms4.asp> Colorado Oil and Gas Commission (COGCC) Rules and Regulations <http://cogcc.state.co.us/> Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES). Construction Site Storm Water Runoff Control. Washington, D.C., February 2003. <http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/menuofbmps/con_site.cfm> Federal Energy Regulatory Commission (FERC), Upland Erosion Control, Revegetation, and Maintenance Plan. January 2003. Horizon Environmental Services, Inc, Guidance Document Reasonable and Prudent Practices for Stabilization (RAPPS) of Oil and Gas Construction Sites. April 2004. Keller, Gordon, and James Sherar, Low-Volume Roads Engineering, Best Management Practices Field Guide. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), Forest Service, US Agency of International Development (USAID), 2005. <http://ntl.bts.gov/lib/24000/24600/24650/Index_BMP_Field_Guide.htm> Schor, Horst J., and Donald H. Gray, Landforming: An Environmental Approach to Hillside Development, Mine Reclamation and Watershed Restoration. John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2007. Maine Department of Conservation, Best Management Practices for Forestry: Protecting Maine’s Water Quality. Maine Forest Service, Forest Policy and Management Division. Augusta, Maine. 2004. <http://www.state.me.us/doc/mfs/pubs/pdf/bmp_manual/bmp_manual.pdf> New York State Department of Environmental Conservation, New York Guidelines for Urban Erosion and Sediment Control. New York. Fourth Edition, 1997. South Dakota Department of Transportation – Water Quality Enhancement Program, Construction Field Manual – Construction Site Management and Erosion and Sediment Control. South Dakota. United States Army Corps of Engineers (USACE), Engineering and Design - Handbook for the Preparation of Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plans for Construction Activities. February 1997. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS), Field Office Technical Guide. 2002. <www.nrcs.usda.gov/technical/efotg> Page 11 United States Department of the Interior and United States Department of Agriculture. Surface Operating Standards and Guidelines for Oil and G as Exploration and Development “Gold Book.” BLM/WO/ST- 06/021+3071. Bureau of Land Management (BLM). Denver, Colorado. Fourth Edition, 2006. Page 12 Erosion Control Measures Armoring (AR) ......................................................................................................................................................... 13 Erosion Control Blanket (ECB) .............................................................................................................................. 18 Landforming (LF) .................................................................................................................................................... 23 Land Grading (LG) .................................................................................................................................................. 26 Mulching (M) ........................................................................................................................................................... 34 Retaining Wall (RW) ............................................................................................................................................... 38 Revegetation (RV) .................................................................................................................................................. 43 Soil Stabilizers (SS) ................................................................................................................................................ 46 Stabilized Unpaved Surface/Gravel Surfacing (GS) ............................................................................................. 48 Subsoil Segregation (SubS) ................................................................................................................................... 50 Surface Roughening (SR) ...................................................................................................................................... 52 Terracing (T) ........................................................................................................................................................... 56 Topsoil Conservation and Segregation (TopS) ..................................................................................................... 60 Vegetated Buffer (VB) ............................................................................................................................................ 64 Page 13 Armoring (AR) Description Armoring is a permanent, erosion-resistant layer made of native rocks/stones/boulders or crushed concrete. It is intended to stabilize areas subject to erosion and protect against scour of the soil caused by concentrated, high velocity flows. Applicability Armoring can be used for areas subject to erosion or weathering, particularly where conditions prohibit the establishment of revegetation or where flow velocities or soil types have a potential to be erosive. Armoring may be used in the following applications: • Channel side slopes and/or bottoms • Inlets and outlets to culverts and sediment traps • Check dams • Roadside ditches Armoring inlet protection should be used where velocities and energies at the inlets of culverts are sufficient to erode around the inlet structure. Armoring may also be used to help channel the stormwater to the inlet of the culvert. Culvert outlet protection should be used where discharge velocities and energies at the outlets of culverts or channels are enough to erode the next downstream reach Limitations Armoring is limited by steepness of slope, because slopes greater than 1.5:1 have potential armoring loss due to erosion and sliding. Page 14 Design criteria Gradation A well-graded mixture of rock sizes should be used instead of one uniform size (with the exception of dry stacking boulders). When dry stacking up a slope, boulders may be uniform in size or may get gradually smaller as the boulders are placed up the slope. Quality Armoring will be durable so that freeze/thaw cycles do not decompose it in a short time. Angular rock is preferred, although cobble maybe the only available option (check with local quarries). Rock should not be subject to breaking down when exposed to water or weathering. Filter material Filter material may be used between armoring and the underlying soil surface to prevent soil from moving through the armoring. Filter cloth material or a layer of sand and/or gravel is usually used for the filter. Apron Armoring as culvert outlet protection Armoring aprons at culvert outlets shall be designed as follows: If the pipe discharges directly into a well-defined channel, the apron shall extend across the channel bottom and up the channel banks to an elevation 1 foot above the maximum tailwater depth or to the top of the bank, whichever is less. The upstream end of the apron, adjacent to the pipe, shall have a width two (2) times the diameter of the outlet pipe, or conform to pipe end section if used. Armoring materials. The outlet protection may be done using rock armoring. Armoring shall be composed of a well-graded mixture of different sized stones. A well-graded mixture, as used herein, is defined as a mixture composed primarily of larger stone sizes, but with a sufficient mixture of other sizes to fill the smaller voids between the stones. Apron thickness. The minimum thickness of the armoring layer shall be 1.5 times the maximum stone diameter of 15 inches or less; and 1.2 times the maximum stone size greater than 15 inches. Construction specifications The performance-oriented specification for armoring is that erosion is not observed on the area with armoring application and that sediment is not observed to leave the armored area. If erosion or sediment is observed, the armoring should be re-designed and/or re-installed. General See Figure R-1 for armoring slope stabilization and stream bank protection. See the Sediment Trap (ST) Control Measure for a detail of an armored channel leading into a sediment trap. 1. Subgrade Preparation. Prepare the subgrade for armoring to the required lines and grades shown on the plans. Compact any fill required in the subgrade to a density approximating that of the undisturbed material or overfill depressions with armoring. Remove brush, trees, stumps, and other objectionable material. Cut the subgrade sufficiently deep so that the finished grade of the armoring will be at the elevation of the surrounding area. Channels should be excavated sufficiently to allow placement of Page 15 the armoring in a manner such that the finished inside dimensions and grade of the armoring meets design specifications. 2. Sand/gravel filter blanket. If using a granular filter, spread filter stone in a uniform layer to the specified depth. Where more than one layer of filter material is used, spread the layers with minimal mixing. 3. Synthetic filter fabric. If using a filter fabric, place the cloth directly on the prepared foundation. Where large stones are to be placed, a 4-inch layer of fine sand or gravel is recommended to protect the filter cloth. Filter fabric is not recommended as a filter on slopes steeper than 2:1. 4. Stone placement. Place armoring so that it forms dense, well-graded mass of stone with a minimum of voids. The desired distribution of stones throughout the mass may be obtained by selective loading at the quarry and controlled dumping during final placement. Place armoring to its full thickness in one operation. Do not place armoring by dumping through chutes or other methods that cause segregation of stone sizes. If a filter is used, be careful not to dislodge the underlying base filter or damage the filter cloth when placing the stones. If damage occurs, remove the armoring and repair filter. 5. The toe of the armoring should be keyed into a stable foundation at its base as shown in Figure R-1 if required for slope stabilization and stream bank protection. The finished slope should be free of pockets of small stone or clusters of large stones. Hand placing may be necessary to achieve proper distribution of stone sizes to produce a relatively smooth, uniform surface. The finished grade of the armoring should blend with the surrounding area. Culvert inlet protection Figure R-2 shows typical culvert inlet protection. However, site specifics shall dictate actual design. 1. After installation of a culvert, examine the stream channel for the amount of debris, logs, and brushy vegetation present. In channels with large amounts of debris, consider using oversized pipes. 2. Typically, the culvert inlet will have a sediment trap and a slide (head) gate that will normally be kept closed. In this case, sediment will settle out of runoff prior to washing through the culvert. If used, the slide gate will be opened only after collected water within the sediment trap is visually checked for any oil sheens. 3. Boulders may be dry-stacked around the culvert inlet and up the slope to the edge of the road. Culvert outlet protection 1. Prepare the sub-grade for the armoring to the required lines and grades. Any fill required in the sub-grade shall be compacted to a density of approximately that of the surrounding undisturbed material. 2. Construct apron to the design length and width with no slope. The invert elevations will be equal at the receiving channel and the apron's downstream end. No over-fall at the end of the apron is allowed. The elevation of the downstream end of the apron shall be equal to the elevation of the receiving channel or adjacent ground. The outlet protection apron shall be located so that there are no bends in the horizontal alignment. 3. Line the apron with armoring. Place armoring in accordance with the above general specifications. 4. If a culvert discharges at the top of cuts/fills or on slopes steeper than 10 percent one of the following two options is suggested: a. Transition culvert to a slope drain according to the Slope Drain (SD) Control Measure. The slope drain shall convey stormwater to the bottom of the slope where an armored apron, as designed above, shall prevent erosion at the slope drain outlet. Page 16 b. Line slope below culvert outlet with an armored channel to convey stormwater to the bottom of the slope with an armored apron, as designed above, shall prevent erosion at the bottom of the slope. The armored channel shall dip into the slope so that all water is contained within the channel, flows to an armored outlet apron at the base of the slope, and does not spill over the sides onto unprotected soil. Maintenance Specifications: • Buildup of debris; or • Sedimentation occurring in the spaces between material; or • Occurrence of scouring/undercutting Corrective Action Specifications: • Dislodged rock that leaves exposed soils; or • Sedimentation occurring over more than ½ of the armoring material; or • Need for continuation or additional armoring above or below pre-installed armoring; or • Improper installation Removal/Abandonment Armoring is generally removed during Final Reclamation. Figure R-1 Typical Armoring Slope Protection Detail Page 17 Figure R-2 Typical Inlet Protection References Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES). Construction Site Storm Water Runoff Control. Washington, D.C., February 2003. <http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/menuofbmps/con_site.cfm> New York State Department of Environmental Conservation, New York Guidelines for Urban Erosion and Sediment Control. New York. Fourth Edition, 1997. Page 18 Erosion Control Blanket (ECB) Description Erosion control blankets are porous fabrics and are manufactured by weaving or bonding fibers made from organic or synthetic materials. Erosion control blankets may be installed on steep slopes, over berms, or in channels to prevent erosion of underlying soils, until final vegetation is established. Applicability Erosion control blankets may be used in the following applications: • To control erosion on steep slopes and to promote the establishment of vegetation. • To stabilize channels against erosion from concentrated flows. • To protect berms and diversions prior to the establishment of vegetation. • To protect exposed soils immediately and temporarily, such as when active piles of soil are left overnight. • As a separator between armoring and soil to prevent soil from being eroded from beneath the armoring and to maintain the base of armoring. • May be used on slopes as steep as 1:1. • Sediment basin outlets. • Road cuts and stream banks. Page 19 Limitations • Blankets used on slopes should be 100% biodegradable, non-toxic to vegetation or germination of seed, and non-toxic or injurious to humans. • Should not be used on slopes where vegetation is already established. • Some blankets might promote increased runoff and might blow away if not firmly anchored. • If the fabric is not properly selected, designed, or installed, the effectiveness may be reduced drastically. Design criteria There are many types of erosion control blankets available. Therefore, the selected fabric should match its purpose. Effective netting and matting require firm, continuous contact between the fabric and the soil. If there is no contact, the material will not hold the soil, and erosion may occur underneath the fabric. Blanket should be purchased at an appropriate width to cover the whole width of the channel, if possible. Selection of blanket type is driven by site conditions. Construction specifications General Application: 1. Smooth soil prior to installation and apply seed prior to fabric installation for stabilization of construction sites. 2. Always prepare the soil before installation of blankets and apply seed and fertilizer to match your soil conditions. 3. Table ECB-1 below lists frequently used fabric types. However, other products may also be used. Site specifics shall dictate blanket selection and use. 4. Dig a 6” x 6” trench 3 feet back from the top of your slope and anchor the blanket inside using staples. Backfill the trench and compact the soil before rolling out the blanket. 5. Roll out the blanket vertically down the slope. 6. Staple blankets according to site conditions and the included staple pattern guide. 7. Use a minimum of 2” when overlapping blankets running parallel each other. Secure the seam using staples. 8. Shingle blankets using a 4” minimum overlap when splicing blankets on a downhill slope. The up-hill blanket should always overlap the downhill blanket. 9. Roll the blanket two feet past the bottom of the slope and secure using staples every 12” on center. Channel Application: 1. Roll the first blanket in the bottom of the channel in the direction of water flow. 2. Install additional blankets parallel the first blanket and away from the center of the channel. Use a minimum of 6” shingle overlap and 3. secure using 2 staggered rows of staples on 4’ centers. 4. Blankets on the top of the slope must be secured with staples in a 6” x 6” trench. 5. For additional support in the channel install a check slot across the channel every 25 feet and at the terminal end of the channel. 6. Never place a seem in the bottom or center of the channel Page 20 Maintenance Specifications: • Loose or Missing anchors/staples; or • Loosened matting or tenting, lacking contact between fabric and soil; or Corrective Action Specifications: • Tears or breaches in the fabric; or • Gully formation resulting in sedimentation at toe of slope; or • Need for continuation or additional matting above or below pre-installed matting Table ECB-1 Suggested Blanket Types Description Longevity Applications Double Net Blanket Biodegradable Net 70% Straw/30% Coconut 24 months up to 1.5:1 Slopes Medium Flow Channels (Max. Flow = 8 ft/sec) Double Net Blanket Biodegradable Net 100% Coconut 36 months up to 1:1 Slopes High Flow Channels (Max. Flow = 10 ft/sec) Note: Manufacturer specifications may vary with site conditions. Page 21 Figure ECB-1 Erosion Control Blanket Installation Page 22 References Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES). Construction Site Storm Water Runoff Control. Washington, D.C., February 2003. <http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/menuofbmps/con_site.cfm> Horizon Environmental Services, Inc, Guidance Document Reasonable and Prudent Practices for Stabilization (RAPPS) of Oil and Gas Construction Sites. April 2004. Keller, Gordon, and James Sherar, Low-Volume Roads Engineering, Best Management Practices Field Guide. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), Forest Service, US Agency of International Development (USAID), 2005. <http://ntl.bts.gov/lib/24000/24600/24650/Index_BMP_Field_Guide.htm> Page 23 Landforming (LF) Description The concept of landforming is construction of landforms based on natural patterns. Landforming mimics stable natural slopes. Landformed slopes offer a diversity of concave and convex, shaded and sunny, exposed and sheltered habitats. The resulting slopes are carefully engineered but look natural. Landforming entails modifying surface topography and drainage so that slopes are stable against erosion and mass wasting. Landforming has been shown to decrease erosion and respects geomorphologic processes of natural slopes. Applicability Landforming applies to all graded areas of a site, including the design and construction of diversions, swales, and berms. Limitations • Adequate space may not be available for proper landforming, especially in steeply sloping areas. • Landforming may increase the amount of disturbed area. Design criteria As discussed within the Land Grading (LG) Control Measure, a grading plan should be prepared that establishes the extent to which grading will occur, how drainage patterns will be directed, and how runoff velocities will affect receiving waters. The grading plan also includes information regarding when earthwork will start and stop, establishes the degree and length of finished slopes, and dictates where and how excess material will be disposed of (or where borrow materials will be obtained if needed). Practices will be developed for erosion control, slope stabilization, and safe disposal of runoff water and drainage, such as ditches and culverts, grade stabilization structures, retaining walls, and surface drains. Berms, roadside ditches, and other stormwater practices that require excavation and filling also should be incorporated into the grading plan. Approval from the Caerus Civil Construction personnel is required for final Landforming design. Construction specifications • Grading should occur in accordance with the Land Grading (LG) Control Measure or in accordance with other applicable Control Measures (i.e. Berm (B) Control Measure, Diversion (D) Control Measure, etc.). Page 24 • Instead of using angular shapes and planer faces with unvarying slope gradients, use compound shapes and variable slope gradients characteristic of natural landforms, as shown in Figure LF-1 and Figure LF-2. • Where room permits and where compatible with regional topography, create slopes with a concave form with steeper gradients near the top and with gradually decreasing, flatter inclinations near the bottom. • Preserve and/or restore natural drainage features where possible. • If possible, drainage should follow natural drop lines on a slope in a manner that minimizes gradients. • Where runoff discharge is greater than acceptable and the soils more erosive, swale sections can be reinforced with geofabrics such as erosion control blankets. • Construct berms and swales in a curvilinear fashion across the slope face. • Sensitive site resources should be protected when landforming is used and erosion and sediment control practices should be used until disturbed areas are stabilized. • Select and plant vegetation in such a way that it is compatible with hillside hydrogeology. Grasses and groundcovers should be planted in drier, convex-shaped slopes or interfluves, while trees and shrubs should be planted in wetter, concave-shaped valleys, swales, and depressions. Maintenance Specifications: • Forming of rills; or • Cracking around shoulder of slopes Corrective Action Specifications: • Mass sloughing of material; or • Forming of gullies; or • Pooling of large volumes of water that can lead to a super saturated state; or • Lacking proper blending with surrounding undisturbed topography; or • Density of rock on Final Reclaims exceeds surrounding undisturbed areas; or • Lack of establishing hydrologic function Figure LF-1 Landforming Concept Page 25 Figure LF-2 Slope Definitions References Schor, Horst J., and Donald H. Gray, Landforming: An Environmental Approach to Hillside Development, Mine Reclamation and Watershed Restoration. John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2007. Page 26 Land Grading (LG) Description Land grading involves reshaping the ground surface to planned grades as determined by an engineering survey, evaluation, and layout. Land grading provides more suitable topography for roads, well pads, and facilities, and helps to control surface runoff, soil erosion, and sedimentation during and after construction in these areas. This Control Measure shall include the following: • Proper cut and fill techniques to ensure roads, well pads, and facilities remain stable over time. • Road crowning or sloping to properly route runoff off the roadway. • Well pad and facility sloping to properly route runoff off the work areas. Applicability • Land grading is applicable to sites with uneven or steep topography or easily erodible soils, because it stabilizes slopes and decreases runoff velocity. • This Control Measure is applicable to the construction and maintenance of any road, well pad, or facility, but particularly those located on steep topography or easily erodible soils. • This Control Measure is applicable to the construction and maintenance of stockpiles, borrow areas, and spoil. Limitations • Improper cut and fill slopes that disrupt natural stormwater patterns might lead to poor drainage, high runoff velocities, and increased peak flows during storm events. • Clearing and grading of the entire site should include vegetated buffers or other controls to control off-site transport of sediments and other pollutants. Grading will be designed with erosion and sediment control and stormwater management goals in mind. Design criteria Grading plan A grading plan should establish the extent to which the construction area will be graded, how drainage patterns will be directed, and how runoff velocities will affect receiving waters. The grading plan should also include; when earthwork will start and stop, establish the degree and length of finished slopes, and dictate Page 27 where and how excess material will be disposed of (or where borrow materials will be obtained if needed). Practices will be developed for erosion control, slope stabilization, and safe disposal of runoff water and drainage, such as ditches and culverts, grade stabilization structures, retaining walls, and surface drains. Berms, roadside ditches, and other stormwater practices that require excavation and filling also should be incorporated into the grading plan. The grading plan should incorporate landforming techniques, as described in the Landforming (LF) Control Measure. Land grading should be based upon layouts that fit and utilize existing topography and desirable natural surroundings to avoid extreme grade modifications. Clearing and grading should only occur at those areas necessary for land grading activities and equipment traffic. Maintaining undisturbed temporary or permanent buffer zones in the grading operation provides a low-cost sediment control measure that will help reduce runoff and off-site sedimentation. Slope failures Landslides and failed cuts and fills can be a major source of sediment. Slope failures, or landslides, typically occur where a slope is over-steep, where fill material is not compacted, or where cuts in natural soils encounter groundwater or zones of weak material. When failures do occur, the slide area should be stabilized by removing the slide material, flattening the slope, adding drainage, or using structures, as discussed below. Designs are typically site specific and may require input from geotechnical engineers and engineering geologists. Failures that occur typically impact operations and can be costly to repair. Failures near streams and channel crossings have an added risk of impact to water quality. Road slope See Figure LG-1. All roads should be designed with one of the following three slope types: • Outsloped roads minimize the concentration of water and minimize road width by avoiding the need for an inside ditch but may require roadway surface and fill slope stabilization. Outsloped roads with clay rich, slippery road surface materials often require surface stabilization with gravel or limited use during rainy periods to assure traffic safety. On road grades over 10 to 12 percent and on steep hill slope areas, out-sloped roads are difficult to drain and can feel unsafe. • Insloped roads are the best method to control surface water. However, insloped roads also concentrate water and require a system of roadside ditches with wing ditches or periodic culverts to relieve water within the roadside ditches. See the Roadside Ditches (RSD) Control Measure, the Wing Ditch (WD) Control Measure, and/or the Culvert (C) Control Measure. • Crowned roads are appropriate for higher standard, two lane roads on gentle grades. They may or may not require roadside ditches, wing ditches, and/or culverts to relieve water within the roadside ditches. It is difficult to create and maintain a crown on a narrow road, so generally in-sloped or out- sloped road drainage is more effective. Construction specifications Cut and fill slopes 1. All applicable perimeter erosion and sediment control practices and measures (berms, diversions, vegetated buffer, or wattles) shall be constructed prior to any road grading activities and maintained in accordance with their applicable Control Measures and the Stormwater Management Plan (SWMP). Perimeter controls should remain in place until all graded or disturbed areas, including slopes, are adequately stabilized. Page 28 2. All areas to be disturbed (both cut and fill) shall be cleared, grubbed, and stripped of topsoil to remove trees, vegetation, roots, or other objectionable material. 3. Fill material shall be free of brush, logs, stumps, roots, or other objectionable materials that would interfere with, or prevent, construction of satisfactory fills. This material can be set aside and later used at the toe of fill slopes as filter berms 4. Table LG-1 presents a range of commonly used cut and fill slope ratios appropriate for the soil and rock types described. Figures LG-2 and LG-3 present typical cut slope and fill slope design options for varying slope and site conditions. Vertical cut slopes should not be used unless the cut is in rock or very well cemented soil. Ideally, both cut and fill slopes should be constructed with a 2:1 or flatter slope to promote growth of vegetation, but cut slopes in dense, sterile soils or rocky material are often difficult to vegetate. 5. All fills shall be compacted as required to reduce erosion, slippage, settlement, subsidence, or other related problems. 6. Topsoil required for the establishment of vegetation shall be stockpiled in the amount necessary to complete finished grading of all exposed areas. See the Topsoil Conservation and Segregation (TopS) Control Measure. 7. Where possible, pocking is the preferred method for short term stabilization. Terraces or contour trenches (see Terracing (T) Control Measure) shall be provided whenever the vertical interval (height) of any 2:1 cut or fill slope exceeds 20 feet; for 3:1 slope it shall be increased to 30 feet and for 4:1 to 40 feet. 8. All graded cut and fill areas shall be stabilized, either structurally or vegetatively, following finished grading. Some common slope stabilization options include hydroseeding, hydromulching, erosion control blankets, armoring, and retaining walls. Road slope 1. See Figure LG-1. Compact soil or road base material to direct runoff. 2. If crowning a road, runoff is directed to both sides of the road requiring two roadside ditches, unless runoff will drain directly to well-stabilized areas. 3. If using an inslope design, runoff is directed toward the hillside and requires a roadside ditch with periodic wing ditches or periodic culverts to relieve water within the roadside ditches. 4. If using an outslope design, ensure a moderate road slope with dense vegetative cover. 5. When a pipeline crosses a road, the road should be re-compacted and re-sloped according to the original design and applicable road specifications. Maintenance Specifications: • Forming of rills; or • Cracking around shoulder of slopes; or • Loss of crown, out-slopes, and in-slopes Corrective Action Specifications: • Mass sloughing of material; or • Forming of gullies; or • Pooling of large volumes of water that can lead to a super saturated state Page 29 Table LG-1 Stable Slope Ratios for Various Conditions Soil/Rock Condition Slope Ratio Most rock ¼:1 to ½:1 Very well cemented soils ¼:1 to ½:1 Most in-place soils ¾:1 to 1:1 Very fractured rock 1:1 to 1 ½: 1 Loose coarse granular soils 1 ½: 1 Heavy clay soils 2:1 to 3:1 Soft clay rich zones or wet seepage areas 2:1 to 3:1 Fills of most soils 1 ½:1 to 2:1 Fills of hard, angular rock 1 1/3 :1 Low cuts and fills (<10 ft high) 2:1 or flatter (for revegetation) Figure LG-1 Typical Road Surface Drainage Options Page 30 Figure LG-2 Typical Cut Slope Design Options Page 31 Figure LG-3 Typical Fill Slope Design Options Page 32 Page 33 References Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES). Construction Site Storm Water Runoff Control. Washington, D.C., February 2003. <http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/menuofbmps/con_site.cfm> Horizon Environmental Services, Inc, Guidance Document Reasonable and Prudent Practices for Stabilization (RAPPS) of Oil and Gas Construction Sites. April 2004. Keller, Gordon, and James Sherar, Low-Volume Roads Engineering, Best Management Practices Field Guide. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), Forest Service, US Agency of International Development (USAID), 2005. <http://ntl.bts.gov/lib/24000/24600/24650/Index_BMP_Field_Guide.htm> New York State Department of Environmental Conservation, New York Guidelines for Urban Erosion and Sediment Control. New York. Fourth Edition, 1997. Schor, Horst J., and Donald H. Gray, Landforming: An Environmental Approach to Hillside Development, Mine Reclamation and Watershed Restoration. John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2007. United States Department of the Interior and United States Department of Agriculture. Surface Operating Standards and Guidelines for Oil and Gas Exploration and Development “Gold Book.” BLM/WO/ST- 06/021+3071. Bureau of Land Management (BLM). Denver, Colorado. Fourth Edition, 2006. Page 34 Mulching (M) Description Mulching is a temporary erosion control practice in which materials such as grass-hay, wood fibers, or straw are placed on exposed or recently planted soil surfaces. Mulching stabilizes soils by minimizing rainfall impact and reducing stormwater runoff velocity. When used in combination with seeding or planting, mulching can aid plant growth by holding seeds, fertilizers, and topsoil in place, preventing birds from eating seeds, retaining moisture, and insulating plant roots against extreme temperatures. Hydro-mulch is a hydraulically-driven mechanical agitation to make sure that the materials are thoroughly blended, and a centrifugal pump achieves even application. Hydro-mulch is a fast, economical and efficient method from applying seed, fertilizer and mulch together or in some combination. Hydro-mulch wicks up available water in order to keep the seed moist for longer periods of time, which results in faster seed germination and establishment. Applicability Mulching in almost all situations is required after re-seeding. Mulching is also often used in areas where temporary seeding cannot be used because of environmental constraints. Hydraulic mulches can be used on slopes as steep as 1:1. Mechanically applied mulches can be used on seeded and planted areas where slopes are steeper than 3:1 or less and where sensitive seedlings require insulation from extreme temperatures or moisture retention. Limitations • Mulching might delay seed germination because the cover changes soil surface temperatures. • The mulches themselves are subject to erosion and may be washed away in a large storm. • Straw mulch should be free of any weeds and any unwanted seed is desirable. Need to cut seed heads off the straw mulch. • Maintenance is necessary to ensure that mulches provide effective erosion control. • Hydraulic application of mulch will be done when no rainfall is expected, preferably within a 24-hour time period. Construction specifications 1. Site preparation: a. Prior to mulching, install the necessary temporary or permanent erosion control practices and drainage systems within or adjacent to the area to be mulched. Page 35 b. Slope, grade, and smooth the site to fit needs of selected mulch products. c. Remove all undesirable stones and other debris to meet the needs of the anticipated land use and maintenance required. 2. Mulching & anchoring for relatively flat slopes (3:1 or less): a. Select the appropriate mulch and application rate that will best meet the need and availability of material. When possible, organic mulches should be used for erosion control and plant material establishment. Mulches and application rates are listed in the General Reclamation Surface Management Guideline. Typically, straw mulching at 2 tons per acre with tackifier is used on flatter slopes. See Table M-1 for suggested materials and application rates. All materials should be free of weed and seed. b. Apply mulch immediately after soil amendments and planting is accomplished or simultaneously if hydroseeding is used. See Table M-1 for installation guidelines. c. Mulch before seeding if construction or restoration activity is interrupted for extended periods, such as when seeding cannot be completed due to seeding period restrictions. If mulching before seeding, increase mulch rate of application on all slopes within 100 feet of water bodies and wetlands. d. Use a mulch crimper to apply and anchor mulch. Crimper should have approximately 6-inch cleats with perpendicular, dull, disc blades. If a crimper is unavailable the Contractor shall apply mulch and anchor it to the soil using one of the methods described in Table M-2. The mulch should be anchored the same day as mulch application. Materials that are heavy enough to stay in place (for example, bark or wood chips on flat slopes) do not need anchoring. Mulches may or may not require a binder, netting, or tacking. Mulch binders should be applied at rates recommended by the manufacturer. Effective use of netting and matting material requires firm, continuous contact between the materials and the soil. 3. Hydro-mulching for steeper slopes (3:1 or steeper): a. For steep slopes an Erosion Control Mulch (ECM) consisting of a hydraulic matrix such as a Engineered Fiber Matrix (EFM) or Fiber Reinforced Matrix (FRM) may be used. An EFM refers to a continuous layer of elongated wood fiber strands that are held together by a water-resistant bonding agent to form a water-absorbing crust. FGM refers to a three-dimensional composite of wood fibers, crimped man-made fibers, and performance enhancing additives. b. The ECM shall be a hydraulically-applied, flexible erosion control blanket composed of long strand, thermally refined wood fibers, crimped, interlocking fibers, and performance enhancing additives. The ECM shall require no curing time period and upon application shall form an intimate bond with the soil surface to create a continuous, porous, absorbent and erosion resistant blanket that allows for rapid germination and accelerated plant growth. c. 3:1 or up to 2.5:1 use the ECM d. 2.5:1 or greater use the FRM e. Step One: Apply seed, fertilizer and other soil amendments with tackifier and a small amount of ECM for visual metering (see Revegetation (RV) for application rates). f. Step Two: Mix 50 lbs. of ECM per 115 to 125 gallons of water. g. Install materials at the typical application rates of 3,000 lbs. per acre or a minimum of 100% coverage. Maintenance Specifications: • Formation of rill erosion; or • Loosening of newly applied mulch (wind erosion) Page 36 Corrective Action Specifications: • Bare spots larger than 5 ft by 5 feet, caused by wind erosion or other factors: or • Application rate was less than needed; or • Impact to mulched area that compromise its ability to retain moisture; or • Formation of gully erosion Removal/Abandonment Mulch and anchoring material should be 100% biodegradable and should not require removal. However, any artificial anchor netting or other artificial mulch material should be removed when protection is no longer needed and disposed of in a landfill. Table M-1 Typical Mulching Materials and Application Rates Material Rate per Acre Requirements Application Organic Mulches Straw 1 - 2 tons Dry, un-chopped, un- weathered; certified weed free. Spread by hand or machine; will be tacked or tied down. Typically used in flatter/open areas. Wood fiber or wood cellulose ½ - 1 ton Use with hydro-seeder; may be used to tack straw. Do not use in hot, dry weather. Table M-2 Mulch Anchoring Guide Anchoring Method or Material Kind of Mulch to be Anchored How to Apply Wood cellulose fiber with chemical application Hay or straw Apply hydro-mulch immediately. After mulching, use 500 lbs. Wood fiber per acre. Some products contain an adhesive material, possibly advantageous. Apply Tackifier 150 lbs./ac. In 480 gal. of water (#156/ac.). Avoid application during rain. A 24-hour curing period and a soil temperature higher than 45 deg. Fahrenheit are required. Mulch anchoring tool/Crimper Hay or straw Apply mulch and pull a mulch anchoring tool (blunt, straight discs) over mulch as near to the contour as possible. Mulch material should be “tucked” into soil surface about 3”. Note: Manufacturer specifications may vary with site conditions. References California Stormwater Quality Association, Stormwater Best Management Practice (BMP) Handbook – Construction. January 2003. <http://www.cabmphandbooks.com/Construction.asp> Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES). Construction Site Storm Water Runoff Control. Washington, D.C., February 2003. Page 37 <http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/menuofbmps/con_site.cfm> Horizon Environmental Services, Inc, Guidance Document Reasonable and Prudent Practices for Stabilization (RAPPS) of Oil and Gas Construction Sites. April 2004. New York State Department of Environmental Conservation, New York Guidelines for Urban Erosion and Sediment Control. New York. Fourth Edition, 1997. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS), Field Office Technical Guide. 2002. <www.nrcs.usda.gov/technical/efotg> Page 38 Retaining Wall (RW) Rock Retaining Wall Gabion Retaining Wall Description Retaining walls are structures that are used to stabilize and hold soil in place, gain space on roadways or well pads, or to keep soil contained within a site boundary. This Control Measure will cover retaining walls constructed with rock, boulders, or gabions. Gabions are rectangular, rock-filled wire baskets that are pervious, semi-flexible building blocks which can be used to armor the bed and/or banks of channels or to divert flow away from eroding channel sections. Several different retaining wall types are: 1. Rigid gravity and semi-gravity walls. These walls may be constructed of concrete or stone masonry. The rigid gravity and semi-gravity walls develop their capacity from their dead weights and structural resistance and are generally used for permanent applications. 2. Non-gravity cantilevered walls. These walls develop lateral resistance through the embedment of vertical wall elements and support retained soil with wall facing elements. Vertical wall elements are normally extended deep in the ground to provide lateral and vertical support. The vertical wall elements can be piles, drilled shafts, steel sheet piles, etc. Wall faces can be reinforced concrete, metal, or timber. Cantilevered walls are generally limited to a maximum height of about 15 feet. 3. Anchored walls. These walls typically consist of the same elements as the non-gravity cantilevered walls but derive additional lateral resistance from one or more tiers of anchors. The anchored walls are typically used in the cut situation, in which the construction proceeds from the top to the base of the wall. Applicability Retaining walls should be used when sites have very steep slopes or loose, highly erodible soils that cause other methods, such as vegetative stabilization or regrading, to be ineffective. The preconstruction drainage pattern should be maintained to the extent possible. Retaining walls may be used for the following applications: • Near the toe of a cut or fill slope to mechanically stabilize steep slopes and so that a flatter slope can be constructed to prevent or minimize slope erosion or failure. Particularly useful along access road cut slopes. • Along a stream bank or drainage channel, to keep a toe of a slope from encroaching into a stream and thus prevent potential undercutting of the toe by flowing water. • As headwalls at culvert inlets and outlets to prevent scour and undercutting. Page 39 Limitations • Most retaining walls are a structural element that will be professionally designed. • To be effective, retaining walls will be designed to handle expected loads. Non-engineered walls should not be used where traffic is expected near the top of the wall. • Most types of retaining walls will be placed on a good foundation, such as bedrock or firm, in- place soil. • Most walls have height restrictions and backfill may be required to meet specific material property requirements. • Materials costs and professional design requirements may make use of gabions impractical. • When used in channels with high sediment loads, the galvanizing wire on gabion cages quickly wears off, causing rusting and the premature failure of the cages. • Expensive and very labor intensive. Design criteria Most retaining walls require a site-specific design. Wall heights, requirements for drainage, and suitable materials will be determined through on-site investigation. All retaining wall designs will be reviewed by a Caerus construction coordinator. An engineered retaining structure is a designed structure that is supported by plans and specifications signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer. Non-engineered retaining structures may be designed by an engineer; however, if the design is not supported by the seal and signature, the retaining structure is not considered engineered. Gabions should be designed and installed in accordance with manufacturer’s standards and specifications and will be able to handle expected storm and flood conditions. The design water velocity for channels utilizing gabions should not exceed those listed as follows: Gabion Thickness (feet) Maximum Velocity (feet per second) 0.5 6 0.75 11 1.0 14 Construction specifications Rock retaining wall guidelines See Figure RW -1. 1. Excavate a footing trench at the location of the proposed wall. 2. Place the largest rocks in the footing trench with their longitudinal axis normal to the wall face. Arrange subsequent rock layers so that each rock above the foundation course has a firm seating on the underlying rocks. 3. The batter of the wall face shall be between ½:1 and vertical, depending upon the height of the wall, the height of the slope, the width of the right-of-way, or other limitations on space. 4. Place fill material behind the rock wall. Slope above the wall should be maintained at 2H:1V or flatter. Backfill the footing trench with excavated material. If a roadway is located at the toe of the wall, pave the roadway up to the base of the rock wall and provide roadway curb for water transport. If a roadway is not located at the toe of the retaining wall, slope the backfilled material away from the wall. Page 40 5. Revegetate the stabilized slope with a method applicable to the particular site. Gabion retaining wall guidelines See Figure RW -2. Gabions shall be fabricated in such a manner that the sides, ends, and lid can be assembled at the construction site into a rectangular basket of the specified sizes. Gabions shall be of single unit construction and shall be installed according manufacturer’s recommendations. General specifications are listed below. 1. Clear and grade the area of trees, brush, vegetation, and unsuitable soils. Compact subgrade firmly to prevent slumping or undercutting. 2. Install a filter fabric or granular filter according to the Armoring (AR) Control Measure to maintain separation of rock material with the underlying soil, if required. 3. Place empty gabion baskets. Each row, tier, or layer of baskets should be reasonably straight and should conform to the specified line and grade (see Figure RW-2 for details). The empty gabion baskets should be fastened to the adjacent baskets along the top and vertical edges. If using more than one layer of gabions, each layer should be fastened to the underlying layer along the front, back and ends. Fastening should be performed in the same manner as provided for assembling the gabion units. 4. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, the vertical joints between basket units of adjacent tiers or layers, along the length of the structure, should be staggered by at least one cell (if more than one layer is used). 5. Before filling each gabion with rock, all kinks and folds in the wire mesh should be removed and all baskets should be properly aligned. A standard fence stretcher, chain fall, or steel rod may be used to stretch the wire baskets and hold alignment. 6. The gabion cells should be carefully filled with appropriately sized rock placed by hand/machine in such a manner that the alignment of the structure will be maintained and so as to avoid bulges and to minimize voids. Rock should be sound, durable, and well graded. All exposed rock surface should have a reasonably smooth and neat appearance. No sharp rock edges should project through the wire mesh. 7. The gabion cells in any row or layer should be filled in stages so that local deformations may be avoided. 8. At no time should any cell be filled to a depth exceeding 12 inches more than any adjacent cell. 9. The layer of rock should completely fill the gabion basket so that the lid will bear on the rock when it is secured. The lid should be joined to the sides, ends, and diaphragms in the same manner as specified for joining the vertical edges. The gabion basket lid should be secured so that no more than 1-inch gap remains at any connection. 10. Gabion rows or layers not completed at the end of each shift should have the last gabion filled with rock tied internally as an end gabion. 11. The area behind the gabion structure should be backfilled with granular material. Geotextile, if required, should be spread uniformly over the back of the gabion structure. Joining edges of the geotextile should be overlapped a minimum of 12 inches and should be anchored in position with approved anchoring devices. The Contractor should place the backfill material in a manner that will not tear, puncture, or shift the geotextile. All other retaining walls should be constructed as designed by a Professional Engineer. Page 41 Maintenance Specifications: • Buildup of plant debris; or • Sedimentation occurring in the spaces between material; or • Occurrence of scouring; or • Check wire of gabion cages for rusting and wear. Corrective Action Specifications: • Dislodged material that resulting in failure of the structure; or • Improper installation; or • Structural failure; or • Damage to building material; or • Instability/deterioration Figure RW-1 Construction of Rock Retaining Structures Page 42 Figure RW-2 Gabion Design References City of Knoxville, Stormwater Engineering, Knoxville BMP Manual - Best Management Practices. July 2003. <http://www.ci.knoxville.tn.us/engineering> Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES). Construction Site Storm Water Runoff Control. Washington, D.C., February 2003. <http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/menuofbmps/con_site.cfm> Horizon Environmental Services, Inc, Guidance Document Reasonable and Prudent Practices for Stabilization (RAPPS) of Oil and Gas Construction Sites. April 2004. Keller, Gordon, and James Sherar, Low-Volume Roads Engineering, Best Management Practices Field Guide. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), Forest Service, US Agency of International Development (USAID), 2005. <http://ntl.bts.gov/lib/24000/24600/24650/Index_BMP_Field_Guide.htm> New York State Department of Environmental Conservation, New York Guidelines for Urban Erosion and Sediment Control. New York. Fourth Edition, 1997. Page 43 Revegetation (RV) Description Revegetation involves planting seed to establish a vegetative cover on disturbed areas. Revegetation reduces erosion and sedimentation by stabilizing disturbed areas in a manner that is economical, adaptable to site conditions, and allows selection of the most appropriate plant materials. Revegetation also: • Absorbs the impact of raindrops • Reduces the velocity of runoff • Reduces runoff volumes by increasing water percolation into the soil • Binds soil with roots • Protects soil from wind • Improves wildlife habitat • Enhances natural beauty • Increase soil fertility Applicability Revegetation is most effective on slopes steeper than 2:1 and may be used in areas where exposed soil surfaces are not to be regraded for periods longer than 30 days. Such areas include denuded areas, soil stockpiles, berms, temporary road banks, etc. Seed may also be effectively hydraulically applied with mulch to steeper areas (see the Mulching (M) Control Measure). Another option for steeper areas is to use revegetation in combination with erosion control blanketing (see the Erosion Control Blanket (ECB) Control Measure). Limitations The effectiveness of revegetation can be limited due to the following: • High erosion potential during establishment. • The need for stable soil temperature and soil moisture content during germination and early growth. • The need to reseed areas that fail to establish. Page 44 Proper seedbed preparation and the use of quality seed are important in this practice. Failure to carefully follow sound agronomic recommendations will often result in an inadequate stand of vegetation that provides little or no erosion control. Seeding does not immediately stabilize soils. Prior to seeding, install necessary erosion and sediment control practices such as diversions, straw bales, and basins until vegetation is established. Design criteria Successful plant establishment can be maximized with proper planning; consideration of soil characteristics; selection of plant materials that are suitable for the site; adequate seedbed preparation, and fertilization; timely planting; and regular maintenance. Construction specifications All revegetation activities (including soil amendments, seeding, planting, mulching, etc.) should be in accordance with the General Reclamation Surface Management Guideline. This Guideline provides information on seed quality and storage; drill seeding, hand seeding, and hydroseeding; seeding depths, dates, mixtures, and establishment; and soil amendments. If used, see the Erosion Control Blanket (ECB) Control Measure. Fencing can be installed around newly seeded areas in order to keep traffic away from reclaimed areas until vegetative growth has been fully established. Fencing may also be used where grazing by domestic livestock or wildlife can damage newly revegetated areas. Fencing details are provided in the General Reclamation Surface Management Guideline and represent BLM design details found in the BLM Oil and Gas Exploration and Development Gold Book. Seeding • If applicable, use surface roughening prior to seeding (see Surface Roughening (SR) Control Measure). • Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or storage. • Seed shall be uniformly sown by drill, by hydro-seeding (without mulch admixture), or by broadcasting. Seed shall be applied at the recommended rates for the application. Broadcast seeding shall be raked, or chain drug into the soil to a depth of approximately one-quarter inch (1/4”) to one-half inch (1/2”). • Protect seeded areas against erosion by uniformly spreading mulch after completion of seeding operations in accordance with the Mulching (M) Control Measure. Maintenance Specifications: • <3 ft of inter-canopy gaps; or • First year growth of: • Non-native invasive plant species • Plant species of management of concern • Lack of vegetation composition; or • No germination, unless seed is still dormant due to drought conditions Corrective Action Specifications: • No germination and establishment; or • <3 living healthy seeding per square foot, after the first growing season; or • Establishment of: Page 45 • Non-native invasive plant species • Plant species of management of concern • Proportion of soil surface in large inter-canopy gaps; or • Loss of soil stability, susceptibility to wind and water erosion References Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES). Construction Site Storm Water Runoff Control. W ashington, D.C., February 2003. <http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/menuofbmps/con_site.cfm> High Mesa Water Park Seeding Specifications. April 2006. Horizon Environmental Services, Inc, Guidance Document Reasonable and Prudent Practices for Stabilization (RAPPS) of Oil and Gas Construction Sites. April 2004. Keller, Gordon, and James Sherar, Low-Volume Roads Engineering, Best Management Practices Field Guide. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), Forest Service, US Agency of International Development (USAID), 2005. <http://ntl.bts.gov/lib/24000/24600/24650/Index_BMP_Field_Guide.htm> United States Army Corps of Engineers (USACE), Engineering and Design - Handbook for the Preparation of Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plans for Construction Activities. February 1997. Page 46 Soil Stabilizers (SS) Description Soil stabilizers (also known as soil binders) consist of stabilizing emulsions that are applied directly to the surface of disturbed soil to temporarily reduce soil erosion. Soil binders are categorized as: • Gelling Agents – Guar Gum Powder • Copolymer Emulsion Dust Suppressant – Gorilla Snot • Polymeric emulsion blends – Soil Sement Applicability Soil binders are used in the summer months on bare soil areas where vegetation may not be desired (such as near compressor stations and helicopter pads) in order to reduce soil loss. Soil binders are also suitable for use on stockpiles and in some cases as a less expensive alternative to mulch as a dust suppressant and soil stabilizer. Limitations • Soil binders are a temporary measure. • Product may need be reapplied 6-12 months after initial application. • Soil binders may not be compatible with certain soils. • Runoff can penetrate a treated area at the top of a slope, undercut the treated soil, and cause spot failures by discharging at a point further down the slope. • Performance depends on temperature, humidity, and traffic across treated areas. Construction specifications Soil binders shall be applied per manufacturer specifications. 1. Soil binder will be non-toxic to plant and animal life. Some examples include Guar, Starch, Pitch & Rosin Emulsion, Liquid Polymers of Methacrylates & Acrylates, and Gypsum. However, many others are available and may be used. Select a soil binder that is appropriate for the region, use and soil type. 2. Soil binder is typically mixed in a water truck or hydro-seeder and applied in a liquid state. Use emulsion formulas for applications with water trucks. 3. Apply soil binder in the summer months over a roughened soil surface on slopes not greater than 1:1. Do not apply immediately before or during a rain event or where standing water is present. Maintenance Specifications: • Formation of rill erosion; or Corrective Action Specifications: • Formation of gully erosion References Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT), Erosion Control and Stormwater Quality Guide. 2002. http://www.dot.state.co.us/environmental/envWaterQual/wqms4.asp Page 47 California Stormwater Quality Association, Stormwater Best Management Practice (BMP) Handbook – Construction. January 2003. <http://www.cabmphandbooks.com/Construction.asp> Page 48 Stabilized Unpaved Surface/Gravel Surfacing (GS) Description Stabilized unpaved surfaces are used on roads, well pads, or other facilities to reduce erosion, limit dust from passing vehicles, and to reduce the amount of mud that may develop during wet weather. Stabilized unpaved surfaces can be made of any of the following materials: • Gravel • Stone • Compacted soil • Recycled Asphalt Product (RAP) A stabilized unpaved surface includes the surface of dirt roads and those areas used during operation of wells or other facilities that are prepared in such a way as to prevent ongoing erosion issues (i.e. with gravel surfacing, proper land grading, and compaction). Areas developed as stabilized unpaved surfaces as needed for operation of the facility will qualify, according to the SWMP, as “finally stabilized.” Applicability Stabilized Unpaved Surface may be used for any road, well pad, or other facility, particularly “soft” sections, steep grades, highly erosive soils, or locations where all-weather access is needed. Gravel or compacted soil may be used as “fill” material in ruts or as a full structural section over the entire road or well pad. Limitations • Rutting and wash-boarding may develop if the surface gravel is too thin, has poor gradation, has little or no binding characteristic, or has a low percentage of fractured stone. • Flat-blading to maintain the roadway will be done properly to avoid changes in gravel thickness, road slope, and road grade. • Material sizing is dependent upon what is available at the gravel pits. Construction specifications 1. Maintain a road cross-slope with in-sloping, out-sloping, or a crown to rapidly move water off the road surface. Also maintain a slight slope on well pads or around other facilities. 2. Gradation of gravel shall be in accordance with applicable specifications (BLM, forest service, private landowner, etc…). Ideally, aggregate surfacing material is (1) hard, durable, and crushed or screened Page 49 to a minus 2-inch size; (2) well graded to achieve maximum density; and (3) contains clayey binder to prevent raveling. 3. Gravel may be placed with a minimum thickness of four inches; however, any amount of gravel is often useful. Geotextile or geogrid sub-grade reinforcement is sometimes used over soft soils to separate the gravel from the soil, keep it uncontaminated, and extend the useful life of the gravel. 4. The same gravel used to surface roadways may also be used to surface roadside ditches and create small check dams within those roadside ditches. 5. Gravel may be compacted during construction and maintenance to achieve a dense, smooth surface and thus reduce the amount of water that can soak into the ground. 6. “Spot” stabilization, local wet areas and soft areas with coarse rocky material as needed. 7. Stabilize the surface in sensitive areas near streams and at drainage crossings if necessary, to minimize surface erosion. 8. Control excessive dust. 9. Blend coarse aggregate and fine clay-rich soil (when available) to produce a desirable composite surface material that is coarse yet well-graded with fines for binder. Maintenance Specifications: • Loss of implemented slope and grade for desired dewatering; or • Loss of aggregate material; or • Loss of compaction; or • Buildup of debris; or • Occurrence of rutting; or • Minor tracking of material off-site Corrective Action Specifications: • Significant tracking of mud clods off-site; or • Significant rutting or total loss of compaction and surface integrity; or • Sediment discharge from unpaved surface that threatens to reach or has reached live water. • Dislodged rock that leaves exposed soils; or • Sedimentation occurring over more than ½ of the armoring material References Keller, Gordon, and James Sherar, Low-Volume Roads Engineering, Best Management Practices Field Guide. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), Forest Service, US Agency of International Development (USAID), 2005. <http://ntl.bts.gov/lib/24000/24600/24650/Index_BMP_Field_Guide.htm> Page 50 Subsoil Segregation (SubS) Description Subsoil segregation during construction of well pads, pipelines, or roads involves the removal and stockpiling of all excess subsoil cut material separate from the removal and stockpiling of surface (topsoil) material. Topsoil handling shall be in accordance with the Topsoil Conservation and Segregation Control Measure. Applicability Subsoil segregation applies to the construction of all well pads, roads, pipelines, and any other construction activity where subsoil is temporarily stockpiled. Limitations • Stockpiling increases the overall area of disturbance at a site. • Stockpiles often require revegetation or some other stabilization Control Measure. Construction specifications Subsoil material horizons will be stripped after all topsoil has been stripped and stockpiled to ensure proper segregation of topsoil and subsoil materials. Subsoil material will be placed in a subsoil stockpile berm above the topsoil stockpile berm which is placed at the toe of pad slopes. Maintenance Specifications: • Forming of rills; or • Cracking around shoulder of slopes Corrective Action Specifications: • Mass sloughing of material; or • Forming of gullies; or • Inadequate separation of stockpiles (Clear mixing of topsoil and subsoil or one pile with total disregard for separation.) Removal/Abandonment Stockpiles are often placed back in their original location when the site is recontoured during interim or final reclamation. Page 51 Figure SubS-1 Stockpiling for Pipeline Installation References United States Army Corps of Engineers (USACE), Engineering and Design - Handbook for the Preparation of Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plans for Construction Activities. February 1997. United States Department of the Interior and United States Department of Agriculture. Surface Operating Standards and Guidelines for Oil and Gas Exploration and Development “Gold Book.” BLM/WO/ST- 06/021+3071. Bureau of Land Management (BLM). Denver, Colorado. Fourth Edition, 2006. Page 52 Surface Roughening (SR) Corrugating/Furrowing Mini-Benching Pocking Description Surface roughening is a temporary erosion control practice often used in conjunction with landforming and or land grading. Surface roughening involves increasing the relief of a bare soil surface using construction equipment. Slopes that are not fine graded and that are left in a roughened condition can reduce erosion. Surface roughening reduces runoff velocity, increases infiltration, reduces erosion, traps sediment, and prepares the soil for seeding and planting by giving seed an opportunity to take hold and grow. The following types of Surface roughening are discussed in this Control Measure: • Corrugating/Furrowing • Mini-Benching • Pocking Applicability Surface roughening is most effective for areas of 1 acre or less, and works well for the following applications: • Any slope, but particularly fill slopes greater than 2:1 • Areas with highly erodible soils • Soils that are frequently disturbed • Prior to application of permanent or temporary seeding Page 53 • Adjacent to roadways as “irrigating” furrows to divert runoff away from roads Limitations • Surface roughening is not appropriate for rocky slopes. • Surface compaction might occur when roughening with tracked machinery. • Surface roughening is of limited effectiveness in anything more than a gentle or shallow depth rain. • If roughening is washed away in a heavy storm, the surface may have to be re-roughened and new seed laid. • Some slopes may be too steep to safety use tracked equipment. • Pocking size can be to exaggerate, preventing the establishment of vegetation. Construction specifications To slow erosion, roughening should be done as soon as possible after grading activities have ceased (temporarily or permanently) in an area. All cut and fill slopes should be roughened wherever possible. Do not blade or scrape the final fill slope face. Excessive compacting of the soil surface should be avoided during roughening, and areas should be seeded as quickly as possible after roughening is complete. Corrugating/Furrowing Corrugating/furrowing (Figure SR-1) uses machinery to create a series of ridges and depressions that run across the slope on the contour. Corrugating/furrowing is an ideal way to harvest/collect runoff water and use that water for a beneficial use (such as directing the water towards newly seeded areas). Groove using any appropriate implement that can be safely operated on the slope, such as disks, tillers, spring harrows, or the teeth of a front-end loader bucket. Do not make the grooves less than 3 inches deep or more than 15 inches apart. Corrugations/furrows may be used adjacent to roadways to divert runoff away from roads. Mini-benching Benches shall be constructed on an even contour line. Benches shall be constructed approximately 2 to 3 feet deep and according to Figure SR-2. Pocking Pocking is performed with a backhoe as shown in the photo at the beginning of this section and as depicted in Figure SR-3. Pocks should be constructed with the bucket of a backhoe and shall be as close together as possible. Pocking that is too large may become a safety concern. Maintenance considerations The frequency of inspections should be in accordance with the SWMP or PCSWMP. Roughening might need to be repeated after storm events. Inspections of roughened slopes will indicate where additional erosion and sediment control measures are needed. If rills appear, they should be filled, graded again, and reseeded as soon as possible. Proper dust control methods should be used. Page 54 Figure SR-1 Corrugating Figure SR-2 Mini-benching Page 55 Figure SR-3 Pocking References Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES). Construction Site Storm Water Runoff Control. Washington, D.C., February 2003. <http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/menuofbmps/con_site.cfm> Horizon Environmental Services, Inc, Guidance Document Reasonable and Prudent Practices for Stabilization (RAPPS) of Oil and Gas Construction Sites. April 2004. New York State Department of Environmental Conservation, New York Guidelines for Urban Erosion and Sediment Control. New York. Fourth Edition, 1997. Page 56 Terracing (T) Description Terraces (also called benches or contour trenches) are properly spaced along a cut or fill slope and made of either earthen embankments, ridge and channel systems, or are cut directly into a rock face of a cut slope. Terraces are often constructed with an adequate grade to promote drainage to a stabilized outlet. Terraces reduce damage from erosion by collecting and redistributing surface runoff to stable outlets at slower speeds and by decreasing the distance of overland runoff flow. They also surpass smooth slopes in holding moisture and help to minimize sediment loading of surface runoff. When terraces are constructed into steep bedrock faces, they help to stabilize the slope by catching loose rocks and other material which may fall from above. Applicability Terraces are most effective for areas less than 10 acres in size and, are suitable for the following applications: • Areas with an existing or expected water erosion problem and no vegetation. • Cut or fill slopes greater than 5 feet in height, which are not part of a trench or excavation. • Graded areas with smooth hard surfaces or any cleared area prior to seeding. • Where the length of slopes needs to be shortened by terracing. • On steep rock walls, particularly those greater than 60 feet in height. Terraces are typically greater than 3 feet wide, while mini-benches (see Surface Roughening (SR) Control Measure) are less than 3 feet wide. Limitations • Terraces are not appropriate for use on sandy or shallow soils. • If too much water permeates the soil in a terrace system, sloughing could occur, and cut and fill costs could increase substantially. Page 57 Construction specifications In the absence of a specific design, terraces may be constructed according to Figure T-1 for cut slopes and Figure T-2 for fill slopes. 1. Construct diversion ditches at the top of the slope (if necessary, for large upslope drainage areas) to prevent or reduce surface water from running down the slope face. 2. The upper terrace should begin immediately below the top of the fill slope. Continue constructing terraces down to the toe of the slope. Terraces shall be a minimum of 6 feet wide. However, a minimum width of 8 feet is ideal so that a crimper has access for mulching. 3. Space terraces according to the following: Slope Vertical distance between terraces 2:1 15-25 feet 3:1 25-35 feet 4:1 35-45 feet 4. Terraces will drain to a stabilized outlet, such as a stabilized waterway, vegetated area, or other suitable outlet. Slope drains may be needed to convey surface runoff from the terraces or benches to the toe of the slope without causing erosion. Analysis of the local site conditions should determine the needed outlets. 5. Remove the loose material that collects at the end of terraces or benches and blend the ends of each terrace or bench into the natural ground surface. 6. Stabilize or revegetate the slope with methods applicable to the particular site. For terraces constructed into high rock walls of cut slopes, the vertical spacing may be anywhere from 10 to 100 feet and the width anywhere from 6 to 100 feet, as determined by a civil engineer. Maintenance Specifications: • Forming of rills; or • Cracking around shoulder of slopes; or • Loss of in-slopes Corrective Action Specifications: • Mass sloughing of material; or • Forming of gullies; or • Pooling of large volumes of water that can lead to a super saturated state; or • Occurrence of sedimentation to some amount/level prior to ultimate failure or bypass of Control Measure. Page 58 Figure T-1 Terracing – Cut Slopes Figure T-2 Terracing – Fill Slopes Page 59 References City of Knoxville, Stormwater Engineering, Knoxville BMP Manual - Best Management Practices. July 2003. http://www.ci.knoxville.tn.us/engineering Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES). Construction Site Storm Water Runoff Control. Washington, D.C., February 2003. <http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/menuofbmps/con_site.cfm> United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS), Field Office Technical Guide. 2002. <www.nrcs.usda.gov/technical/efotg> Page 60 Topsoil Conservation and Segregation (TopS) Description Topsoil conservation and segregation during construction of well pads, pipelines, or roads involves the removal and stockpiling of all surface soil materials from the entire cut and fill area for later reuse during interim and final reclamation. Topsoil provides a planting and growth medium that is more desirable than deeper subsoils for use during reclamation and revegetation activities. If there is an excess of cut material, subsoil may also be stockpiled in accordance with the Subsoil Segregation Control Measure. Applicability Topsoil conservation and segregation applies to the construction of all well pads, roads, pipelines, and any other construction activity where soil is disturbed and later revegetated. Limitations • Stockpiling increases the overall area of disturbance at a site. • Stockpiles often require revegetation and also require other erosion and sediment controls during the establishment of vegetation such as diversions. • Topsoil conservation and segregation required planning and coordination. Construction specifications In accordance with the General Reclamation Surface Management Guideline. Maintenance Specifications: • Forming of rills; or • Cracking around shoulder of slopes Corrective Action Specifications: • Mass sloughing of material; or • Forming of gullies; or • Inadequate separation of stockpiles (Clear mixing of topsoil and subsoil or one pile with total disregard for separation.) Page 61 Removal/Abandonment Stockpiles may be removed when the site is ready for interim or final reclamation. Figure TopS-1 Topsoil Stockpile – Located Below Well Pad Figure TopS-2 Topsoil Stockpile – Located above Well Pad Page 62 Figure TopS-3 Topsoil Stockpile – Plan View Page 63 Figure TopS-4 Topsoil Stockpile for Pipeline Installation References United States Army Corps of Engineers (USACE), Engineering and Design - Handbook for the Preparation of Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plans for Construction Activities. February 1997. United States Department of the Interior and United States Department of Agriculture. Surface Operating Standards and Guidelines for Oil and Gas Exploration and Development “Gold Book.” BLM/WO/ST- 06/021+3071. Bureau of Land Management (BLM). Denver, Colorado. Fourth Edition, 2006. Page 64 Vegetated Buffer (VB) Description Vegetated buffers (also known as vegetated filter strips) are areas of either natural or established vegetation that are maintained to protect the water quality of neighboring areas. Buffers reduce the velocity of stormwater runoff, provide an area for the runoff to permeate the soil, contribute to groundwater recharge, and act as filters to catch sediment. The reduction in velocity also helps to prevent soil erosion. The use of existing natural vegetation is preferred over newly established vegetation for the following reasons: • Can process higher quantities of stormwater runoff than newly seeded areas. • Does not require time to establish. • Has a higher filtering capacity than newly planted vegetation due to aboveground and root structures have more density. • Reduces stormwater runoff by intercepting rainfall, promoting infiltration, and lowering the water table through transpiration. • Provides a fully developed habitat for wildlife. Applicability Vegetated buffers can be used in any area that is able to support vegetation, but they are most effective and beneficial on floodplains, near wetlands, along stream banks, and as stabilized outlets to runoff controls such as diversions, water bars, or culverts. Buffers are also effective in separating land use areas that are not compatible and in protecting wetlands or water bodies by displacing activities that might be potential sources of non-point source pollution. Limitations • Vegetated buffers should be within the permitted area on Caerus owned land. Page 65 • Vegetated buffers require plant growth before they can be effective, and land on which to plant the vegetation must be available. • Although vegetated buffers help to protect water quality, they usually do not effectively counteract concentrated stormwater flows to neighboring or downstream wetlands. Construction specifications 1. Vegetated buffers should be within the permitted area or Caerus owned land. 2. Buffer widths should be determined after careful consideration of slope, vegetation, soils, depth to impermeable layers, runoff sediment characteristics, type and quantity of stormwater pollutants, and annual rainfall. Buffer widths should increase as slope increases. 3. Vegetation that is established for use as a buffer is required meet or exceed the condition of pre- existing vegetation. 4. Zones of vegetation (native vegetation in particular), including grasses, deciduous and evergreen shrubs, and understory and overstory trees, should be intermixed. 5. Fertilizing seeded or planted ground may enhance growth (and improve its effectiveness as a buffer). 6. When using naturally vegetated areas, vegetation should be marked for preservation before clearing activities begin. Barriers may be used to prevent the approach of equipment within protected areas. 7. Direct sediment-laden water onto the naturally vegetated or stabilized planted ground. 8. Do not place any equipment, construction debris, or extra soil in the buffer area. Maintenance Specifications: • Signs of visible erosion, on or around control measure; or • Occurrence of sedimentation, more than 6 inches in depth Corrective Action Specifications: • Sediments laden water covering or flowing over vegetated buffer threatening to or reaching live water; • Vegetative buffer area is being utilized as a storage area Removal/Abandonment During final site cleanup, any barriers placed around preserved natural areas should be removed. References Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES). Construction Site Storm Water Runoff Control. Washington, D.C., February 2003. <http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/menuofbmps/con_site.cfm> Page 66 Drainage Control Measures Berm (B)/Working Surface Perimeter Berm .......................................................................................................... 67 Culvert (C) ............................................................................................................................................................... 71 Diversion (D) ........................................................................................................................................................... 81 Drainage Dip (DD) .................................................................................................................................................. 86 Low Water Crossing (LWC) ................................................................................................................................... 89 Pipeline Water Crossing (PWC) ............................................................................................................................. 92 Roadside Ditches (RSD) ........................................................................................................................................ 99 Slope Drain (SD) ................................................................................................................................................. 101 Trench Breakers (TB) .......................................................................................................................................... 103 Water Bar (WB) ................................................................................................................................................... 106 Wing Ditch (WD) .................................................................................................................................................. 111 Page 67 Berm (B)/Working Surface Perimeter Berm Description A berm is a ridge of compacted soil located at the top or base of a sloping disturbed area. The purpose of a berm is to serve as a sediment barrier. A berm may also be referred to as a working surface perimeter berm (these terms can be used interchangeably, as the design specifications are the same). Berms should be constructed to minimize velocity and prevent erosion to the extent possible. Berms may be constructed from either excavated topsoil or subsoil. Applicability Berms are usually appropriate for smaller drainage basins or basins with minimal runoff, but with modifications they can be capable of servicing larger areas. If properly designed, constructed, and implemented berms can be permanent Control Measure features. Key factors to check are the soils potential for erosion, the predicted velocities along the berm, and the capacity of the channel formed by the berm. Berms are applicable for the following: • At the perimeter of a well pad (particularly the outer edge) to ensure that runoff remains on the pad and is diverted to a well pad detention pond or sediment trap, if available. See the Detention Pond (DP) and Sediment Trap (ST) Control Measure. • Along the outside shoulder of an in-sloped road to ensure that runoff from the roadway drains inward and to protect the fill slope from continual disturbances during road blading and maintenance. See the Land Grading (LG) Control Measure. • Upslope of cut or fill slopes to divert flows away from disturbed areas. • As a toe berm down-slope of cut or fill slopes to divert on-site runoff to a stabilized outlet or sediment trapping device, although diversions are more commonly used for this application. See the Diversion (D) Control Measure. • On well-pads for secondary containment. • As a windrow lip along pipelines and roadways. Limitations • Berms may erode if not properly compacted and stabilized. Berms will also have erosion issues if the velocities of the conveyed/diverted flows are too high. This happens when the flowline at the toe of the berm is too steep (i.e., the berm is not constructed along the contours, but across them). Page 68 Berms which are adjacent to or that convey concentrated flows may require additional erosion control measures. • If a berm crosses a vehicle roadway or entrance, its effectiveness can be reduced. Thus, wherever possible, berms should be designed to avoid crossing vehicle pathways. • Berms should not be placed across concentrated flow pathways (ditches, swales, streams, etc.). The discharge end of the berm may require a sediment trap or outlet protection. Design criteria The design storm should match the application, the risks associated with failure, and the design life of the facility. Typically, permanent applications would be designed at a minimum of the 25-year 24-hour storm. Runoff calculations should take into account the increased runoff potential of disturbed areas and subsurface soils. The design should consider the erosive potential of site-specific soils. If the potential for erosion is high then engineering controls (i.e., additional Control Measures) should be implemented to limit erosion and minimize any potential downstream impacts. Construction specifications 1. Prior to berm construction, remove all trees, brush, stumps, and other objects in the path of the berm and till the base of the berm before laying the fill. The depth of removal will vary, but in general at a minimum it will be to the bottom of the topsoil layer. Fill may consist of topsoil or subsoil excavated during the construction of nearby roads or well pads. If fill material is excavated adjacent to the berm, follow the specification for the Diversion (D) Control Measure. 2. Construct the berm according to Figure B-1 for the appropriate application. For points where vehicles will cross the berm, the side slope should be no steeper than 3:1 and the mound may be surfaced with gravel. This will prolong the life of the berm and increase effectiveness at the point of vehicle crossing. For well pad perimeter installation the pad side of the berm should be sloped at 1.5:1 to help prevent vehicles from backing over the edge of the pad. 3. Berm material shall be compacted, unless topsoil berm, to minimize erosion and increase effectiveness. The compactive effort required is dependent upon many things including, but not limited to the expected design life of the berm, the soils used to construct the berm, the moisture content of the soils, the equipment available, and if vegetation is to be established on the berm. The minimum compactive effort shall be tracking with equipment. 4. Berms should have positive drainage to a stabilized outlet so that runoff does not collect in ponds on the upslope side of the berm, but instead flows along the berm until it reaches a stabilized outlet. Field location should be adjusted as needed. Stabilized outlet may be a well-vegetated area, a well pad detention pond, or a sediment control such as wattles or a sediment trap where sediment can settle out of the runoff before being discharged off-site. 5. If the expected life span of the berm is greater than 15 days, it is recommended that the berm be stabilized with compaction, hydromulch, seeded or apply tackifier immediately after construction. Stabilization is required where concentrated flows are expected. 6. Berms should be constructed and fully stabilized prior to commencement of major upslope land disturbance. This will maximize the effectiveness of the structure as a stormwater control device. Maintenance Specifications: • Initial signs of erosion or loss of compaction on or along the berm resulting in berm height less than 1/3 the install height; or • Occurrence of sediment buildup behind the berm greater than 2/3 the overall height of the berm • Occurrence of scouring/undercutting Page 69 Corrective Action Specifications: • Breach which allows for bypass of the berm; or • Inadequate control measure; or • Improper installation Removal/Abandonment Berms should remain in place and in good condition until all upslope disturbed areas are permanently stabilized. There is no need to formally remove the berm on completion of stabilization until interim or final reclamation. Figure B-1 Berm Installation Page 70 References Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES). Construction Site Storm Water Runoff Control. W ashington, D.C., February 2003. <http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/menuofbmps/con_site.cfm> New York State Department of Environmental Conservation, New York Guidelines for Urban Erosion and Sediment Control. New York. Fourth Edition, 1997. Page 71 Culvert (C) Description Culverts are typically concrete, steel, aluminum, or plastic pipe used to convey water from natural drainage, provide stormwater ditch relief, and convey concentrated flows under the road or construction area. Culvert protection is typically required at both the inlet to the culvert (upstream side) and the outlet to the culvert (downstream side). Culvert inlet protection may involve placing boulders, armoring, gabions, rock retaining walls, and/or any other protection at the inlets of pipes. Armoring, or other energy-dissipating devices, intends to reduce the velocity of flows and thereby reduces erosion and helps protect the inlet structure. Culvert outlet protection involves placing structurally lined aprons or other appropriate energy-dissipating devices, such as large boulders or plunge pools, at the outlets of pipes to reduce the velocity of flows and thereby reducing scouring at stormwater outlets, protect the outlet structure, and minimize potential for erosion downstream. Applicability Culverts may be used in the following applications: • As drainage crossing culverts for streams and gullies to convey normal drainage flows under the roadway. • As ditch relief culverts to convey water from the inside (uphill) ditch by diverting flows to the downhill side of the road where the flow can be dispersed away from the roadway using wing ditches or other means. Ditch relief culverts are ideal on road grades less than 15%. For grades over 15%, it is difficult to slow down the water or remove it from the road surface rapidly. On such steep grades, it is best to use frequently spaced relief culverts and drainage crossing culverts with armored ditches. • In other areas, as needed, to direct runoff under roadways. Velocity reducing control measure should be used for inlet protection where velocities and energies at the inlets of culverts are enough to erode around the inlet structure. Armoring may also be used to help channel the stormwater to the inlet of the culvert. Culvert outlet protection should be used where discharge velocities and energies at the outlets of culverts or channels are enough to erode the next downstream reach. Page 72 Limitations • If undersized, culverts are susceptible to plugging. Undersized culverts within natural drainages can result in road overtopping, which typically causes erosion on the downhill side of the road section. • Culverts will not filter sediment but can be subject to filling with sediment under certain conditions. • Culverts may require regular flushing or cleaning. Ideally the design will be such that the culverts are flushed naturally by runoff at least once a year. However, in areas with highly erosive soils or culverts with flatter slopes regular cleaning and flushing will likely be required to prevent plugging. • Culverts are easily crushed if installed or designed without proper bedding and the proper amount of cover over the crown of the pipe. Pipe bedding requirements vary depending on the pipe material. Manufacture recommendations should be adhered to and are detailed in their installation guides. Cover requirements vary with pipe material and design loads. • Rock aprons at culvert outlets should not be placed on slopes steeper than 10 percent or when the flow coming out of the culvert will be supercritical. Runoff from pipe outlets at the top of cuts/fills or on slopes that will cause supercritical flow (i.e. typically slopes steeper than 10 percent) should be routed via slope drains or armored chutes to a rock apron at the toe of the slope. Design criteria Temporary culverts serving small catchments (less than 0.5 acres). The design storm should match the application, the risks associated with failure, and the design life of the facility. Typically, permanent applications would be designed at a minimum of the 25-year 24-hour storm. Runoff calculations should take into account the increased runoff potential of disturbed areas and subsurface soils. The design should consider the erosive potential of site-specific soils. If the potential for erosion is high then engineering controls (i.e., additional control measures) should be implemented to limit erosion and minimize any potential downstream impacts. Further, the design needs to ensure that the structure is capable of withstanding the expected loads from heavy construction equipment. The project may also be subject to the rules and regulations of the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers for in-stream modifications (404 permits). Capacity If the expected life of the culvert is less than 14 days, the culvert shall be sized to convey a minimum of the peak flow from a 2-year 24-hour frequency storm without overtopping of the culvert. If the life of the culvert is less than 1 year, then the 10-year 24-hour storm shall be the minimum storm event used. In general, the minimum culvert diameter shall be 24 inches (36 inches for perennial streams). The minimum sizing is to prevent failure/blockage due to debris. Pipe size for temporary measures can be estimated using general design criteria, such as in Table C-1, but is ideally based upon site-specific hydrologic analysis. Factors to be considered include the geographic area being drained, soils and slopes in the drainage area, annual precipitation, and likely storm events. Figure C-6 is an inlet nomograph for circular pipes. This figure is useful for determining pipe sizes for known flows when the culvert will be under inlet control. Inlet control is typically a good assumption for culverts without tailwater restrictions. Figure C-6 In some cases, it may not be possible to install culverts to the minimum sizing referenced above. For example, pipelines built close to the surface may interfere with our ability to bury culverts. As a work around, alternatives to culverts, such as steel or poly pipe or casing, may be used when surfaces require drainage Control Measures and installing a culvert is not possible. Page 73 Cover Depth The depth of culvert cover needs to be sufficient enough to ensure protection of the culvert barrel for the design life of the culvert. This requires anticipating the amount of material that may be lost due to road use and erosion. The required cover depth is dependent upon the culvert material type. Culverts made of flexible materials such as corrugated metal and HDPE will require more cover than non-flexible material culverts such as reinforced concrete pipe. Culverts should always have at least 12 inches of cover at the time of installation. If less than 12 inches is being considered, appropriate cover technique should be developed. Slope Culvert slopes should match existing grade. Culvert outlets should not protrude from fill with inverts sticking into the air. In the event a historical protruding culvert, adequate armoring will be employed at the outlet to reduce scouring. Sediment traps can be installed that extend below the culvert invert, but the culvert invert should be at or close to existing grade. The minimum slope for a culvert is 1%. Steep culverts may convey flows under supercritical flow conditions. The purpose of the energy dissipation structure/device is to return flows to subcritical conditions within a controlled environment and limit erosion (i.e., so the hydraulic jump occurs under controlled conditions). Inlet/outlet protection design Sediment traps, gabions, or rock retaining walls at culvert inlets and outlets shall be designed according to their appropriate Control Measure. Armored aprons at culvert outlets shall be designed as follows (master source is U.S. EPA, but text and tables are from Mesa County Stormwater Management Manual): The table below presents maximum permissible mean channel velocities for unlined channels. Erosion protection in the form of a horizontal armored lined apron is required for all culvert outlets when the outlet velocity exceeds these values. When armoring is not an option or is unavailable, the engineer has other natural and manmade materials available for use in erosion protection. Other options include gabions, cleaned concrete, recycled concrete, shotcrete, masonry, geotextiles, and woody plants. Outlet protection measures other than armoring may be used if first approved by the local jurisdiction. Armoring materials. The outlet protection may be done using rock armoring. Armoring shall be composed of a well-graded mixture of stone sizes. It is preferred that armoring consist of angular material. Crushed material works best. A well-graded mixture, as used herein, is defined as a mixture composed primarily of larger stone sizes, but with a sufficient mixture of other sizes to fill the smaller voids between the stones. Filter. If a filter cloth or gravel is used, it should be designed according to the Armoring (AR) Control Measure. Apron thickness. The minimum thickness of the armoring layer shall be 1.5 times the maximum stone diameter of 15 inches or less; and 1.2 times the maximum stone size greater than 15 inches. Armoring stone quality. Stone for armoring shall consist of native rock. The stone shall be hard and angular and of a quality that will not disintegrate on exposure to water or weathering. Page 74 Construction specifications Culvert inlet protection Figure C-1 shows typical culvert inlet protection. However, site specifics shall dictate actual design. 1. After installation of a culvert, examine the stream channel for the amount of debris, logs, and brushy vegetation present. In channels with large amounts of debris, consider using oversized pipes. 2. Special installations may have a sediment trap and a slide (head) gate at the culvert inlet. The slide gate will normally be kept closed so the sediment settles out prior to discharging the water through the culvert. If used, the slide gate will be opened only after collected water within the sediment trap is visually checked for any oil sheens. 3. Boulders may be dry-stacked around the culvert inlet and up the slope to the edge of the road. Drainage crossing culverts See Figure C-2 for installation details. 1. The alignment of the road should be as perpendicular to the flow line of natural drainages as possible. The purpose of this is to minimize pipe length and area of disturbance along the drainage. 2. Use single large pipes versus multiple smaller diameter pipes to minimize plugging potential (unless roadway elevation is critical). In very broad channels, multiple pipes are desirable to maintain the natural flow spread across the channel (i.e. so flow is not concentrated into one location). 3. All culverts should be made of reinforced concrete, High Density Poly Ethelene (HDPE), corrugated metal, or steel. 4. Culverts will be bedded and backfilled. Backfill should be compacted, but care should be taken during compaction of said material to ensure the culvert is not damaged. 5. Align culverts in the bottom and middle of the natural channel. The purpose of this is to minimize the potential for any changes in the stream channel alignment or stream bottom elevation due to placement of the culvert. Culverts should not cause damming or pooling of existing drainages. The culvert should be installed such that any changes to the stream velocities are minimized. 6. Filter cloth may be placed on the streambed and stream banks prior to placement of the culverts and aggregate to reduce settlement and improve crossing stability. The filter cloth may cover the streambed and extend 6 to 12 inches beyond the end of the culvert and bedding material. 7. Extend the outlet of the culvert at least 1 foot beyond the toe of the slope to prevent erosion of the fill material. Alternatively, use retaining walls (headwalls) to hold back the fill slope. 8. It may be necessary to install armoring, a combination of the armoring or other energy dissipater device at the outlet end of the culvert to reduce soil erosion or to trap sediment. 9. It may be desirable to construct pull offs/turnouts for vehicles on one or both sides of narrow culvert crossings. This will help avoid culvert crushing as well as disturbance to roadside ditches and berms. Road and Ditch relief culverts See Figure C-3 for installation details. 1. Ditch relief culverts can provide better flow when skewed greater than or equal to 30 degrees perpendicular to the road (see Figure C-3). Certain circumstances, such as topography, could dictate skewing less than 30 degrees. 2. The culvert gradient should be at least 2% greater than the approaching ditch gradient. This improves the flow hydraulics and reduces siltation and debris from plugging the culvert inlet. Page 75 3. Discharge culvert at natural ground level where possible (see Figure C-4 Type A), on firm, non-erosive soil or in rocky or brushy areas. If discharged on the fill slopes or on erosive soils, armor outlets with rock (see Figure C-4 – Type B) or use down-drain structures (see Figure C-4 – Type C and Slope Drain (SD)). 4. Extend the inlet of the culvert at least 1 foot beyond the flowline of the roadside ditch. Extend the outlet of the culvert at least 1 foot beyond the toe of slopes to prevent erosion of the fill material. Unless the culvert outlet is on a fill slope at which point it should be flush with the slope or discharge into a slope drain to minimize erosion. 5. It may be necessary to install armoring or other energy dissipating device at the outlet end of the culvert to prevent soil erosion or to trap sediment. 6. Spacing of culverts is dependent on the road gradient, soil types, and runoff characteristics. The following table gives suggested culvert spacing. However, spacing will be dependent on-site specific conditions and topography (the table below is from the BLM Gold Book). Soil type Road grade 2–4% 5–8% 9–12% Highly corrosive granitic or sandy 220’-260’ 160’-200’ 120’-160’ Intermediate erosive clay or load 290’-330’ 240’-280’ 180’-220’ Low erosive shale or gravel 380’-420’ 305’-345’ 230’-270’ 7. It may be desirable to construct pull offs/turnouts for vehicles on one or both sides of narrow culvert crossings. This will help avoid culvert crushing as well as disturbance to roadside ditches and berms. Backfill and compaction 1. See Figure C-5. 2. Firmly compact well-graded fill material (soil or road base) around culverts, particularly around the bottom half (i.e., up to the spring line of the culvert). Bedding/fill material should be placed in 6-8-inch loose lifts and then compacted to achieve a uniform density. Typically, this means slightly plastic sandy gravel with fines. Clay cut-off walls should be installed on culverts longer than 100 feet and along culverts with bedding/backfill material that has a high hydraulic conductivity (i.e., may be subject to piping and washout). Pay particular attention to culvert bedding and compaction around the haunches of the pipe. Do not allow the compaction to crush, move, or raise the pipe. In large fills settlement may occur, so allow for it by humping additional material over the culvert. 3. Cover the top of pipes with a minimum fill depth as per the Manufacturer’s recommendations to prevent pipe crushing. For maximum allowable fill height, again follow the Manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. Mound fill over the top of culvert pipes so that the road is slightly raised at culvert locations to help prevent erosion and water from ponding over culvert crossings. This practice, as well as placing large boulders around the culvert outlets, will also help to prevent culverts from crushing. Culvert outlet protection 1. Prepare the sub-grade for the armoring to the required lines and grades. Any fill required in the sub-grade shall be compacted to a density of approximately that of the surrounding undisturbed material. Page 76 2. Construct apron to the design length and width with no slope. No over-fall at the end of the apron is allowed as this could create supercritical flows and erosion. The elevation of the downstream end of the apron shall be equal to the elevation of the receiving channel or adjacent ground. The outlet protection apron shall be located so that there are no bends in the horizontal alignment. 3. Line the apron with armoring, or concrete if required. Note concrete should not be used for applications where the armoring is being used for energy dissipation. Armoring should be the appropriate size and thickness as designed. See the Armoring (AR) Control Measure for the placement of armoring. Alternately, flared culvert ends may be used. 4. If a culvert outlet at the top of cuts/fills or on slopes steeper than 10 percent one of the following two options is suggested: a. Perch culvert beyond fill slope and have adequate energy dissipating Control Measure, beyond the toe of the fill slope. b. Transition culvert to a slope drain according to the Slope Drain (SD) Control Measure. The slope drain shall convey stormwater to the bottom of the slope where an armored apron, as designed above, shall prevent erosion at the slope drain outlet. c. Line slope below culvert outlet with an armored channel to convey stormwater to the bottom of the slope where an armored apron, as designed above, shall prevent erosion at the bottom of the slope. The armor channel shall be designed according to the table in the Armoring (AR) Control Measure that is based on depth of flow and slope. The armored channel shall dip into the slope so that all water is contained within the channel, flows to the armored outlet apron at the base of the slope, and does not spill over the sides onto unprotected soil. Maintenance Specifications: • Buildup of debris; or • Initial signs of erosion or scouring; or • Inlet/outlet erosion control(s) and/or velocity dissipation controls show signs of erosion or sedimentation altering functionality Corrective Action Specifications: • Plugged, blocked, crushed or filled culvert, that prevents water from moving through the culvert; or • Culvert was not placed correctly for proper water movement (not placed in the low spot of the road, higher than water can reach, etc.) Removal/Abandonment When culverts have served their purpose (i.e., when the project area is to be reclaimed), all structures (including culverts, bedding, and filter cloth materials) shall be removed. Removal of drainage crossing culverts and clean-up of the area shall be accomplished without construction equipment working in the waterway channel and upon removal of the structure. The stream shall immediately be shaped to its original cross- section and properly stabilized. Page 77 Table C-1 Culvert Sizing (Rough Estimate for Temporary Applications Only.) Drainage Area (acres) Circular Pipe (inches) 0 – 10 36” 10 - 20 42” 20 - 35 48” 35 - 75 72” Notes: If pipe size is not available, use the next larger pipe size for the given drainage area. Figure C-1 Typical Inlet Protection Page 78 Figure C-2 Drainage Crossing Culvert Alignment & Overflow Dip Figure C-3 Ditch Relief Culvert Installation Page 79 Figure C-4 Culvert Installation Options Figure C-5 Culvert Backfill and Compaction Energy Dissipater Energy Dissipater Energy Dissipater Page 80 References Horizon Environmental Services, Inc, Guidance Document Reasonable and Prudent Practices for Stabilization (RAPPS) of Oil and Gas Construction Sites. April 2004. Keller, Gordon, and James Sherar, Low-Volume Roads Engineering, Best Management Practices Field Guide. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), Forest Service, US Agency of International Development (USAID), 2005. <http://ntl.bts.gov/lib/24000/24600/24650/Index_BMP_Field_Guide.htm> New York State Department of Environmental Conservation, New York Guidelines for Urban Erosion and Sediment Control. New York. Fourth Edition, 1997. United States Army Corps of Engineers (USACE), Engineering and Design - Handbook for the Preparation of Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plans for Construction Activities. February 1997. United States Department of the Interior and United States Department of Agriculture. Surface Operating Standards and Guidelines for Oil and Gas Exploration and Development “Gold Book”. BLM/WO/ST- 06/021+3071. Bureau of Land Management (BLM). Denver, Colorado. Fourth Edition, 2006. Mesa County Colorado, Stormwater Management Manual (SW MM), December 31, 2007 (issued April 2008). Page 81 Diversion (D) Definition A diversion is used to convey or direct runoff away from or to a stabilized area. Diversions can be adjacent to berms and the berms can even be constructed with the excavated material from the diversion or with other fill material, such as topsoil (i.e. a topsoil stockpile may be used to create a diversion and direct runoff). The purpose of a diversion is to prevent run-on from entering a disturbed area, to prevent sediment-laden stormwater runoff from leaving the construction site or disturbed area, to prevent flows from eroding slopes, and/or to direct sediment laden flows to a trapping device. Applicability Diversions may be used for the following applications: • Up-slope of cut or fill slopes (as run-on protection) to convey or divert flows away from disturbed areas. Diversions up-slope of well pads may be constructed with topsoil. A diversion is most typically used in this type of application for run-on protection. • Down-slope of cut or fill slopes (as run-off protection) to divert on-site runoff to a stabilized outlet or sediment trapping device. • At the outer edge of a well pad to ensure that runoff remains on the pad and is diverted to a sediment trapping control measure. • Where runoff from higher areas has potential for causing erosion, or interfering with, or preventing the establishment of, vegetation on lower areas. • Where the length of slopes needs to be reduced so that soil loss will be kept to a minimum. • At the perimeter of a site or disturbed area. Limitations • The area around the diversion channel that is disturbed by its construction may be stabilized (with vegetation or other erosion control measure) so that it is not subject to similar erosion as the steep slope the channel is built to protect. • To minimize the erosion potential within the diversion swale the longitudinal grade of the swale should be minimized in an effort to keep the velocity of water in the swale below the erosive Page 82 velocity of the cut soils. Control Measures such as check dams, filter berms, armoring, erosion control blanket, and revegetation can be used to mitigate erosion as well. • To alleviate erosion potential, diversions may be directed into a stabilized outlet or well-vegetated area or to sediment trapping devices, where erosion sediment can settle out of the runoff before being discharged from the disturbance. • Diversions are not usually applicable below high sediment producing areas unless structural measures, designed to prevent damaging accumulations of sediment in the channels, are installed with, or before, the diversions. Design criteria Design is required for permanent diversions and temporary diversions used for large catchments, catchments with the potential for significant runoff, or diversions being used to divert other water conveyances. Location Diversion locations shall be determined by considering outlet conditions, topography, land use, soil type, length of slope, and the development layout. W here possible (i.e., shallow slopes) a vegetated buffer strip should be left between the edge of the cut or fill slope and the diversion. The erosive velocity and erosion potential of on-site soils should be considered when designing diversions. Diversions should be located along the slope (parallel to the contour) and grades should be shallow (typically 1-3%). Installations perpendicular to the contours (parallel to the slope) and installations with steep slopes should be avoided. Rainfall The design calculations should be tailored to site specific conditions. The design storm should match the application, the risks associated with failure, and the design life of the facility. Typically, permanent applications would be designed at a minimum of the 25-year 24-hour storm. Capacity The sizing of temporary diversions shall take into account items such as, but not limited to the site location, facility type, quantity of water diverted, potential impacts of failure, and the space and material available to construct said diversion. Runoff calculations should take into account the increased runoff potential of disturbed areas and subsurface soils. Cross section See Figure D-2 for details. The diversion channel may be trapezoidal in shape, is a 4-sided flat shape with straight sides that has a pair of opposite sides that are parallel. Or if space allows, the diversion may be a stable landform with rounded features. The cross section of the diversion swale should be as close to the most efficient cross section for the channel type used as is possible given the site conditions. For example, the most efficient trapezoidal channel section is one with the flow depth twice the hydraulic radius. The diversion shall be designed to have stable side slopes. The side slopes shall not be steeper than 2:1 and shall be flat enough to ensure ease of maintenance of the diversion and its protective vegetative cover. The ridge shall have a minimum width of 4 feet at the design water elevation; a minimum 4 inches of freeboard and a reasonable settlement factor (10%) shall be provided. Velocity and grade The permissible velocity for the specific soil type will determine the maximum grade. The maximum permissible velocity for sand and silt vegetated channels is 3 ft/sec, and 5 ft/sec for clay vegetated channels. Page 83 Construction specifications General 1. All trees, brush, stumps, obstructions, and other objectionable material shall be removed and disposed of so as not to interfere with the proper functioning of the diversion. 2. All diversions shall have uninterrupted positive grade to an outlet. 3. Each diversion should have an adequate outlet where outflow will not cause damage. Diverted runoff from a disturbed area shall be conveyed to a sediment trapping device. Diverted runoff from an undisturbed area shall outlet to a sediment trapping device or into an undisturbed stabilized area at non-erosive velocities. Vegetated outlets shall be installed before diversion construction, if needed, to ensure establishment of vegetative cover in the outlet channel. Temporary diversion See Figure D-1. 1. The diversion shall be excavated or shaped to line, grade, and cross section as required to meet the specified criteria specified herein and be free of bank projections or other irregularities which will impede normal flow. 2. Stabilization with vegetation is not required as long as sediment traps or other sediment control devices are provided. Permanent diversion See Figure D-2. 1. The diversion shall be excavated or shaped to line, grade, and cross section as required to meet the criteria specified herein and be free of bank projections or other irregularities which will impede normal flow. 2. Fills shall be compacted as needed to prevent unequal settlement that would cause damage in the completed diversion. 3. All earth removed and not needed in construction shall be spread or disposed of on the construction side of the diversion so that it will not interfere with the functioning of the diversion. 4. Immediately after the ridge and channel are constructed, they can be seeded or hydro-seeded and mulched according to the Revegetation (RV) Control Measure, the Mulching (M) Control Measure, and/or the Erosion Control Blanket (ECB) Control Measure along with any disturbed areas that drain into the diversion. a. For design velocities less than the erosive velocity of the native soils, seeding and mulching may be used for establishment of the vegetation. For design velocities of more than or equal to the erosive velocity of the native soils, the diversion shall be stabilized with seeding protected by Jute or Excelsior matting, or with seeding and mulching until the vegetation is established. Maintenance Specifications: • Initial signs of erosion or scouring in or along the diversion resulting in loss of structure more than 1/3 of the install depth; or • Occurrence of sediment buildup within the diversion greater than 2/3 the overall height Page 84 Corrective Action Specifications: • Breach in diversion which allows for bypass; or • Inadequate control measure; or • Improper installation Removal/Abandonment Temporary and un-compacted diversions shall remain in place only until the disturbed areas are permanently stabilized. Abandonment of temporary diversions shall follow normal disturbance procedure, return grades to pre-disturbance, over with topsoil, seed & mulch, monitor until area is stabilized. Permanent diversions shall remain in place until final reclamation. Figure D-1 Page 85 References Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES). Construction Site Storm W ater Runoff Control. Washington, D.C., February 2003. <http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/menuofbmps/con_site.cfm> New York State Department of Environmental Conservation, New York Guidelines for Urban Erosion and Sediment Control. New York. Fourth Edition, 1997. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS), Field Office Technical Guide. 2002. <www.nrcs.usda.gov/technical/efotg> Page 86 Drainage Dip (DD) Description Drainage dips intercept and remove surface water from the road and shoulders before the combination of water volume and velocity begins to erode the surface materials. Drainage dips are constructed diagonally across and as part of the road surface and will pass slow traffic while dispersing surface water. Traffic, including low buys, should be able to pass over the drainage dip without being high-centered. A drainage dip is a very gentle roll in the road that is implemented when the road is originally constructed and graded. Drainage dips should not be confused with water bars, which are normally used for drainage and erosion protection of pipeline rights-of-way or closed/blocked roads. Applicability Drainage dips may be used in the following applications: • To move water off the road surface efficiently and economically • On low volume, low to moderate speed roads (10-35 mph) with grades less than 12% Limitations • Size limited by the safe passage of trucks and equipment (low boys should be able to pass without high-centering) • May cause concentrated flows from sheet flows • Requires vegetative cover or other sediment filter/trap at discharge point Construction specifications See Figure DD-1. 1. Construct rolling dips deep enough to provide adequate drainage, angled 0-25 degrees from perpendicular to the road, with a 3-5% outslope, and long enough (50 to 200 feet) to pass trailers and equipment. Page 87 2. Spacing of drainage dips depends upon local conditions such as soil material, grade, and topography. See Table DD-1 for recommended maximum distances between drainage dips. 3. In soft soils, armor the mound and dip with gravel or rock, as well as the outlet of the dip. 4. Outlet protection may consist of armoring to slow velocity, sediment traps or other sediment controls, or simply a well vegetated area. Maintenance Specifications: • Initial signs of erosion or scouring in or along the drainage dip resulting in loss of structure more than 1/3 of the install depth; or • Occurrence of sediment buildup within the drainage dip greater than 2/3 the overall structure Corrective Action Specifications: • Breach along drainage drip which allows for bypass; or • Inadequate control measure; or • Improper installation Table DD-1 Maximum Distance between Drainage Dips Road Grade, % Low to Non-Erosive Soils (1) Erosive Soils (2) 0 - 3 400’ 200’ 4 - 6 300’ 160’ 7 - 9 250’ 130’ 10 - 12 200’ 110’ 12+ 160’ 100’ (1) Low Erosion Soils = Coarse Rocky Soils, Gravel, and Some Clay (2) High Erosion Soils = Fine, Friable Soils, Silt, Fine Sands Page 88 Figure DD-1 Typical Drainage Dip References Horizon Environmental Services, Inc, Guidance Document Reasonable and Prudent Practices for Stabilization (RAPPS) of Oil and Gas Construction Sites. April 2004. Keller, Gordon, and James Sherar, Low-Volume Roads Engineering, Best Management Practices Field Guide. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), Forest Service, US Agency of International Development (USAID), 2005. <http://ntl.bts.gov/lib/24000/24600/24650/Index_BMP_Field_Guide.htm> Maine Department of Conservation, Best Management Practices for Forestry: Protecting Maine’s Water Quality. Maine Forest Service, Forest Policy and Management Division. Augusta, Maine. 2004. <http://www.state.me.us/doc/mfs/pubs/pdf/bmp_manual/bmp_manual.pdf> United States Department of the Interior and United States Department of Agriculture. Surface Operating Standards and Guidelines for Oil and Gas Exploration and Development “Gold Book”. BLM/WO/ST- 06/021+3071. Bureau of Land Management (BLM). Denver, Colorado. Fourth Edition, 2006. Page 89 Low Water Crossing (LWC) Description A low water crossing is a temporary structure erected to provide a safe and stable way for construction vehicle traffic to cross waterways. The primary purpose of such a structure is to provide stream bank stabilization, reduce the risk of damage to the streambed or channel, and reduce the risk of sediment loading from traffic. A low water crossing may be ford surfaced with gravel, armoring, or concrete. Note that the crossing may be subject to the rules and regulations of the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers for in-stream modifications (404 permits). Applicability Low water crossings may be used for the following applications: • Wherever heavy construction equipment must be moved from one side of a stream channel to the other, or where lighter construction vehicles will cross the stream a number of times during the construction period. • Vented fords can be used to pass drainages with low flows and keep vehicles out of the water, avoiding water quality degradation. • Fords can be designed as a broad crested weir in order to pass larger flow. • Fords can be “forgiving” and accommodate uncertainties in the design flow and thus are ideal for ephemeral and intermittent drainages with unknown or variable flow characteristics. Limitations • Low-water crossings that are not surfaced should not be used in wet conditions. • Installation may require dewatering or temporary diversion of the stream. • The approaches to fords often have high erosion potential. In addition, excavation of the streambed and approach to lay riprap or other stabilization material causes major stream disturbance. Mud and other debris are transported directly into the stream unless the crossing is used only during periods of low flow. • Ford-type structures may imply some periodic or occasional traffic delays during periods of high flow. Site location Locate the crossing in wide shallow waters where there will be the least disturbance to the soils of the existing waterway banks. When possible, locate the crossing at a point receiving minimal surface runoff. Page 90 Elimination of fish migration barriers Bridges pose the least potential for creating barriers to aquatic migration. The construction of any specific crossing method shall not cause a significant water level difference between the upstream and downstream water surface elevations. Crossing alignment Where possible, the low water crossing shall be at right angles to the stream. Road approaches The centerline of both roadway approaches shall coincide with the crossing alignment centerline for a minimum distance of 50 feet from each bank of the waterway being crossed. If physical or right-of-way restraints preclude the 50 feet minimum, a shorter distance may be provided. All fill materials associated with the roadway approach shall be limited to a maximum height of 2 feet above the existing flood plain elevation. Fords Fords are appropriate in steep areas subject to flash flooding, where normal flow is shallow or intermittent across a wide channel. Fords should be used for crossing seasonally dry streambeds (ephemeral or intermittent drainages) or streams with low flows during most periods of road use. Use fords in place of culverts when there is a high possibility of plugging by debris or vegetation. Use improved (vented) fords with pipes or concrete box culverts to pass low water flows and keep vehicles out of the water. Construction specifications Fords See Figure LWC-1. 1. Locate fords where stream banks are low and where the channel is well confined. 2. Clearing and excavation of the stream shores and bed should be kept to a minimum. 3. Excavate streambed as necessary and place armoring or crushed aggregate as necessary based on site-specific conditions. This type of simple low water crossing is ideal for ephemeral drainages. 4. If possible, the approach roads the cut banks shall be no steeper than 5:1. The road approach shall be a minimum distance of 50 feet from each bank. Spoil material from the banks shall be stored out of the floodplain and stabilized. 5. Use an adequately long aggregate surface to protect the “wetted perimeter” of the natural flow channel. Add protection above the expected level of the high flow. Allow for some freeboard, typically a minimum of 12 inches in elevation, between the top of the reinforced driving surface and the expected high-water level. 6. The downstream edge of a ford is a particularly critical location for scour and may need energy dissipaters or armored protection. 7. Use well-placed, sturdy depth markers at fords (if necessary) to advise traffic of dangerous water depths. 8. All areas disturbed during ford installation shall be stabilized in accordance with the Revegetation (RV) Control Measure. Page 91 Maintenance Specifications: • Buildup of debris; or • Occurrence of rutting; or • Loss of stabilization material downstream Corrective Action Specifications: • Vehicle becomes stuck within the low water crossing; • No inlet or outlet protection, causing degradation of state waters after vehicle crossing) • Dislodged rock that leaves exposed soils; or • Sedimentation occurring over more than ½ of the armoring material; or • Improper installation Removal/Abandonment All low water crossings shall be removed when the structure is no longer needed. Figure LWC-1 Ford Installation References Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES). Construction Site Storm Water Runoff Control. Washington, D.C., February 2003. <http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/menuofbmps/con_site.cfm> Keller, Gordon, and James Sherar, Low-Volume Roads Engineering, Best Management Practices Field Guide. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), Forest Service, US Agency of International Development (USAID), 2005. <http://ntl.bts.gov/lib/24000/24600/24650/Index_BMP_Field_Guide.htm> New York State Department of Environmental Conservation, New York Guidelines for Urban Erosion and Sediment Control. New York. Fourth Edition, 1997. United States Army Corps of Engineers (USACE), Engineering and Design - Handbook for the Preparation of Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plans for Construction Activities. February 1997. United States Department of the Interior, Bureau of Land Management (BLM), United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), Forest Service, Surface Operating Standards for Oil and Gas Exploration and Development “Gold Book”. Fourth Edition, 2005. Page 92 Pipeline Water Crossing (PWC) Description There are several methods for pipeline water crossings. This Control Measure discusses open cut, flume, dam and pump, and bore or directional drill. Applicability Pipeline water crossings are applicable anytime a pipeline is constructed across a live flowing water crossing. Limitations Crossings should also be scheduled during low flow periods and the amount of time spent working in-stream should be minimized. Avoid seasonal high-risk periods within lifecycles of resident aquatic organisms. Open Cut: • Grading of banks may be required. • Problematic in boulders and bedrock. • Trench is prone to sloughing. Flume: • Flow limited by flume size. • Difficult to install. Requires relatively long, straight channel. • Flume pipe can be crushed or blocked during construction. Dam and Pump: • Limited by pump capacity. • Hose may impede construction traffic. Bore or Directional Drill: • Requires additional workspace. • Potential for borehole cave-in. • Requires disposal of drilling mud. Construction specifications In general, pipeline water crossings shall follow these guidelines: • Schedule crossing during low flow period, if possible. • No refueling of mobile equipment within 200 feet of waterbody. • Installation of a temporary equipment crossing is required at all flowing waterbodies. If a temporary equipment crossing is installed, it will be built in accordance with site specific drawings. • Pipelines buried across stream crossings should be buried below the scouring depth. • Maintain clean water flow. • Minimize disturbance and erosion of the watercourse bed and banks. Page 93 • At completion of pipeline water crossing, restore waterbody channel to approximate pre-construction profile and substrate. • At completion of pipeline water crossing, restore stream banks to approximate original condition and stabilize, as necessary. Open Cut See Figure PWC-1. 1. Contractor shall trench up to both sides of crossing. 2. Complete all in-stream activities within 24 hours, if feasible. 3. In agricultural land, strip topsoil from spoil storage area. 4. Construct sediment barriers along the sides of stockpiles and across the entire construction R.O.W. to prevent silt laden water and spoil from flowing back into waterbody. Barriers may be temporarily removed to allow construction activities but will be replaced by the end of each work day. 5. In-stream spoil to be stored out of the stream channel a minimum of 10 feet from the water’s edge and within the construction R.O.W. 6. Redirect water flow via a Diversion Ditch or other flow control measure. 7. Trench through watercourse using mainline excavation equipment where practical. 8. Maintain stream flow throughout crossing construction. 9. Backfill with native material. Flume See Figure PWC-2. 1. Size flume to handle anticipated flows. 2. Stockpile all required materials prior to beginning in-stream work. Complete construction of the in- stream pipe section. Weight and pretest pipe, if warranted, prior to commencing in-stream activity. 3. Install a pre-assembled flume or construct a flume and install both an upstream and downstream dam. 4. Install additional erosion control, if required, downstream of the flume outlet. 5. Ensure a tight seal about the dam and flume prior to undertaking trench excavation. Excavate the trench as quickly as practical placing spoil out of the stream channel. 6. Pump excavation as required to prevent downstream flow of silted water. Direct the pumped water onto Dewater Control Measure. 7. Install pipe. 8. Backfill the stream channel. 9. Remove downstream seal materials. 10. Remove upstream seal materials. 11. Remove the flume. Page 94 Dam and Pump See Figure PWC-3. 1. Stockpile all required materials prior to beginning in-stream work. Complete construction of the in- stream pipe section. Weight and pretest pipe, if warranted, prior to commencing in-stream activity. 2. Install pumps in natural pool upstream of the excavation. 3. Excavate temporary sump within right-of-way if no natural pool exists. Check pump operation to equalize flow. 4. Ensure pumps can handle anticipated flow. Have standby pumps and generators capable of handling 100% of anticipated flow onsite and ready to be used if operating pumps fail. 5. Construct the upstream dam on the edge of the temporary workspace to allow for a wide excavation. Ensure dam is impermeable. Construct dam using sand bags, aqua-dam, sheet piling or other approved material that ensures a tight seal of the bed and banks. 6. Excavate trench as rapidly as possible. 7. Install pipe. 8. Backfill the stream channel. 9. Remove the downstream dam or vehicle crossing plug. 10. Remove the upstream dam or vehicle crossing plug. Bore or Directional Drill See Figure PWC-4. 1. Acquire and mark additional temporary workspace. 2. Set up equipment back from the edge of the watercourse; do not clear or grade within buffer zone except along the work side, if temporary vehicle crossing is installed. 3. Excavate receiving and launching/Jacking pits. 4. Complete boring and tie-in to mainline. 5. Pump receiving or launching/jacking pits dry if seepage becomes a problem. Utilize a Dewatering Control Measure. 6. If using a directional drill, install suitable drilling mud tanks or sumps to prevent contamination of watercourse. Install sumps down-slope from the drill entry and anticipated exit points to contain any release of drilling mud. Dispose of drilling mud in accordance with the appropriate regulatory authority requirements. 7. Backfill and compact. Maintenance Specifications: • All erosion, drainage, and sediment controls installed as part of a pipeline water crossing shall be maintained in accordance with its individual Control Measure specifications. Corrective Action Specifications: • All erosion, drainage, and sediment controls installed as part of a pipeline water crossing shall be maintained in accordance with its individual Control Measure specifications. Page 95 Figure PWC-1 Typical Open Cut Pipeline Water Crossing Page 96 Figure PWC-2 Typical Flume Pipeline Water Crossing Figure PWC-3 Typical Dam and Pump Pipeline Water Crossing Page 97 Page 98 References Canadian Association of Petroleum Producers, Canadian Energy Pipeline Association, and Canadian Gas Association. October 2005. Pipeline Associated Watercourse Crossings 3rd Edition. Prepared by TERA Environmental Consultants and Salmo Consulting Inc. Calgary, AB. United States Department of the Interior and United States Department of Agriculture. Surface Operating Standards and Guidelines for Oil and Gas Exploration and Development “Gold Book.” BLM/WO/ST- 06/021+3071. Bureau of Land Management (BLM). Denver, Colorado. Fourth Edition, 2006. Page 99 Roadside Ditches (RSD) Description Roadside ditches (also called bar ditches) are channels constructed parallel to roads. The ditches convey concentrated runoff of surface water from roads and surrounding areas to a stabilized outlet. Applicability • Roadside ditches should be designed to handle flows and used for all roads built on sloping topography with either an insloped or a crowned design. Limitations • If roadside ditches are not installed correctly, they may become a source of erosion. • Roadside ditches do not necessarily filter sediment from runoff. Construction specifications 1. Roadside ditches should be constructed with no projections of roots, stumps, rocks, or similar debris. 2. Excavate ditches along roadside to a width and depth that can handle expected flows according to Figure RSD-1. 3. All ditches shall have uninterrupted positive grade to a terminal Control Measure. Slope ditch so that water velocities do not cause excessive erosion, but no less than 0.5%. If steep slopes and high velocities exist, use velocity control measure to slow runoff and catch sediment. 4. To control erosion and collect sediment, the aggregate used to line the roadside ditch and construct aggregate check dams should be the same material as used to surface the roadway. The aggregate should be clean-screened. 5. All ditches shall convey runoff to a sediment trapping device such as a sediment trap (see Sediment Trap (ST) Control Measure) or an undisturbed, well vegetated, and stabilized area at non-erosive velocity. Ditches may also be periodically relieved by culverts or continuously relieved by furrows constructed for that purpose (as described in the Surface Roughening (SR) Control Measure). Maintenance Specifications: • Initial signs of erosion or scouring in or along the roadside ditch resulting in loss of structure more than 1/3 of the install depth; or Page 100 • Occurrence of sediment buildup within the roadside ditch greater than 2/3 the overall height Corrective Action Specifications: • Breach in roadside ditch which allows for bypass; or • Inadequate control measure; or • Improper installation Figure RSD-1 Roadside Ditch Installation References Horizon Environmental Services, Inc, Guidance Document Reasonable and Prudent Practices for Stabilization (RAPPS) of Oil and Gas Construction Sites. April 2004. Keller, Gordon, and James Sherar, Low-Volume Roads Engineering, Best Management Practices Field Guide. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), Forest Service, US Agency of International Development (USAID), 2005. <http://ntl.bts.gov/lib/24000/24600/24650/Index_BMP_Field_Guide.htm> United States Department of the Interior and United States Department of Agriculture. Surface Operating Standards and Guidelines for Oil and Gas Exploration and Development “Gold Book”. BLM/WO/ST- 06/021+3071. Bureau of Land Management (BLM). Denver, Colorado. Fourth Edition, 2006. Page 101 Slope Drain (SD) Description A slope drain is a conduit extending the length of a disturbed slope and serves as an outlet for a diversion, a sediment trap, or a detention pond located at the top of a slope. Slope drains convey runoff without causing erosion on or at the bottom of the slope. This practice is a temporary measure used during grading operations until permanent drainage structures are installed and until slopes are permanently stabilized. Applicability Slope drains can be used on most disturbed slopes to eliminate gully erosion problems resulting from concentrated flows discharged at a diversion outlet. Recently graded slopes that do not have permanent drainage measures installed should have a slope drain and a temporary diversion installed. A slope drain used in conjunction with a diversion conveys stormwater flows and reduces erosion until permanent drainage structures are installed. Limitations The area drained by a temporary slope drain should not exceed 5 acres. Physical obstructions substantially reduce the effectiveness of the drain. Other concerns are failures from overtopping because of inadequate pipe inlet capacity, and reduced diversion channel capacity and ridge height. Construction specifications See Figure SD-1 for installation details. 1. The slope drain inlet may be a diversion, a well pad detention pond, or a sediment trap. 2. The slope drain may or may not have a slide gate installed at the inlet end of the pipe in order to control when water is released through the slope drain. 3. The top of the berm over the slope drain inlet shall be at least 6 inches higher at all points than the top of the inlet pipe. 4. The slope drain may consist of metal or plastic pipe or half pipe. The pipe is typically corrugated, although for flatter, shorter slopes, a plastic or concrete lined channel is sometimes used. If flexible tubing is used, it shall be constructed of a durable material. 5. The slope drain shall have a slope of 3 percent or steeper. 6. The slope drain shall outlet into a sediment trapping device when the drainage area is disturbed. 7. An armored apron may be used below the pipe outlet where clean water is being discharged into a stabilized area. Page 102 Maintenance Specifications: • Buildup of debris; or • Initial signs of erosion or scouring; or • Inlet/outlet erosion control(s) and/or velocity dissipation controls show signs of erosion or sedimentation altering functionality Corrective Action Specifications: • Water is running around or beneath the installed slope drain causing erosion; or • The slope drain is plugged, crushed or damaged in such a way that water is prevented from flowing through as intended. Removal/Abandonment Remove slope drain on completion of construction and stabilization activities. Figure SD-1 Slope Drain Installation References Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES). Construction Site Storm Water Runoff Control. Washington, D.C., February 2003. <http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/menuofbmps/con_site.cfm> New York State Department of Environmental Conservation, New York Guidelines for Urban Erosion and Sediment Control. New York. Fourth Edition, 1997. Page 103 Trench Breakers (TB) Description Trench breakers, also known as trench plugs, are barriers placed within an open pipeline excavation in order to slow flow and reduce erosion in the trench and to prevent the trench from becoming a subsurface drainage path. They reduce trench erosion and the volume and velocity of trench water at the bottom of a slope. Applicability Trench breakers may be used in the following applications: • On steep slopes. • Above wetlands. • At waterbody crossings. • At road crossings. Construction specifications 1. Trench breakers should be installed both before and after the lowering-in of pipeline. 2. An engineer or similarly qualified professional shall determine the need for and spacing of trench breakers. Otherwise, spacing shall be according to the following table: Slope (%) Spacing (feet) 5 – 15 250’-350’ 15 – 30 150’-250’ >30 50’-150’ 3. At a minimum, install a trench breaker at the base of slopes greater than 5 percent where the base of the slope is less than 50 feet from a waterbody or wetland and where needed to avoid draining a waterbody or wetland. 4. Dig keys into trench bottom and sides to the extent feasible for added stability. Page 104 5. Trench breakers should be installed to within 1 foot of the surface to allow for adequate topsoil placement. Maintenance Specifications: • Buildup of debris; or • Sedimentation occurring in the spaces between material; or • Occurrence of scouring/undercutting Corrective Action Specifications: • Dislodged material resulting in bypass of the check dam; or • Improper installation Page 105 References Federal Energy Regulatory Commission (FERC), Upland Erosion Control, Revegetation, and Maintenance Plan. January 2003. Page 106 Water Bar (WB) Description A water bar is an earthen ridge, or ridge and channel, constructed slightly off contour across pipeline rights-of- way (R.O.W .s) or other disturbed area that is subject to erosion. Water bars are the primary Control Measure for controlling water velocity on steep R.O.W .s by diverting surface runoff at pre-designed intervals. Applicability Water bars are applicable where runoff protection is needed to prevent erosion on sloping access R.O.W.s or long, narrow sloping areas generally less than 100 feet in width. Water bars help to decrease slope length and divert runoff away from a disturbed area. This is a practice that is often used on buried pipelines, limited-use roads, trails, and firebreaks. It is a method of retiring roads and trails as well as abandoned roads where surface water runoff may cause erosion of exposed mineral soil. Limitations • Not for use on concentrated flows • May cause concentrated flows from sheet flow • Requires vegetative cover or other filter at discharge point Construction specifications See Figure WB-1. 1. Utilize available material to construct Water Bar. 2. Compact the Water Bar to the design cross section. 3. Exposed areas shall be seeded and mulched. 4. Extend the water bar inlet and outlet 1 foot or more beyond the edge of the R.O.W. or disturbed area to keep the diverted water from re-entering the area. 5. Space the water bars according to engineer site specific specification or Table WB-1. 6. Locate the outlet on an undisturbed area. Field spacing shall be adjusted to use the most stable outlet areas. Outlet protection will be provided when natural areas are not adequate (see Figure WB-2). Maintenance Specifications: • Initial signs of erosion or loss of compaction on or along the water bar resulting in height less than 1/3 the install height; or • Occurrence of sediment buildup behind the water bar greater than 2/3 the overall height Corrective Action Specifications: • Breach along water bar which allows for bypass; or • Inadequate control measure; or • Improper installation Page 107 Removal/Abandonment Water bars on pipeline R.O.W.s, infrequently used roads, or other disturbed areas will remain in place as long as necessary. Table WB-1 Water Bar Spacing ROW Grade (%) Low to Non-Erosive Soils (1) Erosive Soils (2) 0 – 5 220’-270’ 115’-145’ 6 – 10 175’-225’ 85’-115’ 11 – 15 125’-175’ 50’-80’ 16 – 20 90’-140’ 35’-65’ 21 – 30 75’-125’ 25’-55’ 31+ 25’-75’ 15’-45’ 1Low Erosion Soils = Coarse Rocky Soils, Gravel, and Some Clay 2High Erosion Soils = Fine, Friable Soils, Silt, Fine Sands 3Site-specific terrain may also dictate spacing of water bars Page 108 Figure WB-1 Water Bar Installation for Pipeline Page 109 Page 110 References Horizon Environmental Services, Inc, Guidance Document Reasonable and Prudent Practices for Stabilization (RAPPS) of Oil and Gas Construction Sites. April 2004. Keller, Gordon, and James Sherar, Low-Volume Roads Engineering, Best Management Practices Field Guide. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), Forest Service, US Agency of International Development (USAID), 2005. <http://ntl.bts.gov/lib/24000/24600/24650/Index_BMP_Field_Guide.htm> Maine Department of Conservation, Best Management Practices for Forestry: Protecting Maine’s Water Quality. Maine Forest Service, Forest Policy and Management Division. Augusta, Maine. 2004. <http://www.state.me.us/doc/mfs/pubs/pdf/bmp_manual/bmp_manual.pdf> New York State Department of Environmental Conservation, New York Guidelines for Urban Erosion and Sediment Control. New York. Fourth Edition, 1997. Page 111 Wing Ditch (WD) Description Wing ditches (turnouts) are extensions of roadside ditches. Wing ditches effectively remove runoff water from the road and/or roadside ditch into well-stabilized areas before it reaches a waterway. Applicability • Wing ditches should be used as much as possible, but their best use may be on slopes longer than 150 ft or greater than 5%, as conditions allow. • Wing ditches are applicable where fairly flat naturally vegetated areas exist at intervals by the roadside. Limitations • Wing ditches should be on gradual slopes only. • Wing ditches require vegetative cover or other filter at the discharge point. • Wing ditches only work well if small volumes of runoff drain into the turnout. Wing ditches should only receive runoff from the road and ditch surface, not from large, uphill watersheds. Construction specifications 1. Use wing ditches wherever possible and on undisturbed soil. 2. Slope wing ditch gradually down from bottom of roadside ditch. Slope should be continuous and should not allow water to pond within the wing ditch. 3. Angle wing ditch at approximately 30 degrees to the roadside ditch. 4. Wing ditch should be seeded/vegetated. 5. Discharge wing ditch into well-vegetated area or install a secondary control such as a wattle, sediment trap, or slash. 6. If a pipeline ROW is adjacent to the roadway, the wing ditch should extend across the entire pipeline ROW before discharging. 7. Space wing ditches according to slope as indicated on Figure WD-1. Page 112 Maintenance Specifications: • Initial signs of erosion or scouring in or along the wing ditch resulting in loss of structure more than 1/3 of the install depth; or • Occurrence of sediment buildup within the wing ditch greater than 2/3 the overall structure Corrective Action Specifications: • Breach along wing ditch which allows for bypass; or • Inadequate control measure; or • Improper installation Page 113 References Horizon Environmental Services, Inc, Guidance Document Reasonable and Prudent Practices for Stabilization (RAPPS) of Oil and Gas Construction Sites. April 2004. Keller, Gordon, and James Sherar, Low-Volume Roads Engineering, Best Management Practices Field Guide. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), Forest Service, US Agency of International Development (USAID), 2005. <http://ntl.bts.gov/lib/24000/24600/24650/Index_BMP_Field_Guide.htm> United States Department of the Interior and United States Department of Agriculture. Surface Operating Standards and Guidelines for Oil and Gas Exploration and Development “Gold Book”. BLM/WO/ST- 06/021+3071. Bureau of Land Management (BLM). Denver, Colorado. Fourth Edition, 2006. Page 114 Sediment Control Measures Check Dam (CD) ................................................................................................................................................. 115 Detention Pond (DP) ........................................................................................................................................... 119 Filter Berm (FB) ................................................................................................................................................... 123 Rumble Strip (RS) ............................................................................................................................................... 125 Sediment Trap (ST) ............................................................................................................................................. 128 Slash (SL) ............................................................................................................................................................ 136 Straw Bale Barrier (SBB)..................................................................................................................................... 138 Wattles (W) .......................................................................................................................................................... 142 Page 115 Check Dam (CD)/Velocity Checks Description Check dams are small, temporary dams constructed across a diversion or roadside ditch. Check dams can be constructed using aggregate, rock, gravel bags, or wattles. Checks are used to slow the velocity of concentrated flow in a channel and thus reduce erosion. As a secondary function, check dams can also be used to catch sediment from the channel itself or from the contributing drainage area as stormwater runoff flows through or over the structure. The purpose of a check dam is to slow runoff velocity, capture sediment, and release runoff through or over the structure. Applicability Check dams are most often used in small, open channels with a contributing drainage area of less than 10 acres, and side slopes of 2:1 or less. Check dams may be used in the following applications: • In diversions or roadside ditches where it is not practical to line the channel or implement other flow control and sediment control practices. • In roadside ditches where aggregate is recycled through during road maintenance. • In diversions where temporary seeding has been recently implemented but has not had time to take root and fully develop. • As a series of check dams, spaced at appropriate intervals, used in one of the above three applications. Limitations • Check dams should not be used in live, continuously flowing streams unless approved by an appropriate regulatory agency. • Check dams may require frequent removal of accumulated sediments. Dams should therefore be located in areas accessible for maintenance. Construction specifications Small, sometimes temporary dam constructed across channelized flows to counteract erosion by reducing water flow velocity and trap small amounts of sediment. 1. Install aggregate check dams according to Figure CD-1, wattle check dams according to Figure CD-2, Page 116 2. Check dams should be located in areas accessible for maintenance. 3. Check dams should be installed to slow velocity and not divert from defined channel. 4. Roadside check dams can be constructed from a number of different materials. When using rock, the material diameter may be 1 to 15 inches depending on the expected velocity and quantity of runoff within the channel. Aggregate check dams constructed within roadside ditches should use the same material used to surface the roadway, as shown on Figure CD-1. 5. All check dams should have sufficient space up slope from the barrier to allow ponding, and to provide room for sediment storage. The center of the dam should be lower than the edges. This design creates a weir effect that helps to channel flows away from the banks and prevent further erosion. 6. Additional stability may be achieved by implanting the dam material into the sides and bottom of the channel, if necessary. 7. Spacing shall be determined based on site-specific conditions and needs. 8. When installing more than one check dam in a channel, an outlet control measure should be installed below the final dam in the series. Because this area is likely to be vulnerable to further erosion, armoring or some other stabilization measure is highly recommended. Maintenance Specifications: • Buildup of debris; or • Sedimentation occurring in the spaces between material; or • Occurrence of scouring/undercutting Corrective Action Specifications: • Dislodged material resulting in bypass of the check dam; or • Sedimentation occurring over more than 2/3 of the armoring material; or • Need for continuation or additional check dams above or below pre-installed check dam; or • Improper installation Removal/Abandonment Removal of check dams is optional. Check dams within roadside ditches are usually used as temporary controls, where other check dams may be left in place to silt out. If removing a check dam, all accumulated sediment should be removed. Removal of a check dam should be completed only after the contributing drainage area has been completely stabilized. Permanent vegetation should replace areas from which gravel, stone, logs, or other material has been removed. Page 117 Page 118 Figure CD-2 Wattle Check Dam Installation References Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT), Erosion Control and Stormwater Quality Guide. 2002. <http://www.dot.state.co.us/environmental/envWaterQual/wqms4.asp> Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES). Construction Site Storm Water Runoff Control. Washington, D.C., February 2003. http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/menuofbmps/con_site.cfm Horizon Environmental Services, Inc, Guidance Document Reasonable and Prudent Practices for Stabilization (RAPPS) of Oil and Gas Construction Sites. April 2004. Page 119 Detention Pond (DP) Description A Detention Pond’s main purpose is to control/regulate flows from a site. Typically, detention ponds are used to reduce the developed peak flow from a site to a peak flow equal to or less than the historic (i.e., pre- developed) peak flow. The key component of a detention pond is outlet flow control designed to retard peak flows released from the pond. A secondary benefit of the pond is water quality improvement (i.e., settling out of sediment), but this is not a detention ponds primary purpose. Detention ponds are formed by excavating below grade and/or by constructing an earthen embankment with an outlet to slow the release of runoff. The outlet may consist of a spillway, a level spreader, any combination of these, or some other type of outlet control. Note that it is possible to create a hybrid detention pond – sediment trap system through the design of the outlet works. The outlet works can be designed to include “extended detention” to “treat” first flush waters. “Treat” refers to sediment removal via sedimentation. Applicability Detention ponds should be considered and/or used in the following applications: • Sites where downstream water conveyance facilities are over, at, or near capacity during storm events. • Sites where increasing peak runoff flows above historical would be detrimental to downstream facilities. This can include but is not limited to: excess/increased erosion, excess levels of sedimentation, and increased flooding and flood elevations to detrimental levels. • Permanent facilities (facilities design to be in use more than 15 years). • Used as a storage area for snow until melting conditions occur. Limitations • Occasional maintenance may be required to remove debris and/or trash from the outlet works. • Occasional maintenance will be needed to remove sediment. • Never construct a detention pond on a live flowing stream or in wetlands. Design criteria The Caerus Civil Construction personnel should be consulted prior to design or implementation. Page 120 Location Detention ponds should be located at points of discharge from disturbed areas. The location will be determined by the natural terrain, drainage pattern of the runoff, and the accessibility for maintenance. Ponds should not be located in areas where their failure due to stormwater runoff excess can lead to further erosive damage of the landscape. Alternative diversion pathways should be designed to accommodate these potential overflows. Well pad detention ponds shall be located at an outside edge of the pad and as far as possible from the pad access road, utilities, and all infrastructures. Storage capacity A detention pond should be designed to maximize surface area for infiltration and sediment settling. The Design Engineer should use the NOAA point precipitation value generator to determine the design rainfall values associated with the specific project location. Where possible, the detention pond will be built to detain a minimum of a 25 year/24-hour precipitation event. To comply with this, the required storage capacity of a pond can be estimated using the following guideline: 3,600 ft3 of storage is required per acre of contributing drainage area plus freeboard. Ponds should have a minimum freeboard of 12 inches or 150% volume capacity. The pond should generally be configured so that the pond is at least 2 feet deep, but where possible not more than 6 feet deep at its deepest point. The surface area of the pond should be maximized before depth, as in general greater surface areas facilitate better settling of particulates. A detention pond may be designed by a Professional Engineer if there are any facilities, structures, roads, utilities, sensitive wildlife areas, or other critical items downstream of the pond that would have the potential to be impacted in the event of a pond failure or as required by Federal, State, or Local law. For example, dams within Colorado are subject to regulation if they are “jurisdictional” sized. Jurisdictional sized dams are defined as: • Capacity greater than 100 acre-feet, • Surface area in excess of 20 acres at the high-water line, or • The dam exceeds 10 feet in height (the exact measurement to determine height depends on the type of dam see Rule 4.2.5.1 of Rules and Regulations for Dam Safety and Dam Construction for Colorado). Construction specifications a. If possible, detention ponds, along with other perimeter controls, shall be installed before any land disturbance takes place in the drainage area. b. Should be located above the floodplain, where possible. c. Area under embankment shall be cleared, grubbed, and stripped of any vegetation and root mat. The pool area shall be cleared. d. The fill material for the embankment shall be free of roots and other woody vegetation as well as over-sized stones, rocks, organic material or other objectionable material. The embankment shall be compacted by traversing with equipment while it is being constructed. Fill shall be placed in maximum of 8-inch loose lifts and compacted prior to placement of the next lift. Seeding of the embankment should be performed as soon as possible after construction of the sediment reservoir. Mulching may also be used to cover the embankment in combination with seeding or during time periods when seeding is ineffective. e. Options for dewatering of the detention pond include, but are not limited to: Page 121 a. Slope drain - Dewatering may be achieved through a 12 to 24-inch pipe. The slope drain shall be sloped (1% minimum) and routed through the detention pond berm to discharge into a sediment trapping device or into a well-stabilized area. b. Spillway - Dewatering may be achieved through a defined spillway located at least 12-inches lower than the berm of the detention pond. The spillway shall be stabilized with armoring (see the Armoring (AR) Control Measure), erosion control blanket (see the Mulching Control Measure), or other approved stabilization method. The spillway may discharge into a sediment trapping device or into a well-stabilized area. See Figure DP-2. c. Level spreader – Dewatering may be achieved through a level spreader. A level spreader is a device used to prevent erosion and to improve infiltration by spreading concentrated storm water runoff evenly over the ground at a level contour as shallow flow instead of through channels (concentrated flow, which is more erosive). This reduces flow speed and increases infiltration. The level spreader may consist of compacted earth, which will be vegetated upon completion of construction. However, if erosion is noted during inspections it may be necessary to install aggregate, wattles, or other approved stabilization method along the length of the level spreader. See Figure DP-3. d. Filter Berm – The entire Detention Pond/Sediment Trap berm fill cross-section may be constructed of coarse angular native rock or import material. Due to its internal void space, the Filter Berm provides a permeable media for slow-release of stormwater following sediment deposition in the pond/trap/berm. Filter Berms are typically constructed at natural grade and disperse stormwater at their down-stream toe of slope to an existing vegetation buffer. Filter Berms are constructed with a level top line and typically do not need a defined spillway. Filter Berms are considered for dewatering applications with perhaps high influent rates and where maximum perimeter dispersal to the surrounding vegetation community is desired. e. Vegetate the detention pond in accordance with the Revegetation (RV) Control Measure. Maintenance Specifications: • Signs of visible erosion, on or around control measure; or • Occurrence of sediment buildup within the trap greater than 2/3 the overall height or amount that would result in ultimate failure or bypass of Control Measure; or • Inlet/outlet erosion control(s) and/or velocity dissipation controls show signs of erosion or sedimentation altering functionality Corrective Action Specifications: • Breach or failure within containment that results in an unintended release of water from the Detention Pond. • Occurrence of sediment buildup within the pond greater than 2/3 the overall height or amount that would result in ultimate failure or bypass of Control Measure • Not adequality sized to retain the 2yr 24-hour event. Removal/Abandonment After the contributing area has been properly stabilized, the detention pond may remain in place (if the pond itself is also fully stabilized), or the pond may be removed, and the newly disturbed area shall be stabilized. Page 122 Figure DP-2 Detention Pond Installation – Spillway Outlet Figure DP-3 Detention Pond Installation – Level Spreader Outlet References Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT), Erosion Control and Stormwater Quality Guide. 2002. <http://www.dot.state.co.us/environmental/envWaterQual/wqms4.asp> Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES). Construction Site Storm Water Runoff Control. Washington, D.C., February 2003 <http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/menuofbmps/con_site.cfm> Horizon Environmental Services, Inc, Guidance Document Reasonable and Prudent Practices for Stabilization (RAPPS) of Oil and Gas Construction Sites. April 2004. Page 123 Filter Berm (FB) Description A filter berm is a temporary ridge made up of natural materials that already occur on the project site. Rock filter berms use site gravel, stone, or rock. Both types of filter berms are placed along a level contour to slow, filter, and divert flow and act as an efficient form of sediment control. Filter berms are easy to install and disturbance during installation is minimal. In some configurations, filter berms are covered with a filter cloth to stabilize the structure and improve barrier efficiency. Applicability The drainage area for filter berms will be no greater than 2 acres. In addition, the drainage slope leading down to a filter berm will be no greater than 2:1 and no longer than 100 feet. The following are suitable applications: • 5 to 7 feet beyond the toe of slopes. • Along the site perimeter. • Along streams and channels, or adjacent to roadways. • Around temporary spoil areas or other small cleared areas. Limitations • Intended to be used only in gently sloping areas and are not appropriate for high-velocity flow areas. • A large amount of material is needed to construct a useful filter berm. Therefore, filter berms are only applicable to sites where there is enough material from clearing and grubbing or rock material to form a sufficiently sized berm. • May be difficult to remove after construction. Construction specifications The performance-oriented specification for filter berms is that sediment is not observed on the down gradient side of the berm. If sediment is observed on the down gradient side of the berm, the filter berm should be maintained or re-installed. Rock filter berms See Figure FB-2 for installation details. 1. Place filter berm along a level contour. Use well-graded, angular site gravel or crushed rock of medium to large diameter with larger rocks on the bottom. 2. Trenching is not required. 3. Berms should be spaced according to the steepness of the slope, with berms spaced closer together as the slope increases. Maintenance Specifications: • Buildup of debris; or • Sedimentation occurring in the spaces between material; or • Occurrence of scouring Page 124 Corrective Action Specifications: • Dislodged material that resulting in bypass of the filter berm; or • Sedimentation occurring over more than 2/3 of the berm material; or • Need for continuation or additional berm material above or below pre-installed filter berm; or • Improper installation Removal/Abandonment Filter berms may be removed after uphill drainage areas are stabilized. Rock and brush may also be left in place only if it does not cause any landscaping problems. Remove all manmade materials (wire, fabric, and/or stakes). Figure FB-2 Rock Filter Berm Installation References Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES). Construction Site Storm Water Runoff Control. Washington, D.C., February 2003. <http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/menuofbmps/con_site.cfm> Horizon Environmental Services, Inc, Guidance Document Reasonable and Prudent Practices for Stabilization (RAPPS) of Oil and Gas Construction Sites. April 2004. Page 125 Rumble Strip (RS)/Vehicle Track Pads Description The purpose of a rumble strip is to minimize the amount of tracked mud and dust that leaves a site. As a vehicle drives over the pad mud and sediment are removed from the vehicle's wheels and off-site transport of sediment is reduced. The pad also reduces erosion and rutting on the soil beneath the stabilization structure Applicability Typically, rumble strips are installed at locations where construction traffic leaves or enters an existing paved road. However, the applicability of site entrance stabilization may be extended to any roadway or entrance where vehicles will access or leave the site, particularly for pipelines and facilities. Limitations • Although stabilizing a construction entrance is a good way to help reduce the amount of sediment leaving a site, some soil may still be deposited from vehicle tires onto paved surfaces. To further reduce the chance of these sediments polluting stormwater runoff, sweeping of the paved area adjacent to the rumble strip may be needed. • Sediment traps or other secondary sediment controls are needed to capture that sediment that accumulates at the pad and may run off during storm events. Construction specifications See Figure RS-1 for installation details. 1. Locate the pad approximately 60 feet back from the entrance at any county road. 2. If the pad is constructed on a crowned road, a roadside ditch with check dams or sediment traps shall be located on both sides of the road to collect runoff from the pad. If the road slopes to only one side of the road then only one roadside ditch with sediment controls will be needed. 3. Piping of surface water under entrance shall be provided as required. 4. Place a matrix of 1.5” minimum sized stone gravel, or reclaimed or recycled concrete equivalent, to a minimum thickness of six inches, a minimum width of 12 feet (or the width of the road) and a minimum length of 50 feet. 5. All surface water flowing or diverted toward the rumble strip shall be piped across the entrance if needed. If piping is impractical, a mountable berm with 5:1 slopes will be permitted. Page 126 See Figure RS-2 for installation details. 1. Vehicle Track Pads should be of sufficient width to handle the widest vehicles. 2. Pads should be long enough to remove mud, soil, and rock from tires. 3. Design so that drainage from the pad area leads to a trap, or other sediment control measure. Maintenance Specifications: • Buildup of debris, mud, or soil; or • Sedimentation occurring in the spaces between material; or • Occurrence of rutting; or • Tracking of material off-site • Regrade rock as needed to ensure positive drainage. Corrective Action Specifications: • Dislodged rock that leaves exposed soils; or • Sedimentation occurring over more than ½ of the armoring material; or • Improper installation Page 127 References Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT), Erosion Control and Stormwater Quality Guide. 2002. <http://www.dot.state.co.us/environmental/envWaterQual/wqms4.asp> Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES). Construction Site Storm Water Runoff Control. Washington, D.C., February 2003. <http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/menuofbmps/con_site.cfm> Horizon Environmental Services, Inc, Guidance Document Reasonable and Prudent Practices for Stabilization (RAPPS) of Oil and Gas Construction Sites. April 2004. Page 128 Sediment Trap (ST) Description Sediment traps are typically small to medium sized ponding areas that retain or detain flows with the primary purpose of water quality improvement via sedimentation. They are usually installed in natural ground along a controlled water conveyance or other point of discharge from a disturbed area. Sediment traps are typically formed by excavating below grade and occasionally also formed by constructing an earthen embankment with a stabilized spillway to slow the release of runoff. Applicability Sediment traps are generally temporary control measures used at the outlets of stormwater diversion structures (such as water bars or wing ditches), channels, slope drains, construction site entrance wash racks, or any other runoff conveyance that discharges waters containing erosion sediment and debris. Traps are common along pipelines or roadways and may be located in series to allow for backup control in case one trap fails. Sediment traps can be used in the following applications: • Used as a temporary storage area during dewatering activities. • Placed on stormwater conveyance and diversion outlets including, but not limited to: culverts, wing ditches, water bars, slope drains, and construction entrance wash stations. • Water and sediment storage area on well pads, at the base of well pads, and/or down-slope of other large disturbed areas. • Used as a storage area for snow until melting conditions occur. Limitations • Regular maintenance is required to remove sediment. Traps should be located near roads or where they are accessible to remove sediment. • Sediment traps do not typically remove fine particles such as silts and clays. Never construct a sediment trap on a live flowing stream, natural drainage ways, or in wetlands. Page 129 Design criteria Location The location of sediment traps will be determined by the natural terrain, drainage pattern of the runoff, and the accessibility for maintenance. Sediment traps should not be located in areas where their failure due to stormwater runoff excess can lead to further erosive damage of the landscape. Alternative diversion pathways should be designed to accommodate these potential overflows. Sediment trap locations should also allow for easy maintenance access for the periodic removal of accumulated sediment. Storage capacity A sediment trap should be designed to maximize surface area for infiltration and sediment settling. This will increase the effectiveness of the trap and decrease the likelihood of backup during and after periods of high runoff intensity. Sediment traps shall be sized to accommodate site runoff volumes resulting from the 2-year 24-hour precipitation event as provided by regional NOAA Precipitation Atlases (see Diversion Ditches DD BMP section) and calculated from the Rational Method. From the table below, the sediment trap volume has been estimated by multiplying its tributary disturbed area in acres by the runoff volume for the appropriate runoff coefficient and adding 15% for sediment accumulation. From these calculations, minimum sediment trap volumes have been calculated for the given tributary acreage. Page 130 Minimum Trap Volumes The following formula may be used, as a reference, to estimate the volume of a sediment trap. Volume (ft3) = 0.4 x surface area (ft2) x maximum pool depth (ft). The table below also serves as a volume calculator for various sediment trap dimensions. Sediment traps can be configured as diversion ditches using the runoff volume estimates above. Based on tributary drainage area, various ditch configurations and sizes are provided in the sizing tables below to accommodate corresponding runoff volumes. Page 131 Page 132 Page 133 Construction specifications See Figure ST-1 for installation details and Table 1 for a listing of dimensions associated with different volumes. • If possible, sediment traps, along with other perimeter controls, shall be installed before any land disturbance takes place in the drainage area. • Traps should be located above the floodplain, where possible. If there are space constraints, several small sediment traps may be constructed in series. • Area under embankment shall be cleared, grubbed, and stripped of any vegetation and root mat. The pool area shall be cleared. • The fill material for the embankment shall be free of roots and other woody vegetation as well as over-sized stones, rocks, organic material, or other objectionable material. The embankment shall be compacted by traversing with equipment while it is being constructed. Seeding of the embankment should be performed as soon as possible after construction of the sediment trap. Erosion control blanketing may also be used to cover the embankment in combination with seeding or during time periods when seeding is ineffective. • The spillway may consist of a stone section in the embankment formed by a combination coarse aggregate/riprap to provide for filtering/detention capability. See Figure ST-1 for spillway installation details. A spillway or slope drain may be utilized to drain the sediment trap. Slope drain pipe diameter sizes may be determined using the slope drain sizing table below. Should a spillway be desired, the spillway shall be compacted and lined with coarse angular aggregate/riprap, or local adequately sized rock to provide for filtering/detention capability and to prevent erosion of the spillway. The spillway may alternately be constructed with a small section of pipe or may consist of a level spreader, where the entire embankment is constructed at a uniform elevation. The spillway weir for each sediment trap should be at least four feet long for a 1-acre drainage area and increase by 2 feet for each additional drainage acre added, up to a maximum drainage area of 5 acres. See Figure ST-1 for installation details. 1. If possible, sediment traps, along with other perimeter controls, shall be installed before any land disturbance takes place in the drainage area. 2. Traps should be located above the floodplain, where possible. If there are space constraints, several small sediment traps may be constructed in series. 3. Area under embankment shall be cleared, grubbed, and stripped of any vegetation and root mat. The pool area shall be cleared. 4. The fill material for the embankment shall be free of roots and other woody vegetation as well as over- sized stones, rocks, organic material or other objectionable material. The embankment shall be compacted by traversing with equipment while it is being constructed. Seeding of the embankment should be performed as soon as possible after construction of the sediment trap. Mulching may also be used to cover the embankment in combination with seeding or during time periods when seeding is ineffective. 5. Potential options for dewatering of the sediment trap are: a. Spillway - Dewatering may be achieved through a defined spillway located at least 6-inches lower than the berm of the sediment trap. The spillway shall be stabilized with armoring to support the establishment of vegetation. The spillway shall be discharge into a sediment trapping device or into a well-stabilized area. Page 134 b. Level spreader – Dewatering may be achieved through a level spreader, which may extend around as much as half of the sediment trap. A level spreader is a device used to prevent erosion and to improve infiltration by spreading concentrated storm water runoff evenly over the ground at a level contour as shallow flow instead of through channels. This reduces flow speed and increases infiltration. The level spreader may consist of compacted earth, which will be vegetated on completion of construction. However, if erosion is noted during inspections it may be necessary to install aggregate, mulching, or wattles along the length of the level spreader. c. Filter Berm – The entire Detention Pond/Sediment Trap berm fill cross-section may be constructed of coarse angular native rock or import material. Due to its internal void space, the Filter Berm provides a permeable media for slow-release of stormwater following sediment deposition in the pond/trap/berm. Filter Berms are typically constructed at natural grade and disperse stormwater at their down-stream toe of slope to an existing vegetation buffer. Filter Berms are constructed with a level top line and typically do not need a defined spillway. Filter Berms are considered for dewatering applications with perhaps high influent rates and where maximum perimeter dispersal to the surrounding vegetation community is desired. Maintenance Specifications: • Signs of visible erosion, on or around control measure; or • Occurrence of sediment buildup within the trap greater than 2/3 the overall height or amount that would result in ultimate failure or bypass of Control Measure; or • Inlet/outlet erosion control(s) and/or velocity dissipation controls show signs of erosion or sedimentation altering functionality Corrective Action Specifications: • Sediment trap has a breach or failure resulting in an unintended release of water; or • Traps are not placed in the appropriate locations to collect the anticipated amount of precipitation; or • Traps are more then 2/3 full of sediment. Removal/Abandonment After the contributing area has been properly stabilized, the sediment trap may remain in place (if the trap itself is also fully stabilized), or the sediment trap may be removed, and the newly disturbed area shall be stabilized. Page 135 Figure ST-1 Sediment Trap Installation References Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT), Erosion Control and Stormwater Quality Guide. 2002. <http://www.dot.state.co.us/environmental/envWaterQual/wqms4.asp> Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES). Construction Site Storm Water Runoff Control. Washington, D.C., February 2003. http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/menuofbmps/con_site.cfm Horizon Environmental Services, Inc, Guidance Document Reasonable and Prudent Practices for Stabilization (RAPPS) of Oil and Gas Construction Sites. April 2004. Page 136 Slash (SL) Description Slash is any natural debris or material left over from site clearing and grubbing. Slash may include small tree branches, root mats, grass, leaves, stone, etc... Placement of slash over disturbed areas can help control off-site transport of sediment by slowing the flow of runoff, which minimizes erosion, and trapping sediment until vegetation is established at the sediment source. Applicability Slash may be used for the following: • Primarily used at site discharge points. • As a pre-construction BMP. • To create a filter berm (see the Filter Berm (FB) Control Measure). • As outlet protection for culverts. • As slash mulch in areas requiring revegetation (see the Mulching (M) Control Measure). • As a perimeter control. • Alongside access roads. Limitations • Material may need to be cut up or broken into smaller pieces. • Slash does not eliminate the need to revegetate. Construction specifications 1. Material that has been cleared/grubbed may be chipped on-site prior to reuse. 2. For slash filter berms, see the Filter Berm (FB) Control Measure. 3. For slash mulch, see the Mulching (M) Control Measure. 4. Prior to spreading slash over a disturbed area, the area may be seeded in accordance with the Revegetation (RV) Control Measure. Page 137 Maintenance Specifications: • Initial signs of erosion or scouring; or • Occurrence of sediment buildup greater than 2/3 the overall height of the slash Corrective Action Specifications: • Breach in slash which allows for bypass; or • Inadequate control measure Removal/Abandonment Removal of slash is not necessary. Slash that remains in place serves as compost and adds organic matter to existing soils. Page 138 Straw Bale Barrier (SBB) Description A straw bale barrier is a series of entrenched and staked straw bales placed on a level contour to intercept sheet flows. The barrier reduces runoff velocity and filters sediment laden runoff from small drainage areas of disturbed soil. The barrier may also be used to protect against erosion. Applicability Straw bale barriers may be used below disturbed areas subject to sheet and rill erosion where the length of slope above the straw bale barrier does not exceed the following limits: Constructed Slope Percent Slope Slope Length (ft) 2:1 50% 25’ 3:1 33% 50’ 4:1 25% 75’ Straw bales may be used in the following applications: • Below the toe of erodible slopes or other small cleared areas • At the top of slopes to divert runoff away from disturbed slopes • Along streams and channels for both erosion and sediment control Limitations • For short-term use only • Only for use in short sections • For use below small drainage areas less than 2 acres • Decomposes over time • May be consumed by livestock Page 139 • Straw bales will be certified weed free to avoid invasive weeds that may develop and should not be used in areas where weeds are a concern. • Removal of anchor stakes, and bale, twine, or wire will be necessary after stabilization is complete • Not recommended for concentrated flow, live streams, or swales where there is the possibility of a washout Construction specifications The performance-oriented specification for a straw bale barrier is that sediment is not observed on the down gradient side of the barrier. If sediment is observed on the down gradient side of the barrier, the straw bales should be maintained or re-installed. See Figure SBB-1 (one row of bales) or SBB-2 (two rows of bales) for installation details. 1. Bales shall be placed in a single row on a level contour with ends of adjacent bales tightly abutting one another. Bales shall be certified weed free. Bales will be installed with bale twine or wire parallel to the ground. 2. Allow sufficient space up slope from the barrier to allow ponding, and to provide room for sediment storage. 3. All bales shall be either wire-bound or string-tied. Straw bales shall be installed so that bindings are oriented around the sides rather than along the tops and bottoms of the bales in order to prevent deterioration of the bindings. 4. If straw bales are used in a disturbed area, a trench shall be excavated the width of a bale and the length of the proposed barrier to a secure depth. If straw bales are part of a layered Control Measure system (3 or more) or if a vegetated buffer (see Vegetated Buffer (VB) Control Measure) is used and the straw bales are placed on undisturbed earth, the bales may be secured without trenching (although additional fasteners may be needed). 5. After the bales are staked and chinked (gaps filled by wedging), the excavated soil shall be backfilled against the barrier. Backfill soil shall conform to the ground level on the downhill side and shall be built up to 4 inches against the uphill side of the barrier. 6. Each bale shall be securely anchored by at least two fasteners driven through the bale. The first fastener in each bale shall be driven toward the previously laid bale to force the bales together. Fasteners shall be driven into the ground to securely anchor the bales. Maintenance Specifications: • Buildup of debris; or • Sedimentation occurring over more than ½ the height of the bales; or • Occurrence of scouring; or • Loss or missing stakes Corrective Action Specifications: • Breach or unintended by-pass of straw bale structure; or • Sedimentation occurring over more than 2/3 of the bales; or • Need for continuation or additional bales above or below pre-installed bales; or • Improper installation Page 140 Removal/Abandonment At the end of their useful lives, the twine or wire will be cut, and the straw will be spread out over the ground as compost. Any sediment deposits remaining in place after the straw bale barrier is no longer required should be removed from the site or dressed to conform to the existing grade, prepared and seeded. Figure SBB-1 Straw Bale Installation – 1 Row Page 141 Figure SBB-2 Straw Bale Installation – 2 Rows References Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT), Erosion Control and Stormwater Quality Guide. 2002. <http://www.dot.state.co.us/environmental/envW aterQual/wqms4.asp> Horizon Environmental Services, Inc, Guidance Document Reasonable and Prudent Practices for Stabilization (RAPPS) of Oil and Gas Construction Sites. April 2004. New York State Department of Environmental Conservation, New York Guidelines for Urban Erosion and Sediment Control. New York. Fourth Edition, 1997. Page 142 Wattles (W) Description A wattle (also called a fiber roll) consists of straw, or other similar materials bound into a tight tubular roll. Excelsior log (aspen fiber) is the preferred wattle. When wattles are placed at the toe and on the face of slopes, they intercept runoff, reduce its flow velocity, release the runoff as sheet flow, and provide removal of sediment from the runoff. By interrupting the length of a slope, fiber rolls can also reduce erosion. Applicability Wattles may be suitable: • As slope breakers along the toe, top, face, and at grade breaks of exposed and erodible slopes to shorten slope length, reduce runoff velocity, and spread runoff as sheet flow • At the end of a downward slope where it transitions to a steeper slope • Along the perim eter of a project in an undisturbed area • At the overflow locations of sediment traps • As check dams in unlined ditches • Around temporary stockpiles Limitations • When used in disturbed areas, wattles are not effective unless trenched. • Difficult to move once saturated. Page 143 • If not properly staked and trenched in, wattles could be transported by high flows. • Wattles have a very limited sediment capture zone. • Wattles should not be used on slopes subject to creep, slumping, or landslide. • Wattles should not be used where periodic road or surface maintenance activities are expected. . Construction specifications The Caerus Environmental Coordinator or Construction Coordinator should be contacted prior to installation. The performance-oriented specification for wattles is that sediment is not observed on the down gradient side of the wattle row. If sediment is observed on the down gradient side of the wattle, the wattle should be maintained or re-installed. In areas prone to cattle grazing, utilizing an Excelsior wattle is recommended. See Figure W-1 for wattles used to control erosion along slopes. 1. Locate wattles on level contours spaced as follows: a. Slope inclination of 4:1 or flatter: Fiber rolls should be placed at a maximum interval of 20 ft. b. Slope inclination between 4:1 and 2:1: Fiber Rolls should be placed at a maximum interval of 15 ft. (a closer spacing is more effective). c. Slope inclination 2:1 or greater: Fiber Rolls should be placed at a maximum interval of 10 ft. (a closer spacing is more effective). 2. Turn the ends of the wattles up slope to prevent runoff from going around the roll. 3. If wattles are used in a disturbed area, stake wattles into a 2 to 4 in. deep trench with a width equal to the diameter of the wattle. Cast soil material upgradient of the wattles. Drive stake at the end of each wattle and spaced 4 ft maximum on center. If wattles are part of a layered Control Measure system (3 or more) or if a vegetated buffer (see Vegetated Buffer (VB)Control Measure) is used and the wattle is placed on undisturbed earth, the wattles may be installed without trenching. Maintenance Specifications: • Buildup of debris; or • Sedimentation occurring over more than ½ the height of the wattle; or • Occurrence of scouring Corrective Action Specifications: • Sedimentation occurring over more than 2/3 of the berm material; or • Need for continuation or additional wattles above or below pre-installed wattle; or • Improper installation Page 144 Removal/Abandonment Wattles are typically left to rot in place. However, if wattles are removed, collect and dispose of sediment accumulation, and fill and compact holes, trenches, depressions or any other ground disturbance to blend with adjacent ground. Figure W-1 Wattle Installation References California Stormwater Quality Association, Stormwater Best Management Practice (BMP) Handbook – Construction. January 2003. <http://www.cabmphandbooks.com/Construction.asp> Page 145 Non-Stormwater Control Measures Dust Control (DC) ................................................................................................................................................ 146 Material Delivery and Storage (MDS) ................................................................................................................. 148 Scheduling (S) ..................................................................................................................................................... 150 Spill Prevention and Control (SPC) .................................................................................................................... 152 Vehicle and Equipment Maintenance (VEM) ..................................................................................................... 156 Waste Management (WM) .................................................................................................................................. 159 Page 146 Dust Control (DC) Description Dust control involves practices such as applying water or dust palliatives (such as magnesium chloride) to be implemented during construction operations to prevent dust and wind erosion from exposed soil surfaces. Other dust control practices not discussed within this Control Measure include the use of speed restrictions, regular road maintenance, restriction of construction activity during high-wind days, road surfacing, and wind breaks and barriers. Applicability These practices are limited to exposed soil where wind erosion is expected. Dust palliatives (such as magnesium chloride) are typically used after spring rains and before winter snows. Limitations The effectiveness of this application can be limited by soil, temperature, and wind velocity. Standards and specifications Irrigation practices can be applied to a project site until the soil is moist and can be repeated as necessary. However, the soil shall not be oversaturated causing runoff to flow from the project site. The distribution system shall be equipped with a proper spray system to ensure even water distribution. When a distribution system is unavailable, at least one mobile unit shall be available at all times to apply water or a dust palliative to the project site. All non-potable tanks, pipes, and other conveyances shall be marked “non-potable water - do not drink.” Seeding, mulching, soil binder, gravel surfacing, and grading techniques are also temporary methods to prevent dust and wind erosion. Refer to the applicable Control Measure. Maintenance Specifications: • Normal following distance visibility is impacted by airborne particulates; or • Reduce vehicular speed; or • Limit access into and through disturbed area Corrective Action Specifications: • Landowner complaint received for dust Page 147 References Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT), Erosion Control and Stormwater Quality Guide. 2002. http://www.dot.state.co.us/environmental/envWaterQual/wqms4.asp Colorado Oil and Gas Commission (COGCC) Rules and Regulations <http://cogcc.state.co.us/> Page 148 Material Delivery and Storage (MDS) Description These practices are to be implemented for proper handling, delivery, and storage of materials in order to prevent spills or leaks into the storm drains or watercourses. Applicability These practices are implemented at all construction sites where delivery and storage of materials may be detrimental to the environment. Materials of concern are not limited to soil, pesticides, herbicides, fertilizers, petroleum products, asphalt and concrete components, and hazardous chemicals such as acids, paints, solvents, adhesives, and curing compounds. Limitations Space limitation may preclude indoor storage. Storage sheds will meet building and fire code requirements. Standards and specifications In accordance with the General Reclamation Surface Management Guideline. Deliver and loading/unloading areas • Keep an accurate, up-to-date inventory of material delivered and stored on site. • Minimize hazardous material storage on site. • Employees trained in emergency spill clean-up procedures should be present when dangerous materials or liquid chemicals are unloaded. • Cover loading and unloading areas to reduce exposure of materials to rainfall. • Routinely check vehicles and equipment such as valves, pumps, flanges, and connections for leaks. • Direct off-site stormwater flows away by grading, berming, or curbing the area around the loading/unloading area. Page 149 Storage and material handling areas • Designate storage areas at the project site. • Locate the storage area away from the storm drain system and watercourses. • Prevent run-on from adjacent areas as well as runoff of stormwater from the material storage areas. • Prevent spills or leakage of liquid materials from contaminating soil (i.e., soaking into the ground) by placing storage areas on impervious surfaces. • Stockpile soil in accordance with the Topsoil Conservation and Segregation (TopS) Control Measure or the Subsoil Segregation (SubS) Control Measure. • Store materials indoors within existing structures or sheds when available. • Safety data sheets (SDS) shall be made available for all materials. • Training for proper material handling and storage techniques shall be required. • Provide sufficient separation between storage containers to allow cleanup and emergency response. • Chemically incompatible materials should not be stored together or in the same storage facility. • Label all materials properly and maintain current legible labels; also maintain a current inventory of all material delivered and stored. • Do not store hazardous chemicals, drums, or bagged materials directly on the ground. Place these items on a pallet and when possible, under cover in secondary containment. • Keep hazardous chemicals in their original containers and keep them well labeled. Spill Clean-up • Caerus personnel will activate the IRP in the event of a significant incident, involving Caerus property, that adversely affects or has the potential to adversely affect the health and safety of employees, the general public, or the environment. Incidents are to be reported immediately to Gas Control, 970-285- 2615, upon the discovery. If the incident poses a risk to human health, personnel will be immediately cleared from the area. If safe to do so, Caerus personnel will try to control the situation with available equipment until emergency response personnel arrive, or until all attempts have been exhausted. For specifics on incident response and cleanup procedures, please refer to the current version of the IRP. • If significant residual materials remain on the ground after construction is complete, properly remove and dispose of any hazardous materials or contaminated soil. Maintenance considerations The frequency of inspections should be in accordance with the SWMP or PCSWMP. Inspect equipment and vehicles for leaks. Maintain an ample supply of cleanup materials at all designated storage and handling areas where leaks and spills are likely to occur. Spot-check material storage and handling areas for compliance. Material storage areas shall be checked for accumulation of non-labeled materials and spills. Containment structures or other perimeter controls shall be inspected and repaired when signs of degradation are visible. References Arizona Department of Transportation (ADOT), Erosion and Pollution Control Manual. 2005. Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT), Erosion Control and Stormwater Quality Guide. 2002. http://www.dot.state.co.us/environmental/envWaterQual/wqms4.asp Page 150 Scheduling (S) Description Develop a schedule for every project that includes sequencing (phasing) of construction activities in conjunction with the implementation of construction site Control Measures in order to reduce the amount and duration of soil exposed by construction activities. The purpose is to minimize erosion of disturbed soils by wind, rain, runoff, and vehicle tracking by reducing the amount and duration of soil exposed to erosion and ensuring that Control Measures are implemented in a timely manner as construction proceeds. Applicability • Construction activities shall be planned to minimize the amount of disturbed land exposed to erosive conditions. • Stabilization measures shall be installed and maintained as work progresses, not just at the completion of construction. Standards and specifications • Schedule the installation of temporary and permanent controls as specified in the Construction General Permit. • The schedule of construction activities and concurrent application of temporary and permanent Control Measures is developed as part of the SWMP or PCSWMP. • Schedule clearing and grubbing activity to allow existing vegetation to remain in place as long as possible. • Where possible, schedule construction for the dry seasons. • Schedule shall include dates for significant long-term operations or activities that may have planned non-stormwater discharges such as dewatering, sawcutting, grinding, drilling, boring, crushing, blasting, painting, hydro-demolition, mortar mixing, bridge cleaning, etc. • Schedule shall include dates for installation of permanent drainage systems and runoff diversion devices. These devices should be installed as early as possible in the construction process. • The schedule shall include non-stormwater Control Measures, waste management, and materials pollution Control Measures. Page 151 • Stabilize non-active areas as specified in the Construction General Permit. • Monitor weather forecast and adjust construction schedule to allow for the implementation of soil stabilization and sediment controls on all disturbed areas prior to the onset of rain. • Where possible, avoid performing maintenance in the winter. • In order to minimize vehicle tracking, restrict site access to only one entrance/exit (if possible), and restrict time of access. Maintenance considerations The frequency of inspections should be in accordance with the SW MP or PCSWMP. Verify that work is progressing in accordance with the schedule. The schedule will be updated when changes are warranted or when directed by the Engineer. References Arizona Department of Transportation (ADOT), Erosion and Pollution Control Manual. 2005. Page 152 Spill Prevention and Control (SPC) Description These practices are implemented to prevent and control spills to ensure that spills and leaks do not result in water quality impacts. Applicability This Control Measure applies to all construction activities. Spill prevention and control measures shall be implemented any time chemicals or hazardous substances are used, stored, or handled. Limitations The measures described in this Control Measure are general. Appropriate practices for specific materials used, stored, or handled on a project site should be identified by site personnel. Standards and specifications Spill prevention and control shall be in accordance with the Piceance Basin’s EHS Response Procedures. The following general design guidelines can be implemented for spill prevention and control measures for various activities and areas: • Identify materials delivered, handled, stored, and used at a project site. Page 153 • Identify project areas and activities potentially susceptible to spills. Areas and activities that are most vulnerable to spills include: transportation facilities, loading and unloading areas, fuel and chemical storage areas, process activities, dust or particulate generating processes, and waste disposal activities. • Follow Caerus’s established Incident Response Plan (IRP) and Spill Prevention and Countermeasure Controls (SPCC) Plan. Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasures (SPCC) Plan A Spill Prevention Control and Countermeasures (SPCC) Plan has been developed and will be implemented for certain products that are stored at the site. The SPCC Plan identifies areas where spills can occur on site, specifies material handling procedures and storage requirements, and identifies spill cleanup procedures. The purpose of this plan is to establish standard operating procedures and the necessary employee training to minimize the likelihood of accidental releases of pollutants that can contaminate stormwater runoff. Spill prevention is prudent both environmentally and economically. Caerus site-specific SPCC plans be provided upon request. Em ergency spill cleanup plans should include the following information: • A description of the facility including the nature of the facility activity and general types and quantities of chemicals stored at the facility. • A site plan showing the location of storage areas for chemicals, location of storm drains, site drainage patterns, fire-fighting equipment and water source locations, and the location and description of any devices used to contain spills such as positive control valves. • Notification procedures to be implemented in the event of a spill, such as, posting phone numbers of key personnel and appropriate regulatory agencies. • Instructions regarding cleanup procedures. • Designating personnel with overall spill response cleanup responsibility. • A summary of the plan should be written and posted at appropriate points in the building (i.e., project trailer and areas with a high spill potential), and shall identify the spill cleanup coordinators, location of cleanup kits, and phone numbers of regulatory agencies to be contacted in the event of a spill. • Cleanup of spills should begin immediately. No emulsifier or dispersant should be used. In fueling areas, absorbent materials should be packaged in small bags for easy use, and small drums should be available for storage of absorbent and/or used absorbent. Absorbent materials shall not be washed into the floor drain or storm sewer. Cleanup response procedures In the event of a spill, contact Gas Control at 970-285-2615. The EHS representative on-call will follow the applicable response procedures. Response guidelines have been identified below for contractors responding to spills that may potentially result in an illicit discharge. It is the contractor’s responsibility to have all emergency phone numbers available at the construction site as well to notify the proper response agencies in a timely manner. It is also the contractor’s responsibility to ensure timely and proper cleanup of any spill. Minor spills For non–hazardous materials such as gasoline, paint, or oil that may be spilled in small quantities which do not enter state waters or pose a potential to do so, the following measures shall be implemented: Page 154 1. Use absorbent materials to contain spills. Do not hose down spill area with water or bury the spill. 2. Recover spilled materials. 3. Clean the contaminated area of residuals and/or properly dispose of the absorbent material. Semi-significant spills For non-hazardous materials that qualify as a semi-significant spill or spills of any size which do not enter state waters or pose a potential to do so and can be controlled by the first responder along with the aid of other personnel, the following measures shall be implemented: 1. Notify the project foreman and activate the IRP immediately. 2. Contain the spills to prevent spreading. 3. If the spills occur on paved or impermeable surfaces, clean-up using “dry” methods (adsorbent materials, cat litter, and/or rags). Contain the spill by encircling with absorbent materials and do not let the spill spread widely. 4. If the spill occurs in a dirt area, immediately contain it by constructing an earthen dike. Dig up and properly dispose of contaminated material. 5. If the spills occur during rain, cover affected area if possible. Significant spills For non-hazardous materials that qualify as a significant spill or spills of any size that enter state waters or have the potential to do so, the following measures shall be implemented: 1. Contact the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment (CDPHE) Environmental Emergency Spill Reporting Line (1-877-518-5608) within 24 hours of the spill event. A written notification to the CDPHE-Emergency Management Program (EMP) is necessary within 5 days. 2. Contact the Colorado State Patrol 24-hour hotline (1-303-239-4501) if the spill is on a state highway. 3. Follow IRP. 4. If possible, clean up the spill immediately. Use absorbent materials if the material is on an impermeable surface. Construct an earthen dike to contain a spill on dirt areas. If rainfall is present at the time of the spill, cover the spill with a tarp to prevent contaminating runoff. Hazardous spills For all spills involving hazardous materials, the following measures shall be implemented: 1. Contact the local emergency response team by dialing 911. 2. Contact the CDPHE-EMP 24 Environmental Emergency Spill Reporting Line (1-877-518-5608) within 24 hours of the spill event. A written notification to the CDPHE-EMP is necessary within 30 days. 3. Contact the Colorado State Patrol 24-hour hotline (1-303-239-4501) if the spill is on a state highway. 4. Follow IRP 5. Construction personnel shall not try to Contain the spill. 6. A licensed contractor or HazMat team shall be used to properly clean up spills. Maintenance considerations The frequency of inspections should be in accordance with the SWMP or PCSWMP. Inspect equipment and vehicles for leaks. Maintain an ample supply of cleanup materials at all designated maintenance areas where leaks and spill are likely to occur. Spot-check material storage and handling areas for compliance. Material storage and use areas shall be checked for accumulation of non-labeled materials and spills. Identify spills or Page 155 leaks into to the storm drain at or near work areas. Containment structures or other perimeter controls shall be inspected and repaired when signs of degradation are visible. References Arizona Department of Transportation (ADOT), Erosion and Pollution Control Manual. 2005. http://www.azdot.gov/ADOT_and/Storm_Water/Erosion_Pollution_Control_Manual.asp Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT), Erosion Control and Stormwater Quality Guide. Page 156 Vehicle and Equipment Maintenance (VEM) Description Procedures and practices used to minimize or eliminate the discharge of pollutants during the following operations: • Cleaning of vehicles and equipment prior to or during use on project site. • Fueling of vehicles. • Maintenance of vehicles and equipment. Applicability These procedures are applied on all construction sites where vehicle and equipment cleaning, fueling, and/or maintenance take place. Procedures specified in the Caerus Wildlife Mitigation Plan may also apply to some aspects of vehicle and equipment maintenance. Limitations Only use on-site vehicle and equipment fueling when it is impractical to send vehicles and equipment off site to be refueled. Comply with local codes and ordinances regarding the disposal of fluids and consumables, and the on-site maintenance of equipment. Page 157 Standards and specifications Vehicle and equipment cleaning • On-site vehicle and equipment washing is discouraged but may be necessary to eliminate spread of invasive species to areas outside of project site. • When equipment/vehicle washing/cleaning must occur on site and the operation cannot be located within a structure or building equipped with appropriate disposal facilities, the outside cleaning shall have the following characteristics and shall be arranged with the Qualified Stormwater Manager: − A washout area shall be an excavated pit, which will later be backfilled or where the concrete wash can harden and be properly disposed of. − Locate wash out areas close to the active construction site on the project. − Locate wash out pits away from storm drains, open ditches, or receiving waters. − Use only when necessary. − When cleaning vehicles/equipment with water use as little water as possible. Consider using high pressure sprayers, which require less water. • If possible, use one of the following off-site EPA compliance car-washes: − Rifle, Colorado. Vehicle and equipment fueling • Federal, state, and local requirements shall be observed for any stationary aboveground storage tanks. • Spill prevention, containment, and countermeasures shall be included in the Stormwater Management Plan (SWMP) if the volume of project site fuel in a single container exceeds 660 gallons, or if the total fuel storage volume at any one site exceeds 1,320 gallons. • Designated fueling areas shall be protected from stormwater runoff and shall be located at least 50 feet from downstream drainage facilities or watercourses. Fueling will be performed on level-grade areas. • Absorbent spill clean-up materials and spill kits shall be available in fueling areas and on fueling trucks and shall be disposed of properly after use. • Mobile fueling involves fueling earthmoving or excavation equipment from a tank truck or some other container that is moved around the site. Stationary fueling stations for throughout the site shall be minimized. W henever practical, fuel shall be transported to the construction equipment. If mobile fueling is required, the following procedures shall be followed: − − Personnel will attend to the fueling process to ensure that any spills will be of limited volume. Vehicle and equipment maintenance • Plan for the proper recycling or disposal of used oils, hydraulic fluids, gear lubricants, batteries, and tires. • Use appropriate, leak-proof containers for fuels, oils, and lubricants to provide for proper disposal. • Use steam or high-pressure water instead of thinners and solvents to wash down equipment. Wash water and detergents can be disposed of in the sanitary sewer system after grit is removed, after checking with local authorities. • Use drip pans or absorbent pads under equipment during maintenance that involves fluids. Page 158 • Equipment maintenance and wash-out areas should be located at least 50 feet away from drainages. • Provide spill containment areas around stored oil and chemical drums. • Provide a contained wash-out area to wash down heavy equipment. Maintenance considerations The frequency of inspections should be in accordance with the SWMP or PCSWMP. Vehicles and equipment shall be inspected for leaky gaskets and damages hoses. Leaks shall be repaired immediately, or problem vehicles or equipment shall be removed from the project site. Any damaged hoses shall be repaired or replaced as needed. Fueling areas and storage tanks shall be inspected. Immediately clean up spills and properly dispose of contaminated soil and cleanup materials. Inspect equipment maintenance areas and wash-out areas. Inspect fluid containers for leaks. Repair leaky fluid containers immediately. References Arizona Department of Transportation (ADOT), Erosion and Pollution Control Manual. 2005. Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT), Erosion Control and Stormwater Quality Guide. 2002. http://www.dot.state.co.us/environmental/envW aterQual/wqms4.asp Page 159 Waste Management (WM) Description Stormwater runoff from areas where construction wastes are stored or disposed can be polluted. Wastes leached or spilled from management areas may build up in soils or on other surfaces and be carried by stormwater runoff. The optimal approach to reduce the potential for stormwater contamination from wastes is to reduce the amount generated and, consequently, the amount stored on site. The following types of waste management are covered under this Control Measure: Concrete waste management: Practices to be used in order to minimize and prevent concrete waste associated with construction activities from entering storm drains and watercourses. Concrete waste may be generated where concrete trucks or concrete-coated equipment are washed on site, where slurries containing concrete are generated, or where mortar-mixing areas exist. Solid waste management: Practices to be used in order to minimize and prevent solid waste associated with construction activities from entering storm drains and watercourses. Solid waste can be classified as non- hazardous solid material including concrete, rock, debris, soil, wood, vegetative material, plastic, fabrics, mortar, metal scraps, Styrofoam, and general litter such as but not limited to beverage containers and plastic wrappers. Sanitary and septic waste management: Practices to be used in order to minimize and prevent sanitary and septic waste associated with construction activities from entering storm drains and watercourses. Liquid waste management: Practices to be used in order to minimize and prevent liquid waste associated with construction activities from entering storm drains and watercourses. Hazardous waste management: Practices to be used in order to prevent hazardous waste associated with construction activities from entering storm drains and watercourses. Hazardous wastes may be discovered or generated and are designated as hazardous by the Code of Federal Regulations or Colorado state laws. Contaminated waste management: Practices to be used in order to minimize and prevent pollutants from contaminated soils from leaching into watercourses or drainage systems. Page 160 Applicability Facilities or designated construction work areas where each type of waste is discovered or generated. Limitations During the non-rainy season or in arid portions of the state, temporary stockpiling of non-hazardous solid waste may not require stringent drainage control measures. The Qualified Stormwater Manager for the project shall determine if drainage control measures are warranted for a specific construction site where non- hazardous solid waste is being stockpiled. Liquid waste management does not apply to solid wastes, hazardous wastes, concrete slurries/wastes, dewatering operations, sanitary/septic wastes, or permitted allowable non-stormwater discharges. Disposal of some liquid wastes may be subject to regulations or requirements of other permits secured for the construction site. This Control Measure provides general hazardous waste management guidelines but does not relieve the contractor from full responsibility of complying with federal, state, and local laws regarding storage, handling, transportation, and disposal of hazardous wastes. It is the contractor’s full responsibility to identify all hazardous waste generated at the project site. The contractor is responsible for identifying pollutant-specific handling and disposal procedures for contaminated soils at the project site. Standards The SWMP shall clearly describe and locate the practices implemented at the site to control stormwater pollution from all types of construction site waste. Concrete waste Waste generated from concrete activities shall NOT be allowed to flow into drainage ways, inlets, or receiving waters. All concrete washout activities shall be in accordance with the CDPS General Permit for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activity (Permit No. COR-030000). Concrete waste shall be placed in a temporary concrete washout facility. • Concrete washout facilities will be comprised of an excavation with berm and construction fences along the perimeter. The bottom of the excavation will be proven to be at least 5 vertical feet above groundwater or, alternatively, the excavation will be lined with synthetic liner that is designed to control seepage. The facilities shall be maintained in good condition to contain all liquid and concrete waste generated by operations at a project site. • Temporary concrete washout facilities shall be located at a minimum 50 horizontal feet from drainageways and/or receiving waters to maintain required vegetative buffer. And are outside of shallow groundwater. • Prohibited from adding solvents, flocculants, or acid to wash water. • Hardened concrete waste shall be properly disposed of following solid waste management procedures. • Removal of temporary facilities, including the solid concrete waste and the material used to construct the facilities, shall be the responsibility of the contractor, who shall remove the waste from the project site and dispose of it properly following guidelines outlined in solid, liquid waste management and any applicable regulations. Solid waste Page 161 • Litter shall be minimized at all construction sites and collected on a weekly basis into dumpsters. Trash receptacles shall be provided in various locations within the construction site boundaries. Bear- proof containers shall be used, if necessary. • Collected trash shall not be placed near drainage inlets or watercourses. • A trash hauling contractor shall be used to properly dispose of the collected waste in a timely manner. Dumpster washout at the construction site is not permissible. • Priority shall be given to remove waste and debris from drainage inlets, trash racks, and ditches in order to prevent clogging of the stormwater system. • Waste storage areas shall be pre-approved by the engineer. • Storage areas for solid waste shall be located at least 50 feet from drainageways and watercourses and shall not be located in areas susceptible to frequent flooding. Sediment barriers such as berms, dikes, or other temporary diversion structures shall be used to prevent stormwater runoff from contacting stored solid waste at the project site. • Solid waste shall be segregated properly into various categories for recycling or disposal. Proper disposal is required for each waste category. The contractor shall make every attempt to recycle useful vegetation, packaging material, and surplus construction materials when practical. Septic and sanitary waste • Temporary sanitary facilities shall be located away from drainage ways, inlets, receiving waters, and areas susceptible to flooding or damage by construction equipment. • Wastewater generated from sanitary facilities shall not be allowed to flow into drainageways, inlets, or receiving waters. • Only licensed sanitary/septic waste haulers shall be used to properly dispose of waste from temporary sanitary facilities. • In project areas susceptible to strong winds, temporary sanitary facilities shall be secured to prevent overturning. Liquid waste • The contractor shall oversee and enforce all liquid waste measures and will instruct all employees and subcontractors on the identification of hazardous and non-hazardous liquid waste, and non-hazardous handling, storage, and proper disposal. • The contractor shall ensure compliance with all liquid waste management procedures and practices. • Liquid wastes generated from operational procedures such as drilling residue and fluids shall not be allowed to flow into drainageways, inlets, or receiving waters. • All liquid wastes shall be contained in designated areas such as sediment basins, holding pits, or portable tanks. Designated containment areas shall be located away from drainageways, inlets, receiving waters, areas of high traffic, and areas susceptible to flooding. • Precautions shall be taken to ensure that proper spill prevention and control measures are being implemented to avoid accidental spills. • If a liquid waste is released or spilled, capture the liquid with proper cleanup methods. Do not allow the liquid waste to flow uncontrolled or into drainageways, inlets, and receiving waters. Use diverting methods such as temporary dikes to control the spill and direct it to containment areas for capture. • The contractor shall be responsible for adhering to all permit requirements, federal, state, and local regulations for properly disposing liquid waste. Hazardous waste The following are general guidelines provided for planning the management of hazardous wastes. Page 162 • Hazardous waste storage, transportation, and disposal shall comply with 49 CFR 172, 173, 178, 179, and 261-263, and state regulations. • Special materials and equipment may be required to manage wastes that are corrosive, combustible, flammable, oxidizer, poison, toxic, or reactive. Clearly label all waste containers with the appropriate description of the wastes being contained. • Hazardous wastes shall be segregated, and incompatible or reactive wastes shall be disposed of properly in a manner to prevent fires and explosion. Always consult the health and safety officer, engineer, and/or project manager prior to mixing hazardous wastes for disposal. Hazardous waste shall be segregated properly into various categories such as liquids, semi-liquids, and solids. • Select the most appropriate disposal container to store the hazardous waste. Additionally, select a container that is compatible with the hazardous material being stored. For instance, use plastic or plastic-lined steel drums for storing corrosive materials. Corrosive materials will react with steel and cause the waste to be released from the drum. Always consult the engineer or project manager to ensure that the container and waste are compatible. • Waste containers shall be stored and managed in temporary containment facilities that shall meet the following requirements: − A spill containment volume 1.5 times the volume of all containers − Impervious to the materials contained for a minimum contact time of 72 hours − Free of accumulated rainwater or spills, with sufficient separation provided between stored containers to allow for spill cleanup − Incompatible, ignitable, and reactive materials shall not be stored in the same temporary containment facility − “Caution: Flammable Material” signs will be posted near containment areas to prevent fires or explosions • The following management guidelines are recommended for containment facilities: − Keep containers closed at all times except when adding or removing waste from the container. Use a funnel or hose to transfer wastes to drums. − Open, handle, and store containers to prevent ruptures or leaks. Make sure to open drums with a spark-proof wrench. − If the container begins to leak or you notice dents or bulges, transfer the waste to another container. • Locate containment areas away from high-traffic areas, waterways, drainage inlets, sensitive habitats, and areas prone to flooding or ponding. • Waste residuals from equipment or brushes shall be cleaned in designated containment areas and shall not be allowed to seep into soils causing soil contamination or to discharge into watercourses or drainageways. • Secondary containment needs to be provided for all hazardous waste containers. In addition, containment berms shall be used in fueling and maintenance areas where the potential for spills is high. • Hazardous waste containment areas shall be pre-approved by the engineer and/or project manager. • It is the contractor’s responsibility to ensure that all hazardous waste discovered or generated at a project site is disposed of properly by a licensed hazardous material disposal contractor/facility utilizing properly completed Uniform Waste Manifest forms. The contractor is responsible for not exceeding hazardous waste storage requirements mandated by the state or other localities. Page 163 • Additional disposal guidelines for non-hazardous solid and liquid waste are included in Sections Solid Waste Management Section and Liquid Waste Management Section, respectively. Contaminated waste The following are general guidelines provided for planning the management of contaminated soils. • The contractor is responsible for reviewing relevant environmental reports, appropriate plans, and project special provisions for contaminated soils information. The contractor shall also take initiative to further inform the engineer of any potential or identified contaminated soils on the project site. • Contractor and employees are responsible for meeting safety training requirements mandated by 29 CFR 1910.120 prior to performing any construction work or excavation at projects sites where contaminated soils have been classified as hazardous materials. • The contractor is responsible for following all rules and regulations applicable to the excavation, handling, transport, and disposal of contaminated and hazardous materials. The applicable rules and regulations are not limited to the standards of Occupational Safety and Health Administration, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, U.S. Department of Transportation (USDOT), Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment (CDPHE), and local agencies. • Contaminated soils should be placed in a lined and bermed area. • Surround the perimeter of the exclusion zone with a security fence for safety. • Collect impacted soil samples and complete a characterization analysis. • Collect non-reusable protective equipment used at the project site and dispose of it properly. Additionally, treat and/or dispose of wastewater from decontamination procedures. • Contaminated soil shall be transported to a licensed disposal facility on vehicles registered for that purpose. • When an underground storage tank is discovered at a construction site, coordinate with the regional environmental project manager for guidance on handling and disposal procedures. • Preventive measures, such as berms, freeze walls, cofferdams, and grout curtains, should be installed to prevent stormwater runoff or groundwater from mixing with hazardous materials or underground tank excavations. Water exposed to contaminated areas should be placed in water-tight holding tanks, tested, and properly disposed. Maintenance considerations The frequency of inspections should be in accordance with the SWMP or PCSWMP. The contractor shall monitor concrete activities to ensure proper waste management techniques are being utilized. Maintenance of temporary concrete washout facilities shall include removing hardened concrete and proper disposal. It is recommended that facilities be cleaned out once they are 1/2 percent full, or new facilities shall be constructed to provide additional concrete waste storage. Check for and remove litter and debris from drainage grates and other drainage structures. Provide cover for dumpsters and waste containers to prevent entry of rainwater and loss of contents by high winds. Inspect perimeter controls, containment structures, berms, covers, and liners. Repair or replace as needed to function properly. The contractor shall be responsible for monitoring on-site contaminated storage and disposal procedures. Page 164 References Arizona Department of Transportation (ADOT), Erosion and Pollution Control Manual. 2005. Colorado Department of Transportation (CDOT), Erosion Control and Stormwater Quality Guide. 2002. http://www.dot.state.co.us/environmental/envWaterQual/wqms4.asp Appendix D Master SWMP Permit Area Map Appendix D: Narrative Description of Permit Coverage Area Name of Permit Coverage Area: NPR Permit Number: COR400643 Location of the Permit Coverage Area: • County: Portions of Garfield County • Nearest City/Town and Cross Street: Town of Parachute and intersection of HWY 213 and I70. • Township/Section/Range information: • Township 5S, Range 96W, Sections 1-36 • Township 5S, Range 95W, Sections 3-10, 15-22, 27-34 • Township 6S, Range 96W, Sections 1-4, 9-12, 13-17, 21-28, 33-36 • Latitude/Longitude: 39.59316/-108.11542 Ultimate Receiving Water(s): • Parachute Creek • Colorado River W e s t F o r k East Fork E Middl e F or k Northwat er Cr e ek Trapper Cre ek Parachute CreekConn CreekDavis Gu lch Allenwater CreekWheeler GulchDeep GulchForked Gu lchCorral GulchLittle CreekWillow CreekSheep Kill GulchSchatte CreekGarden G ul c h Cascade CanyonSpring GulchHouse Log GulchBull Gulc h Wolf CreekCircle Dot GulchCrystal CreekCache CreekTrail GulchStarkey G ulc h First An v i l C r e e kGardner GulchBaker Gulch He lm G u l c h Grassy GulchMiddle WaterRas p b e r r y C r e e k Red Gulch Cabin WaterBear Cabin GulchMiddle ForkJV GulchSheep Gulch Camp GulchW Forked GulchR u l i s o n G u l c h C o t t o n w o o d G u l c h Bear Run Timber GulchPete Spring Gu lch Shor t Wa te rWest ForkCottonwood GulchEast For k Parachute CreekGrassy GulchMi d d l e F o r k 5 S 95 W 6 S 96 W 6 S 95 W 5 S 96 W 5 S 94 W 6 S 97 W 6 S 94 W 5 S 97 W 4 S 96 W 7 S 97 W 4 S 97 W 7 S 94 W 4 S 95 W 7 S 95 W 4 S 94 W 7 S 96 W Copyright:© 2013 National Geographic Society, i-cubed Legend TWN_CO NPR µ Colorado Discharge Permit NPR COR400643 PERMIT Facility Name ESTIMATED DISTURBED ACRES COR400643 NPR 596-19C 4 COR400643 NPR 596-20C 4 COR400643 NPR 596-29C 3.5 COR400643 NPR 596-31A 4.56 COR400643 NPR 596-31C 2.23 COR400643 NPR 596-32C 3.57 COR400643 NPR 596-33C 3 COR400643 NPR 596-34D 3 COR400643 NPR A03 596 6.8 COR400643 NPR E03 596 2 COR400643 NPR G09 596 8.9 COR400643 NPR K08 596 12 COR400643 NPR K10 596 8 COR400643 NPR NPM Ridge Road PL 2018 30 COR400643 NPR O04 696 8 COR400643 NPR P17 596 9 COR400643 NPR Unocal 1,6 Road 2.7 COR400643 NPR West Fork 16" Pipeline 2017 9.98 Total Number of Estimated Disturbed Acres:125.24 Appendix E Soils Table APPENDIX C Soils Table - Douglas-Plateau Area Page 1 of 2 Small Commercial Buildings Local Roads & Streets Roadfill Topsoil Pond Reservoir Areas Embankments, Dikes, & Levees Drainage Irrigation Terraces and Diversions Grassed Waterways D2-Badland, 10 to 65% slope Vary shallow, poorly-drained areas showing no soil characteristics; formed from residuum derived from highly calcareous and gypsiferous shale and bentonite.0-60 Weathered bedrock N/A 0.00-0.00 0.00-0.00 N/A very rapid very severe N/A Not rated Not rated Not rated Not rated Very limited: depth to bedrock, slope.Severe: thin layer Limitation: deep to water. Limitation: slope, depth to rock. Limitation: slope, depth to rock. Limitation: slope, depth to rock. 0-3 Loam CL, CL-ML 0.60-2.00 0.14-0.17 1-2 3-14 Clay loam CL 0.20-0.60 0.17-0.20 0.5-1 14-40 Loam CL, CL-ML 0.60-2.00 0.14-0.17 0-0.5 40-60 Loam CL, CL-ML 0.60-6.00 0.14-0.17 0-0.5 0-3 Loam, Very stony loam CL, CL-ML, SC, SC-SM 0.60-2.00 0.07-0.17 1-2 3-14 Clay loam, Very stony loam CL, CL-ML, SC, SC-SM 0.20-2.00 0.07-0.20 0.5-1 14-40 Loam, Very cobbly loam CL, CL-ML, SC, SC-SM 0.60-2.00 0.07-0.17 0-1 40-60 Loam, Very cobbly loam, Extremely cobbly loam CL, CL-ML, GC, GC-GM 0.60-6.00 0.07-0.17 0-0.5 0-4 Gravelly loam CL-ML, GC-GM, SC-SM, GC, SC 0.60-2.00 0.10-0.13 0.5-1 4-10 Loam, Extremely gravelly loam, Very gravelly loam CL, CL-ML, GC, GC-GM 0.60-2.00 0.07-0.18 0.5-1 10-43 Clay, Clay loam, Silty clay loam, Unweathered bedrock CL 0.06-0.60 0.00-0.21 0-0.5 43-60 Silty clay loam, Clay, Unweathered bedrock CL 0.06-0.20 0.00-0.21 0-0.5 0-4 Loam CL, CL-ML 0.60-2.00 0.14-0.17 0.5-1 4-11 Clay Loam, silty clay loam CL 0.20-0.60 0.15-0.18 0-0.5 11-60 Extremely gravelly sandy loam, very gravelly loam, silt loam, loam, silty clay loam CL-ML, ML, GC, CL, GM 0.20-2.0 0.12-0.18 0-0.5 0-2 Stony loam CL-ML, CL, SC, SC-SM 0.60-6.00 0.10-0.13 1-2 2-8 Cobbly clay loam CL 0.20-0.60 0.13-0.16 0.5-1 8-41 Very cobbly clay loam CL, SC 0.20-0.60 0.9-0.11 0.5-1 41-60 Extremely cobbly Silty clay loam, extremely cobbly silt loam GM, GP-GM 0.60-2.00 0.4-0.06 0-0.5 60-66 Extremely stony sandy loam SC, SC-SM 2.00-6.00 0.3-0.04 0-0.5 0-2 Very fine sandy loam CL, CL-ML 0.60-6.00 0.14-0.17 0.5-1 2-13 Clay loam, Sandy clay loam CL 0.20-0.60 0.14-0.17 0.5-1 13-33 Clay loam, Sandy clay loam CL 0.20-0.60 0.14-0.17 0-0.5 33-60 Clay loam, Silty clay loam CL 0.20-0.60 0.14-0.17 0-0.5 0-4 Fine sandy loam SC-SM, SM 2.00-6.00 0.13-0.15 0.5-1 4-60 Stratified loamy sand to loam SC-SM, SM 2.00-6.00 0.10-0.12 0-0.5 0-7 Silty clay loam ML 0.20-0.60 0.17-0.21 1-2 7-12 Silty clay loam ML 0.06-0.60 0.17-0.21 0.5-1 12-35 Silty clay MH, ML 0.06-0.2 0.14-0.17 0.5-1 35-60 Silty clay loam ML 0.06-0.60 0.17-0.21 0-0.5 0-7 Silty clay loam ML 0.20-0.60 0.17-0.21 1-2 7-12 Silty clay loam ML 0.06-0.60 0.17-0.21 0.5-1 12-35 Silty clay MH, ML 0.06-0.2 0.14-0.17 0.5-1 35-60 Silty clay loam ML 0.06-0.60 0.17-0.21 0-0.5 0-3 Very stony loam CL, CL-ML, SC, SC-SM 0.60-2.00 0.07-0.09 1-2 3-12 Very stony loam CL, CL-ML, SC, SC-SM 0.60-2.00 0.07-0.09 0.5-1 12-26 Very cobbly loam SC, SC-SM 0.60-2.00 0.07-0.09 0.5-1 26-60 Very cobbly loam, Extremely cobbly loam GC, GC-GM 0.60-2.00 0.07-0.09 0-0.5 0-3 Very stony loam CL, CL-ML, SC, SC-SM 0.60-2.00 0.07-0.09 1-2 3-12 Very stony loam CL, CL-ML, SC, SC-SM 0.60-2.00 0.07-0.09 0.5-1 12-26 Very cobbly loam SC, SC-SM 0.60-2.00 0.07-0.09 0.5-1 26-60 Very cobbly loam, Extremely cobbly loam GC, GC-GM 0.60-2.00 0.07-0.09 0-0.5 0-20 Clay loam, loam CL, SC, CL-ML, SC-SM 0.20-0.60 0.17-0.20 3-6 20-33 Clay loam CL,0.20-0.60 0.17-0.20 1-3 33-45 Clay, clay loam CL 0.06-0.20 0.14-0.16 1-2 45-60 Clay loam, loam CL, CL-ML, SC-SM, SC 0.20-0.60 0.17-0.20 0.5-1 0-6 Sandy loam SC-SM, SM, 2.00-6.00 0.10-0.13 0.5-1 6-60 Stratified sand to loam ML, CL-ML, SC-SM, SM 2.00-6.00 0.11-0.14 0.5-1 0-8 Gravelly sandy clay loam GC-GM, GC, SC-SM 0.20-2.00 0.10-0.13 2-3 8-20 Very channery sandy clay loam GC-GM, GC, GW-GC 0.20-2.00 0.07-0.09 1-2 20-28 Clay loam CL 0.20-2.00 0.16-0.19 1-2 28-60 Stratified very gravelly sand to extremely gravelly loamy sand GC-GM, GM, GW=GM, GW 6-20 0.03-0.04 1-2 0-3 Clay loam CL 0.20-0.60 0.17-0.20 0.5-1 3-60 Clay CL 0.06-0.2 0.14-0.16 0-0.5 0-3 Clay loam CL 0.20-0.60 0.17-0.20 0.5-1 3-60 Clay CL 0.06-0.20 0.14-0.16 0-0.5 0-8 Loam, silty clay loam, clay loam CL, CL-ML, ML 0.60-2.00 0.14-0.17 1-3 8-13 Silt loam, silty clay loam, clay loam ML, CL 0.60-2.00 0.14-0.17 0.5-1 13-35 silt loam, silty clay, clay loam, silty ML, MH, CL 0.60-2.00 0.14-0.17 0-0.5 35-60 silt loam, silty clay loam, clay loam, clay ML, CL 0.60-2.00 0.14-0.17 0-0.5 0-10 Loam CL, CL-ML 0.60-2.00 0.16-0.18 2-4 10-21 Clay loam CL 0.60-2.00 0.17-0.21 0.5-1 21-28 Gravelly sandy clay loam GC, GC-GM, SC-SM, SC 0.60-2.00 0.10-0.13 0.5-1 28-60 Loam CL, CL-ML 0.60-2.00 0.14-0.18 0-0.5 0-10 Loam, clay loam, stony loam CL, CL-ML, SC, SC-SM 0.60-2.00 0.16-0.18 2-4 10-21 Clay loam, very stony clay CL, CL-ML, SC, SC-SM 0.60-2.00 0.17-0.21 0.5-1 21-28 Gravelly sandy clay loam, clay loam, clay, very stony clay CL, GC, GC-GM, SC-SM, SC, 0.60-2.00 0.10-0.13 0.5-1 28-60 Loam, clay loam, clay, very stony clay loam CL, CL-ML 0.60-2.00 0.14-0.18 0-0.5 Unified ClassificationMap Unit Number - Soil Name Soil DepthSoil Description USDA Texture's) Moderately deep and deep, well drained soils on side slopes and toe slopes formed in coluvium derived dominantly from mixed sedimentary rocks. D22-Clapper very stony loam, 12 to 25% slope Deep, well-drained very stony loam and very cobbly loam formed in weathered glacial till derived from basalt and mixed materials; found on the side slopes of mountains. D23-Clapper very stony loam, 25 to 65% slope Characteristic Plant Communities Suitability For: D12-Bunkwater very fine sandy loam, 1 to 8% slope Deep, well-drained sandy loam and clay loam formed in eolian deposits derived from mixed materials and found on structural benches. D3-Barx loam, 3 to 12% slope Deep, well-drained loam and clay loam formed in eolian deposits derived from mixed materials and found between 5,000 and 6,400 feet. D4-Barx-Clapper complex, 3 to 12% slope Deep, well-drained loam and very stony loam formed in eolian deposits derived from mixed materials and found on dissected plateaus. D10-Borollic Calciorthids, 25 to 50% slope Permeability (inch/hour) D18-Cerro silty clay loam, 2 to 6% slope Deep, well drained soil on foothills formed in coluvium and residuum derived dominantly from marine shale of the Wasatch Formation. Deep, well drained soil on foothills formed in coluvium and residuum derived dominantly from marine shale of the Wasatch Formation. D19-Cerro silty clay loam, 6 to 12% slope On foothills and old mudflows, formed in coluvium and localized alluvium derived dominantly from shales. Erosion Potential (slight/ moderate/ severe) Available Water Capacity (inch/inch) Organic Matter (%) Surface Runoff (slow/ medium/ rapid) D24-Cochetopa - Clayburn complex, 12 to 40% slope Deep, well-drained soil on flood plains, low terraces and alluvial fans; formed in stratified calcareous alluvium derived dominantly from sedimentary rock. D25-Cowestglen sandy loam, 1 to 8% slope Deep, well-drained to somewhat poorly drained soils on floodplains, formed in alluvium derived dominantly from the Green River and Wasatch shale formations. D28-Cumulus Haploborolls, 1 to 3 percent slope Deep, well-drained very stony loam and very cobbly loam formed in weathered glacial till derived from basalt and mixed materials; found on foothill slopes. Deep, well-drained soil on alluvial fans and toe slopes, formed in residuum and alluvium derived dominantly from Wasatch shales. D31-Dominguez clay loam, 1 to 3% slopes On structural benches, ~1% of surface is covered with basalt stones. D33-Emmons -Cerro- Pagoda complex, 5 to 30% slope, very stony D32-Dominguez clay loam, 3 to 8% slope Deep, well-drained clay loam formed from sandstone and shale residuum and clay found on alluvial fans and toe slopes. Deep, well-drained on side slopes and foot slopes, formed in coluvium derived dominantly from mixed sedimentary rocks. D34-Empedrado loam, 25 to 45% slope D35-Empedrado - Pagoda-Godding complex, 6 to 25% slope, stony On benches, mudflows, and till plains. Very limited: slope.rapid severe rapid severe moderate/rapid severe Indian ricegrass, Bluebunch wheatgrass, Galleta, Bottlebrush squirreltail, Other perennial forbs Very limited: slope, shrink- swell, depth to hard bedrock. rapid Somewhat limited: slope.Good Greasewood, Shadscale saltbrush, Galleta, Western wheatgrass, Wyoming big sagebrush Somewhat limited: slope.Not limited. Somewhat limited: slope, large stones content. Good Western wheatgrass, Sandberg bluegrass, Wyoming big sagebrush, Bottlebrush squirreltail, Indian ricegrass, Needle and thread Very limited: slope, large stones content. Western wheatgrass, Wyoming big sagebrush, Bottlebrush squirreltail, Indian ricegrass, Needle and thread Very limited: seepage.Good Poor: slope, shrink-swell, depth to bedrock, stone content. Poor: slope, too clayey, depth to bedrock, rock fragment content. Good/Fair: cobble content, stone content. Good/Poor: hard to reclaim, rock fragments, carbonate content. Limitation: deep to water. Somewhat limited: seepage.Very limited: piping.Limitation: deep to water. Severe: slope, depth to rock.Slight/Severe: thin layer.Limitation: deep to water. Severe: Slope.Severe: large stones. Severe: piping. Limitation: slope.Limitation: erodes easily.Limitation: erodes easily, too arid. Very/somewhat limited: seepage, slope. Very/somewhat limited: piping, large stones content. Limitation: deep to water. Limitation: large stones, slope, droughty. Limitation: erodes easily, large stones. Limitation: erodes easily, too arid, large stones. Very limited: piping. Limitation: soil blowing.Limitation: excess sodium, too arid. medium severe Galleta, Sandberg bluegrass, Bluebunch wheatgrass, Bottlebrush squirreltail, Other perennial forbs, Other shrubs Very limited: slope, large stones content. Very limited: slope, large stones content. Fair: cobble content, slope, stone content. Poor: hard to reclaim, rock fragments, slope, carbonate Poor: sodium content, salinity, too clayey. Poor: slope, hard to reclaim, rock fragments, carbonate content. Somewhat limited: slope, seepage. Somewhat limited: seepage, slope. Somewhat limited: large stones content. Limitation: deep to water. Limitation: large stones, slope, droughty. rapid severe Galleta, Sandberg bluegrass, Bluebunch wheatgrass, Bottlebrush squirreltail, Other perennial forbs, Other shrubs Very limited: slope, large stones content. Very limited: slope, large stones content. Poor: slope, cobble content, stone content. Somewhat limited: large stones content. Limitation: deep to water. Limitation: large stones, slope, droughty. Limitation: large stones, slope. Limitation: large stones, slope. Limitation: large stones, slope, too arid. Limitation: percs slowly.Limitation: percs slowly, too arid. Limitation: large stones, slope, too arid. very rapid severe Wyoming big sagebrush, Saline wildrye, Western wheatgrass, Sandberg bluegrass, Indian ricegrass, Shadscale saltbush. Very limited: shrink-swell, slope. Very limited: shrink- swell. Fair: shrink- swell. Poor: too clayey. Limitation: deep to water. Limitation: percs slowly, slope.Not limited.Somewhat limited: piping. Limitation: erodes easily, percs slowly, slope, large stones, depth to rock. Limitation: erodes easily, slope, too arid, large stones. D7-Biedsaw-Sunup gravelly loams, 10 to 40% slope On side slopes of mountains and ridges. rapid severe D15-Cameo fine sandy loam, 1 to 6% slope This deep, well drained soil is on flood plains and low terraces.slow/medium slight/moderate Very limited: slope, shrink-swell, depth to hard bedrock. Limitation: percs slowly, slope, depth to rock, droughty. Limitation: excess sodium, slope, soil blowing. D11-Borpark stony loam, 40 to 75% slope` Deep, well drained soil on stony breaks formed in coluvium derived dominantly from basalt and shale. Good.Severe: seepage.Severe: piping.Limitation: deep to water. Alkali sacaton, Fourwing saltbush, Basin big sagebrush, Basin wildrye, Galleta Very limited: flooding.Not limited.Good.Limitation: slope, soil blowing. Limitation: too sandy, soil blowing.Limitation: too arid. rapid to very rapid severe Streambank wheatgrass, Western wheatgrass, Bottlebrush squirreltail, Mountain big sagebrush, Sasketoon serviceberry. Very limited: slope.Limitation: slope.Limitation: erodes easily, slope. Somewhat limited: slope, frost action. Good. Fair: slope, carbonate content. Severe: Slope. Poor: slope.Poor: slope.Severe: Slope.Severe: piping. Severe: piping.Limitation: deep to water. Limitation: deep to water.Limitation: slope.Limitation: erodes easily, slope. Limitation: erodes easily, slope. Limitation: erodes easily, slope, to arid. rapid very severe Gambel's oak, Big bluegrass, Saskatoon serviceberry, Elk sedge, Mountain brome, Slender wheatgrass, Mountain snowberry, Muttongrass, Needleandthread, Western wheatgrass. Very limited: slope.Very limited: slope, frost action. Very limited: slope, frost action.Fair: Slope.Poor: slope.Severe: Slope.medium moderate to severe Gambel's oak, Big bluegrass, Saskatoon serviceberry, Elk sedge, Mountain brome, Slender wheatgrass, Mountain snowberry, Muttongrass, Needleandthread, Western wheatgrass. Very limited: slope.Limitation: erodes easily, slope.Severe: piping.Limitation: deep to water.Limitation: slope.Limitation: erodes easily, slope. Very limited: slope.Poor: slope. Poor: slope, carbonate content, salinity. Severe: Slope. Limitation: large stones, slope, droughty. Severe: piping.Limitation: deep to water. Limitation: percs slowly, slope, Poor: rock fragment content, slope, hard to reclaim. Limitation: deep to water. very severe Gambel's oak, Saskatoon serviceberry, True mountain mahogany, Big bluegrass, Western wheatgrass. Very limited: slope.Limitation: deep to water. Poor: too clayey.Moderate: slope. Limitation: erodes easily, slope, depth to rock. Limitation: erodes easily, slope, to arid. rapid very severe Gambel's oak, Saskatoon serviceberry, Western wheatgrass, Indian ricegrass, Antelope bitterbrush, Mountian big sagebrush, Prarie Junegrass, Squaw apple. Very limited: slope, Content of large stones, shrink-swell, Very limited: slope, Content of large stones, shrink-swell, Poor: stone content, slope, cobble content, shrink-swell. Poor: too clayey, slope.Severe: Slope. Limitation: large stones, slope. Limitation: large stones, slope, droughty. slow slight Western wheatgrass, Letterman's needlegrass, Muttongrass, Slender wheatgrass, Mountain big sagebrush, Mule-ears, Nodding brome, Scarlet Indian paintbrush, Silvery lupine, Sulpur wildbuckwheat, Utah serviceberry, Mountain snowberry. Very limited: shrink-swell.Very limited: shrink- swell. Fair: shrink- swell. medium moderate Western wheatgrass, Letterman's needlegrass, Muttongrass, Slender wheatgrass, Mountain big sagebrush, Mule-ears, Nodding brome, Scarlet Indian paintbrush, Silvery lupine, Sulpur wildbuckwheat, Utah serviceberry, Mountain snowberry. Very limited: shrink-swell, slope. Very limited: shrink- swell, slope. Fair: shrink- swell.Severe: piping.Limitation: deep to water. Limitation: percs slowly, slope, Limitation: erodes easily, percs slowly, slope. Limitation: erodes easily, percs slowly. Limitation: erodes easily, percs slowly. Limitation: slope, Limitation: percs slowly, slope, Limitation: erodes easily, percs slowly, slope. rapid very severe Slender wheatgrass, Columbia needlegrass, Mountain brome, Mountain snowberry, Nodding brome. Very limited: slope, shrink- swell. Very limited: slope, shrink-swell, frost action. Poor: slope, shrink-swell.Poor: slope. slow slight to severe Basin wildrye, Basin big sagebrush, other perennial forbs, other perennial grasses, Western wheatgrass, other shrubs. Very limited: flooding, slope. Limitation: deep to water. Limitation: percs slowly, slope, Severe: Slope.Moderate: Piping. Limitation: slope, soil blowing.Limitation: too sandy.Somewhat limited: flooding.Good.Fair: sodium content.Severe: seepage. Fair: Stone content. Poor: hard to reclaim, rock fragment content. Severe: seepage.Severe: seepage. Severe: piping.Limitation: deep to water. Limitation: deep to water. Limitation: flooding, droughty. Limitation: large stones, too sandy. Limitation: large stones, slope, droughty. Limitation: too arid. slow slight Western wheatgrass, Basin wildrye, Basin big sagebrush.Very limited: flooding.Very limited: flooding. Very limited: shrink- swell. Fair: shrink- swell. Poor: too clayey.Slightslowslight Wyoming big sagebrush, Saline wildrye, Western wheatgrass, Sandberg bluegrass, Indian ricegrass, Shadscale saltbush. Very limited: shrink-swell.Limitation: percs slowly, too arid. Limitation: erodes easily, slope, depth to rock. Slight Limitation: deep to water. Limitation: percs slowly. Limitation: percs slowly. S:\EHS\Piceance EHS\1. Compliance Programs\Stormwater\Plans and Manuals\CDPHE SWMP and Appendices\CDPHE Permit-Specific Information\COR03B651_Plateau Creek\Appendix C - Plateau Creek Soil Types Table January 2008 APPENDIX C Soils Table - Douglas-Plateau Area Page 2 of 2 Small Commercial Buildings Local Roads & Streets Roadfill Topsoil Pond Reservoir Areas Embankments, Dikes, & Levees Drainage Irrigation Terraces and Diversions Grassed Waterways Unified ClassificationMap Unit Number - Soil Name Soil DepthSoil Description USDA Texture's)Characteristic Plant Communities Suitability For: Permeability (inch/hour) Erosion Potential (slight/ moderate/ severe) Available Water Capacity (inch/inch) Organic Matter (%) Surface Runoff (slow/ medium/ rapid) 0-13 Variable ML, SC, CL, SM 0.60-20 0.07-0.16 0.5-1 13-60 Stratified very gravelly sand to clay loam GC, CL, GM ML 0.2-2.0 0.10-0.20 0-0.5 0-7 Clay loam CL 0.20-0.60 0.17-0.20 2-4 7-18 Clay loam CL 0.20-0.60 0.17-0.20 1-3 18-50 Clay loam CL 0.06-0.2 0.17-0.20 1-2 50-60 Silty clay loam CL 0.20-0.60 0.17-0.20 0.5-1 0-7 Clay loam CL 0.20-0.60 0.17-0.20 2-4 7-18 Clay loam CL 0.20-0.60 0.17-0.20 1-3 18-50 Clay Loam, silty clay loam CL 0.06-0.2 0.17-0.20 1-2 50-60 Silty clay loam CL 0.20-0.60 0.17-0.20 0.5-1 0-7 Clay loam, loam CL, CL-ML 0.20-0.60 0.17-0.20 2-4 7-18 Clay loam CL 0.20-0.60 0.17-0.20 1-3 18-50 Clay Loam, silty clay loam CL 0.06-0.2 0.17-0.20 1-2 50-60 Silty clay loam CL 0.20-0.60 0.17-0.20 0.5-1 0-7 Stony loam CL-ML, CL, SC, SC-SM 0.60-6.00 0.10-0.13 2-3 7-10 Very stony clay loam CL 0.20-0.60 0.09-0.11 1-2 10-27 Very stony clay CL 0.06-0.2 0.07-0.08 0.5-1 27-60 Very stony clay loam CL 0.20-0.60 0.09-0.11 0.5-1 0-10 Cobbly loam CL, CL-ML, SC-SM, SC 0.60-6.00 0.10-0.13 2-3 10-15 Very cobbly clay, very cobbly clay loam SL, GC, SC 0.06-0.2 0.09-0.11 1-2 15-22 Very cobbly clay loam, very cobbly clay SL, GC, SC 0.06-0.2 0.09-0.11 1-2 22-34 Very stony clay loam SL, GC, SC 0.20-0.60 0.09-0.11 0.5-1 34-45 Extremely cobbly sandy clay loam GC, SP-SC, GP-GC, SC 0.2-2.0 0.04-0.05 0.5-1 45-60 Extremely stony sandy loam GP-GC, SC, GC, SC-SM 0.60-6.00 0.03-0.04 0-0.5 0-4 Very channery loam GC, GC-GM 0.6-2.0 0.07-0.09 1-3 4-60 Extremely channery loam, very channery loam GC, GC-GM 0.6-2.0 0.07-0.09 0-1 0-10 Clay loam, loam CL, CL-ML 0.6-2.0 0.16-0.18 2-4 10-21 Clay loam, loam CL 0.6-2.0 0.17-0.21 0.5-1 21-28 Clay loam, clay, gravelly sandy clay loam CL, GC, GC-GM, SC-SM, SC, 0.6-2.0 0.10-0.13 0.5-1 28-60 Clay loam, clay, loam CL, CL-ML 0.6-2.0 0.14-0.18 0-0.5 0-10 Clay loam, loam CL, CL-ML 0.6-2.0 0.16-0.18 2-4 10-21 Clay loam, loam CL 0.6-2.0 0.17-0.21 0.5-1 21-28 Clay loam, clay, gravelly sandy clay loam CL, GC, GC-GM, SC-SM, SC, 0.6-2.0 0.10-0.13 0.5-1 28-60 Clay loam, clay, loam CL, CL-ML 0.6-2.0 0.14-0.18 0-0.5 0-6 Loam, clay loam CL, CL-ML 0.20-0.60 0.17-0.21 2-3 6-17 Loam, clay loam CL 0.20-0.60 0.17-0.21 1-3 17-27 Loam, clay loam, clay CL 0.06-0.2 0.14-0.21 0.5-1 27-60 Loam, clay loam, clay CL 0.06-0.6 0.14-0.21 0-0.5 0-6 Clay loam, loam CL, CL-ML 0.20-0.60 0.17-0.21 2-3 6-17 Clay loam, loam CL 0.20-0.60 0.17-0.21 1-3 17-27 Clay loam, clay CL 0.06-0.2 0.14-0.21 0.5-1 27-60 Clay loam, clay CL 0.06-0.6 0.14-0.21 0-0.5 0-10 Loam, channery loam CL, CL-ML, GC, GC-GM, SC, SC-SM 0.6-2.0 0.14-0.17 3-6 10-39 Extremely channery loam, very channery loam, channery loam, unweathered bedrock GC, GC-GM, SC-SM, SC 0.6-2.0 0.07-0.09 1-2 39-55 Very channery loam GC, GC-GM 0.06-0.2 55-59 Unweathered bedrock N/A 0-4 Loam CL, CL-ML 0.6-2.0 0.13-0.16 2-4 4-19 Clay loam CL 0.20-0.60 0.16-0.19 1-2 19-28 Clay loam CL 0.20-0.60 0.16-0.19 0.5-1 28-60 Loam CL, CL-ML 0.6-2.0 0.13-0.16 0-0.5 0-2 Channery loam, Unweathered bedrock GC, GC-GM, SC, SC-SM 0.00-2.00 0.00-0.13 0-1 2-13 Channery loam, Very channery loam, Unweathered bedrock CL, CL-ML, GC, GC-GM 0.00-6.00 0.00-0.07 0-0.5 13-17 Weathered bedrock, Unweathered bedrock N/A 0.00-2.00 0.00-0.00 N/A 17-60 Unweathered bedrock N/A 0.00-0.00 0.00-0.00 N/A 0-2 Channery loam, Unweathered bedrock GC, GC-GM, SC, SC-SM 0.60-6.00 0.10-0.13 0.5-1 2-13 Channery loam, Very channery loam, Unweathered bedrock CL, CL-ML, GC, GC-GM 0.60-6.00 0.05-0.07 0-0.5 13-17 Weathered bedrock, Unweathered bedrock 17-60 Unweathered bedrock 0-2 Channery loam, Unweathered bedrock GC, GC-GM, SC, SC-SM 0.00-5.95 0.00-0.13 0-1 2-13 Channery loam, Very channery loam, Unweathered bedrock CL, CL-ML, GC, GC-GM 0.00-6.00 0.00-0.07 0-0.5 13-17 Weathered bedrock, Unweathered bedrock N/A 0.00-2.00 0.00-0.00 0 17-60 Unweathered bedrock N/A 0.00-0.00 0.00-0.00 0 0-8 Channery loam GC, GC-GM 2.00-6.00 0.10-0.13 1-3 8-46 Very channery loam GC-GM, GM 0.06-0.20 0.07-0.09 0.5-1 46-60 Very channery loam GC-GM, GM 2.00-6.00 0.07-0.09 0-0.5 0-2 Fine sandy loam SC, SC-SM 2.00-6.00 0.13-0.16 0.5-1.0 2-9 Loam, Sandy loam, Fine sandy loam SC, SC-SM 2.00-6.00 0.13-0.16 0.0-0.5 9-60 Unweathered bedrock N/A 0.06-0.20 0.00-0.00 N/A 0-6 Gravelly sandy loam, loam GC-GM, GC, SC, SC-SM, CL, CL-ML 0.60-6.00 0.14-0.17 1-3 6-11 Clay loam, loam, sandy clay loam CL, CL-ML 0.60-6.00 0.14-0.17 0.5-1.0 11-32 Very channery sandy loam, clay loam, channery sandy clay loam, channery loam CL, CL-ML, GC, GC-GM, GW- GC, SC, SC-SM 0.60-6.00 0.05-0.07 0.0-0.5 32-36 Silty clay loam, clay, channery sandy clay loam, channery loam, unweathered bedrock CL, CL-ML, SC, SC-SM 0.06-0.20 D79-Soil Data Not Available D66-Torriorthents- warm- Rock outcrop complex, 35 to 90% slope D41-Golime cobbly loam, 5 to 15% slope, very bouldery Deep, well-drained in till plains, formed in outwash material derived dominantly from basalt, sandstone and shale. D42-Grobutte very channery loam, 30 to 60% slope Very shallow to deep over hard or soft bedrock, soils are well drained to somewhat excessively drained, found on steep, mainly south-facing slopes of mountains, hills, ridges, and canyon sides in extremely rough and eroded areas. D49-Hesperus-Pagoda complex, 3 to 12% slope On toe slopes and terraces. D61-Rock outcrop- Torriorthents- complex, 15 to 90% slope Exposed sandstone and shale bedrock, loose stones, and shallow to deep stony loams exposed on south- facing slopes of mountains, hills, ridges, and canyon sides. Deep, well-drained on glacial till plains, formed in outwash material derived dominantly from basalt, sandstone and shale. very rapid/rapid very severe Saline wildrye, Shadscale saltbrush, Indian ricegrass, Bluebunch wheatgrass Very limited: slope, depth to hard bedrock. Limitation: slope, depth to rock, large stones, too arid. Limitation: slope, depth to rock, droughty. Limitation: slope, depth to rock, large stones. Very limited: depth to hard bedrock, slope. Poor: depth to bedrock, slope. Poor: slope, depth to bedrock, rock fragments, salinity. Very limited: depth to bedrock, slope. rapid very severe Gambel's oak, other perennial grasses, Indian ricegrass, Mountain big sagebrush, Sasketoon serviceberry, Wyoming big sagebrush, Western wheatgrass. Very limited: slope, depth to hard bedrock. Limitation: slope, depth to rock, large stones. Limitation: slope, droughty. Very limited: slope, depth to hard bedrock. Poor: depth to bedrock, slope. Poor: slope, depth to bedrock, rock fragments, salinity. Limitation: deep to water. Severe: slope, depth to rock.Severe: thin layer. Limitation: deep to water. Limitation: slope, droughty. Poor: depth to bedrock, slope. Poor: depth to bedrock, slope. Very limited: depth to bedrock, slope. Very limited: thin layer, seepage. Limitation: deep to water.severe Galleta, Sandberg bluegrass, Bluebunch wheatgrass, Bottlebrush squirreltail, Needle and thread grass Very limited: slope, depth to hard bedrock. Very limited: depth to hard bedrock, slope. On dissected mesas.Limitation: slope, soil blowing, depth to rock. rapid D76-Wrayha-Veatch - Rabbitex complex, 12 to 45% slope On side slopes of mountains and ridges. D69-Travessilla-Rock outcrop complex, 10 to 35% slope D36-Fluvaquents, 0 to 3 percent slope Deep, poorly-drained nearly level on flood plains and first terraces, formed in alluvium. D37-Fughes clay loam, 2 to 6% slope Deep, well-drained on mesas and terraces, formed in alluvium and coluvium derived dominantly from mixed sedimentary rock. D40-Godding stony loam, 9 to 25% slope, extremely bouldery On mountainsides and benches. D48-Hesperus- Empedrado , moist- Pagoda complex, 35 to 55% slope On mountainsides and benches or terraces. D38-Fughes clay loam, 3 to 9%, stony Deep, well-drained on the upper fringes of valley terraces, formed in alluvium and coluvium derived dominantly from mixed rock sources. D39-Fughes -Hesperus complex, 3 to 12% slope On terraces and toe slopes. Deep, well-drained on steep hills and mountainsides, formed in coluvium derived dominantly from mixed material. D47-Hesperus- Empedrado , moist- Pagoda complex, 5 to 35% slope D67-Tosca channery loam, 25 to 80% slope Deep, well-drained on mountain side slopes and foot slopes, formed in coluvium derived dominantly from Green River shale. D53-Pagoda -Hesperus complex, 12 to 40% slope On foothills and old mudflows, formed in coluvium and alluvium derived dominantly from shales. D56-Parachute -Irigul- Rhone association, 25 to 50% slope On tops of mountains and ridges and on the crests and sides of hills. D58-Peninsula loam, 3 to 9% slope Deep, well-drained on benches, formed in mixed transported materials derived dominantly from sedimentary rock and volcanic sources. Exposed sandstone and shale bedrock, loose stones, and shallow to deep stony and very channery loams exposed on south-facing slopes of mountains, hills, ridges, and canyonsides. D65-Torriorthents , cool- Rock outcrop complex, 35 to 90% slopes Limitation: slope, depth to rock, droughty. Poor: slope, hard to reclaim, rock fragment content. Severe: Slope.Slight Limitation: deep to water. Gamble's oak, Western wheatgrass, Bluebunch wheatgrass, Bottlebrush squirreltail, Mountain big sagebrush, Muttongrass, other perennial forbs, other perennial grasses, True mountain mahogany. Very limited: slope.Very limited: slope.Poor: slope. Limitation: erodes slowly, percs slowly. rapid Saskatoon serviceberry, Elk sedge, Mountain brome, Western wheatgrass, Columbia needlegrass, Letterman's needlegrass, Mountain big sagebrush, Mountain snowberry. Very limited: slope.Very limited: slope, frost action. Limitation: slope, droughty.Limitation: slope.Limitation: slope, to arid, droughty. very severe Poor: depth to bedrock, slope. Very limited: thin layer.Limitation: deep to water. Severe: Piping.Limitation: deep to water. Limitation: percs slowly, slope, Limitation: erodes slowly. Limitation: slope.Limitation: erodes easily, slope. Limitation: erodes easily, slope. rapid Limitation: slope, depth to rock. Limitation: slope, depth to rock, droughty. Poor: rock fragment content, slope, depth to rock. Severe: slope.Severe: thin layer.Limitation: deep to water. medium slight Needleandthread, Mountain big sagebrush, Western wheatgrass, Saskatoon serviceberry, Mountain snowberry, Muttongrass, Prarie Jungrass. Very limited: slope, Content of large stones. Limitation: slope, soil blowing, depth to rock. Limitation: slope, too arid, depth to rock. Limitation: slope, depth to rock, large stones, too arid. rapid very severe Limitation: deep to water. Slight Limitation: deep to water. Limitation: slope, droughty.Limitation: slope.Very limited: Content of large stones, slope. Poor: Cobble content, stone content. Poor: rock fragment content, slope, hard to reclaim. Severe: Slope. Limitation: large stones, slope, droughty. Limitation: slope, to arid, droughty. rapid moderate Gambel's oak, Big bluegrass, Elk sedge, Nodding brome, Saskatoon serviceberry, Mountain snowberry, Needleandthread, Slender wheatgrass, Western wheatgrass. Very limited: slope, Content of large stones, shrink-swell. Very limited: Content of large stones, slope, shrink-swell. Poor: stone content, slope, cobble content, slope. Poor: rock fragment content, slope, hard to reclaim, too clayey. Severe: Slope. Very limited: shrink- swell, frost action. Fair: shrink- swell.Fair: too clayey.Moderate: slope. medium slight to severe Gambel's oak, Elk sedge, Saskatoon serviceberry, Mountain snowberry, Slender wheatgrass, True mountain mahogany, Western wheatgrass. Very limited: shrink-swell, slope. Severe: Slope.Severe: piping. Severe: piping.Limitation: deep to water.Limitation: slope.Favorable. Limitation: deep to water. Limitation: large stones, slope, droughty. Limitation: large stones, slope. Moderate: large stones, piping. Very limited: slope.Very limited: slope, frost action. Favorable. medium to rapid moderate to very severe Gambel's oak, Big bluegrass, Saskatoon serviceberry, Elk sedge, Mountain brome, Slender wheatgrass, Mountain snowberry, Muttongrass, Needleandthread, Western wheatgrass. Very limited: slope, shrink- swell. Very limited: Slope, shrink-swell, frost action. Fair: slope.Poor: slope. Limitation: erodes easily, slope. Limitation: erodes easily, slope.Poor: slope.Poor: slope.Severe: Slope.Severe: piping. Good.Moderate: slope.medium slight to very severe Gambel's oak, Saskatoon serviceberry, Mountain brome, Letterman's needlegrass, Elk sedge, Mountain snowberry, Nodding brome, Slender wheatgrass. Very limited: slope, shrink- swell. Severe: slope.Moderate: piping. Moderate: piping.Limitation: deep to water. Limitation: percs slowly, slope, Limitation: percs slowly. Limitation: percs slowly, slope, Limitation: percs slowly, slope, Limitation: percs slowly. medium to rapid very severe Gambel's oak, Columbia needlegrass, Saskatoon serviceberry, Mountain brome, Letterman's needlegrass, Elk sedge, Mountain snowberry, Nodding brome, Slender wheatgrass. Very limited: slope, shrink- swell. Very limited: slope, shrink-swell. Poor: slope, shrink-swell. Poor: slope, too clayey. Fair: Hard to reclaim. Moderate: seepage, slope. slow to medium moderate to severe Needleandthread, Mountain big sagebrush, other perennial forbs, Western wheatgrass, Saskatoon serviceberry, Mountain snowberry, Muttongrass, Prarie Jungrass. Somewhat limited: shrink- swell, slope. Somewhat limited: shrink-swell.Good. Somewhat limited: shrink-swell. Fair: shrink- swell. very severe Gambel's oak, Big bluegrass, Saskatoon serviceberry, Elk sedge, Mountain brome, Slender wheatgrass, Mountain snowberry, Muttongrass, Needleandthread, Western wheatgrass. very rapid very severe Basin wildrye, Cottonwood, Western wheatgrass, Willow, Rush, Sedge, Western white clematis. Very limited: flooding, depth to saturation zone. Limitation: too sandy, wetness. Very limited: frost action, flooding, depth to saturation zone. Fair: Depth to saturated zone. Poor: hard to reclaim, rock fragments, depth to Moderate: seepage. Moderate: slope. Severe: piping. Severe: piping wetness. Limitation: flooding, frost action, cutbanks cave. Limitation: deep to water.Favorable.Favorable. Limitation: wetness, droughty. medium slight Gambel's oak, Elk sedge, Saskatoon serviceberry, Mountain snowberry, Slender wheatgrass, True mountain mahogany, Western wheatgrass. Very limited: shrink-swell.Very limited: shrink- swell, frost action. Fair: shrink- swell.Fair: too clayey. Favorable.Very limited: shrink- swell, frost action. Fair: shrink- swell.Fair: too clayey.Moderate: slope. medium slight to moderate Gambel's oak, Elk sedge, Saskatoon serviceberry, Mountain snowberry, Slender wheatgrass, True mountain mahogany, Western wheatgrass. Very limited: shrink-swell, slope.Favorable. rapid very severe Saskatoon serviceberry, Gambel's oak, Elk sedge, Mountain brome, Mountain snowberry, Slender wheatgrass. Very limited: slope.Very limited: slope, frost action.Poor: slope. Poor: Hard to reclaim, slope, rock fragments, carbonate Severe: seepage, slope.Severe: seepage.Limitation: slope, droughty. rapid very severe Gambel's oak, Muttongrass, Bluebunch wheatgrass, Elk sedge, Saskatoon serviceberry, True mountain mahogany. Very limited: slope, depth to hard bedrock. Very limited: slope, depth to hard bedrock. Poor: depth to bedrock, slope, stone content. Poor: Rock fragments, slope, depth to bedrock. Severe: slope.Slight Severe: piping.Limitation: deep to water.Limitation: slope. Very limited: thin layer.Limitation: deep to water. Limitation: slope, droughty, depth to rock. Limitation: deep to water. Limitation: percs slowly, slope, Limitation: deep to water.Limitation: slope. Limitation: slope. Limitation: flooding, wetness, droughty. 0.06-2.0 very rapid/rapid very severe Saline wildrye, Shadscale saltbrush, Indian ricegrass, Wyoming big sagebrush, Bluebunch wheatgrass Very limited: slope, depth to hard bedrock. *The R preceding the soil number represents the Soil Survey of Rifle Area, Colorado. The D preceding the soil number represents the Soil Survey of Douglas-Plateau Area, Colorado. Limitation: erodes easily, slope, too arid. Limitation: erodes easily, slope, soil blowing. Limitation: slope. Limitation: deep to water. Limitation: percs slowly, slope, soil blowing. Limitation: large stones, slope, depth to rock. Limitation: large stones, slope, too arid, depth to rock. Very limited: depth to hard bedrock, slope. Poor: slope, depth to bedrock. Poor: slope, rock fragments, depth to bedrock, salinity. Very limited: depth to bedrock, slope. S:\EHS\Piceance EHS\1. Compliance Programs\Stormwater\Plans and Manuals\CDPHE SWMP and Appendices\CDPHE Permit-Specific Information\COR03B651_Plateau Creek\Appendix C - Plateau Creek Soil Types Table January 2008 Appendix F Method(s) for Determining Vegetative Cover 1 Ocular Vegetation Monitoring Guidance October 7, 2014 Introduction This document is meant to serve as a source of guidance for estimating basal vegetative cover, when time and resources cannot afford the utilization of a more extensive monitoring process. What To Look For Two of the primary types of vegetative cover are canopy cover and basal cover. Canopy cover refers to the coverage of soils surfaces by the herbaceous top-growth of a plant. Basal cover refers to the amount of cover or density of plant stem coverage on the soil surface. For the purposes of estimating “vegetative cover” for compliance with Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment (CDPHE) and Colorado Oil & Gas Conservation Commission (COGCC) requirements, basal cover is the cover type of interest. Looking at the image, below, it is easy to understand the challenge of estimating basal cover because basal cover is often covered and skewed by canopy cover. How to Do It It is difficult to estimate basal cover without utilizing quantitative measuring procedures. By using the following simple procedure and a Visual Cover Estimate Chart, a more accurate estimate can be achieved. Materials & Resources • 6” PVC Pipe Ring (PVC pipe cut in ~2” segments) • Hand clippers • Visual Cover Estimate Chart 2 • Printed Ocular Veg. Monitoring Field Calculation Sheet / Pencil or Digital “Ocular Veg Monitoring Calc Sheet” / Tablet Procedure I. Designate Observation Points To start, review the area of disturbance and the adjacent, non-disturbed vegetation growth. As you review the areas, keep in mind general areas where the growth appears relatively low, compared to the whole; relatively dense or highly vegetation, relative to the whole; and those areas that are of medium or average growth, and the most representative of the area. Keeping these spots in mind, designate the following points: A. Off Disturbance (pre-existing) 1. Three (3) of relative low growth 2. Three (3) of relative high growth, and 3. Three (3) of medium or average growth. B. Reclaimed Disturbance (reclaimed) 1. Three (3) of relative low growth 2. Three (3) of relative high growth, and 3. Three (3) of medium or average growth. The more samples you take, the more accurate your results will be. If you choose to take more samples, either target single additional samples that would be considered medium or average growth, or take additional samples is sets of 3, as described above. II. Clipping Observation Points After you have designated the areas, as described above, you will need to remove the herbaceous top-growth, leaving a stubble-height of about ½ an inch. This exposes the basal coverage. The density of this stubble will be what you compare against the Visual Cover Estimate Chart. To do this, complete the following: 1. Using a ring made of 6” PVC pipe, randomly toss the pipe within your designated areas. 2. Where the ring lands, use clippers to clear an area > 6” in diameter of plant top growth. Make sure to leave ½-1 inch of stubble. 3. Randomly position the 6” PVC ring on your cleared area, flat against the ground surface. Looking directly down on the stubble, you will be looking at the cut surfaces straight on. 4. Utilizing a Visual Cover Estimate Chart, visually compare the cover of your plant stubble to the chart options. 5. Record the estimated percentages for each sample (see Ocular Veg. Monitoring Field Calculation Sheet). 6. Average the results of the Off-Disturbance estimates 7. Average the results of the On-Disturbance estimates 8. Divide the On-Disturbance estimates by your Off-Disturbance estimates – this gives you’re your % relative cover. 3 References What Is Cover? Principles of Vegetation Measurement and Assessment and Ecological Monitoring and Analysis. University of Idaho, College of Natural Resources. Website. Visual Cover Estimate Chart. ftp://ftp-fc.sc.egov.usda.gov/OR/Grazing_Lands/Planning_Aids/OR-02-NRPH-Ex4-10.pdf Exhibit 4-10 Comparison Charts for Visual Estimation of Forage Cover (190-NRPH, AMENDMENT OR-2, May 2004) OR-4ex-23 (190-NRPH, AMENDMENT OR-2, May 2004) OR-4ex-24 Ocular Vegetation Monitoring Caculation Sheet LOCATION: Reclaimed Pre-Disturbance Reclaimed Pre-Disturbance Set 1 Set 2 Low Growth Area Average Growth Area High Growth Area Average Growth Area High Growth Area Set 4 Low Growth Area Average Growth Area High Growth Area Set 5 Low Growth Area Low Growth Area Average Growth Area High Growth Area NOTES: DATE: COMPLETED BY: Average Growth Area High Growth Area Set 6 Low Growth Area Average Growth Area High Growth Area Estimated Total Average Reclaimed Disturbance % Cover Estimated Total Average Pre- Disturbance % Cover % Vegetative Basal Cover of Reclaim, relative of Pre-Disturbance Set 3 Low Growth Area Created: October 7th, 2014 Appendix G Master Reclamation Plan 1 Master Reclamation Plan Revised March 20, 2018 2 Table of Contents Master Reclamation Plan ................................................................................................................................ 1 Introduction .................................................................................................................................................... 3 1.0 Pre-Disturbance and Planning ............................................................................................................. 4 1.1 Initial Site Assessment ................................................................................................................. 4 2.0 Initial Construction .............................................................................................................................. 5 2.1 Stormwater Management ........................................................................................................... 5 2.2 Soil Management ......................................................................................................................... 6 2.3 Waters of the US ......................................................................................................................... 6 2.4 Materials and Waste Management ............................................................................................. 7 2.5 Other Natural Resources Considered During Reclamation .......................................................... 7 3.0 Interim and Final Reclamation ............................................................................................................. 7 3.1 Recontouring ............................................................................................................................... 7 3.2 Site and Soil Preparation ............................................................................................................. 7 3.3 Seeding Methods ......................................................................................................................... 8 3.4 Soil Amendments......................................................................................................................... 8 3.5 Mulch........................................................................................................................................... 8 3.6 Seed Mixes .................................................................................................................................. 8 3.7 Fencing ........................................................................................................................................ 9 3.8 Weed Management ..................................................................................................................... 9 3.9 Well Plug and Abandonment ....................................................................................................... 9 3.10 Pipeline Abandonment and Removal ........................................................................................ 10 3.11 Reclamation Monitoring ............................................................................................................ 10 3.12 Equipment and Performance Photos ......................................................................................... 11 4.0 Site Specific Reclamation Plan ........................................................................................................... 11 Appendix A – Caerus Best Management Practices (BMP) Manual (Refer to SWMP Appendix E) .................. 12 Appendix B – Detailed Earthwork Guidelines ................................................................................................ 13 Appendix C – Detailed Seeding Guidelines .................................................................................................... 14 Appendix D – BLM and Landowner Seed Mixture Tables .............................................................................. 15 Appendix E – Seed Report Form .................................................................................................................... 16 Appendix F – Weed Management Plan ......................................................................................................... 17 Appendix G – BLM and Landowner Seed Mixture Tables .............................................................................. 18 Appendix H – Seeding Equipment and Performance Photos ......................................................................... 19 Appendix I – Site Specific Reclamation Plan Template .................................................................................. 20 3 Introduction This Master Reclamation Plan has been developed to share with Caerus staff and contractors as a training and awareness tool. This Plan has also been developed for cooperating agencies such as the Bureau of Land Management (BLM), Colorado Oil and Gas Conservation Commission (COGCC), Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment (CDPHE), Colorado Parks and Wildlife (CPW) and local governments (counties, cities and towns). Caerus will submit the Master Reclamation Plan to these agencies upon request or as a permit Condition Of Approval (COA). The objective of Caerus’ Reclamation Program in Piceance Basin (Garfield, Rio Blanco and Mesa Counties) is to establish diverse, self-sustaining native vegetation cover that meets our compliance requirements and provides a standard for reclamation. To meet these objectives, careful planning goes into each phase of the project, from pre-construction planning to final reclamation and bond release. The following summary provides a brief overview of Caerus’ reclamation objectives for each life-phase of the disturbance, along with general practices for all surface disturbance activities. Additional detailed information on earthwork, revegetation, stormwater practices, and reclamation maintenance is provided throughout this document and the appendices. Pre-Disturbance/Planning: The main objective of the Pre-Disturbance/Planning phase is to gather site-specific data on soils, natural landform, wetlands and sensitive habitats, weeds, vegetative cover and density, and any other pertinent information prior to initial disturbance. This baseline data is summarized in a Biological Assessment Report (BAR), Mini BAR or Initial Site Assessment (ISA). The reports are used to establish the best methods for reclamation for the life of the oil and gas operation, and to build success criteria for interim and final reclamation. Visual resources are taken into account at this time, and effective mitigation measures are developed and implemented prior to disturbance, as needed. Stormwater management planning is another key step in the Pre-Disturbance/Planning phase. A Stormwater Management Plan (SWMP) is required by the Colorado Department of Public Health and Environment – Water Quality Control Division (CDPHE WQCD) prior to construction activity. Best Management Practices (BMPs) are needed for each phase of construction; these controls manage stormwater to prevent sediment discharge and erosion. The type and location of BMPs for each phase of construction are determined, and Pre-Disturbance BMPs are installed, as needed. Construction: The main objective of the Construction phase is to conserve topsoil and organics, and to quickly stabilize the site for stormwater compliance. Stormwater BMPs can include, but are not limited to, topsoil seeding, slash management, and land forming. Ideally, there are multiple layers of BMPs installed during this phase to stabilize the location and protect water quality. Dust control is generally implemented along access roads during all phases of construction by watering or salting the road and/or reducing traffic speed. Segregated soils and organic material are staged for use in future phases, while conserving active soil 4 microbiology where possible. Suggested seed mixes for this phase are typically grass species only, due to its quick establishment time and the temporary nature of the Construction phase. Interim and Final Reclamation: During Interim Reclamation, the main objective is to reduce the footprint of the overall operational working surface of the location by returning as much of the disturbance to original grade and hydrologic function. Redistribution of topsoil on the reclaimed area helps to maintain healthy, biologically active topsoil. Since the Interim Reclamation is typically designed for long-term operations, the majority of Stormwater BMPs implemented during this phase require minimal maintenance and stand the test of time or are easily phased out when they are no longer needed. Recommended seed mixes typically include native shrubs, forbs and grasses, which stabilize the location, provide plant diversity and inhibit non- desirable species. Fencing may be used to protect the reclamation area from wildlife or livestock. A weed management program is utilized during both interim and final reclamation to control invasive, noxious and annual weeds. Prior to any disturbance, if any noxious weeds are identified via the vegetation surveys, noxious weeds will be treated to help prevent the spread of weed seeds. The main objective of Final Reclamation is to return the landform to the approximate pre-existing condition and hydrologic function by successfully establishing a vigorous, early seral stage, diverse native and/or desired plant community. In preparation for final reclamation, the well(s) is plugged and abandoned, equipment is removed, unused pipelines are cut and blinded off or removed, water wells drilled for operations are plugged, and the location is tested and remediated to meet the Colorado Oil and Gas Conservation Commission (COGCC) Table 910-1 standards for constituents of concern. Once the location is cleared, final earthwork and seeding can commence. Proper seed bed preparation, seeding method, seed mix and amendments will be used to maximize the success of the reclaim. Successful final reclaims are sustainable and will maximize opportunity for long-term, natural ecological restoration of the disturbed site. Success criteria for final reclamation is determined and evaluated by a variety of both qualitative and quantitative analysis. Data collected during inspections and monitoring events is compared to the seed that was planted, Ecological Site Descriptions (ESD), off-site or pre-set eco-type reference areas, or base-line data gathered in the Pre-Disturbance/Planning phase. Once the success criteria are met and approved by the regulating agencies, the location can be released back to the landowner. 1.0 Pre -Disturbance and Planning 1.1 Initial Site Assessment All or a portion of the following baseline conditions are evaluated and reported. This information is typically collected prior to disturbance but can also be collected prior to Interim or Final reclamation. • Project Area - The project location and area will be described. • Soils – An Order 1 Soil Survey is completed to determine baseline soils. Information from the soil survey including physical and chemical lab data are used to establish a topsoil management plan for the disturbance. • Vegetation – A Vegetation Survey of each proposed pad, access road or ancillary facilities pad would consist of identifying individual species of grasses and forbs and a technical assessment of the current percent basal cover of those species present on the proposed development site. The 5 species list would be used to pick those species which match with the BLM or Forest Service approved species list for reclamation. • Federal and State Listed Candidate, Threatened and Endangered Plant Species – A species survey will be conducted to identify potential suitable habitat and species of concern identified within the project area. • Noxious Weeds - A baseline noxious weed inventory would be utilized to identify areas requiring pre-disturbance weed control through application of proper herbicides. Also, the survey would provide documentation on the presence of noxious weeds on areas directly adjacent to proposed development site(s). • Federal and State Listed Candidate, Threatened and Endangered Animal Species – A species survey will be conducted to identify potential suitable habitat and species of concern identified within the project area. • General Wildlife – A wildlife survey will be conducted on the project area. Species may include raptors, migratory, non-migratory and Birds of Conservation Concern, American elk and mule deer, black bear and mountain lion, small mammals, and other species of interest. • Waters of the United States – A description of the survey area will include vegetation communities, average climate, recent weather, etc. • Wetland Delineation – A description of the survey area, including wetlands, other waters, and uplands within survey area, average climate, recent weather, etc. Delineations results will include USACE Wetland Delineation Manual and appropriate Regional Supplement forms. • Flood Plain Verification - Description of the survey area, including wetlands, other waters, and uplands within survey area, average climate, recent weather, etc. • Visual Resources – The composite of basic terrain, geologic features, hydrologic features, vegetative patterns, and land use effects that typify a land unit and influence the visual appeal that the unit may have for visitors. • Archeological Resources - Archaeological resources consist of the physical remains of past human activity. These resources may be of regional, national or international significance. These resources are often very susceptible to disturbance and are non-renewable and finite in number so planning and design mitigate impact to these resources. • Paleontological Resources - Paleontological resources are fragile and nonrenewable scientific records of the history of life on earth, and so represent an important and critical component of America's natural heritage. Planning and design with paleontological resources is important because once these resources are "damaged, destroyed or improperly collected, their scientific and educational value may be greatly reduced or lost forever. • Photo Documentation – Photo documentation of each vegetation transect, and soil pit will be included. 2.0 Initial Construction 2.1 Stormwater Management BMPs will be utilized for all projects to minimize sheet and rill erosion and to maintain compliance with the CDPHE –WQCD General Permit for Stormwater Discharges associated with Construction Activity and with COGCC’s 1000 Series Rules. Caerus’s BMP manual can be found in Appendix A (refer to SWMP Appendix E). 6 Non-structural BMPs related to sheet and rill erosion will include construction techniques to minimize land disturbance by proper site construction planning and preserving natural vegetation. Depending on site specific conditions, water bars, wing ditches, drainage dips and culverts may be utilized to manage water along road/pipeline ROWs. Stabilization measures may include the following types of structural BMPs: retention structures (i.e. sediment traps, straw bales, or other containment devices), infiltration structures (i.e. gravel and sand), and diversionary structures (i.e. culverts, wing ditches, water bars, berms and diversion ditches). Erosion on steep slopes will be controlled using standard methods such as hydro mulching, tackifiers, and/or matting. Sediment and erosion control structures will be inspected per the applicable regulation, cleaned out, and maintained in functional condition. The timing of inspection, monitoring and maintenance will comply with CDPHE and COGCC standards. 2.2 Soil Management Soils will be managed according to the findings summarized in BAR, Mini BAR or ISA document. In general, topsoil will be collected from the uppermost horizon and stored separately from the subsoil. Topsoil depth may vary across the well pad site and will be stripped and salvaged accordingly. Contractors will reference the site-specific document such as the survey plat, to determine salvage strategies. Precautions will be taken to protect soil from erosion, degradation and contamination, including covering piles with mulch, and diverting water runoff around piles. Soil that will be stored for more than one growing season may be seeded with short-lived species to compete against weeds. Soil should not be piled too high, as the resulting compaction and anaerobic conditions can result in soil degradation. Detailed Earthwork Guidelines can be found in Appendix B. Fugitive dust will be prevented and abated as needed, whether created by vehicular traffic, equipment operations or wind events. The BLM may direct the operator to change the level and type of treatment if dust abatement is insufficient. BLM approval is required before application of surfactants, binding agents, or other dust-suppression chemicals on roadways within public lands. Speed control measures on all project-related unpaved roads may be required. More stringent dust control may be required in areas adjacent to Federal- or State-listed threatened, endangered, or sensitive plant species. 2.3 Waters of the US Areas identified as Waters of US, Wetland, Floodplain or critical Riparian habitat are mitigated primarily by avoidance in the planning phase. Local, State, and Federal rules and guidelines are followed, when applicable, for any disturbance falling with in Waters of the State. If a project cannot be moved to avoid an impact, the required permit will be obtained. If the permit is granted, the permit COAs will be implemented to mitigate the project impacts. Mitigation could include utilizing a specific riparian habitat seed mix with live plants or paying into a mitigation bank to acquire credits for the impact. The ISA or BAR will identify these areas or impacts and provide general guidance for next steps. If a resource is impacted the site-specific reclamation will include the actual mitigation employed at the site. BMPs found in the BMP manual (Appendix A (refer to SWMP Appendix E)) should also be considered for any work in or around Waters of the State. 7 2.4 Materials and Waste Management Before reclamation earthwork (Interim or Final) is initiated, qualified environmental personnel will complete a records search and site-assessment for the purpose of identifying potential soil impacts resulting from current and historic activities on the pad. The site-assessment includes collection of field notes and a photographic record of site conditions. Soil samples will be collected from the footprint of removed production equipment, from any visibly stained soil, and wherever stormwater accumulations may concentrate contaminants. Collected soil samples will be analyzed for compliance with COGCC Table 910-1 constituents of concern. 2.5 Other Natural Resources Considered During Reclamation Other Natural Resources are considered during construction and reclamation activities. As noted above, pre-disturbance surveys are conducted to identify Threatened, Endangered or Sensitive plant or animal species, General Wildlife impacts, Paleontological Resources, Archeological Resources and Visual Resources. The ISA or BAR will identify these areas or impacts and provide general guidance for next steps. If a resource is impacted the site-specific reclamation will include the actual mitigation employed at the site. Visual Resource Management is a bit more common in our general reclamation practices. Planning and design minimize the visual impacts of surface-disturbing activities and maintain scenic values. During the planning and permitting phase, a location may be selected that falls within a BLM visual resource management class that requires mitigation. Best management practices such as land-forming, land- grading, manipulation of vegetation, colored mulching, etc. will be employed to mitigate the visual impact. The desired outcome is for the disturbance to blend in with the surrounding landscape so that the scenic quality is not altered. 3.0 Interim and Final Reclamation 3.1 Recontouring Recontouring the location should be the first step when initiating interim or final reclamation. Reclaimed topographic conditions should be similar to pre-disturbance conditions as described in the pre- construction, site specific document and the surveyor plats. The reclaimed landscape should blend with the surrounding contours, historic hydrology should be restored and erosion control BMPs should be installed to prevent stormwater discharges from the disturbance. Recontouring is required by the Bureau of Land Management (BLM) On-Shore Order 1 and the COGCC 1000 series rule. 3.2 Site and Soil Preparation Prior to seeding, the location and soil need to be prepped for optimal seed to soil contact and ultimately for the overall success of the revegetation. Compaction should be mitigated in areas with significant traffic or weight placed on them (i.e. parking areas) to approximately 18-24 inches, using standard ripping methods. Ripping will take place prior to application of topsoil. Segregated soils should be redistributed by first laying down the subsoil, and then spreading the topsoil over the subsoil. The topsoil should be spread at appropriate depths to the geographic topography. In most cases, to a depth of 4 to 6 inches (or if 8 topsoil is scarce, as deep as possible) across the disturbed areas. The location should be seeded with 48 hours of soil prep for optimum results. 3.3 Seeding Methods The methods required to successfully seed reclamation areas differ substantially from standard methods used for agriculture. The terrain is rougher, soils are often shallow, and seeding methods vary from species to species. Methods must be adaptable to account for individual species requirements within the seed mix. Segregation of seed by size and planting depth is critical for optimal regrowth, as different plant species have different seed sizes and require different planting depths. Seeding methods to be used on the site will be selected based on project conditions. Options include drill seeding, drill seeding with special handling of seed, hand or mechanical broadcasting, or hydro-seeding. Detailed Seeding Guidelines can be found in Appendix C. 3.4 Soil Amendments Soil amendments may be recommended based on the soil type and analytical results captured in the BAR or ISA. Site specific recommendations should be considered and employed during the site prep and seeding phase of the project. 3.5 Mulch Mulch may be used to hold seed in place and retain moisture. Hydraulic mulches are typically used when reclaiming steep terrain and crimped or tacked straw mulches are utilized on more level projects. 3.6 Seed Mixes The Colorado River Valley and Grand Junction BLM Field offices have approved six preferred seed mixes, and the White River BLM Field Office has approved eight preferred seed mixes, to be used for reclaiming Oil and Gas locations on federal surface. The mixes are ecosystem specific and include native species that are commonly found in the area due to factors such as elevation and moisture. The seed mixes are menu- driven, which gives the operator room to select preferred species based on seed availability, preference, establishment time and cost. A minimum rate of 60 pure live seeds per square foot for drill seeding, and 120 pure live seeds per square foot for hydraulic or broadcast seeding applications is required. The approved BLM seed mixtures may be found in Appendix D. When a location has federal mineral rights but sits on private surface, the BLM defers to the landowner’s desired seed mix. If the BAR or ISA indicates that there are high densities of grasses or forbs on any given proposed location that is not in current seed mixtures, a variance may be requested for inclusion of the species. Once reclamation activity has be completed, the seeding vendor will fill-out and submit the Piceance Seeding Form (Appendix E). The form captures the specific details of the project as they were implemented. The location, start and completions dates, seedbed preparations methods, soil amendments and rates, mulch type, seed mix and method, and any additional information will be captured on this form and uploaded to the tracking database. Information from this form will be stored for agency reporting. 9 3.7 Fencing When appropriate, reclaim areas will be fenced for the exclusion of livestock grazing until seeding is well established. Typically, a wildlife-friendly, four-strand fence is specified, with wood H-bracing on corners, and a “Cowboy” style wire gate for maintenance access. Also, to deter hunting traffic and other recreational use of reclaimed roads or pads, fencing or other site-specific protection of final reclamation areas may be installed. BLM surface locations will be fenced according to the specifications listed below. • In deer and elk habitat, fences for livestock exclusion will not exceed 40 inches. The four strand fence will have smooth top and bottom wires. Distance from the ground to the bottom smooth wire will be no less than 16 inches. Distance from the top wire to the second wire will be no less than 12 inches. Middle wires will be barbed, with 6-inch spacing. Livestock fencing standards for BLM may be also be found on page 18 of the Gold Book, 4th Edition, in BLM Manual Handbook H-1741-1, p. 16, or electric fencing may be approved. Fencing will remain in place and properly maintained, for reclamation sites, throughout vegetation establishment, or until the site is approved by COGCC for Interim complete or Final Reclaim bond release. Or, in the case of BLM surfaces, fence will remain until Interim Reclaim Approval or Final Abandonment Notice (FAN) is conditionally approved (with order to remove fence) on final reclaims. 3.8 Weed Management Noxious weeds will be documented during the pre-disturbance survey, and a site-specific management plan will be developed to address any concerns. An annual weed management program is employed for all locations. Each location is inspected annually and treated as necessary. Each producing location will receive a bare-ground treatment either in the fall or spring and then annual and noxious weeds are treated throughout the growing season chemically, biologically or mechanically. A general stand-alone Weed Management Plan is included as Appendix F. This plan outlines management goals, methods, and monitoring of weeds. Herbicide use must be approved prior to spraying on BLM surface, and the following standards will be followed: • A Pesticide Use Proposal (PUP) will be submitted and approved prior to the use of herbicides on Public Lands. • A Weed Management Plan (see Appendix F) will be submitted and approved prior to the use of herbicides. • Pesticide Application Records (PARs) will be submitted to the BLM office. • A Pesticide Use Report will be submitted at the end of the treatment season. 3.9 Well Plug and Abandonment COGCC and BLM well testing, and production requirements are followed for each project. If a well does not pass a test or if the well has reached the end of its life, the well may be repaired or plugged and abandoned. Sub-surface Integrity is maintained by plugging drill holes and surface openings, and 10 filling/capping any other openings to ensure that contamination of ground and surface water does not occur. 3.10 Pipeline Abandonment and Removal Final abandonment of pipelines and flowlines will include purging, proper disposal of fluids, then plugging at specific intervals. COGCC 1100 series rules and requirements will be followed during pipeline abandonment. Surface lines and any lines that may be exposed in the foreseeable future due to water or wind erosion, soil movement, or anticipated subsequent use, will be removed. Exceptions for site-specific situations may be requested and include: facilities, risers, meter housing, or other pipelines that must remain on location for current use related to other operations or because they are owned by a 3rd party. In these cases, re-assignment of responsibility may be needed, concerning final removal of any remaining equipment and ROW final reclamation. 3.11 Reclamation Monitoring The purpose of the Vegetation Monitoring Program is to verify compliance with Federal and State reclamation success requirements to establish early seral stage development for desirable vegetation. The program utilizes the Stormwater and Inspection Programs as a means to identify when a disturbance requires a quantitative vegetation measurement, in addition to other regulatory required monitoring cycles. For Colorado River Valley, Grand Junction, and White River Field offices, Annual Reclamation Status Reports are completed on a three-year rotation for Interim and Final Reclaim disturbances after the 2nd season of establishment. See Appendix G for the BLM and Caerus Vegetation Monitoring Guidance Documentation. Another purpose of the Vegetation Monitoring Program is to verify when reclamation success criteria has been met. Criteria, currently in the WRFO BLM Resource Management Plan (Aug. 2015), will serve as the basis for Caerus’ overall reclamation success goals and are listed below: • At a minimum, the established plant community will consist of species included in the seed mix and/or desirable species which occur in the surrounding natural vegetation. o Permanent vegetative cover will be determined successful when the basal cover of desirable perennial species is at least 80 percent of the basal cover of the undisturbed site or, of a reference area, or, if available, of the potential basal cover as defined in the National Resource Conservation Service (NRCS) Range/Ecological Site(s) for the area. o The resulting plant community (in a healthy early seral state) must contain at least 80 percent desirable plant species, preferably one of which is a forb or shrub. Plants must be resilient, as demonstrated by vigor, well-developed root systems and flowers. Shrubs must be well established and at least in a “young” age class, rather than comprised mainly of seedlings that might not survive. o No one species may exceed 70 percent basal cover in the resulting plant community, to achieve species diversity on the site. Desirable species include those defined by those in the BLM-approved seed mix, other desired species found in the reference area, or potential species in the NRCS range/ecological site. 11 o Reference areas may be identified when areas near the disturbance do not reflect the appropriate plant community. Prior to BLM approval for use as a reference area, an operator may provide quantitative site measurements of vegetation cover, vegetation composition, woody plant density, and percent bare ground. Data collected during the annual vegetation monitoring events, is compiled for annual reporting, analysis, and budgeting. The data is reviewed each year and a team of qualified individuals decide what actions (if any) are required to achieve successful reclamation, final stabilization, or bond release. Next steps or corrective actions are incorporated in annual planning and budget cycles for the coming season. 3.12 Equipment and Performance Photos This Plan also includes photos of equipment and reclamation projects as Appendix H for reference. 4.0 Site Specific Reclamation Plan Caerus would like to utilize this Plan as a detailed reference document with approving agencies. For example, Caerus will submit this Master Reclamation Plan to the BLM for their approval on the overall general reclamation methods and approach. If and when approved, this document will be kept by the BLM and Caerus will submit a simplified Site-Specific Reclamation Plan with only the pertinent details associated with that location. The site-specific information will be more apparent and easy to read. The intent of this process is to make generating, reviewing and approving a site-specific plans more efficient for both parties. The template will include information referencing each item listed above in Sections 1.0 through 3.0. The Site-Specific Reclamation Plan Template is attached in Appendix I. 12 Appendix A – Caerus Best Management Practices (BMP) Manual (Refer to SWMP Appendix E) 13 Appendix B – Detailed Earthwork Guidelines Appendix B – Detailed Earthwork Guidelines Table of Contents Appendix A – Detailed Earthwork Guidelines ...................................................................................................................................... 1 1.0 Earthwork ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2 1.1 Initial Construction ............................................................................................................................................... 2 1.1.1 Preconstruction and Temporary Stormwater BMPs ................................................................................................ 2 1.1.2 Stabilized Unpaved Surface Stockpiling .................................................................................................................... 2 1.1.3 Vegetation/Slash Windrowing .................................................................................................................................. 2 1.1.4 Topsoil and Subsoil Conservation ............................................................................................................................. 3 1.1.5 Topsoil Stripping and Stockpiling (Non-Cropland) ................................................................................................... 3 1.1.6 Subsoil Stripping and Stockpiling (Non-Cropland) ................................................................................................... 4 1.1.7 Soil Stripping and Stockpiling (Cropland) ................................................................................................................. 4 1.2 Interim Reclamation ............................................................................................................................................. 5 1.2.1 Mass Fill Material Backfilling, Grading, Drainage, and BMPs .................................................................................. 5 1.2.2 Subsoil and Topsoil Placement Matrix (Non-Cropland) ........................................................................................... 5 1.2.3 Soil Replacement (Cropland)..................................................................................................................................... 7 1.2.4 Stabilized Unpaved Surfaces ..................................................................................................................................... 7 1.2.5 Site Finalization .......................................................................................................................................................... 7 1.2.6 Access Roads .............................................................................................................................................................. 7 1.3 Final Reclamation ................................................................................................................................................. 7 1.3.1 Removal of Structures .............................................................................................................................................. 7 1.3.2 Topsoil and Subsoil Handling (Non-Cropland).......................................................................................................... 7 1.3.3 Fill Material Backfilling and Grading to Approximate Original Contour .................................................................. 8 1.3.4 Subsoil and Topsoil Placement ................................................................................................................................. 8 1.3.5 Use of Soil Matrix Replacement Procedures to Enhance Species Diversity and Ecosystem Development .......... 8 1.3.6 Soil Replacement (Cropland)..................................................................................................................................... 9 1.3.7 Re-Contouring ............................................................................................................................................................ 9 1.4 Pipeline Construction and Reclamation ................................................................................................................11 1.4.1 Delineation of limits of disturbance: ...................................................................................................................... 11 1.4.2 Preconstruction & Temporary Stormwater BMP’s: ............................................................................................... 11 1.4.3 Stabilized Unpaved Surface Stockpiling: ................................................................................................................. 11 1.4.4 Vegetation/Slash Windrowing: ............................................................................................................................... 11 1.4.5 Topsoil Conservation: .............................................................................................................................................. 11 1.4.6 Mass Subsoil Grading, Drainage and Stormwater Controls:.................................................................................. 11 1.4.7 Topsoil Placement: .................................................................................................................................................. 12 1.4.8 Stabilized Unpaved Surfaces: .................................................................................................................................. 13 1.4.9 Site Finalization:....................................................................................................................................................... 13 1.0 Earthwork The main earthwork objectives on access road, facility and pipeline construction (Initial Construction) are: topsoil conservation, stormwater management and product delivery. The main earthwork objective on Interim Reclamation projects is to minimize the working surface area while mitigating the visual resource disturbance, maximizing the stormwater management effectiveness and utilizing available topsoil efficiently. The main earthwork objective on Final Reclamation Projects is to restore the original contours and spread the available topsoil equally over the entire site. The following segment on Soils and Soil Management outline guidelines for Earthwork contractors related to each life phase of the disturbance. Practices listed in Sections 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 relate to roads, facilities and pad construction and reclamation. Guidelines specific to pipeline construction are provided separately in section 1.4. Soils and Soil Management 1.1 Initial Construction 1.1.1 Preconstruction and Temporary Stormwater BMPs Construction is not allowed to take place until preconstruction and temporary BMPs are in place per site plan and on-site review. Typical, preconstruction and temporary stormwater BMP requirements not addressed at the scale of the site plan and/or not encountered during the on-site review are still required and will be addressed with authorized change orders. 1.1.2 Stabilized Unpaved Surface Stockpiling During reclamation, any available aggregate material found on the operation’s surface should be stockpiled in an approved and strategic area. 1.1.3 Vegetation/Slash Windrowing • Before construction or surface disturbance the site will be cleared of brush and trees. • Vegetation removal will be minimized. • All trees directly outside the limits of construction will be left standing and undamaged unless BLM/Caerus specifically directs removal. • BLM must be notified in advance if machinery such as track-mounted forestry mulchers or hydro- axes are to be used. • Woody material may be chipped in place (with forestry mulcher or hydro-ax), salvaged and stored with topsoil. • An alternative method involves cutting and evenly scattering woody materials smaller than 4” in diameter. Large woody material is to be cut in pieces, salvaged and stored with topsoil. A wood- cutting permit must be purchased from the BLM prior to removing. • During reclamation, woody material is to be scattered throughout the site to create micro-sites that support seed germination and establishment. • An alternate option for woody material is to stack near existing BLM roads for removal from public land (as firewood or fence posts). • Stumps over 6” in height will not be left in place. Stumps may be buried or scattered in an approved area such as a toe-slope, perimeter berm for stormwater or topsoil protection, or used as a BMP. • Available vegetation and slash can and should be utilized as BMPs. • Site specific drainage and water concentration patterns will dictate the placement of higher quality vegetation. • Large trees placed alone in drainage swales do not meet performance based requirements. • Vegetation/Slash windrowing requires a spread of equipment including a dozer and excavator to meet Caerus’ performance-based expectations. 1.1.4 Topsoil and Subsoil Conservation • Topsoil and subsoil conservation will be stockpiled or windrowed according to the BAR or ISA recommendations. • Every attempt will be made to conserve available topsoil and subsoil horizons. • Topsoil and subsoil will be separated into two respective stockpiles. • Many sites have several topsoil types and must be kept segregated. • Topsoil and subsoil windrows and stockpiles can perform as additional best management practices when placed properly, functioning as stormwater and visual resource management landforms. • Site conditions and constraints not addressed at the scale of the site plans are to be field designed to meet the surface management performance based objectives. • Excess or deficient soil volume in diversion windrows and/or visual screens will not be accepted. Attention to elevations and site drainage patterns is critical. • Special attention should be paid to access road construction to windrow proper amounts of topsoil above the cut slope and below the fill slope. • Special attention should be paid to the initial placement of topsoil below the fill slope in order to prevent subsoil from covering the windrowed topsoil. • When access road conditions do not permit the windrowing of topsoil, conserved topsoil is to be stockpiled in stages for future spreading after rough grading. 1.1.5 Topsoil Stripping and Stockpiling (Non-Cropland) Topsoil and suitable subsoil for plant growth needs to be salvaged when conditions are not too wet or too dry. Attempting to salvage soil under poor weather conditions can lead to the destruction of desirable soil structure. Each soil texture has a different range of moisture content that provides optimum topsoil stripping to preserve soil structure. Several guidelines for contractors to follow for earthwork operations are listed below: • Avoid stripping topsoil when large dry clumps are produced, indicating very dry soil conditions. • Avoid stripping topsoil when soil material is coming up in wet clumps and sticking to equipment blades, ripper shanks, etc. • When practical, the entire depth of topsoil should be retrieved in one pass or lift. This process will help reduce compaction and subsequent destruction of desirable soil structure. • When vegetation communities, which are to receive topsoil salvage operations, consist of all desirable native grass species, it is advisable to include the vegetation with the salvaging operation. Seed from desirable grass species will likely exist in the soil and may provide a valuable seed bank when topsoil is re-spread. • Topsoil and potential subsoil stockpiles may consist of berms placed at the toe of pads. The topsoil stockpile will be placed at the toe of the slope and the subsoil stockpile berm will be placed approximately 10 feet above the topsoil stockpile. • Topsoil and subsoil stockpiles on access roads will be placed at the toe of fill slopes for slopes 4:1 or steeper and the top of cut areas with slopes flatter than 4:1. Separation of topsoil and subsoil material is not feasible on slopes 2:5 to 1 or steeper. In many cases, extremely steep slope areas will contain very little useable topsoil due to typical shallow soils and rocky substrates. It is a common misconception that frozen soil should not be stripped and stockpiled. Based upon an informal assessment found in a 1987 annual report by the Wyodak Coal Mine in Gillette, Wyoming, there is evidence that stripping frozen soil may be acceptable and without negative impacts to soil structure and other physical and chemical conditions in the soil. Reclamation personnel discovered, in the summer of 1987, that a parcel of re-graded spoil that had received “live” frozen topsoil the previous winter was producing noticeable stands of grasses and shrubs. This excerpt from the Wyodak annual report, 1987, went on to say that frozen topsoil stripped and replaced on an area for reclamation actually provided better species diversity than areas typical stripped and replaced during favorable weather conditions. The key to stripping subsoil and topsoil under snow or during winter months is to make sure the material is truly frozen throughout the profile to be stripped in order to avoid loss of valuable soil structure with wet soils (Wrede 2006). 1.1.6 Subsoil Stripping and Stockpiling (Non-Cropland) Any subsoil material which meets plant growth medium criteria as described in site-specific BAR or ISA will be assigned a stripping depth to be used during the initial construction phase for roads and ancillary facilities pads. Subsoil material horizons will be stripped after all topsoil has been stripped and stockpiled to ensure proper segregation of topsoil and subsoil materials. Subsoil material will be placed in a subsoil stockpile berm above the topsoil stockpile berm which is placed at the toe of pad slopes. There will be a separation distance of approximately 10 feet between the topsoil and subsoil stockpiles. There are alternate methods for topsoil and subsoil stockpiling and those alternate methods can be employed after consultation with the Caerus Construction and EHS departments. 1.1.7 Soil Stripping and Stockpiling (Cropland) Current COGCC regulations require salvage and replacement of soils by horizon and to a depth of 6 feet or bedrock/paralithic contact, whichever is shallower. The BAR or ISA will be used to establish the soil mapping unit number, soil horizons (A, B, C or A, C) (Figure 4.1), and soil chemical and physical elements from the soil test. Those soils which contain an A, B, and C horizon will have a salvage plan that separates all three horizons as long as the soil scientist finds benefit in the salvaging of the C horizon separately. The C horizon would have to receive a Good or Fair rating in order to require separate horizon salvage and replacement. Otherwise, the C horizon will be considered overburden and be placed under the B followed by the A horizon. Stockpiles will consist of each separate horizon being placed in berms at the toe of the slope. The A horizon will be placed closest to the toe followed by the B horizon and if specified, the C horizon. A 10-foot buffer will be placed between each berm to help keep soil horizons from comingling. 1.2 Interim Reclamation 1.2.1 Mass Fill Material Backfilling, Grading, Drainage, and BMPs • A Caerus Reclamation and Construction Coordinator must sign off on rough grading and drainage before topsoil spreading can take place. • All slopes, exterior facing stockpiles and windrows will terminate in a toe berm of sufficient size and compaction to contain anticipated erosion until vegetation establishment takes place. • Constraints may not allow toe berms to be installed. In these situations, sediment and stormwater should be diverted to a designed containment. • All slopes are to be tracked, sheep foot pocked and/or benched in a manner to promote vegetative growth and prevent washing. • Culverts are required to be installed prior to topsoil placement and road surfacing. Culverts are to be installed with sufficient slope and diameter to promote drainage and to prevent silting and freezing. • Roads should be built up to drain away from culvert crossings to prevent water from pooling. Road construction quality should allow adequate access to a location during the life of the facility. • Drainage outlets, swales and culvert slopes should be properly prepared for erosion control fabric and associated h and labor. • Rough grading, proper drainage and culvert installations will be approved by a Caerus Reclamation and Construction Coordinator before further construction activities continue. 1.2.2 Subsoil and Topsoil Placement Matrix (Non-Cropland) Subsoil placement will occur when subsoil material is determined to have suitable plant growth requirements as identified during the Assessment Surveys. Subsoil material will consist of B and C Horizon material that falls into the “Good” or “Fair” ratings. The use of subsoil will depend greatly on the amount of topsoil or A horizon material that is available for placement on reclaimed surfaces. Uniform placement of topsoil and subsoil is not desirable in steep and mountainous areas since different areas in the landscape are more difficult to revegetate. Also, erosion processes can still occur regardless of good BMP programs and installation, especially until a viable vegetative cover is established. Variable topsoil depths help to establish species diversity. When shrub planting is used as part of the final reclamation/revegetation process, planting will typically occur in mid slopes with shallow soil replacement as described in Section 8.4.5. The greatest depth of topsoil should be placed in traditionally high erosion prone areas. The typical areas where the greatest depth of topsoil and subsoil will be placed are hilltops and slopes, as well as draws and drainage channels coming off of hilly areas. Topsoil and subsoil placement in this manner will help ensure there are adequate depths of plant growth medium over time. Topsoil and subsoil placement in this manner will be referred to throughout this document as soil placement matrix. A significant number of combinations of topsoil and subsoil placement depths may occur on individual sites depending on the quality and quantity of topsoil and subsoil that are established during the BAR or ISA. Therefore, topsoil and subsoil placement guidelines have been developed based upon total volumes of material available. Areas which are considered difficult to revegetate will receive the largest percentage of available topsoil and subsoil. This determination of topsoil replacement depths is based on a topsoil depth study that was conducted in Northwestern Colorado. The study indicates that replacement depths of topsoil greater than 6 inches will favor vegetation communities dominated by grasses (Redente et al 1997). The following are general percentage ranges to be used for the soil placement matrix. The slope percentages were established by David Chenoweth (Chenoweth and Associates Environmental Consultants, LLC), Certified Soil Scientist, based on review of numerous technical documents and consultation with professionals in the fields of Soil Science and Geomorphic Landforms. A mass balance of the site will be prepared and submitted to contractors prior to any placement of topsoil and subsoil. The general percentages for placement are as follows: 1. South Facing Hill Slope Tops 3:1 or greater 25% to 50% 2. West Facing Hill Slope Tops 3:1 or greater 25% to 50% 3. East Facing Hill Slope Tops 3:1 or greater 15% to 45% 4. North Facing Hill Slope Tops 3:1 or greater 15% to 45% 5. South, West, East, or North Mid Slopes 3:1 or greater 10% to 20% 6. Steep Gradient Draws 50% to 75% 7. South Facing Toe of Slopes 3:1 or less 20% to 40% 8. West Facing Toe of Slopes 3:1 or less 20% to 40% 9. East Facing Toe of Slopes 3:1 or less 10% to 30% 10. North Facing Toe of Slopes 3:1 or less 10% to 30% 11. Major Drainage Channel Bottoms 5% to 20% • Topsoil and subsoil placement cannot take place until rough grading, drainage, and culvert installations have been accepted by a Caerus Reclamation and Construction Coordinator. • The execution of the soil placement is critical to the success of revegetation projects. If done incorrectly, the condition of improperly prepared subsoil does not allow for stripping and replacement of topsoil. Final grading must be approved by Caerus’ Reclamation and Construction Coordinator prior to topsoil placement. Failure to obtain approval may require stripping the topsoil from areas needing re-grading and incurring any soil amendment expense to make up for lost topsoil and/or subsoil contaminated topsoil. • The earthwork contractor will be provided with staking and/or site plans that detail the soil matrix placement requirements. • On some projects where topsoil conservation was not effectively practiced or conditions prohibit effective segregation of A and B horizons, there will be a shortage of available topsoil. When there is an insufficient amount of topsoil to adequately cover the site with an average of a 4” depth, a plan will be developed to blend poorer quality topsoil or subsoil with appropriate soil amendments. • The use of a dozer to transport topsoil from the stockpile to the area of final placement is not allowed unless specifically authorized by a Caerus Reclamation and Construction Coordinator. • The preferred method of topsoil transport is by truck and/or loader. • Motor graders and backhoes or excavators can be utilized for finish spreading. • On steep slopes (2:1 or greater) requiring finish spreading, tracking dozers can be utilized after rough placement. • Soil matrix placement is critical to successful revegetation. • Special attention should be paid to slopes that are benched to ensure the benching is adequately sized to remain benched after topsoil spreading. • Tracked or pocketed slopes may have to be re-tracked and/or re-pocketed after topsoil is placed and spread. 1.2.3 Soil Replacement (Cropland) Cropland soils should be replaced by B horizon followed by A horizon soil material (replace C horizon before B horizon if C horizon is salvaged). Extreme care should be used to replace each horizon to the depth which existed prior to disturbance and as noted in the BAR or ISA. Equipment used for soil replacement should be selected to avoid compaction of soils which can severely impact crop yields. If salvaged depths cannot be replaced, additional imported topsoil and/or organic fertilizers may be required to amend soils. 1.2.4 Stabilized Unpaved Surfaces • It is the contractor’s responsibility to ensure that access roads and facilities meet Caerus’ performance requirements prior to spreading gravel. If there are questions, an inspection can be provided by Caerus personnel. • Surfaces, including bar ditches, will be adequately compacted prior to gravel placement. • Bar ditches are to be armored with the same gravel material as the road surface and compacted. Bar ditches must be sized to accommodate the gravel and still perform drainage functions. 1.2.5 Site Finalization • Any culvert, access road and/or other site damage from earthwork activities must be repaired prior to demobilization of earth moving equipment and operators. • Any significant erosion that has occurred during construction must be repaired. 1.2.6 Access Roads • The site’s attached access road is to be maintained and/or prepared for winter by removing the bar ditches and filling low spots as part of normal reclamation activities. • Any persistent re-occurring access road issues beyond normal wear and tear maintenance will be addressed via bid items. • Any large access road issues will be addressed via bid items. 1.3 Final Reclamation 1.3.1 Removal of Structures All production equipment and debris must be removed from the site prior to initiating reclamation work. This includes culverts, liner material, and residual stormwater BMP materials. Gravel encountered on pads will be removed, or if allowed, be placed in cut areas as long as 3 feet of overburden and subsoil/topsoil can be placed on top. 1.3.2 Topsoil and Subsoil Handling (Non-Cropland) Depending on the length of time that has passed since interim reclamation occurred and topsoil/subsoil was placed, soil development could have occurred and a new soil profile may have started to form. Thus, there are some possibilities that topsoil depth previously placed during interim reclamation may now be deeper due to soil profile development. This is a very slow process and does not typically become recognizable for approximately 20 years after topsoil and subsoil is placed. If 20 years or more has passed since interim reclamation, topsoil depths should be checked to determine if deeper depths exist. Topsoil and subsoil should be pushed with dozers to the bottom of the pad and placed in short term stockpiles until backfilling and grading to approximate original contour (AOC) occurs. Topsoil and subsoil needs to be handled separately. Topsoil should be pushed to the bottom of the pad and placed in a windrow first and subsoil should be pushed to a windrow above the topsoil so the materials are not comingled. A Caerus Reclamation and Construction Coordinator must sign off on proper removal and placement of subsoil and topsoil in temporary stockpile berms before any backfilling or grading operations occur. 1.3.3 Fill Material Backfilling and Grading to Approximate Original Contour Overburden fill material will be placed back into cut areas in progressive lifts. Large boulders will either be placed in cut areas where a minimum of three feet of overburden and subsoil/topsoil material can be placed on top or used on the surface for wildlife habitat and erosion control features. Density of rocks to be used on surface of final reclaim should not exceed surrounding undisturbed areas. Historic files of original topography and contours should be reviewed for establishing AOC elevations. Final grades of overburden should allow for the varying plant growth medium placements detailed in the soil placement matrix. Drainage channel locations will be re-established, and care should be taken to construct channel bottoms in a manner that does not concentrate flows and accelerate erosion. A combination of rock drop structures, rock lined channels, and erosion control blankets with in-filled Flexible Growth Medium may be used to control erosion until vegetation is established. The final step to completing overburden backfilling and grading will be ripping the surface to a depth of 18 inches on maximum 2 foot centers by dozers or other heavy equipment. All ripping should be completed on the contour when possible. 1.3.4 Subsoil and Topsoil Placement Subsoil and topsoil placement will be completed with excavators to avoid excessive compaction. The subsoil material will be pulled upslope and placed at depths provided by vegetation establishment zones as described in Figures below. Topsoil will be placed after all subsoil is placed and there is no danger of comingling the materials in any given work area. 1.3.5 Use of Soil Matrix Replacement Procedures to Enhance Species Diversity and Ecosystem Development Several studies have been completed which illustrate the benefits of variable soil replacement depths in establishing species diversity and canopy cover for grasses, forbs, and shrubs. Redente et al (1997) found that a 6-inch layer of topsoil was sufficient for establishment and continued productivity of vegetation at a northwest Colorado mine site. Deeper topsoil depths (12, 18, and 24 inches) were found to be associated with a plant community dominated by grasses, while shallower topsoil depths supported plant communities that were more diverse and had significantly greater forb and shrub densities. Also, shrub establishment tends to be more successful on shallow soil sites with rocky substrates. Illustrated figures below, were prepared by Chenoweth & Associates Environmental Consultants, LLC (C&A) to illustrate the soil matrix replacement criteria to enhance vegetation establishment for erosion control while promoting species diversity for grasses, forbs, and shrubs. 1.3.6 Soil Replacement (Cropland) When replacing cropland soils, replace the B horizon material first, followed by A horizon material (replace C horizon before B horizon if C horizon is salvaged). Extreme care should be used to replace each horizon to the depth which existed prior to disturbance and as noted in the BAR or ISA soil survey. Equipment used for soil replacement should be selected to avoid compaction of soils which can severely impact crop yields. If depths salvaged cannot be replaced, additional imported topsoil and/or organic fertilizers may be required to amend soils. 1.3.7 Re-Contouring The re-contoured surface should resemble the approximate original landform, with the goal to return the area to its natural hydrologic function. Re-contouring will begin with pulling the fill material back to the cut, blending with the natural slope of the area. Micro-drainages will be re-established to allow natural flow. The surface cover and size distribution of exposed rock will not exceed pre-disturbance site conditions. Any gravel will be removed from the working surface prior to re-contouring. If topsoil and/or subsoil stockpiles are present, they will be spread appropriately across the project site. If stockpiles are not present, the soil at the bottom of the fill slope will be utilized. Older pads may have had topsoil pushed to the bottom of the fill slope and covered with fill. Every effort will be made to save and distribute available topsoil. Figures (prepared by Chenoweth & Associates Environmental Consultants, LLC): Topsoil replacement on a slope cross section. 1.4 Pipeline Construction and Reclamation 1.4.1 Delineation of limits of disturbance: • Construction is not allowed to take place until surveying and utility locates are complete. 1.4.2 Preconstruction & Temporary Stormwater BMP’s: • Construction is not allowed to take place until preconstruction and temporary BMP’s are in place per site plan and on site review. Typical Preconstruction and Temporary stormwater BMP requirements not addressed at the scale of the site plan or/and not encountered during the onsite review are still required and will be addressed with a change order. 1.4.3 Stabilized Unpaved Surface Stockpiling: • Prior to mass earth moving on pipeline rights-of-way (ROWs), which interface existing facility and access roads, any available aggregate material must be stockpiled in an out of the way high point. 1.4.4 Vegetation/Slash Windrowing: • All available vegetation and slash is to be windrowed to perform as vegetative sediment filters. • Site specific drainage and water concentration patterns dictate placement of the more quality vegetation. • Large trees alone, in drainage swales do not meet performance based requirements. • This activity cannot be performed to Caerus’ performance-based expectations with a dozer alone and track hoes are required. 1.4.5 Topsoil Conservation: • Every attempt must be made to conserve available topsoil and avoid cross contamination with subsoil horizons. • Many sites have several topsoil types and must be kept segregated. • Topsoil windrows and stockpiles perform additional management practices as stormwater and visual resource management. Site conditions and constraints not addressed at the scale of the site plans are to be field designed and must meet the surface management performance based objectives. Excess soil volume in diversion windrows and deficient volumes in windrows containments and/or visual screens will not be accepted. Attention to elevations and drainage site drainage patterns is critical. • Special attention must be paid on pipeline ROW pioneering work to windrow enough topsoil above the cut slope and below the fill slope. • Special attention must be paid to the initial placement of topsoil to prevent subsoils from covering the windrowed topsoil. • When pipeline ROW conditions do not permit the windrowing of topsoil, the topsoil should be stockpiled in stages for future spreading after rough grading. 1.4.6 Mass Subsoil Grading, Drainage and Stormwater Controls: • Topsoil spreading on pipeline ROWs cannot take place until a Caerus representative has signed off on rough grading and drainage. • All slopes and exterior facing stockpiles and windrows will terminate in a toe berm of sufficient size and compaction to contain anticipated erosion on the slopes until vegetation establishment takes place. Pipeline ROW constraints may not allow toe berms to be installed. In these situations, sediment and stormwater must be diverted to a designed containment. • All pipeline ROW slopes are to be tracked, sheep foot pocked and/or benched in manner to promote vegetative growth and prevent wasting. • Culverts are required to be installed prior to topsoil placement and road surfacing. Culverts are to be installed with sufficient drainage to prevent silting and freezing. The pipeline ROW must be built up to drain away from culvert crossings and prevent water from pooling. This pipeline build must be sufficient enough to age years before wearing out. • All Pipeline drainage crossings without culverts will have a minimum of four water bars/roller berms. Two at the toe above the high water mark on either side of the drainage and two at the grade change on either side of the drainage. • Sufficient water bars must be installed along entire length of the ROW when slopes dictate. See stormwater BMP manual. • Pipeline ROW drainage outlets, swales and culvert slopes must be properly prepared for erosion control fabric and associated hand labor. • Rough grading, drainage and culvert installations should be approved by a Caerus representative before further construction activities continue. 1.4.7 Topsoil Placement: • Topsoil placement cannot take place until rough grading, drainage and culvert installations have been accepted by a Caerus representative. • The performance of the topsoil operation is critical to the success of revegetation. The condition of properly prepared subsoils does not allow for stripping and replacement of topsoil if done incorrectly. • Therefore, the final grading must be approved by Caerus’ reclamation representative prior to topsoil placement. Failure to obtain approval may require stripping the topsoil from areas needing regraded and incurring any soil amendment expense to make up for lost or subsoil contaminated topsoil. • It is the responsibility of the earthwork contractor to estimate the available quantity of topsoil and the depth too spread it evenly over the access road slopes. • On some projects were topsoil conservation was not effectively practiced or conditions prohibit effective segregation of A and B horizons there will be a shortage of available topsoil to cover the site with 1” of topsoil the following areas receive priority until the available topsoil is utilized. • South Facing Slopes 3:1 or greater • West Facing Slopes 3:1 or greater • East Facing Slopes 3:1 or greater • North Facing Slopes 3:1 or greater • South Facing Slopes 3:1 or less • West Facing Slopes 3:1 or less • East Facing Slopes 3:1 or less • North Facing Slopes 3:1 or less • The Remaining Shallow Areas • The use of a dozer to transport topsoil from the stockpile to the topsoil final placement is not allowed unless authorized. • The preferred methods of topsoil transport are trucks and loaders. • Blades and hoes can be utilized for finish spreading. • On steep slopes (2:1 or greater) requiring finish spreading and tracking dozers can be utilized after rough placement. • Topsoil conservation and placement is critical to a successful revegetation. Those contractors who cannot meet the performance requirements may not be invited to bid these projects in the future. • Special attention must be paid to slopes that are benched to insure the benching is adequately sized to remain benched after topsoil spreading. • Slopes with tracking and sheep foot pocking may have to be re-tracked and/or re-pocked. 1.4.8 Stabilized Unpaved Surfaces: • It is the contractor’s responsibility to assess whether access roads and facilities meet the performance requirements prior to spreading gravel. If there are questions an on-site can be arranged. • Surfaces must be adequately compacted prior to gravel placement including bar ditches. • Bar ditches are to be armored with same gravel material as the road surface and compacted. Bar ditches must be sized to accommodate the gravel and still perform drainage functions. 1.4.9 Site Finalization: • Any culvert, access road and/or other site damage from earth work activities must be repaired prior to de-mobilization of earth moving equipment and operators. • Any significant erosion that has occurred during completion of the project must be repaired. 14 Appendix C – Detailed Seeding Guidelines Appendix C – Detailed Seeding Guidelines Table of Contents Appendix C – Detailed Seeding Guidelines 1 1.0 Seeding 2 1.1 Soils Testing and Evaluation 2 1.2 Seeding Establishment 2 1.3 Soil Amendments 2 1.3.1 Organic Amendment Specifications: 3 2.0 Soil Preparation 3 2.1 Mechanical Surface Roughening 3 2.2 Transplanting and Plant Community Conservation 4 2.3 Disking 4 2.4 Chisel Plowing 4 2.5 Subsoiling 4 2.6 Harrowing 5 3.0 Drill Seeding 5 3.1 Equipment 5 3.2 Methods of Use 5 4.0 Broadcast Seeding 7 4.1 Hydraulic Applications 7 4.2 Mulching and Erosion Control 7 4.3 Hydraulically Applied Erosion Control Mulch Specification 7 5.0 Certified Weed Free Straw Specifications 9 6.0 Seed Planting Rates & Species Selection for Individual Seed Mixtures 10 6.1 Seed Quality 11 6.2 Seed Storage 11 6.3 Seeding Dates for the Piceance Basin 11 6.4 Seed Germination 11 6.5 Seeding Success 12 6.6 Seed Mixtures for the Piceance Basin 12 6.7 Seeding and Reclamation Documentation 12 1.0 Seeding 1.1 Soils Testing and Evaluation Caerus conducts soil testing and evaluation for reclamation prescriptions prior to major project disturbance. This is typically done within a full Biological Assessment Report (BAR) or Initial Site Assessments (ISA), prior to disturbance, documenting baseline soil and vegetative conditions. On existing projects soil test data and prescriptions are often collected in a “mini” BAR or basic soil fertility testing. There is also a clear precedent that the existing custom manufactured amendment specifications meet performance standards over a wide variety of soils. However, inadequate topsoil conservation during construction of existing pads that are to be reclaimed can present constraints and establishment issues. 1.2 Seeding Establishment Assuming that timely and adequate precipitation occurs after seeding is completed, the contractor will be responsible for achieving a density of eight (8) seedlings per square foot after the germination flush and three (3) viable seedlings of the species seeded after a one year growing season. The contractor may schedule a walk through with a Caerus representative after the germination flush to document success of the stage of the re-vegetation process. In the event that extremely hot and dry conditions occur shortly after germination of the appropriate seed mixture the contractor may request in writing authorization to water the seeded and stressed area to prevent desiccation and ultimately death of the seeded area. In these situations, Caerus will provide a water tank and water while the re-vegetation contractor provides the man power and irrigation equipment to sustain the vegetation. Touch up or re-seeding will not be paid for by Caerus unless inadequate natural and timely precipitation can be documented as impacting re-vegetation success. 1.3 Soil Amendments Increasing soil fertility of areas to be reclaimed is a major consideration in the regions we are working in. Soil test are the best way to determine which amendments are needed. The major nutrients needed by any vegetation for growth is Nitrogen, Phosphorus, and Potassium. Nitrogen is for top growth of plants, Phosphorus is for root growth and Potassium is for the overall health and vigor of plants. Typically, commercial fertilizers will list the nutrients in the order of Nitrogen, Phosphorus, and Potassium or N-P- K. For example, a product listed as 4-6-4 will contain 4% Nitrogen, 6% Phosphorus, and 4% Potassium. Nitrogen may not be at desirable levels in the soil at the time of seeding. However, research has shown that adding nitrogen at the time of seeding can often times increase the growth and cover of weed species at the expense of the desirable seeded species. Also, nitrogen cannot be metabolized by native grasses until they are approximately one-year-old. For these reasons, most experienced re-vegetation specialists will not recommend the use of nitrogen at the time of seeding. Instead, they will tend to place nitrogen fixing legumes in the seed mixture. These legumes will pull nitrogen from the atmosphere and provide it later to other plants such as grasses. As most agency-prescribed seed mixes are now strictly native varieties, limiting the available legume options, Caerus typically amends soils with organics that have very low rates of Nitrogen, designed for slow release. See additional product information at the end of this document. Phosphorus most likely will be the limiting nutrient in the soil. It is advisable to add phosphorus (if prescribed) prior to soil tillage and work it into the soil to a depth of 6 to 8 inches. Most native soils in Colorado contain optimum levels of potassium. Therefore, potassium should very seldom if ever be needed in the Piceance Basin. Dry amendments can be typically applied using a Three Point Hitch Tractor Mounted Spreader or Fertilizer Buggy Wagon Implement. Both of these styles of spreaders are considered broadcast spreaders. Their width of application is typically between 10 and 30 feet. The amount of fertilizer applied per acre is controlled by a slide gate opening on the bottom of the spreader. Another form of amendment application is through hydraulic application, via a hydro seeder/mulcher. 1.3.1 Organic Amendment Specifications: By combining custom formulations of Mycorrihizae fungi and Humate components together with a poultry-based amendment, the end product (Richlawn Organic 100: 3-6-3) is safe and easy to apply both by dry broadcast or by hydraulic means. The amount of organic amendment applied per acre is controlled by a slide gate opening on the bottom of the spreader or bags per load in a hydraulic applicator. Performance objectives still require application adjustments for topsoil quantity, quality, slope aspect and ratio’s. Richlawn’s Organic 100 material data sheet can be found in the additional Product Information section at the end of this document. Biotic Earth™ and other competitive Growth Mediums (spec sheet can be found at the end of this document) have been very beneficial for harsh soil conditions or sites with minimal or no available topsoil. Applied properly, the product provides a layer of fertile material in which germination can first occur, and then help speed the natural development of A horizon topsoil as root development continues. The product is primarily a Sphagnum Peat Moss and straw-base with other organic components. It is designed for hydraulic application with seeding and along with application of the Richlawn 3-6-3. Several applications done with dry-broadcast and harrow methods have also proven effective. 2.0 Soil Preparation Soil Preparation is a critical first step to re-vegetation. It is ideal to have 8 inches of loose soil to allow for root growth and firm enough for good seed to soil contact. The soil surface should also be relatively free of rocks, debris and dirt clods greater than 3 inches in diameter. The Piceance Basin, however, has many sites that are extremely rocky or have thin soil horizons. There are several types of implements that can be pulled behind farm tractors or small dozers to till the soil. These consist of disk, chisel plows, subsoilers and harrows. The working widths commercially available for soil preparation implements typically vary between 6 feet to over 20 feet. The working width of implements used by contractors is typically based on site access and size. Also, smaller contractors may have a limited number and size of tillage implements in their equipment fleet. In addition to tractor type implements, a large portion of final soil preparation is now being completed with large-scale track hoe excavators, at the time of land-forming and mass soil placement, by the Earthwork contractor. Excavator or other mechanical soil preparation is critical and used primarily on slopes greater than 2:1, or otherwise prohibitive to tractor operation. 2.1 Mechanical Surface Roughening A key element of successful and long-term sustainability of seeding has proven to be the practice of surface roughening, either by mechanical means or in smaller scale by hand. Rough surfaces and pockets will gather and store seasonally infrequent stormwater, making moisture available for germination and to new seedling plants for longer periods, dramatically increasing opportunity for vegetative establishment. Small depressions with random roughening textures or more uniform pocking, done in checker-board patterns, can be used. In terms of using roughening as a stormwater management (BMP), the goal of any pattern or random texture, is to eliminate opportunity for erosion by breaking up the direction of flow. Surface Roughening can range from small hand-made pockets (4-6”) in depth, to larger depressions (12 – 18”) in depth, typically done with a track hoe excavator. Raking through with the bucket teeth, leaving the small ridges is also an effective method, but should always be done on contour, against the slope. Size and density of pocking or roughening is dependent on soil type and texture, moisture, slope, and aspect. Typically, the steeper the slope and more exposure it has to evaporative loss, the greater the need for aggressive roughening. The goal for long-term land-form, however, is to have natural sediment deposition and settling occur during the first several years of the reclaim, eventually eliminating the roughening, resulting in consistent and successful vegetative establishment. 2.2 Transplanting and Plant Community Conservation In recent years, especially during Final Reclamation of pads and roads, the practice of salvaging and transplanting available shrubs and other native plant communities which have grown naturally on cut and fill slopes or within our construction boundary, has become a very valuable tool in the overall success of the reclaim. Many things are accomplished when this practice is incorporated in the re- contouring or final grading of the site. First, topsoil and the soil microbiology which is naturally supporting shrubs, forbs, and even trees, can be harnessed and put to use immediately rather than waiting years for it to re-develop in freshly disturbed soils. Secondly, even if the plant being transplanted does not survive, the natural seed bank in the soil beneath and around it greatly increases the chances for a vegetative diversity to occur very quickly. And, if successful, the living plant transplant immediately adds to the percent cover (stabilization for stormwater management), and mosaic of the reclamation. Timing and technique for this practice is critical for increasing odds of success. Seasonally, to maximize the chance of survival, transplanting works best during dormancy of the shrubs and trees (November through March), and when natural soil moisture is available. Regardless of timing, however, the technique of transplanting is even more important. As the mass soil movement is being conducted during the re-contouring, the track hoe operator should look for opportunities to use clumps or individual plants that he encounters, in the final grade. Placing these clumps aside, if necessary, the operator then first prepares a large pocket or depression to place the transplant. It is very important to leave the top surface grade of the transplanted material at or below the surrounding soils. 2.3 Disking Disks are normally used where there is significant surface compaction and the soil needs to be tilled to loosen large soil clods. They are also used where there is a concern of bringing more rock up to the soil surface as will occur with chisels, rippers, and subsoilers. Disks should not be used alone where extreme subsoil compaction exist. There are offset disks and tandem disks available on the market. Tandem disks turn the soil twice and offset disks move the soil in opposing directions and help level the surface. On very rough sites a Rhome brand construction type disk is recommended because of the weight of the disk and its ability to withstand rough conditions. A heavy construction disk normally needs to be pulled behind a mid-size dozer or large 4WD tractor because of its weight and soil penetration ability. 2.4 Chisel Plowing A chisel plow cuts through the soil and helps to eliminate soil compaction to a depth of approximately 8 inches. Chisel plowing to a shallower depth can help cut off and kill weeds. Some rock and clod material can be brought to the soil surface during this operation. If a significant number of clods are brought up to the surface, then a cultipacker should be utilized to break clods back down prior to seeding. 2.5 Subsoiling Subsoiling (typically done by Earthwork contractor) is used to break up compacted soil layers 6 to 24 inches in depth and it helps to improve water infiltration and aerates subsoil layers to encourage root penetration. Subsoiling can bring up significant large clods in zones with heavy clays and compacted zones. Chisel or Disc plowing will need to follow subsoiling when large volumes of clods greater than 3 inches are brought to the surface. 2.6 Harrowing Harrows lightly scratch the ground to loosen a shallow layer of soil (4 inches or shallower). The three styles of harrows consist of a spike tooth harrow, flex-tine tooth harrow, and spring tooth harrow. Harrows should only be used on loose friable soils that do not require deep tillage. Harrows can be used to remove undesirable vegetation such as weeds that will interfere with seeding operations. Harrows will break up surface crust and generally break up clods of topsoil material, but not hard and massive subsoil material. Harrows are excellent for preparing a seedbed for small seeds such as forbs and some shrub seeds and help incorporate dry-broadcasted amendments. 3.0 Drill Seeding 3.1 Equipment Drill seeders are implements that are towed behind a tractor or small crawler dozer. Drill seeding is considered the optimum means of planting grasses, forbs, and most shrub seed. Rangeland type drill seeders used for planting native vegetation should have several critical features or components. No-Till drills are also used where soil conditions make it necessary to press the seed into the ground. The drill seeder should be equipped with three different seed boxes: A legume box is needed for small seed such as wildflowers, alfalfa, sweet clover, etc., a trashy seed box with aggressive picker wheels for handling trashy seed such as bluestems and gramas, and a standard seed box used for flowable seeds such as wheat grasses and small grains. Most native grass drill seeders come in 8 to 10-foot planting widths. The seed drill is activated by a series of gears and chains that are attached to one of the drill wheels on the drill. When the drive wheel is activated it turns the gears which turn the shafts that run through the seed boxes. The seed gravity feeds into seed cups that are attached to the shaft. The trashy seed box has an extra shaft that runs above the seed cup shaft and has an aggressive picker spiral agitator wheel which forces the seed down to the seed cup so it does not simply float in the seed box. The seed from all seed boxes falls through a hole in the seed box where a flexible rubber tube is connected between the bottom of the seed box and the double disk furrow openers. The double disk furrow op eners, as the name implies, opens a small trench in the soil that the seed falls into. As the drill moves forward the seed is covered with soil and pressed into the ground by the press wheels or drag chains. It is very important that the seed is planted to the right depth and the seed is pressed into the soil firmly to press out air and allow the seed to absorb moisture as it becomes available to help germinate the seed. The double disk is attached to a lift arm assembly that allows it to roll and float over minor obstacles in the ground such as small rocks tree branches, and dirt clods. The drill should be lifted up by using the hydraulic cylinder when large rocks and debris are encountered in the drills path. While rangeland type drill seeders are built to handle tough conditions they can be high maintenance and require a supply of extra parts in the field when breakdowns occur. 3.2 Methods of Use Drill seeders should be calibrated for use on a small area before all seeding is completed. Most manufacturers of drill seeding equipment can provide general guidelines as to the amount of seed output by seed box for flowable seeds versus trashy seeds. Calibration will help ensure that the proper amount of Pure Live Seed (PLS) is planted. PLS of any given vegetation species is determined by a registered seed testing laboratory. Individual seeds from individual species are normally placed in a growth chamber to determine the percentage of seeds that will germinate, for example, if 100 seeds are placed in a growth chamber and forced to germinate and only 90 germinate, the germination percentage is considered 90%. Purity is the measure of viable seed and separates out inert material, weed seed (not more than 1% according to federal regulations) and other crop seed. Therefore, the total viable seed is the percent by count that will germinate. The following example provides an illustration of a method of calculating an amount of seed to be planted which takes into account the variation of seed germination and purity of the seed source: Example of a Pure Live Seed (PLS) Calculation: A recommended seed mixture requires that 5 lbs. (PLS) of intermediate wheatgrass be planted: Intermediate wheatgrass germination = 80% Intermediate wheatgrass purity = 90% 80% X 90% (PLS) = 0.72 5 lbs. (PLS) to be planted = Approximately 7 lbs. of bagged 0.72 (PLS factor) seed should be included in the mixture so that 5 lbs. of PLS will be planted. Thus, a seed species PLS factor is based on germination X purity. In order to plant one PLS pound of a species you may end up planting 1.6 to 2.0 times more seed which is considered the bulk seed amount. The operator should first decide whether to have the seed mixture divided by trashy vs. flowable species or to combine the species and utilize both seed boxes to achieve proper seed output. It is best to consult with your seed dealer to determine just how trashy or fluffy the seed will be. There are several different opinions in the industry as to how to calibrate a native grass seed drill. The most elaborate method of calibration involves jacking up the drill and spinning the drive wheel the number of revolutions that represent an acre. Seed is caught from one of the seed tubes and weighed after spinning the gauge wheel and the seed weight for one tube is converted into the fraction of an acre that the tube represents. Most drill seeders contain either a slide bar with number settings or gear ratios with numbers to increase or decrease the seed output. These adjustments should be made if more than a 10 % variance of less seed than required occurs. Also, adjustments should be made for too much seed being put down which can be a costly mistake as well as planting too much seed for what the soil and environment will support. The simplest way to calibrate a seed drill is to place two acres’ worth of seed in the seed box and drill seed ½ acre. Fill the seed box back up to the height it existed with two acres worth of material. Next determine if you had to fill more than a ½ acre of material or less than, or you were right on with the calibration. Be aware that if you had to place less seed back in the box, than the volume you started with, you are not seeding enough. Calibration of a seed drill can change overnight if seed is left in the drill. Seed may settle in the seed box causing a slight amount of packing and humidity can change the way seed flows from the drill. It is best to finish out the seed in the seed box by the end of the day and start fresh the next day. Remember to check the calibration of the drill at least every 10 acres or each time you refill the drill. Always keep the drill boxes full enough that the seed feeds properly. Remember when seeding on side slopes that seed can slide to the downhill side of the seed box leaving little or no seed to be planted on the high side of the drill. Most drills come equipped with divider boxes to keep seed from sliding all the way to the low end of the drill. If the seed drill does not have divider boxes think of ways to place sheet metal or even card board in the drill to divide it into at least three different compartments. All drill seeding should be completed parallel to slopes or on the slope contour. Drill seeding up and down a slope can result in accelerating erosion after rainfall since the indentations from the drill rows help to concentrate flow and accelerate soil movement downhill. Most native grass species and forbs germinate best if seeded to a depth of ¼ to ½ inch. Most depth bands on drills are set at ½ inch so the seed cannot be planted any deeper. 4.0 Broadcast Seeding Broadcast seeding is typically done where seeding areas prohibit safe operation of a farm tractor, access is limited, scope of work is so small, large equipment is not justified and/or the soil surface is covered with large rock that cannot be economically removed. Hand seeding may be needed in small, tight access areas where machinery cannot effectively operate. Broadcast seeding can be performed either with a hand seeder (or tractor mounted spreader. Broadcast spreaders typically spread an even swath of seed onto the soil surface. Depending on the roughness of the ground, the seed can end up at various depths in the soil. Broadcast seeding by hand or machine alone will not typically provide good results unless the seed is covered with soil. Broadcast seeding with a tractor should be followed by using a flex harrow to cover the seed with soil. Hand broadcast seeding should be followed by hand raking with a hard-tine rake. In both cases the seed should not be raked deeper than ½ inch into the ground. And in all cases the broadcast seed is mulched in some way. 4.1 Hydraulic Applications Hydraulic applications are completed with a hydro-mulcher machine. Most people in the industry use the term hydroseeder/hydromulcher interchangeably since they do both operations. A hydroseeder/hydromulcher machine consists of a water tank equipped with a motor that operates a hydraulic agitation system. The top of the machine contains a turret or gun where the seed is discharged. The operator will mix the seed, amendments, and required tackifiers. The objective of using the hydraulic pressure of the machine is to use enough force from the engine RPM’s to shoot or push the seed into the ground. If the seed is not adequately covered with soil, hand raking of the area or slope harrowing should be employed. 4.2 Mulching and Erosion Control Conserving soil moisture and controlling surface erosion are very important during seedling establishment. Lack of proper erosion control can result in seed being washed away before it germinates. Mulch materials can help conserve soil moisture and reduce erosion. Mulch materials also provide other beneficial functions. They include increasing moisture infiltration from rain and snow, cooling the soil surface, and providing valuable soil organic matter to increase soil structure. Several different types of mulch materials can be used for revegetation purposes. The most common ones used are native hay/straw mulch, hydro-mulch with Flexible Growth Medium and Bonded Fiber Matrix. There are also several types of roll out erosion control blankets that are available to be used in place, or in combinations with mulches, on steep slope areas, drainage areas, and stream channels. For additional erosion control mulch information see product information at the end of this document. Erosion control is now required by federal and state laws on most disturbed construction sites. 4.3 Hydraulically Applied Erosion Control Mulch Specification The Erosion Control Mulch (ECM) shall be a hydraulically-applied, flexible erosion control blanket composed of long strand, thermally refined wood fibers, crimped, interlocking fibers and performance enhancing additives. The ECM shall require no curing time and upon application shall form an intimate bond with the soil surface to create a continuous, porous, absorbent and erosion resistant blanket that allows for rapid germination and accelerated plant growth. The Erosion Control Mulch shall conform to the following property values when uniformly applied at a rate of 3500 pounds per acre (3900 kilograms/hectare) under laboratory conditions. Property Test Method1 English SI Physical Mass Per Unit Area ASTM D-6566 11.5 oz/yd2 390 g/m2 Thickness ASTM D-6525 0.19 in 4.8 mm % Ground Cover ASTM D-6567 99% 99% Flexural Rigidity (wet) ASTM D-6575 0.138 oz-in 10,000 mg-cm Color (fugitive dye) Observed Green Green Endurance Functional Longevity Observed Up to 18 months Up to 18 months Performance Cover Factor3 (6 in/hr event) ECTC Test Method #2 0.0066 0.0066 % Effectiveness3 ECTC Test Method #2 99.34% 99.34% Shear Stress ECTC Test Method #3 1 lb/ft2 48 Pa Vegetation Establishment ECTC Test Method #4 800% 800% 1. ASTM and ECTC (Erosion Control Technology Council) test methods developed for Rolled Erosion Control Products. 2. Cover Factor is calculated as soil loss ratio of treated surface versus an untreated control surface. 3. % Effectiveness = One minus Cover Factor multiplied by 100%. COMPOSITION: Thermally Processed Wood Fibers – 74.5% + 2.5% Crosslinked Hydro-Colloid Tackifier – 10% + 1% Crimped, Interlocking Fibers – 5% +1% Moisture Content – 10.5% + 1.5% INSTALLATION: Strictly comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Use approved hydro-spraying machines with fan-type nozzle (50-degree tip) whenever possible to achieve best soil coverage. Apply ECM from opposing directions to soil surface to assure 95% soil surface coverage. Slope interruption devices or water diversion techniques are recommended when slope lengths exceed 100 ft (30m). Erosion Control and Revegetation: • Step One: Apply seed, fertilizer and other soil amendments with tackifier and a small amount of ECM for visual metering. (see seed, fertilizer, soil amendments and tackifier specifications for application rates) • Step Two: Mix 50 lbs. of ECM per 125 gallons (23 kg/475 liters) of water; confirm loading rates with equipment manufacturer. (Different manufacturers rates may vary slightly) Install materials at the following typical application rates: Slope Gradient/Condition English SI <3H to 1V 3000 lbs./ac 3400 kg/ha >3H to 1V and <2H to 1V 3500 lbs./ac 3900 kg/ha >2H to 1V and <1H to 1V 4000 lbs./ac 4500 kg/ha >1H to 1V 4500 lbs./ac 5100 kg/ha Below ECB or TRM 1500 lbs./ac 1700 kg/ha As infill for TRM 3500 lbs./ac 3900 kg/ha Slope Gradient/Condition Performance Specification <3H 70-80% soil coverage, minimum 0.16 inch depth <3H to 1V 90-100% soil coverage, <2” rocks uncovered, minimum 0.19 inch depth >3H to 1V and <2H to 1V 95-100% soil coverage, <6” rocks uncovered, minimum 0.22 inch depth >2H to 1V and <1H to 1V 100% soil coverage, <12” boulders uncovered, minimum 0.22 inch depth >1H to 1V All exposed surfaces including rock outcrops shall be covered at a minimum of 0.24 inch depth Below ECB or TRM 1500-2500 lb/ac slope dependent, minimum 0.08 inch depth As infill for ECB 1500-3500 lb/ac, minimum 0.19 inch depth As infill for TRM Perpendicular application with 100% infill, minimum 0.19 inch depth 5.0 Certified Weed Free Straw Specifications Any cereal grain straw used on Caerus reclamations must be certified by the State of Colorado Department of Agriculture, as being Weed-free. Re-vegetation contractors must be able to provide evidence of certification (by field produced), for each site using straw mulch. Vendors or the farm producer will be able to give copy of the Certification. Also, straw produced by qualified farmers will be baled with two-color twine, typically Blue and Orange, indicating it has been approved by a State inspector prior to harvesting and field baling. To minimize volunteer cereal grain germination, from the use of straw mulch, contractors should make it a priority to use straw harvested with a “stripper” head combine. This type of harvesting has proven to greatly reduce the amount of cereal grain seed in the straw, thus minimizing volunteer growth in the reclaim. Seeding contractors will be held responsible for mowing or trimming seed heads of volunteer growth, prior to maturation, in the first two years of establishment. 6.0 Seed Planting Rates & Species Selection for Individual Seed Mixtures Establishing seed mixtures and planting rates for different native grass, forbs, and shrub seeds is normally done by a re-vegetation specialist, soil scientist, plant ecologist, or agronomist. These professionals have several years of experience in knowing how many pounds of each type of seed are needed to increase the chances of overall reclamation success. Any expert in the reclamation industry knows that there are no absolutes in designing a seed mixture. The consultant takes into account what vegetation species are currently growing by vegetation zone on the site. A native vegetation zone or community is controlled by several environmental factors including elevation, degree of slope, aspect of slope (east, west, north, or south facing), soil type (for example sandy or clayey), and the amount of precipitation that the area receives each year. Vegetation communities will typically have at least two grass species to as many as eight species. Shrub and forbs species will also typically be present. There should be at least three grass species in a typical reclamation seed mixture. Having a number of species in the mixture will promote diversity in the final vegetative cover and will reduce the risk of re-vegetation failure if one or more of the species does not adapt to site conditions. Typically, a consultant will base the poundage of each species on several factors. Some species are hard to establish and may require higher poundage of seed to have a chance to establish. Some species may be easy to establish and are seeded at a higher rate to ensure some initial vegetation cover after seeding. Some vegetation species are very aggressive and should represent a small percentage of the seed mixture or they will dominate the site. Each vegetation species has a different number of seeds per pound. For example, Western Wheat Grass has approximately 110,000 seeds per pound while Blue Grama has 825,000 seeds per pound. There are different opinions with scientist as to how much seed to plant on an acre or square foot basis. Typically, the number of seeds planted per square foot is a consideration. Chenoweth & Associates believes that 30 to 75 seeds per square foot should be planted on any site. Others believe that 144 seeds per square foot should be planted on any site, especially steeper windblown slopes. The Federal Requirement by the Glenwood Springs Energy Office specifies 60 Pure Live Seeds per square foot when drill seeding and 120 Pure Live Seeds per square foot when broadcast seeding. For more information, please refer to Appendix D - BLM and Landowner Seed Mixes. The higher number of seeds per square foot could be based on the risk of loosening seed to water erosion on steep hill sides or wind erosion in high wind prone areas. Higher seeding rates could also be based on very good topsoil replacement that will allow a site to support more vegetation. The general rule of thumb for hydro-seeding and broadcast seeding is to double the drill seed rate of seed. This rule was established because broadcast and hydro-seeding does not typically provide for optimum seed placement and planting depth as compared to drill seeding. A seed mixture at a minimum will consist of native grasses and forbs. As previously mentioned, at least three grass species should be in any re-vegetation seed mixture. The operator, landowner (either private landowner or federal agencies such as the Forest Service or BLM), and Re-Vegetation Specialist/Contractor typically consult with one another to determine what the seed mixture should contain. These individuals or organization will determine if the seed mixture should contain only grasses or whether shrub and forbs seed should be added to the seed mixture as well. 6.1 Seed Quality Seed purchased from a reputable seed dealer should contain a seed tag that provides the germination and purity of each species in the bag. The seed tag should also indicate the Lot number of the seed. The lot number is to document where and when the seed was harvested. The seed supplier should supply seed that has been tested within one year of the purchase date. 6.2 Seed Storage Seed should be properly stored until it is used. Seed should be kept in a cool dark environment. The temperature in the storage area should never exceed 85ºF for enclosed containers and 90ºF for good ventilated storage. Seed is not typically impacted by freezing temperatures and in fact some seeds benefit from cold and heat scarification in order to germinate. Seed which becomes wet for any period of time exceeding 48 hours should not be used. If seed is stored over winter or for any extended period of time should be retested. Some seed species will decrease in germination percentage faster than others. Additional seed of some species may have to be purchased and re-blended into the original seed mixture to bring the mixture back up to the proper PLS rate desired. 6.3 Seeding Dates for the Piceance Basin Desirable seeding dates are typically tied to periods when precipitation will closely follow the actual seed planting. Moisture in the Piceance Basin typically comes during the summer monsoon period which occurs in July/August and winter rain or snow which is highest in January, February and March. Seeding needs to be completed when the soil is not frozen or wet. Therefore, the optimum seeding dates are early in the spring until May 1, mid-July until September 1, and after the first heavy frost until permanent ground freeze. These dates do not always coincide with construction schedules and the urgency to seed after earth work is completed to help control erosion. There are times that seeding a cover crop during a poor seeding period may be beneficial, however, many of the cereal grain type cover crop varieties have now been excluded from use by Public Land agencies in our region. Always check with Caerus reclamation coordinators for any specific seeding date Conditions of Approval or other limitations, prior to seeding. 6.4 Seed Germination Depending on the vegetation species, germination can occur as soon as 10 days after seeding. Germination is dependent on adequate soil moisture and soil temperature. Normally grass seed needs at least 54ºF surface soil temperature to germinate. These temperatures should exist from late April until late August in the Colorado oil & gas fields depending on elevation and soil shading. Germination of all species can often times take several days or weeks depending on the number of species in the seed mixture. Again, this assumes there is adequate soil moisture in addition to proper soil temperatures for seed germination. At the time of peak germination flush as many as 10 to 20 seedlings per square foot may be present. Approximately 75% of the seedlings die off shortly after germination as the plants reach equilibrium of what the soils moisture and nutrient levels will support. If hot dry periods follow germination, some or all of the grasses and forbs may die. A further discussion of this situation is provided in the following section. 6.5 Seeding Success After germination occurs, new seedlings are very dependent on continued available soil moisture to survive. Some grass species are more susceptible to desiccation and die back than others. Thus, if adequate and timely precipitation does not occur during the first growing season failure of the re- vegetation may occur. This is why it is very important to use the proper materials and procedures identified throughout this report. There are at least two university research units that agree on determining re-vegetation success after the first growing season. Typically, 3 to 4 live healthy seedlings per square foot after the first growing season will yield long term re-vegetation success. These seedlings will ultimately yield approximately 40% to 60% canopy cover after the plants mature. Ultimately, initial seeding success leads to achieving overall reclamation success. 6.6 Seed Mixtures for the Piceance Basin Seed mixtures are typically specified by private land owners & public land managers. Seed mixes for well pads, road cut and fill slopes, pipelines and borrow pits within a given habitat may vary. These seed mixtures will be site specific to the ecosystems present. At the time the seed is ordered the supplier must email the seed tags/labels to Caerus’ representative prior to shipment. The email shall only include one location at a time and include the following information on each seed mix; Contractor name, seed mix name, seeding location, as well as the following; the seed shall be certified free of noxious weeds. Seed may contain up to 2.0 percent of “other crop” seed by weight which includes the seed of other agronomic crops and native plants; however, a lower percent of other crop seed is recommended. Seed which does not meet the above criteria shall not be applied. See Appendix D – Seed Mixture Tables (BLM and Private Landowners). 6.7 Seeding and Reclamation Documentation The Revegetation Contractor uses Caerus’ Seeding Report Form to record the amount and application of the amendments and mulches, seedbed preparation techniques, and the seed mix used on each specific location (see Appendix E). This document is to be fully completed and submitted digitally, with seed tags, to the Caerus Reclamation Coordinator as soon as seeding is complete. Seed tags and other requested information may be submitted by Caerus to BLM or other agencies, via Sundry notices or other communication, typically within 14 days of seeding date. Completion and submittal of the Seeding Form is a requirement for payment of re-vegetation invoices by the seeding contractor. Product Information Client: Proiect: Lab lD: Clienl Sample lD: rrr.ettorsdab.con ätådÍ¡¡h¡tÚ¡rtä, LABORATORY ANALYTICAL REPORT Prepared by Billings, MT Branch MT Sulphur and Chemical 2015 Certificate of Analysis 81 501 01 1 4-001 1, 9Qo/" Disintegrating Report Dale: 01/19/15 Collection Date: 01/05/15 13:50 DateReceived: 0'l/06/1 5 Matrix: Solid l¡lctr¿ II ltt.at2{llt r Bt[in¡!, rr l]ltt lltl . clrgu, tyr ll]2t$lllt Glll6ü!, tfl l¡$lll-tl rt . R¡pld Clty, S0 l!D¡t2-l¡2t ¡ Collca¡ Strtion, lX lllltl22l I Analyses Result Units Oualifiers RL MCL/ QCL Method Analysis Date / By PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS Ash CHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS Carbon, Total Acidity, 1:2 Chlor¡de, 1:2 Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen INORGANICS Sullur, by loss on ignition METALS, TOTAL HF DIGESTION S¡licon METALS, TOTAL - EPA SW846 Aluminum Antimony Arsenic Barium Beryllium Boron Cadmium Calcium Chromium Cobalt Copper lron Lead Lithium Magnesium Manganese Molybdenum Nickel Phosphorus Potassium Selenium Silver Sodium Tellurium Thallium Tin Titanium Vanadium Zinc 9.27 wlo/o 0.07 wt% 6 mg/kg 6 mg/kg 56 mg/kg 90.7 wlo/o 1 wlo/o 267 mglkg ND mg/kg ND mg/kg 4.90 mg/kg ND mg/kg ND mg/kg ND mg/kg 432 mglkg 0.1 mg/kg 0.08 mg/kg ND mg/kg 296 mg/kg 1.04 mg/kg 0.4 mg/kg '158 mg/kg 24.4 mglkg 0.07 mg/kg 0.20 mg/kg 15.7 mg/kg 64 mg/kg ND mg/kg ND mg/kg 433 mg/kg ND mg/kg ND mg/kg 2 mg/kg 18.1 mg/kg 0.3 mg/kg 2 mg/kg D2974 Leco E305.r ASAlO-3 ASA31-3 Calculation SW6OlOB sw6010B sw6020 sw6020 sw6020 sw6010B SW6OlOB sw6010B sw6010B sw6010B sw6020 sw6020 sw6010B sw6020 sw6010B SW6OlOB sw6010B sw6020 sw6020 SW6OlOB sw6010B sw6020 sw6020 sw6010B sw6010B sw6020 sw6020 SW6OlOB sw6010B sw6010B 01/09/15 14:00 /jh 01107115 15:08 / srm 01/13/15 13:10 /jwc 01/13/15 19:43 / rbf 01/13/15 14:15 / srm 01/09/15 14:00/jh 01/09/15 15:52 I rlh 011141'15 21 :08 / rlh 01/15/15 15:29 / amm 0111511515:29 / amm 01/15/15 15:29 / amm 01113/15 18:13 / rlh 01/1 6/1 5 14;59 / rlh 01/13/15 1B:13 / rlh 01/13/15 18:13 / rlh 01113115 18:13 / rlh 01/15/15 15:29 / amm 01/15/15 15:29 / amm 0'1114115 21 :08 / rlh 01/15/15 15:29 / amm 01/13/1518:13/rlh 01/13/15 18:13 / rlh 0'111311518:13 / rlh 01115115 15:29 / amm 01/15/15 15:29 / amm 01/13/1518:13/rlh 01113115 18:13 / rlh 0l/15/1515:29/amm 01/15/15 15:29 / amm 01113115 18:13 / rlh 01/13/15 1B:13 / rlh 01/15/15 15:29 / amm 01/15/1515:29/amm 01114115 21:08 I rlh 0l /1 3/1 5 18:13 / rlh 01/13/15 18:.l3 / rlh D D D 0.01 0.01 1 1 10 0.100 1 3 0.1 0.2 0.05 0.05 0.4 0.05 1 0.1 0.05 0.5 0.6 0.05 0.3 1 0.06 0.05 0.05 0.5 4 0.2 0.05 1 5 0.05 1 0.09 0.2 1 Report Deflnitlons: RL - Analyte reporting limit. QCL - Quality control limit. D - RL increased due to sample malrix. MCL - Maximum contam¡nant level. ND - Not detected at the reporting limit. Pagø 2 ol 25 tøEI\ERGY *tB8írb.Coßr ,st¡d*.Yræ LABORATORY ANALYTICAL REPORT Prepared by Billings, MT Branch MT Sulphur and Chemical 2015 Cert¡f¡cate of Analysis 81 501 01 1 4-001 1, 90% Disintegrating ]hho¡, It fll-l?l{ll I . Ennn¡1 If lt}lll-lltl ¡ C¡¡p*, tvv ll}2t5.lll I Gllld¡, tVf llll&ll Ë ¡ frpß Cltt, Sfl llllrl-l Ît¡ . Collcgc Shüoî, IX l¡ùllù221 I Glient: Project: Lab lD: Client Sample lD: Report Dale: 01/19/15 collection Date: 0'l/05/15 13:50 DaleReceived: 01/06/1 5 Matr¡x: Solid Analysls Date / By MCL/ Quallflers RL OCL MethodResult Unlts METALS, TOTAL. EPA SW846 Mercury ND mg/kg 0.06 01/09/15 15t27 I eac Report Deflnltlons: RL - Analyte reporting limit. QCL - Quality control lim¡t. MCL - Maximum contaminant level. ND - Not detected at the reporting l¡mit. Page 3 of 25 Extended Term – Flexible Growth Medium™ Less expensive than extended term blankets, and less soil preparation is required Same speed and cost-savings of other hydraulic applications, but lasts twice as long Effective immediately and grass grows twice as fast as blankets REINFORCED VEGETATION HARD ARMOR NATURAL VEGETATION Rock/Concrete GreenArmor™ System HP-FGM™/ET-FGM™ Flexible Growth Medium™ ProMatrix™ Engineered Fiber Matrix (Replaces ECB, BFM, SMM) Wood With Tackifier Straw/Hydraulic Mulch STEEPER SLOPES, HIGHER SHEAR STRESS & VELOCITIES Proven Two-Year Protection from a Superior Hydraulic Application CocoFlex™ Extended Term-Flexible Growth Medium™ (ET-FGM ™) doubles the functional longevity of Flexterra® HP-FGM™, making this the highest-performing, longest-lasting hydraulically applied erosion control product on the market. The patented technology requires no cure time and provides superior slope protection over turf establishment blankets and Bonded Fiber Matrix (BFM) products. Additionally, CocoFlex ET-FGM can be combined with other erosion control technologies, such as Turf Reinforcement Mats (TRMs), to accommodate a broad range of applications. CocoFlex ET-FGM Advantages: • Designed with blended coconut and wood fibers, crimped interlocking man-made fibers and additives that are engineered to perform under extreme conditions • Unmatched performance— > 99% effectiveness translates to superior erosion protection on slopes > 2.5:1V • Fastest growth establishment—1500% water-holding capacity delivers more moisture to the seedbed for faster germination and accelerated growth • Nearly 100 times less soil loss per acre than alternative products Green Design Engineering™ is a holistic approach that combines agronomic and engineering expertise with advanced technologies to provide cost-effective and earth-friendly solutions. Profile strives to deliver Green Design Engineering across our team of consulting professionals, innovative products and educational resources. PS3 is a free, comprehensive 24/7 online resource you can use to design a project and select the right products that address both the physical and agronomic needs of your site. It will help you develop holistic, sustainable solutions for cost-effective erosion control, vegetation establishment and subsequent reductions in sediment and other pollutants from leaving disturbed sites. Because good plans start with the soil, PS3 offers free soil testing to ensure this critical step is considered. To access the site, design your project and take advantage of a free soil analysis, visit www.profileps3.com. GREEN DESIGN ENGINEERING ™ EARTH-FRIENDLY SOLUTIONS FOR SUSTAINABLE RESULTS™ TEST METHOD ENGLISH SI PHYSICAL Mass Per Unit Area ASTM D65661 11.5 oz/yd2 390 g/m2 Thickness ASTM D65251 0.23 in 5.8 mm % Ground Cover ASTM D65671 99% 99% Water-Holding Capacity ASTM D7367 1500% 1500% Cure Time Observed < 2 hr < 2 hr Color (fugitive dye) Observed Green Green ENDurANCE Functional Longevity2 Observed ≤ 24 months ≤ 24 months PErFOrMANCE Cover Factor2 (6 in/hr event) ASTM D71011 0.10 0.10 % Effectiveness3 ASTM D71011 99% 99% Cover Factor2 (5 in/hr event) Large Scale4 0.0001 0.0001 % Effectiveness3 Large Scale4 > 99.99% > 99.99% Shear Stress ASTM D72071 1.6 1b/ft2 77 Pa Vegetation Establishment ASTM D73221 511% 511% 1. ASTM test methods developed for Rolled Erosion Control Products and have been modified to accommodate hydraulically applied erosion control products. 2. Cover Factor is calculated as soil loss ratio of treated surface versus an untreated control surface. 3. % Effectiveness = One minus Cover Factor multiplied by 100%. 4. Large scale testing conducted at Utah Water Research facility using rainfall simulator on 2.5H:1V slope, sandy-loam soil, at a rate of 5" (13 cm) per hour for a duration of 60 minutes. Consult comprehensive CSI formatted ET-FGM specification for additional details. SLOPE GrADIENT/CONDITION ENGLISH SI ≤ 3H to 1V 3000 lb/ac 3400 kg/ha > 3H to 1V and ≤ 2H to 1V 3500 lb/ac 3900 kg/ha > 2H to 1V and ≤ 1H to 1V 4000 lb/ac 4500 kg/ha > 1H to 1V 4500 lb/ac 5100 kg/ha Below ECB or TRM 1500 lb/ac 1700 kg/ha As infill for TRM 3500 lb/ac 3900 kg/ha CocoFlex™ ET-FGM ™ Technical Data: COMPOSITIONThermally Processed Wood Fibers — 51% ± 2% Coconut Fibers — 21.5% ± 2% Proprietary Crosslinked Hydro-Colloidal Tackifiers and Activators — 10% ± 1% Proprietary Crimped, Interlocking Fibers — 7.5% ± 1% Moisture Content — 10% ± 2% INSTALLATIONUse approved hydro-spraying machines with fan-type nozzle (50-degree tip) whenever possible to achieve best soil coverage. Apply ET-FGM from opposing directions to assure 95% soil surface coverage. Slope interruption devices or water diversion techniques are recommended when slope lengths exceed 100 ft (30 m). Erosion Control and Revegetation: For maximum performance, apply ET-FGM in a two-step process: Step One: Apply fertilizer, other soil amendments and 50% of seed with a small amount of ET-FGM for visual metering. Step Two: Mix balance of seed and apply ET-FGM at a rate of 50 lb per 125 gal (23 kg/475 L) of water over freshly seeded surfaces. Confirm loading rates with equipment manufacturer. Do not leave seeded surfaces unprotected, especially if precipitation is imminent. Depending upon site conditions ET-FGM may be applied in a one-step process where all components may be mixed together in single tank loads. CF-01 4/13 PACKAGINGBags: Net Weight - 50 lb (23 kg) UV and weather-resistant plastic film Pallets: 40 bags/pallet, 1 ton (907 kg)/pallet Weather-proof, stretch-wrapped with UV resistant pallet cover For technical information or distribution, please call 800-508-8681. For customer service, call 800-366-1180. For warranty information, visit profileproducts.com. 750 Lake Cook Road • Suite 440 Buffalo Grove, IL 60089 www.profileproducts.com © 2013 PROFILE Products LLC. All rights reserved. Profile and Flexterra are registered trademarks of PROFILE Products LLC. CocoFlex, Flexible Growth Medium, FGM, GreenArmor, ProMatrix, Solutions for your Environment, Green Design Engineering and Earth-Friendly Solutions for Sustainable Results are trademarks of PROFILE Products LLC. EcoMatrix™ Engineered Fiber Matrix™ (EFM) is a biodegradable bonded fiber matrix composed of 100% recycled Thermally Refined™ wood fibers, crimped interlocking biodegradable fibers, and naturally derived biopolymers. EcoMatrix is phytosanitized, free from harmful plastic nettings, and when cured forms an intimate bond with the soil surface to create a continuous, porous, absorbent and flexible erosion resistant blanket that allows for rapid germination and accelerated plant growth. EcoMatrix may require a 24-48 hour curing period to achieve maximum performance.  Erosion control for slopes ranging from mild to steep (≤1H:1V)  Meets or exceeds performance of bonded fiber matrix (BFM)  Equivalent performance to most erosion controlled blankets  Rough graded slopes  Enhancement of vegetation establishment To the best of our knowledge, the information contained herein is accurate. However, Profile Products cannot assume any liability whatsoever for the accuracy or completeness thereof. Final determination of the suitability of any information or material for the use contemplated, of its manner of use and whether the suggested use infringes any patents is the sole responsibility of the use r. Profile Products 2014© Profile Products LLC 750 Lake Cook Road, Ste. 440 Buffalo Grove, IL 60089 800-508-8681 or +1-847-215-3464 www.profileproducts.com Physical Properties* Test Method Units Minimum Value Mass/Unit Area ASTM D65661 g/m2 (oz/yd2) > 393 (11.6) Thickness ASTM D65251 mm (in) > 4 (0.16) Ground Cover ASTM D65671 % > 98 Water Holding Capacity ASTM D73671 % > 1200 Material Color Observed n/a Green Performance Properties* Test Method Units Value Cover Factor2 Large Scale4 n/a < 0.05 Percent Effectiveness3 Large Scale4 % > 95 Cure Time Observed hours 24-48 Vegetation Establishment ASTM D73221 % > 600 Environmental Properties* Test Method Units Typical Value Functional Longevity5 ASTM D5338 n/a Up to 12 months Ecotoxicity EPA 2021.0 % 48-hr LC50 > 100% Biodegradability ASTM D5338 % 100 Product Composition Typical Value Thermally Processed Wood Fiber6 77 % Wetting Agents - including high-viscosity, colloidal polysaccharide based tackifier (>10% of total formulation) 18 % Crimped, Biodegradable Interlocking Fibers derived from plant sugars 2.5 % Proprietary Mineral Activator 2.5 % * When uniformly applied at a rate of 3500 pounds per acre (3900 kilograms/hectare) under laboratory conditions. 1. ASTM test methods developed for Rolled Erosion Control Products that have been modified to accommodate Hydraulic Erosion Control Products. 2. Cover Factor is calculated as soil loss ratio of treated surface versus an untreated control surface. 3. % Effectiveness = One minus Cover Factor multiplied by 100%. 4. Large scale testing conducted at Utah Water Research Laboratory and Texas Transportation Institute. For specific testing information please contact a Profile technical service representative at 800-508-8681 or +1-847-215-3464. 5. Functional Longevity is the estimated time period, based upon field observations, that a material can be anticipated to provide erosion control and agronomic benefits as influenced by composition, as well as site-specific conditions, including; but not limited to temperature, moisture, light conditions, soils, biological activity, vegetative establishment and other environmental factors. 6. Heated to a temperature greater than 380 degrees Fahrenheit (193 degrees Celsius) for 5 minutes at a pressure greater than 50 psi (345 kPa) in order to be Thermally Refined™/Processed and to achieve phytosanitization. Properties Test Method Units Nominal Value Bag Weight Scale kg (lb) 22.7 (50) Bags per Pallet Observed # 40 UV and weather-resistant plastic bags. Pallets are weather-proof stretch wrapped with UV resistant pallet cover. EcoMatrix DS 07/2014 Ver. 0609 www.bioticearth.com PHONE: (866) 280-7327 • FAX: (866) 757-7327 A subsidiary of ErosionControlBlanket Biotic EarthTM HGM Hydraulic Growth Medium Specification Sheet The Verdyol Biotic EarthTM HGM shall be a biotic-active hydraulically applied mulch and growth medium that includes soil builders and affords highly effective erosion control. The Biotic EarthTM HGM shall be specifically designed to assist in soil building, vegetation establishment, and is for use on moderate slopes for immediate erosion control, soil amending, and where vegetation establishment is expected to occur within six months or less. The Biotic EarthTM HGM shall be manufactured from thermally and mechanically processed straw and flexible flax fibers with sphagnum peat moss. The Verdyol Biotic EarthTM HGM comes packaged in white bags. The Verdyol Biotic EarthTM HGM may be considered a Hydraulic Mulch (HM) as defined by the Erosion Control Technology Council. The Verdyol Biotic EarthTM HGM may be considered a Stabilized Mulch Matrix (SMM) as defined by the Erosion Control Technology Council when used in conjunction with EarthBound® 2000 or EarthBound® Scientific Soil Stabilizer & Tackifier. Material Composition 70% by volume of thermally and mechanically processed straw and flexible flax fibers (FFF) 30% by volume of sphagnum peat moss Laboratory Analysis Total Organic Matter Content = >95% Carbon:Nitrogen Ratio = 56:1 Moisture Content = 31% ± 5% pH = 6 (Saturated Media Extract Method) These values are representative of Quality Control Analysis at time of manufacturing. This data is for information purposes only and cannot be uses as a warranty. Packaging & Weights Bags = 50 lbs (23 kg) +/- 10% Bag size = 2.2 ft3 (0.062 m3) 45 bags per pallet EarthBound® is a registered trademark of EarthChem, Inc. Apex Resources Inc. Reaching Higher 549 Stonegate Drive Voice: 832-786-7492 Katy, TX 77494 Fax: 832-786-7496 www.apexr.com Email: info@apexr.com Apex Plantago Specification Product Name: APSIL Apsil is a 100% organic Plantago tackifier derived from the seed of Psyllium (Plantago Ovata). Plantago has a high mucilloid content that gives it the adhesive strength to bind straw, paper mulch and hydromulch. Apsil can be used in application such as hydroseeding, dust control, binding applications. Appearance: Pale buff-colored husk. Chemical Analysis Swell Volume Not less than 27 ml/gm. Moisture 10% max Total Ash 2.7% Acid Insoluble Ash 1% max Protein 1.6-1.8% Fiber 4.0% Mucilage Content 75% min pH (1% Solution) 6.5-7.0 Granulation: 40 Mesh Fumigation: Methyl Bromide 48gms/cum 24hrs. approx. 89 Deg/F. The above specifications for APSIL – Plantago Powder supplied by Apex Resources Inc. are certified. Charles Staff Technical Director RICHLAWN ORGANIC 100 Richlawn 3-6-3 with Mychorrizae and Humates Richlawn 3-6-3 is a CDOT Approved Natural, Organic Fertilizer containing a slow release Nitrogen, Organic Phosphorous, Mycorrhizae and a rich amount of Humus. Richlawn 3-6-3 restores depleted soils with essential nutrients to build a sustainable environment in which to establish vegetation quickly. Manufactured by Richlawn Turf Food, LLC 15121 WCR 32, Platteville, CO 80651 Net Weight 50 Lbs (22.68 Kg.) Guaranteed Analysis Total Nitrogen(N) ………………………………………………………………… 3.0% 2.90% Water Insoluble Organic Nitrogen* .010% Water Soluble Organic Nitrogen Available Phosphate (P2O5) ………………………………………………………………………………….. 6.0% Soluble Potash (K2O) …………………………………………………………… 3.0% Calcium (Ca) ……………………………………………………………………….. 10.0% Plant Nutrient Sources: Dried Poultry Manure, Bone Meal and Sulfate of Potash. *2.90% Water insoluble nitrogen from dried poultry manure and bone meal. Non-Plant Food Ingredients Humates ……………………………………………………………………………… 14.0% Endo Mychorrhizae …………………………………………………………….. 30,000 Propagules 7500 Propagules Glomus mosseae 7500 Propagules Glomus entunicatum 7500 Propagules Glomus intradices 7500 Propagules Glomus aggregatum DISTRIBUTED BY: TRITON ENVIRONMENTAL 5433 NEWPORT STREET COMMERCE CITY, CO 80022 303.945.7588 (O) 303.945.7579 (F) The Benefits of Richlawn 3-6-3  Increases the Nutrient and water holding capacity of the exisiting soil.  Increases Soil Porosity which promotes superior Root Establishment.  Mychrrhizae transports nutrients from the soils and delivers them to the plants roots, greatly reducing fertilization and water need.  Humates add organic material to the soil which increases soil microbiology and water holding capacity. Specifications Product Name: SprayMatrix™ Fiber Reinforced Matrix (FRM) Revision Date: October 2012 1. Product Identification SprayMatrix is a high performance hydraulically applied Fiber Reinforced Matrix (FRM) manufactured from thermo- mechanically processed virgin wood chips and engineered fibers. It comes premixed with a proprietary “cross-linked” bonding agent and does not require additional binders or other additives to provide superior erosion control. SprayMatrix instantly adheres to the soil providing immediate protection that increases in effectiveness the longer it dries. SprayMatrix provides a functional and economical alternative to more expensive materials. It gets vegetation off to a faster, stronger start by maximizing water and nutrient retention while having the durability to ensure sustainable growth. 2. Mixing & Installation SprayMatrix is mixed and applied with a standard hydro seeding machine (mechanically agitated machines are recommended). Follow equipment manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations for operation. Mix SprayMatrix with approximately 125 gallons of water per 50 pound bag. Seed, fertilizer, and soil amendments may be added at specified rates for a one-step installation. For slopes of less than 2.1: Apply SprayMatrix beginning with a primary coat over the surface, followed by additional coats over the same area. Do not apply a thick coat in a single pass. Apply starting at the top of the slope, working your way towards the bottom, allowing the material to “rain” on the surface. Repeat this procedure until 100% coverage is achieved. Applying SprayMatrix to the flat surface at the top of the slope will help to eliminate the possibility of water getting under the applied material and causing erosion. For slopes 2.1 and steeper: First, "paint" the surface with SprayMatrix by pointing the nozzle straight down to drive the material, seed and fertilizer into the soil. After the initial covering, follow instructions above for "raining" material on the surface until 100% coverage is achieved. 3. Product Composition / Property Values Thermo-Mechanically Processed Virgin Wood Fiber (min) 81% Proprietary Cross-Linked Binder (max) 14% Engineered Reinforcing Fibers (max) 5% Ecotoxicity Non-Toxic Water Holding Capacity 1300% Applied Color Green Functional Longevity Up to 18 Months Cover Factor (Large Scale @ TRI) 0.001 % Effectiveness (ASTM 6459) 99.99% Cure Time None Required* *Best results with up to 24 hour dry time 4. Packaging and Shipping Bag Dimensions, Net Weight 10” x 18” x 29”, 50lbs Pallet Dimensions, Quantity 95”H x 47”W x 47”D, 40 Bags Truckload 22 Pallets, 880 Bags 5. Technical Assistance Technical Department: (800) 654-6117 Recommended Application Rates* Slope Gradient US Metric ≤ 4H to 1V 2500bs / Acre 2800kg / Ha ≤ 3H to 1V 3000lbs / Acre 3400kg / Ha ≤ 2H to 1V 3500lbs / Acre 3900kg / Ha ≤ 1H to 1V 4000lbs / Acre 4500kg / Ha > 1H to 1V 4500lbs / Acre 5000kg / Ha *Rates represent typical site conditions & may be modified to meet site requirements Appendix D – BLM and Landowner Seed Mixture Tables  BLM - Grand Junction and Colorado River Valley Field Offices – Menu Based Seed Mixes (Revised 2017) 1 BLM MENU-BASED NATIVE RECLAMATION SEED MIXES BY HABITAT TYPE (September 2017) All seed placed on public land shall be approved by the BLM and meet BLM standards for species and seeding rate for the specific habitat type within the project area. Seed mix labels and test results shall be provided to the BLM for approval before application. All seed shall be tested by a registered seed analyst for viability/germination and noxious weeds at official state seed analysis lab, within one year of acceptance date. Certification shall include a minimum germination rate of 80%, a minimum purity of 90%, source- identification, no noxious weed seeds and no more than 0.5% weight of other weed seeds. Mulch shall be certified weed free. (IM 2006-073) For drill-seeding, small seeds (>500,000 per pound) must be packaged separately to allow for separate application and planted no deeper than 0.25 inch. The seeding rates in the following tables are based on 60 pure live seeds (PLS) per square foot for drill-seeding. This is doubled to 120 PLS per square foot for broadcast-seeding or hydroseeding. For hydroseeding/hydromulching, application of seeds and mulch shall be two separate steps. Table 1-4. Low Elevation Salt-Desert Shrub or Basin Big Sagebrush (8 to 10 inches precipitation) Common Name Species Name Variety Seeds per Pound PLS lbs/acre Plant All of the Following Grasses (15% of Mix Each, 45% Total) Indian Ricegrass Achnatherum hymenoides Native Colorado/Utah source or Nezpar, Paloma, Rimrock 141,000 2.8 Alkali Sacaton Sporobolus airoides Native Colorado/Utah source preferred 5,000,000 0.08 Sand Dropseed Sporobolus cryptandrus UP* Dolores or native Colorado/Utah source preferred 1,750,000 0.2 And Two of the Following Grasses (10% of Mix Each, 20% Total) Bottlebrush squirreltail Elymus elymoides Fish Creek, Toe Jam Creek, Wapiti 192,000 1.4 Salina Wildrye Leymus salinas UP* Dolores or native Colorado/Utah source preferred 125,000 (estimate) 2.1 Western Wheatgrass Pascopyrum smithii UP* variety or Arriba, Recovery, Rodan, Rosana 110,000 2.4 And One of the Following Grasses (10% of Mix Each, 10% Total) Purple Three-awn Aristida purpurea Native Colorado/Utah source preferred 275,000 1.0 Galleta Pleuraphis jamesii Native Colorado/Utah source preferred 159,000 1.6 And Two of the Following Shrubs (7.5% of Mix Each, 15% Total) Fourwing Saltbush Atriplex canescens Native Colorado/Utah source preferred 50,000 3.9 Shadscale Saltbush Atriplex confertifolia Native Colorado/Utah source, or Rincon, Snake River, Wytana 60,000 3.3 Gardner’s Saltbush Atriplex gardneri Native Colorado/Utah source preferred 111,500 1.8 And Four of the Following Forbs/Subshrubs (2.5% of Mix Each, 10% Total)** Common Name Scientific Name PLS lbs/acre Common Name Scientific Name PLS lbs/acre Broom Snakeweed Gutierrezia sarothrae 0.04 Scarlet Globemallow Sphaeralcea coccinea 0.13 Lewis Blue Flax Linum lewisii 0.4 Western Yarrow Achillea millefolium 0.02 Scarlet Gilia Ipomopsis aggregata 0.18 Winterfat Krascheninnikovia lanata 0.53 *UP = Uncompahgre Project (UP), Kathy See, nativeplant@upartnership.org, 970-240-9498, 970-901-8247 ** From UP if available; otherwise native Colorado/Utah source preferred. 2 Table 1-3. Pinyon-Juniper Woodland or Wyoming Sagebrush Shrubland (12 to 16 inches precipitation) Common Name Species Name Variety Seeds per Pound PLS lbs/acre Plant All of the Following Grasses (15% of Mix Each, 45% Total) Indian Ricegrass Achnatherum hymenoides Native Colorado/Utah source, or Nezpar, Paloma, Rimrock 141,000 2.8 Thickspike Wheatgrass Elymus lanceolatus Critana, Schwendimar 154,000 2.5 Western Wheatgrass Pascopyrum smithii UP* or native Colorado/Utah source or Arriba, Recovery, Rodan, Rosana 110,000 3.6 And Two of the Following Grasses (10% of Mix Each, 20% Total) Bottlebrush Squirreltail Elymus elymoides Native Colorado/Utah source, or Fish Creek, Toe Jam Creek, Wapiti 192,000 1.4 Slender Wheatgrass Elymus trachycaulus San Luis 159,000 1.6 Sandberg Bluegrass Poa secunda “sandbergii” UP* Colorado-Sims Mesa or High Mesa 882,000 0.3 Bluebunch Wheatgrass Pseudoroegneria spicata Native Colorado/Utah source, or Anatone, Goldar 140,000 2.8 And Two of the Following Grasses (5% of Mix Each, 10% Total) Columbia or Letterman Needlegrass or Needle-and-Thread Achnatherum nelsonii / A. lettermanii / Hesperostipa comata Native sources within 500 miles preferred 150,000/ 225,000/ 115,000 0.9/ 0.6/ 1.1 Basin Wildrye Leymus cinereus Intermountain tetraploid 130,000 1.0 Galleta Pleuraphis jamesii Native Colorado/Utah source preferred 159,000 0.8 Sand Dropseed Sporobolus cryptandrus UP* Dolores or native Colorado/Utah source preferred 1,750,000 0.1 And Two of the Following Shrubs/Subshrubs (7.5% of Mix Each, 15% Total) Fourwing Saltbush Atriplex canescens Native Colorado/Utah source preferred 50,000 3.9 Broom Snakeweed Gutierrezia sarothrae Native Colorado/Utah source preferred 1,600,000 0.1 Winterfat Krascheninnikovia lanata Native Colorado/Utah source preferred 123,000 1.6 And Four of the Following Forbs (2.5% of Mix Each, 10% Total)** Common Name Scientific Name PLS lbs/acre Common Name Scientific Name PLS lbs/acre American Vetch Vicia americana 2.4 Scarlet Globemallow Sphaeralcea coccinea 0.13 Arrowleaf Balsamroot Balsamorhiza sagittata 1.2 Showy Fleabane Erigeron speciosus* 0.04 Blanketflower Gaillardia aristata 0.5 Silvery Lupine Lupinus argenteus 3.6 Bluestem Penstemon/ Dusty Penstemon Penstemon cyanocaulis* or P. comarrhenus* 0.1 Sulphur Buckwheat* Eriogonum umbellatum 0.3 Fernleaf Biscuitroot Lomatium dissectum 1.5 Tapertip Hawks- beard Crepis acuminata 0.08 Hairy Golden-aster Heterotheca villosa 0.1 Thickleaf Penstemon Penstemon pachyphyllus 0.3 Lewis Blue Flax Linum lewisii 0.4 Utah Sweetvetch Hedysaurum boreale 1.4 Scarlet Gilia Ipomopsis aggregata 0.18 Western Yarrow Achillea millefolium 0.02 *UP = Uncompahgre Project (UP), Kathy See, nativeplant@upartnership.org, 970-240-9498, 970-901-8247 ** From UP if available; otherwise native Colorado/Utah source preferred. 3 Table 1-2. Mixed Mountain Shrubland, including Oakbrush and Mountain Sagebrush (16 to 22 inches precipitation) Common Name Species Name Variety Seeds per Pound PLS lbs/acre Plant Three of the Following Grasses (15% of Mix Each, 45% Total) Indian Ricegrass Achnatherum hymenoides UP* White River preferred, or Nezpar, Paloma, Rimrock 141,000 2.8 Mountain Brome Bromopsis marginatus UP* Cold Springs preferred, or Bromar, Garnet 64,000 6.1 Slender Wheatgrass Elymus trachycaulus San Luis 159,000 1.6 Bluebunch Wheatgrass Pseudoroegneria spicata Native Colorado/Utah source, or Anatone, Goldar 140,000 2.8 And Two of the Following Grasses (10% of Mix Each, 20% Total) Bottlebrush Squirreltail Elymus elymoides Native Colorado/Utah source, or Fish Creek, Toe Jam Creek, Wapiti 192,000 1.4 Prairie Junegrass Koeleria macrantha Native Colorado/Utah source preferred 2,315,000 0.1 Mutton Bluegrass Poa fendleriana Native Colorado/Utah source preferred 890,000 0.3 And One of the Following Grasses (10% of Mix Each, 10% Total) Columbia or Letterman Needlegrass or Needle-and-Thread Achnatherum nelsonii / A. lettermanii / Hesperostipa comata Native sources within 500 miles preferred 150,000/ 225,000/ 115,000 1.7/ 1.2/ 2.3 And One of the Following Grasses (10% of Mix Each, 10% Total) Western Wheatgrass Pascopyrum smithii UP* variety native Colorado/Utah source, or Arriba, Recovery, Rodan, Rosana 110,000 2.4 Thickspike Wheatgrass Elymus lanceolatus Bannock, Critana, Schwendimar 154,000 1.7 And Five of the Following Forbs (3% of Mix Each, 15% Total)** Common Name Scientific Name PLS lbs/acre Common Name Scientific Name PLS lbs/acre American Vetch Vicia americana 2.4 Scarlet Gilia Ipomopsis aggregata 0.2 Arrowleaf Balsamroot Balsamorhiza sagittata 1.4 Scarlet Globemallow Sphaeralcea coccinea 0.16 Bigelow’s Tansy- aster Dieteria bigelovii 0.05 Showy Golden-eye Heliomeris multiflora 0.07 Blanket-flower Gaillardia aristata 0.6 Sticky Geranium Geranium viscosissimum 1.6 Hairy Golden-aster Heterotheca villosa 0.1 Sulphur Buckwheat Eriogonum umbellatum 0.4 Lewis Blue Flax Linum lewisii 0.5 Tailcup Lupine Lupinus caudatus 4.4 Mule’s-ears Wyethia amplexicaulus 2.8 Tapertip Hawks- beard Crepis acuminata 0.1 Rocky Mountain Beeplant Cleome serrulata 0.7 Utah Sweetvetch Hedysaurum boreale 1.7 Rocky Mountain Penstemon Penstemon strictus 0.1 Western Yarrow Achillea millefolium 0.03 *Uncompahgre Project (UP), Kathy See, nativeplant@upartnership.org, 970-240-9498, 970-901-8247 ** From UP if available; otherwise native Colorado/Utah source preferred. 4 Table 1-1. Montane or Subalpine Conifers or Quaking Aspen (18 to 24+ inches) Common Name Species Name Variety Seeds per Pound PLS lbs/acre Plant One of the Following Grasses (15% of Mix Each, 15% Total) Arizona Fescue Festuca arizonica Colorado/Utah source; Redondo 550,000 0.7 Idaho Fescue (higher elevations) Festuca idahoensis Colorado/Utah source, or Joseph, Nezpurs, Winchester 450,000 0.9 Rocky Mountain Fescue Festuca saximontana Colorado/Utah source preferred 1,200,000 0.3 And Two of the Following Grasses (15% of Mix Each, 30% Total) Letterman’s Needlegrass Achnatherum lettermanii Colorado/Utah source preferred 225,000 1.2 Mountain Brome Bromus marginatus UP* Cold Springs preferred, or Bromar, Garnet 64,000 6.1 Slender Wheatgrass Elymus trachycaulus San Luis 159,000 2.5 Wheeler Bluegrass Poa wheeleri ( nervosa) Colorado/Utah source preferred 950,000 0.4 And Three of the Following Grasses (10% of Mix Each, 30% Total) Big Bluegrass Poa secunda “ampla” Colorado/Utah source, or Ampla 882,000 0.3 Blue Wildrye Elymus glaucus Colorado/Utah source, or Arlington, Elkton 134,500 1.9 Mountain Muhly Muhlenbergia montana Colorado/Utah source preferred 1,500,000 0.17 Rough Bentgrass Agrostis scabra Colorado/Utah source preferred 5,000,000 0.05 And Two of the Following of Shrubs (5% of Mix Each, 10% Total) Mountain Snowberry Symphoricarpos rotundifolius (oreophilus) Colorado/Utah source preferred 54,700 2.4 Wax Currant Ribes cereum Colorado/Utah source preferred 350,000 0.4 Winterfat Krascheninnikovia lanata Colorado/Utah source preferred 123,000 1.1 And Five of the Following Forbs (3% of Mix Each, 15% Total) Common Name Scientific Name PLS lbs/acre Common Name Scientific Name PLS lbs/acre American Vetch Vicia americana 2.4 Showy Daisy Erigeron speciosus* 0.05 Bigelow’s Tansy- aster Dieteria bigelovii 0.05 Showy Golden-eye Heliomeris multiflora 0.07 Blanketflower Gaillardia aristata 0.6 Sticky Geranium Geranium viscosissimum 1.6 Hairy Golden-aster Heterotheca villosa 0.1 Sulphur Buckwheat Eriogonum umbellatum* 0.3 Lewis Blue Flax Linum lewisii 0.5 Tapertip Hawks- beard Crepis acuminata 0.1 Mountain Golden- banner Thermopsis montana 5.2 Tailcup Lupine Lupinus caudatus 4.4 Rocky Mountain Penstemon Penstemon strictus 0.1 Western Yarrow Achillea millefolium 0.02 Rydberg’s Penstemon Penstemon rydbergii 0.09 Wild Bergamot Monarda fistulosa 0.06 *Uncompahgre Project (UP), Kathy See, nativeplant@upartnership.org, 970-240-9498, 970-901-8247. BLM White River Field Office – Menu Based Seed Mixes (Revised Seed Mixes) Range Site: Alkali Flat, Alkaline Slopes, Clayey Foothills, Clayey Slopes Standard Seed Mixes (50 seeds per square foot application rate) Application Rate (lbs PLS/acre) Rosana Western Wheatgrass Pascopyrum smithii 4.5 Critana Thickspike Wheatgrass Elymus lanceolatus ssp. lanceolatus 3.5 Toe Jam Creek Bottlebrush Squirreltail Elymus elymoides 3 Scarlet Globemallow Sphaeralcea coccinea 0.5 Sulphur Flower Eriogonum umbellatum 1.5 Winterfat Krascheninnikovia lanata 1 Sodar Streambank Wheatgrass Elymus lanceolatus ssp. psammophilus 3.5 Annual Sunflower Helianthus annus 3 Mat Saltbush Atriplex corrugata 2 These seed mixes have been designed by considering soil types, ranges sites, and the composition of native species likely to occur in the potential native plant community. Drill seeding is the preferred method of seed application. If slopes are too steep or otherwise unsuitable for drilling, seed will be broadcast at double the rate specified. Broadcast seed should be covered by harrowing or raking to ensure germination and establishment. Hydromulching after seed application will generally be required on steeper slopes. Seed Mix Cultivar Species Scientific Name 1 Alternates:* Range Site: Standard Seed Mixes (50 seeds per square foot application rate) Application Rate (lbs PLS/acre) Arriba Western Wheatgrass Pascopyrum smithii 4 Rimrock Indian Ricegrass Achnatherum hymenoides 3.5 Whitmar Bluebunch Wheatgrass Pseudoroegneria spicata ssp. inermis 4 Lodorm Green Needlegrass Nassella viridula 2.5 Timp Northern Sweetvetch Hedysarum boreale 3 Sulphur Flower Eriogonum umbellatum 1.5 Critana Needle and Thread Elymus lanceolatus ssp. lanceolatus 3 Scarlet Globemallow Sphaeralcea coccinea 0.5 These seed mixes have been designed by considering soil types, ranges sites, and the composition of native species likely to occur in the potential native plant community. Drill seeding is the preferred method of seed application. If slopes are too steep or otherwise unsuitable for drilling, seed will be broadcast at double the rate specified. Broadcast seed should be covered by harrowing or raking to ensure germination and establishment. Hydromulching after seed application will generally be required on steeper slopes. Deep Loam, Loamy Slopes, Loamy, Loamy 10-14 in PPT, Loamy Bottom, Loamy Breaks, Loamy Slopes, Rolling Loam 2 Alternates:* Cultivar Species Scientific NameSeed Mix Range Site: Standard Seed Mixes (50 seeds per square foot application rate) Application Rate (lbs PLS/acre) Rosanna Western Wheatgrass Pascopyrum smithii 4 Whitmar Bluebunch Wheatgrass Pseudoroegneria spicata ssp. inermis 3.5 Rimrock Indian Ricegrass Achnatherum hymenoides 3 Needle and Thread Grass Hesperostipa comata ssp. comata 2.5 Maple Grove Lewis Flax Linum lewisii 1 Scarlet Globemallow Sphaeralcea coccinea 0.5 Critana Thickspike Wheatgrass Elymus lanceolatus ssp. lanceolatus 3 Sulphur Flower Eriogonum umbellatum 1.5 These seed mixes have been designed by considering soil types, ranges sites, and the composition of native species likely to occur in the potential native plant community. Drill seeding is the preferred method of seed application. If slopes are too steep or otherwise unsuitable for drilling, seed will be broadcast at double the rate specified. Broadcast seed should be covered by harrowing or raking to ensure germination and establishment. Hydromulching after seed application will generally be required on steeper slopes. 3 Alternates:* Desert Clay, Foothills Juniper, Mountain Pinyon, Pinyon Juniper Woodlands, Sandy Juniper, Stoney Foothills, Soil Unit 206mcs Seed Mix Cultivar Species Scientific Name Range Site: Sandhills, Sandy Foothills Standard Seed Mixes (50 seeds per square foot application rate) Application Rate (lbs PLS/acre) Rosanna Western Wheatgrass Pascopyrum smithii 3.5 Critana Thickspike Wheatgrass Elymus lanceolatus ssp. lanceolatus 2.5 Rimrock Indian Ricegrass Achnatherum hymenoides 3 Needle and Thread Grass Hesperostipa comata ssp. comata 2.5 Northern Sweetvetch Hedysarum boreale 3 Sulphur buckwheat Eriogonum Umbellatum 1 Toe Jam Creek Bottlebrush Squirreltail Elymus elymoides 2 Scarlet Globemallow Sphaeralcea coccinea 0.5 These seed mixes have been designed by considering soil types, ranges sites, and the composition of native species likely to occur in the potential native plant community. Drill seeding is the preferred method of seed application. If slopes are too steep or otherwise unsuitable for drilling, seed will be broadcast at double the rate specified. Broadcast seed should be covered by harrowing or raking to ensure germination and establishment. Hydromulching after seed application will generally be required on steeper slopes. Seed Mix Cultivar Species Scientific Name 4 Alternates:* Range Site: Foothill Swale, Swale Meadow Standard Seed Mixes (50 seeds per square foot application rate) Application Rate (lbs PLS/acre) Magnar Basin Wildrye Leymus cinereus 3.5 Rosanna Western Wheatgrass Pascopyrum smithii 3.5 San Luis Slender Wheatgrass Elymus trachycaulus ssp. trachycaulus 3 Critana Thickspike Wheatgrass Elymus lanceolatus ssp. lanceolatus 3 Timp Northern Sweetvetch Hedysarum boreale 4.5 Maple Grove Lewis Flax Linum lewisii 1 Sodar Streambank Wheatgrass Elymus lanceolatus ssp. psammophilus 3 Scarlet Globemallow Sphaeralcea coccinea 0.5 Seed Mixes 5 or 10* Seed Mix Cultivar Species Scientific Name These seed mixes have been designed by considering soil types, ranges sites, and the composition of native species likely to occur in the potential native plant community. Drill seeding is the preferred method of seed application. If slopes are too steep or otherwise unsuitable for drilling, seed will be broadcast at double the rate specified. Broadcast seed should be covered by harrowing or raking to ensure germination and establishment. Hydromulching after seed application will generally be required on steeper slopes. 5 Alternates:* *Two seed mixes are presented as options in areas that are known to be especially harsh sites to reclaim. The second seed mix listed is a mix of native and introduced species. Range Site: Standard Seed Mixes (50 seeds per square foot application rate) Application Rate (lbs PLS/acre) UP Plateau Sandberg bluegrass Poa secunda ssp. sandbergii 0.5 San Luis Slender Wheatgrass Elymus trachycaulus ssp. trachycaulus 2 Sherman Big Bluegrass Poa secunda ssp. ampla 1 Bromar Mountain Brome Bromus marginatus 2 Maple Grove Lewis Flax Linum lewisii 1 Bandera Rocky Mountain Penstemon Penstemon strictus 0.5 Canbar Canby Bluegrass Poa secunda ssp. canbyi 0.5 Arrowleaf Balsamroot Balsamorhiza sagittata 3 These seed mixes have been designed by considering soil types, ranges sites, and the composition of native species likely to occur in the potential native plant community. Drill seeding is the preferred method of seed application. If slopes are too steep or otherwise unsuitable for drilling, seed will be broadcast at double the rate specified. Broadcast seed should be covered by harrowing or raking to ensure germination and establishment. Hydromulching after seed application will generally be required on steeper slopes. 6 Alternates:* Aspen, Brushy Loam, Deep Clay Loam, Douglas-Fir Woodland, Lodgepole Pine Woodland, Mountain Loam, Mountain Meadow, Mountain Shallow Loam, Mountain Swale, Spruce-Fir Woodland Seed Mix Cultivar Species Scientific Name Range Site: Dry Exposure, Dry Mountain Loam, Stoney Loam Standard Seed Mixes (50 seeds per square foot application rate) Application Rate (lbs PLS/acre) Letterman needlegrass Elymus lanceolatus ssp. lanceolatus 3 San Luis Slender Wheatgrass Elymus trachycaulus ssp. trachycaulus 2 Whitmar Bluebunch Wheatgrass Pseudoroegneria spicata ssp. inermis 4 Sodar Streambank Wheatgrass Elymus lanceolatus ssp. psammophilus 3 Scarlet Globemallow Sphaeralcea coccinea 0.5 Sulfur Flower Buckwheat Eriogonum umbellatum 1 UP Plateau Sandberg Bluegrass Poa secunda ssp. sandbergii 0.5 Northern Sweetvetch Hedysarum boreale 3 These seed mixes have been designed by considering soil types, ranges sites, and the composition of native species likely to occur in the potential native plant community. Drill seeding is the preferred method of seed application. If slopes are too steep or otherwise unsuitable for drilling, seed will be broadcast at double the rate specified. Broadcast seed should be covered by harrowing or raking to ensure germination and establishment. Hydromulching after seed application will generally be required on steeper slopes. Seed Mix Cultivar Species Scientific Name 7 Alternates:* Range Site: Standard Seed Mixes (50 seeds per square foot application rate) Application Rate (lbs PLS/acre) Viva Florets Galleta Grass Pleuraphis jamesii 3 Rimrock Indian Ricegrass Achnatherum hymenoides 3 Toe Jam Creek Bottlebrush Squirreltail Elymus elymoides 2.5 Rosanna Western Wheatgrass Pascopyrum smithii 4 Scarlet Globemallow Sphaeralcea coccinea 0.25 Annual Sunflower Helianthus annus 2.5 Mat Saltbush Atriplex corrugata 2 UP Plateau Sandberg Bluegrass Poa secunda ssp. sandbergii 0.5 Fernleaf Biscuitroot Lomatium dissectum 3 Shadscale Atriplex confertifolia 2 Seed Mixes 8 or 9* Clayey Loam, Clayey Saltdesert, Desert Shallow Clay, Loamy Cold Desert, Loamy Saltdesert, Salt Meadow, Saltdesert Breaks, Saltdesert Overflow, Sandy, Sandy Saltdesert, Semidesert Clay Loam, Semidesert Gravelly Loam, Semidesert Loam, Semidesert Sandy Loam, Semidesert Shallow Loam, Silty Saltdesert, Upland Shallow Loam, Upland Stony Loam, and Soil Units 196mcs and 204mcs Seed Mix Cultivar Species Scientific Name These seed mixes have been designed by considering soil types, ranges sites, and the composition of native species likely to occur in the potential native plant community. Drill seeding is the preferred method of seed application. If slopes are too steep or otherwise unsuitable for drilling, seed will be broadcast at double the rate specified. Broadcast seed should be covered by harrowing or raking to ensure germination and establishment. Hydromulching after seed application will generally be required on steeper slopes. 8 Alternates:* *Two seed mixes are presented as options in areas that are known to be especially harsh sites to reclaim. The second seed mix listed is a mix of native and introduced species. Range Site: Standard Seed Mixes (50 seeds per square foot application rate) Application Rate (lbs PLS/acre) Rosanna Western Wheatgrass Pascopyrum smithii 5 Bozoisky-Select Russian Wildrye Psathyrostachys juncea 3 Hycrest Crested Wheatgrass Agropyron cristatum 3 Annual Sunflower Helianthus annus 5 P27 Siberian Wheatgrass Agropyron fragile 3.5 Scarlet Globemallow Sphaeralcea coccinea 1 Seed Mixes 8 or 9* Clayey Loam, Clayey Saltdesert, Desert Shallow Clay, Loamy Cold Desert, Loamy Saltdesert, Salt Meadow, Saltdesert Breaks, Saltdesert Overflow, Sandy, Sandy Saltdesert, Semidesert Clay Loam, Semidesert Gravelly Loam, Semidesert Loam, Semidesert Sandy Loam, Semidesert Shallow Loam, Silty Saltdesert, Upland Shallow Loam, Upland Stony Loam, and Soil Units 196mcs and 204mcs Seed Mix Cultivar Species Scientific Name These seed mixes have been designed by considering soil types, ranges sites, and the composition of native species likely to occur in the potential native plant community. Drill seeding is the preferred method of seed application. If slopes are too steep or otherwise unsuitable for drilling, seed will be broadcast at double the rate specified. Broadcast seed should be covered by harrowing or raking to ensure germination and establishment. Hydromulching after seed application will generally be required on steeper slopes. 9 Alternates:* *Two seed mixes are presented as options in areas that are known to be especially harsh sites to reclaim. The second seed mix listed is a mix of native and introduced species. Range Site: Foothill Swale, Swale Meadow Standard Seed Mixes (50 seeds per square foot application rate) Application Rate (lbs PLS/acre) Magnar Basin Wildrye Leymus cinereus 3.5 Rosanna Western Wheatgrass Pascopyrum smithii 4 Luna Pubescent Wheatgrass Elytrigia intermedia 4 Paiute Orchardgrass Dactylis glomerata 1 Ladak Alfalfa Medicago sativa 1.5 Wytana Fourwing Saltbush Atriplex canescens 2 Alternates:* Hycrest Crested Wheatgrass Agropyron cristatum 1.5 Scarlet Globemallow Sphaeralcea coccinea 0.5 Seed Mixes 5 or 10* These seed mixes have been designed by considering soil types, ranges sites, and the composition of native species likely to occur in the potential native plant community. Drill seeding is the preferred method of seed application. If slopes are too steep or otherwise unsuitable for drilling, seed will be broadcast at double the rate specified. Broadcast seed should be covered by harrowing or raking to ensure germination and establishment. Hydromulching after seed application will generally be required on steeper slopes. 10 *Two seed mixes are presented as options in areas that are known to be especially harsh sites to reclaim. The second seed mix listed is a mix of native and introduced species. Seed Mix Cultivar Species Scientific Name FR - LEFT FORK 6502 (C23 299) (BLM) Cultivar Common Name Scientific Name Application Rate (lbs PLS/acre) Rosana Western Wheatgrass Pascopyrum smithii 4 Whitmar Bluebunch Wheatgrass Pseudoroegneria spicata ssp. inermis 3.5 Rimrock Indian Ricegrass Achnatherum hymenoides 3 Needle and Thread Grass Hesperostipa comata ssp. comata 2.5 Sulphur Flower Buckwheat Eriogonum umbellatum 1.5 Scarlet Globemallow Sphaeralcea coccinea 0.5 FR - CC FED A 4510 (BLM) and FR - SHU II 4506 D-2 (BLM) Cultivar Common Name Scientific Name Application Rate (lbs PLS/acre) Arriba Western Wheatgrass Pascopyrum smithii 4 Whitmar Bluebunch Wheatgrass Pseudoroegneria spicata ssp. inermis 3.5 Rimrock Indian Ricegrass Achnatherum hymenoides 3 Needle and Thread Grass Hesperostipa comata ssp. comata 2.5 Sulphur Flower Buckwheat Eriogonum umbellatum 1.5 Timp Northern Sweetvetch Hedysarum boreale 3 Private Landowner Seed Mixes (Check with Land Department for Revised/Current Seed Mix) Harold Schaeffer Seed Mix (Revised) Variety Pounds Pure Live Seed (PLS) per Acre Intermediate Wheatgrass 4.5/ac Pubescent Wheatgrass 3.5/ac Tall Wheatgrass 3.5/ac Western Wheatgrass 3.5/ac Russian Wild Rye 2.5/ac Total 17.5 lbs. PLS per acre Rates recommended are for drill seeding. For broadcast seeding or hydroseeding double the seeding rate. Harold Schaeffer Seed Mix (Original) Variety Pounds Pure Live Seed (PLS) per Acre Intermediate Wheatgrass 3.0/ac Pubescent Wheatgrass 2.0/ac Tall Wheatgrass 2.0/ac Western Wheatgrass 2.0/ac Russian Wild Rye 1.0/ac Total 10.0 lbs. PLS per acre Rates recommended are for drill seeding. For broadcast seeding or hydroseeding double the seeding rate. Hunter/Grass Seed Mix (Harold Schaeffer Revised) Variety Pounds Pure Live Seed (PLS) per Acre Intermediate Wheatgrass 4.5/ac Pubescent Wheatgrass 3.5/ac Tall Wheatgrass 3.5/ac Western Wheatgrass 3.5/ac Russian Wild Rye 2.5/ac Total 17.5 lbs. PLS per acre Rates recommended are for drill seeding. For broadcast seeding or hydroseeding double the seeding rate. Private Land Lowland-Pinyon Juniper Woodland Seed Mix Common Name Scientific Name Pounds (PLS) per Acre Slender Wheatgrass Elymus trachycaulus ssp. 3.25/ac Pubescent Wheat Grass Agropyron trichophorum 2.75/ac Western Wheat Grass Agropyron smithii 2.75/ac Sideoats Grama Bouteloua curtipendula 2.25/ac Intermediate Wheat Grass 1.75/ac Galleta Hilaria jamesii 1.75/ac Thickspike Wheatgrass Elymus lanceaoatus ssp. 1.75/ac Idaho Fescue Festuca idahoensis 0.75/ac Russian Wild Rye 1.0/ac Perennial ryegrass Lolium perenne 0.75/ac Indian Ricegrass Oryzopsis hymenoides 0.50/ac Alkali sacaton Sporobolus airoides 0.25/ac Total 19.75/ac Rates recommended are for drill seeding. For broadcast seeding or hydroseeding double the seeding rate. Private Land Pinyon Juniper Woodland Seed Mix Common Name Scientific Name Pounds (PLS) per Acre Slender Wheatgrass Elymus trachycaulus ssp. 3.25/ac Pubescent Wheat Grass Agropyron trichophorum 2.75/ac Western Wheat Grass Agropyron smithii 2.75/ac Sideoats Grama Bouteloua curtipendula 2.25/ac Intermediate Wheat Grass 1.75/ac Galleta Hilaria jamesii 1.75/ac Thickspike Wheatgrass Elymus lanceaoatus ssp. 1.75/ac Idaho Fescue Festuca idahoensis 0.75/ac Russian Wild Rye 1.0/ac Perennial ryegrass Lolium perenne 0.75/ac Indian Ricegrass Oryzopsis hymenoides 0.50/ac Alkali sacaton Sporobolus airoides 0.25/ac Total 19.75/ac Rates recommended are for drill seeding. For broadcast seeding or hydroseeding double the seeding rate. Rose Ranch (Harold Schaeffer) Seed Mix (Original) Variety Pounds Pure Live Seed (PLS) per Acre Crested Wheatgrass 0.0/ac Alfalfa 0.0/ac Intermediate Wheatgrass 3.0/ac Pubescent Wheatgrass 2.0/ac Tall Wheatgrass 2.0/ac Western Wheatgrass 2.0/ac Russian Wild Rye 1.0/ac Total 10.0 lbs. PLS per acre Rates recommended are for drill seeding. For broadcast seeding or hydroseeding double the seeding rate. If on non-irrigated areas, the mixture of dryland crested wheat grass and alfalfa (50-50) that Shaeffer uses is good. On irrigated areas the mix that was put on the D-14 (alfalfa and the legumes grasses) is working well. The proposed pipeline is basically on non- irrigated areas. Let me know if you need further info. Thanks, Jim On May 2, 2007, at 9:49 AM, Hayes, Stan wrote: Satterfield & Knox Seed Mix Common Name Scientific Name Pounds (PLS) per Acre Slender Wheatgrass Elymus trachycaulus ssp. 3.25/ac Pubescent Wheat Grass Agropyron trichophorum 2.75/ac Western Wheat Grass Agropyron smithii 2.75/ac Sideoats Grama Bouteloua curtipendula 2.25/ac Intermediate Wheat Grass 1.75/ac Galleta Hilaria jamesii 1.75/ac Thickspike Wheatgrass Elymus lanceaoatus ssp. 1.75/ac Idaho Fescue Festuca idahoensis 0.75/ac Russian Wild Rye 1.0/ac Perennial ryegrass Lolium perenne 0.75/ac Indian Ricegrass Oryzopsis hymenoides 0.50/ac Alkali sacaton Sporobolus airoides 0.25/ac Total 19.75/ac Rates recommended are for drill seeding. For broadcast seeding or hydroseeding double the seeding rate. Private Land Lowland-Pinyon Juniper Woodland Seed Mix Common Name Scientific Name Pounds (PLS) per Acre Slender Wheatgrass Elymus trachycaulus ssp. 3.25/ac Pubescent Wheat Grass Agropyron trichophorum 2.75/ac Western Wheat Grass Agropyron smithii 2.75/ac Sideoats Grama Bouteloua curtipendula 2.25/ac Intermediate Wheat Grass 1.75/ac Galleta Hilaria jamesii 1.75/ac Thickspike Wheatgrass Elymus lanceaoatus ssp. 1.75/ac Idaho Fescue Festuca idahoensis 0.75/ac Russian Wild Rye 1.0/ac Perennial ryegrass Lolium perenne 0.75/ac Indian Ricegrass Oryzopsis hymenoides 0.50/ac Alkali sacaton Sporobolus airoides 0.25/ac Total 19.75/ac Rates recommended are for drill seeding. For broadcast seeding or hydroseeding double the seeding rate. 16 Appendix E – Seed Report Form v 1.3.0 Piceance Seeding Form Caerus Project Manager Area Route Facility Surface Ownership Latitude Longitude Seeding Contractor Reclamation / Seeding Type REVEGETATION DETAILS Start Date Seedbed preparation methods (select all that apply) Chisel Plowing Pocking Cultipacking Disking Harrowing Subsoiling Other Soil Ammendments, Mulches and Fertilizers Applied Comments / Description Seed Mix Description (see breakdown below) Planting Method Drill Broadcast Hydraulic (seed, amendements, tackifiers, hydromulch) Seeding Comments: Piceance Seeding Form Application Rate Application Method Acres Prepared AR Units SITE DETAILS Completion Date Comments / Description Seeding Rate in Lbs. PLS / Acre Acres Applied Comments / Description 17 Appendix F – Weed Management Plan Caerus Oil and Gas, LLC Integrated Weed Management Plan Piceance Basin Revision Date: March 26, 2018 1. Introduction Caerus Oil and Gas, LLC (Caerus) currently implement s several integrated weed management techniques in the Piceance Basin. Because effective weed control is dependent upon multiple varying factors, Caerus strives to assess weed infestations on an individual basis, so that the best, site-specific weed management techniques may be customized and executed. Caerus employs the benefits of cultural, chemical, mechanical and biological control – as well as, many combinations of these methods – in everyday weed management throughout the Piceance field. Caerus has established a systematic approach to assessing field conditions and utilizing these tools to create site-specific prescriptions. The information in this document describes the general processes and timelines of Caerus’ Weed Management Program. 2. Define an Objective Caerus will make management decisions based upon the objective of a treatment. The objective of a weed management effort is defined by the purpose(s) and the goal(s) of the site-specific treatment. 2.1 Weed Management Purposes Caerus may manage weeds for the purpose(s) of: • Conserving land resources, including neighboring agricultural resources and native habitat • Supporting reclamation success • Reducing negative impacts on the landscape, aesthetically • Improving visibility within operational areas for the purpose of human and wildlife safety • Reducing fire hazards for the safety of humans, wildlife and the local environment A single location or area may have one (1) or many purposes for weed management. Prescribe Treatment Record and Document Efforts Define Objective Monitor for Success Continue Adaptive Management 2.2 Weed Management Goals Caerus will manage weed infestations accordingly, based upon the expected outcome or goal of the treatment. The weed management goal is defined by the target specie(s) and the desired management level. Target specie(s) may include: • Annual, non-listed species • State Listed Noxious weeds • Native species that are not deemed desirable by the land owner/manager The desired weed management levels that Caerus defines are: • Prevention • Eradication • Containment • Reduction • Maintenance 2.2.1 Prevention ~Prevention refers to the act of avoiding the introduction of a target species to an area that is currently free of the species. Caerus attempts to utilize preventative weed control measures first to avoid the introduction of new species and to reduce the continued spread and/or vigor of existing infestations. Preventative measures include: • washing of machinery between job-sites where isolated weed species are identified (see Section 3) • quarantine of livestock being moved onto Caerus managed properties, when the risk of spreading new species is known (see Section 3) • treatment of existing infestations prior to ground disturbance to reduce spread and vigor and (see Section 4) • utilization of non-selective, pre-emergent herbicides to prevent the establishment of unwanted vegetation in industrial areas (see Section 4) 2.2.2 Eradication ~Eradication refers to the act of completely removing an infestation of a target species from a designated area. Eradication is often not practical or attainable. Caerus may aim for eradication of a target species in areas where infestations are caught very early on, after introduction, and are therefore, relatively small in size and not widely distributed throughout the area. When treating for eradication, the field goal is to kill 100% of the plants in a given infestation. 2.2.3 Containment ~Containment refers to the act of treating an established weed infestation around the boundaries, so as to avoid the continued spread of the infestation. Containment is usually the best option when large landscapes or watersheds are very heavily infested to the point where regaining the lost areas would be impractical. Here, managing parties would set the goal to keep the target species from spreading beyond the current borders. When containment is the goal, resources are focused on treating the perimeter of the infested area and inward, to the distance that the target species would be expected to spread. The goal is to kill 100% of the weeds within a defined perimeter only. The infested areas within that perimeter may be left alone or managed with another management level goal. In other words, within the confinement boundary, the infestation may be treated for reduction, maintenance or be left untreated. 2.2.4 Reduction ~Reduction refers to the act of treating an established weed infestation with the goal of reducing the density and numbers of the target specie(s). The majority of Caerus treatments are done with the goal of reducing infestations. Reduction efforts aim to kill 80% of the weeds within a treatment area. 2.2.5 Maintenance ~Maintenance refers to the act of treating an established weed infestation with the goal of maintaining the density and size of the infestation. In addition to reduction, Caerus manages for maintenance quite often. Maintenance efforts aim to kill 70% of the weeds within a treatment area. 2.3 Defining a Weed Management Objective The following matrix may be utilized to establish, document, and communicate Weed Management Objectives: Resource Conservation Reclamation Support Aesthetics Visibility Fire Hazard Reduction bareground yellow toadflax knapweeds hoary cress biennial thistles houndstongue common mullein canada thistle misc. annuals P Prevention E Eradication C Containment R Reduction M Management Weed Management Purposes W e e d S p e c i e s Management Levels Legend Using the matrix above, choose the purposes and target species of a defined weed management area. Blanks have been provided for other entries. Specify the desired, practical Management Level in the appropriate boxes. 3. Define a Weed Management Area Considering the Weed Management Objective, Caerus will define, geographically, the Weed Management Area that would fall under the objective. 4. Prescribe a Treatment After the Weed Management Objective and Weed Management Area are defined, Caerus and/or Caerus-hired contractors will assess and prescribe any combination of the following post-emergent weed control methods: • Cultural (see Section 4.1) • Chemical (see Section 4.2) • Mechanical (see Section 4.3) • Biological (see Section 4.4) 4.1 Cultural Weed Management Caerus has modified their operating culture to consider the prevention of weed seed introduction, early detection/ rapid response (EDRR), rotation management, and grazing monitoring & livestock management where Caerus has authority. Caerus requires all Third-Party companies and contractors to clean dirt-moving equipment prior to mobilization into new areas, especially when equipment have been previously used in areas known to harbor infestations that do not currently exist in the new area of disturbance. Caerus emphasizes on EDRR by providing weed training opportunities annually. To support rapid response, Caerus contracts with weed abatement contractors who are on-call throughout the spring, summer and fall months. Environmental Field Coordinators also carry tools and instructions for mechanical weed removal, in the circumstance that a few, isolated weeds are approached during regular field activities. Caerus establishes treatment rotations on Caerus-managed properties to ensure that all known infestations that exist on undisturbed areas are controlled. By keeping weed infestations controlled on a landscape basis, the risk of spread onto disturbed areas is reduced. A rotation system ensures that the more remote infestations are treated just as much as the areas of high visibility. Due to the high level of livestock and wildlife in many of these remote areas, this cultural practice reduces the spread of weed seed by animal vectors. Lastly, where Caerus has authority, livestock grazing plans, pasture rotations, pasture monitoring and inventory plans are implemented to assess and minimize the impacts of grazing on desirable, competitive plant communities. 4.2 Chemical Management Caerus utilizes both pre-emergent and post-emergent chemical treatments for the control of non-listed and noxious weed species. Chemical means of weed control are the most commonly utilized weed management technique. The frequency of this treatment method is mostly attributed to the financial feasibility, speed and relative consistency in results associated with herbicide applications. In general, most Caerus sites are inventoried, monitored and sprayed a minimum of 1-4 times per year, based upon the accessibility and known infestation status of the site. With every visit, commercial pesticide applicators monitor previous treatments for effectiveness, inventory for new or surviving plants, and treat the site. Documentation of this event is recorded into Caerus’ Noxious Weed Management Database as reported on contractor invoices and daily pesticide application records (PARs). The first site visit and herbicide application are done in the early spring of the approaching growing season or in the fall of the previous year. Non-selective, residual herbicide applications are made as a safety precaution on active sites. This treatment type also prevents the prevalence and spread of annual weed infestations that are commonly observed on fresh and frequently disturbed sites. During this treatment, pesticide applicators inspect the location and surrounding areas for very young newly emerging weeds, or rosette “flushes” in the circumstance that the site is treated in the fall. The second site visit and treatment is done in spring to early summer. This post-emergent treatment is intended to target early perennials (hoary cress, primarily), biennial rosettes, and annual “obnoxious weeds” such as Russian thistle and kochia. Again, pesticide applicators will inventory the area for later maturing plant species such as Russian knapweed. During the third site visit, herbicide efficacy is monitored, and a mid -late summer inventory is conducted with intentions to spray late-bolting biennials and budding perennials; furthermore, mechanical removal of flowers and seed heads on biennial species (most commonly musk thistle) may also be done around this time. Lastly, on many sites, a late-summer to fall herbicide treatment may be applied on creeping perennials such as Canada thistle and Russian knapweed in order to best capture the opportunity for the use of translocated herbicides. Following this step, the non- selective, pre-emergent treatments described above will be used where applicable, and the cycle will start again. This treatment plan is highly site -dependent; thus, variations inevitably occur based upon individual site characteristics (i.e. elevation, soils, topography, moisture, etc.) and also upon the various label requirements and recommended target growth stages of the herbicides being used. 4.3 Mechanical Weed Management Second to chemical means of control, Caerus utilizes mechanical weed management on a frequent basis. Large-scale mowing or “brush-hogging” projects are primarily executed on reclaimed sites that support a desirable plant component, but which also support a significant, spatially-competitive weed community. Generally, these treatments target annual, non-listed weed types . Caerus makes a special effort to utilize mechanical weed management techniques in the early stages of reclamation, so as not to disturb newly establishing native and desirable plants. Additionally, Caerus will employ mechanical removal as a second resort when chemical weed control means are not an effective option, such as on dry roadsides or in areas where chemical resistance may be suspected. These treatments are typically goaled towards the removal of weeds when the growth stage of the target specie is not compatible with chemical control (i.e. removal of thistle seed heads following bolt and flower). Additionally, in the case of fuels reduction for safety purposes, mechanical control is preferred because it not only kills the plants but removes the biomass (fuel). Generally, mechanical weed removal is conducted during the late summer and early fall. 4.4 Biological Weed Management Caerus will consider the integration of biological weed control agents in highly infested landscapes that are not good candidates for chemical or mechanical control, alone, either ba sed upon topography, infestation size, spatial relativity to potentially impacted wildlife habitat or a combination of these factors. Informal monitoring will be conducted and recorded. 5. Record and Document Efforts Caerus utilizes standardized reporting, invoicing, and inspection processes that are all logged and documented. 6. Monitor for Success Caerus will continue to check and conduct ocular monitoring on all weed management projects. If deemed necessary, Caerus may utilize quantitative monitoring as well. 7. Continue Adaptive Management Caerus will review the objectives and how goals were met with field management personnel and contractors annually. Caerus will take lessons learned from these reviews and adjust goals and inputs, as needed. 8. Conclusion Due to the highly-fragmented, linear structure of many of the surfaces managed by Caerus, successful weed management proves to be challenging and dynamic. A great deal of communication and cooperation between landowners, county representatives, and federal government agencies is necessary to effectively manage weed infestations on a local, landscape basis. Caerus is committed to maintaining this communication and cooperative work. 18 Appendix G – BLM and Landowner Seed Mixture Tables 1/21/2015 iMonitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems SECOND EDITION Volume I: Core Methods by Jeffrey E. Herrick, Justin W. Van Zee, Sarah. E. McCord, Ericha M. Courtright, Jason W. Karl, and Laura M. Burkett USDA - ARS Jornada Experimental Range Las Cruces, New Mexico 1/21/2015 ii Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Printed January 2015 Publisher: USDA-ARS Jornada Experimental Range P.O. Box 30003, MSC 3JER, NMSU Las Cruces, New Mexico 88003-8003 http://jornada.nmsu.edu ISBN 0-9755552-0-0 Distributed by: The University of Arizona Press Tucson, Arizona, USA 800-426-3797 http://www.uapress.arizona.edu Cover photo: Randy Hayes 1/21/2015 iiiMonitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY BACKGROUND The Core Methods volume of the second edition provides a single, standard reference for the core methods which are part of the BLM Assessment, In- ventory, and Monitoring Strategy (AIM) and NRCS National Resources Inventory (NRI). This contin- ues a process of methods standardization that began in 1998, during the first NRI pilot, continued with the establishment of the NRI on non-federal range- lands in 2003, the publication of the first edition of this manual in 2005, and subsequent adoption of the core methods by the BLM through its national AIM strategy in 2011. The process used to select the core methods for AIM Strategy has been described elsewhere1,2. A similar, but less formal process, was used by the NRCS to select the same methods for the NRI. All of these efforts were stimulated by the 1994 National Academy of Sciences publication, “Rangeland Health”3 and the report by the Society for Range Management Task Group on Unity in Concepts and Terminology4. Development of this Core Methods volume was also significantly influenced by input from individu- als representing a number of universities, national 1 Toevs, G.R., J.W. Karl, J.J. Taylor, C.S. Spurrier, M. Karl, M.R. Bobo, and J.E. Herrick. 2011. Consistent Indicators and Methods and a Scalable Sample Design to Meet Assessment, Inventory, and Monitoring Information Needs Across Scales. Rangelands: 33(4):14-20. 2 Herrick, J.E., M.C. Duniway, D.A. Pyke, B.T. Bestelmeyer, S.A. Wills, J.W. Karl and K.M. Havstad. 2012. A Holistic Strategy for Adaptive Land Management. Journal of Soil and Water Conservation 67: 105A-113A. 3 National Research Council. 1994. Rangeland Health: New Ways to Classify, Inventory and Monitor Rangelands. National Academy Press. Washington, DC. 180 pp. 4 Task Group on Unity in Concepts and Terminology Committee Members. 1995. New Concepts for Assessment of Rangeland Condition. Journal of Range Management 48 (3):271–282. and international organizations, and U.S. federal agencies. The USFS, DoD, and NPS have provided particularly helpful input as we have attempted to align methods with those used by these organiza- tions, where possible, with the view to the eventual development of a national standard. A number of clarifications and minor adjustments were made to the methods to complete the standardization process. Those that have the potential to affect consistency with previously collected data are noted below. WHAT IS NEW IN THE 2ND EDITION? • The second edition reconciles minor methodological differences between the first edition, the NRCS NRI program and the BLM AIM Strategy in an effort to further standardize data collection methods among agencies. • Vegetation height, Species inventory, and Plant identification methods are new additions to Volume I. • Monitoring program design (Volume II, Chapters 1-8) is amended to reflect the NRCS Conservation Planning Process and the BLM AIM Strategy. • Plant density (formerly Belt transect) and Semi- quantitative methods are moved from Volume I to the Supplemental Methods section of Volume II. • Instructions on Establishing a monitoring plot, Plot characterization and Plot observations are enhanced and moved to Volume I. • A new chapter on Quality Assurance and Quality Control is included in Volume I. • Example transect length is now 25 m (75 ft) but transect length may vary by ecosystem and management objectives1. PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION 1/21/2015 iv Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY The monitoring approach and methods described here are the result of a collaboration that began in 1994. The effort was led by the USDA-Agricultural Research Service (ARS) Jornada Experimental Range (JER) in cooperation with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Office of Research and Development, the Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS), and the USDI-Bureau of Land Management (BLM). The development has been guided by suggestions from a large number of indi- viduals who represent landowners, government agen- cies, and environmental organizations in the United States, Mexico, Costa Rica, China, Mongolia, Kenya, Namibia, and Australia. New Mexico State University faculty in particular, have provided ongoing support and input. Funding to support research associated with the development and testing of these protocols has been provided by the USDA-ARS, USDA- NRCS, USDI-BLM, Holloman Air Force Base (AFB), Department of Defense (DoD) Legacy Resources Program, the U.S. EPA, and the National Science Foundation Long-Term Ecological Research program under Grant No. 12-35828. Any opinions, findings, and conclusions or recommendations expressed in this material are those of the author(s) and do not necessarily reflect the views of the National Science Foundation or any of the other organizations listed here. Countless reviewers, work- shop participants, students, and technicians have tested the methods described here. This input has been invaluable. 1This list does not necessarily imply endorsement by these organizations. This is Volume I of a two-part document. Volume II includes guidance on monitoring program design and interpretation, as well as additional methods. For updates, electronic copies of data sheets and a user- friendly Access database and field (touchscreen) data entry system, please visit the USDA-ARS Jornada Experimental Range website (http://jornada.nmsu.edu) and the Landscape Toolbox (http://www. landscapetoolbox.org). The manual and specific methods have been improved by suggestions from individuals who repre- sent the following organizations1: • USDI-BLM (Alaska, Arizona, Colorado, Idaho, Nevada, New Mexico, Utah, National Operations Center, Washington Office) • CATIE-Centro Agronómico Tropical de Investigación y Enseñanza (Costa Rica) • Cattle Growers (New Mexico) • CIAT-Centro de Investigación de Agricultura Tropical (Honduras) • Conservation Fund (New Mexico) • Department of Defense (California, New Mexico, Texas) • The Great Basin Institute • INIFAP-Instituto Nacional de Investigaciones Forestales, Agrícolas y Pecuarias (México) • Land EKG Inc. (Montana) • Mexican Protected Natural Areas (Chihuahua and Sonora, México) • The Nature Conservancy • Natural Resources Conservation Service (Arizona, Colorado, Florida, Kansas, Louisiana, New Mexico, Resource Assessment Division) • New Mexico State University • Peter Sundt Rangeland Consultants • The Quivira Coalition • Synergy Resource Solutions, Inc. • USDA Agricultural Research Service (Arizona, Colorado, Oregon) • USDA-NRCS Grazing Lands Technology Institute • USDA-NRCS Soil Quality Institute • USDA-NRCS National Soil Survey Center • U.S. Forest Service (Colorado, New Mexico) • U.S. Geological Survey, Biological Resources Division (Colorado, Utah) • U.S. National Park Service (California, Nevada, Utah) ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS 1/21/2015 vMonitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Acknowledgements ........................................................................................................iii Preface to the 2nd Edition ...............................................................................................v Introduction ...................................................................................................................1 How to Establish a Monitoring Program .......................................................................2 How to Establish Monitoring Plots ................................................................................6 Quality Assurance and Quality Control .........................................................................9 Plant Identification ......................................................................................................14 Plot Characterization ...................................................................................................16 Plot Observation ..........................................................................................................23 Core Methods • Photo points (for visual record of data) .................................................................25 • Line-point intercept (for cover and composition) ...................................................27 • Vegetation height (for vertical structure) ................................................................36 • Gap intercept (for size and distribution of exposed ground) ...................................41 • Soil stability test (for soil susceptibility to water erosion) ........................................47 • Species inventory (for biodiversity) ........................................................................55 Data Entry and Quality Control ..................................................................................58 Appendix A: Plot characterization helpful resources ....................................................61 Appendix B: Data Sheets ..............................................................................................63 • Equipment Checklist • Unknown Plant Record • QA and QC • Plot Characterization • Plot Observation • Photo Points • Line-point Intercept • Line-point Intercept with Height • Vegetation Height • Gap Intercept • Soil Stability • Species Inventory TABLE OF CONTENTS 1/21/2015 1Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY WHAT ARE CORE METHODS? Core methods generate indicators which represent the minimum information necessary to describe three key ecosystem attributes: soil and site stability, watershed function, and biotic integrity (Figure 1). Nearly everything we value about ecosystems depends on these attributes. These core methods can also be used to generate many additional indicators that directly inform multiple management objectives, such as maintaining wildlife habitat, biodiversity conservation, producing forage, and supporting watershed health. Modifications to the core methods are discouraged as they limit the ability to combine and compare datasets, and thus describe ecosystem attributes at multiple scales. WHAT ARE SUPPLEMENTAL METHODS? Supplemental methods, such as those described in Volume II, Chapters 9-19, may be included when the core methods are insufficient to inform a particu- lar management objective. These additional methods are not intended to replace the core methods. Instead they provide additional information necessary to address specific management questions. Supplemental methods in conjunction with the core methods allow these data to be used for multiple management objectives by providing basic ecosystem attribute information while also meeting local monitoring needs. Figure 1. The three key ecosystem attributes which are described by monitoring ecosystems using the core methods (adapted from Toevs et al. 2011, reprinted with permission). CORE METHODS (VOLUME I)INDICATORS Line-point intercept with plot-level species inventory • Bare ground • Vegetation composition • Non-native invasive plant species • Plant species of management concern Vegetation height • Vegetation height Gap intercept • Proportion of soil surface in large intercanopy gaps Soil stability • Soil aggregate stability Multiple core methods Integrated/modeled indicators• Susceptibility to wind and water erosion • Wildlife habitat structure SUPPLEMENTAL METHODS (VOLUME II) Compaction test • Soil compaction Infiltration • Soil infiltration capacity Plant production • Total annual production Species richness (modified Whitaker method)• Biodiversity Plant density • Non-native invasive plant species • Plant density • Plant species of management concern Vegetation structure • Visual obstruction Tree density • Structure diversity • Woody biomass Riparian vegetation • Riparian vegetation composition Channel/gully profiles • Channel shape Biotic Integrity Hydrologic Function Soil and Site Stability Vegetation grasses, forbs shrubs, trees Wildlife vertebrates invertebrates Soil Resources mineral nutrients, water organic matter, biota Soil-Plant-Water Interface plant litter, soil structure biological crusts Watershed hydrologic function riparian vegetation Soil Resources INTRODUCTION 1/21/2015 2 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Figure 2. Field monitoring measurement using Line-point intercept in Mongolia. Core Methods is the only volume needed if all of the following are “true.” CRITERIA TRUE FALSE IF FALSE, THEN SEE VOLUME II My management objectives are fairly well described. Chapter 1 I already know where I want to monitor. Chapter 3 I already know how frequently I want to monitor.Chapter 4 The core indicators will answer my monitoring questions.Chapter 4 The basic monitoring strategy sounds reasonable, and I am either not aware of compaction or other problems not covered by the core methods or I have decided not to monitor these problems. Chapter 4 I am comfortable with a standard number of measurements (page 5) that will allow me to document large changes but may miss smaller changes. Chapter 4 I am not planning to monitor riparian areas. Chapter 22 I already know how to interpret the indicators. Chapter 21* * For information about how to calculate additional indicators and interpret your results, please see Volume II, Chapters 20 and 21. IS THE CORE METHODS VOLUME ALL I NEED? Before collecting field monitoring measurements (Figure 2) it is important to specify why, where, how, at what frequency, and at what intensity you will monitor. The methods described in the Core Methods volume are part of Step 8 in implementing a moni- toring program (Figure 3). Describing the anticipat- ed data analysis and interpretation of the monitoring data will also inform the characteristics of the moni- toring program design. Volume II of this manual provides detailed guidance on monitoring program design, data analysis and interpretation. In some cases, you may need to refer to Volume II (see ques- tions below) before continuing to read the rest of the Core Methods volume. HOW TO ESTABLISH A MONITORING PROGRAM 1/21/2015 3Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Figure 3. Monitoring of core indicators program design, implementation and integration with management. For more detail on monitoring program design, see Volume II, Chapters 1-8. Step 10: Document management and disturbance; record short-term monitoring data (if applicable) Step 11: Repeat monitoring at pre-determined frequency and perform data QA & QC Step 12: Analyze, interpret, report, and use monitoring results to apply adaptive management First Year: Develop Monitoring Program First Year: Implement Monitoring Program Every Year: Maintain Program Every 1-10 Years*: Repeat Long-term Monitoring Step 4: a) Select and document supplemental monitoring methods; b) estimate sample sizes; c) set sampling frequency; d) develop implementation rules Step 8: Establish monitoring locations; collect data and perform QA; perform data QC Step 9: Evaluate baseline data and rene monitoring design and monitoring objectives as necessary *The frequency of repeat monitoring will vary by management objective. Typically, treatments (e.g., riparian restoration, post-re rehabilitation) involving relatively rapid responses or where more frequent data may inform adaptive management (e.g., management changes in more mesic environments) require monitoring frequencies of less than once every 5 years. For more long-term management objectives (e.g., grazing management) and in arid environments where responses to management changes are slow to occur, monitoring frequencies of 8-10 years are usually sucient. Step 6: Apply stratication and select statistically valid monitoring locations Step 5: Collect and evaluate pilot data to determine sampling suciency and the validity of the strata Step 7: Develop QA & QC procedures and data management plans Step 1: Develop management objectives; select additional ecosystem attributes & indicators to monitor Step 2: Set the study area and reporting units; develop monitoring objectives Step 3: Select criteria for stratifying study area into similar land areas (if required). First Year: Design Monitoring Program How to Establish a Monitoring Program 1/21/2015 4 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY MEMBERS OF A MONITORING TEAM (ONE INDIVIDUAL MAY HAVE MULTIPLE ROLES) ROLE RESPONSIBILITY Land Manager • Develop management objectives and questions • Develop monitoring objectives • Select supplemental indicators to be monitored • Determine area to be monitored • Design project specifications • Select supplemental methods • Describe QA and QC protocols • Interpret results Field Crew Leader • Oversee crew training and calibration • Coordinate data collection • Record data in electronic database or onto paper data sheets • Ensure QA on each data sheet • Coordinate QC on each data sheet Recorder • Record data in electronic database or onto paper data sheets • Perform QA on each data sheets Observer • Perform data collection method • Ensure proper technique for each method Data Entry • Enter data from paper data sheets into a digital format (e.g., Access database, Excel spreadsheet) Data Error Checking • Check transcription from paper data sheets to digital format • Perform QC on each data sheet QUICK START MONITORING PROGRAM CHECKLIST* STEP DONE? Define monitoring objectives. Review the adequacy of the core indicators and add supplemental or contingent indicators as needed. Assemble background information (maps, photos, management history) and select general areas you would like to monitor. Select monitoring sites. This may involve preliminary evaluations of risk or opportunity for change. Define quality assurance and quality control objectives. Describe each monitoring site’s management, landscape, and soil characteristics. Establish permanent transects and begin monitoring. * For a more detailed checklist, see the Introduction of Volume II, Section I. How to Establish a Monitoring Program 1/21/2015 5Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Photos Canopy and basal gap interceptLine-point intercept Soil stability test * No. = Total number needed for three 25 m transects once the transects are established.** Total person hours for a team of two people. Estimates are based on averages for an experienced team working in a variety of dryland plant communities. Time requirements may vary outside stated ranges due to factors such as crew experience and complexity of the plant community. One person can complete all methods, but we have found it most efficient to have a data recorder and an observer (except for Soil stability and Species inventory). ESTIMATED TIME REQUIREMENTS FOR CORE METHODS MEASUREMENTS IN A THREE TRANSECT PLOT DESIGN METHOD–PAGE NO.*TIME** (HOURS) NO. OF PEOPLE INDICATORS GENERATED Plot characterization and observation (for record of soil and site characteristics), page 16 1 0.5-1.0 2 Plot location on the landscape Soil characteristics Qualitative record that can help interpret quantitative indicators Photos (for visual record of data), page 25 3 (1/line) 0.1-0.2 2 Qualitative record that can help interpret quantitative indicators Line-point intercept (for plant cover and composition), page 27 150 pts. (50/line)0.5-1.5 2 Foliar cover (%) Plant basal cover (%) Bare ground (%) Vegetation height (for vegetation structure), page 36 30 pts. (10/line)0.25-0.5 2 Vertical structure of vegetation Canopy gap intercept (for size and distribution of intercanopy gaps), page 41 3 lines 0.1-1.0 2 Proportion of line covered by large gaps between plant canopies Basal gap intercept (for size and distribution of basal gaps), page 42 3 lines 0.1-1.0 2 Proportion of line covered by large gaps between plant bases Soil stability test (for soil erodibility), page 47 18 samples (6/line) 0.4-0.6 1 Average surface stability: • total (for sheet erosion) • not under canopy (for raindrop impact) Species inventory (for biodiversity), page 55 1 inventory 0.25 1 Species richness estimate Invasive species presence/absence Rare plants presence/absence How to Establish a Monitoring Program 1/21/2015 6 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY It is important to carefully locate and describe each monitoring plot for two reasons. First, this information enables comparison of data collected on plots with similar soils, topography and climate – all of the which determine site potential. Second, this information helps to relocate the plot to continue monitoring that location over time. ESTABLISH AND PERMANENTLY MARK PLOTS AND TRANSECTS Before establishing the plot, verify that the site is suitable by checking it against the “rejection criteria” listed on the Monitoring Program Design Form I (Volume II, Chapter 1). Strict adherence to the rejec- tion criteria protocol is necessary to preserve the population monitored and to eliminate bias. Permanent plot and transect markers such as rebar stakes or rock cairns can be installed to assist with plot relocation. Do not use t-posts, which can be attractive to livestock and wildlife, which rub against them. In projects where permanent markers are not permitted, such as in the NRI, precise GPS coordi- nates alone will suffice. For more information on plot monumentation, see Elzinga et al. 20011. It is recommended that more than one transect be established at a plot. Multiple transects distribute observations across the plot, capture within-plot vari- ability, and are less sensitive to directional patterns than a single transect. Transect length may vary by project, but should be applied consistently at each plot. See Volume II for a more information on mod- ifying transect length and other plot measurements. 1 Elzinga, C.L., D.W. Salzer, J.W. Willoughby and J.P. Gibbs. 2001. Monitoring Plant and Animal Populations, Blackwell Publishing. 368 pp. HOW TO ESTABLISH A TRANSECT 1. Pull out the tape and anchor each end with a steel stake (Figure 4). Rules 1.1 Keep measuring tape taut and straight. 1.2 Keep measuring tape as close to the ground as possible (thread under shrubs using a steel stake or PVC pipe with a carabiner as a “nee- dle”), but not so close that it disturbs the soil surface or affects the natural way the vegeta- tion stands below the tape. 1.3 If necessary, reverse-string the tape by anchor- ing the reel at the endpoint of the transect and working back towards the “0” start point of the transect, while a second person guides the person stringing the tape in a straight line through shrubs and other vegetation. This is the most efficient way to string a straight tape in shrubby areas. Figure 4. Transect line pulled straight and taut. UNITS Both English and metric units are included for each measurement. For simplicity, many of these conversions are approximate. For example, the rough equivalent for a 25 m line is listed as 75 ft instead of 84 ft. This is because it is easier to select 50 points along a 75 ft transect (every 1.5 ft). Note that while metric units are preferred and in some cases required (BLM AIM), in NRI English units are used. For precise conversions, please see Volume II, Appendix B. HOW TO ESTABLISH A MONITORING PLOT 1/21/2015 7Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY MULTIPLE TRANSECT PLOT DESIGNS 2. Spoke design (Figure 5a). Rules 2.1 Place a permanent stake into the ground at the center of the monitoring plot. This stake will also serve as the camera point (Photos, page 25). 2.2 Starting with 0 degrees or a randomly selected azimuth (compass direction: 0° to 359°), ex- tend a tape in the azimuth direction to a dis- tance of 5 m (15 ft) further than the length of the transect. Install a stake at the 5 m mark. This will serve as the 0 m end of your transect, because the transect begins 5 m from the cen- ter point. 2.3 Anchor the far end of the transect with a stake. 2.4 Repeat transect establishment at regular intervals in a circle around the plot. The inter- val depends on the number of transects. Many monitoring programs use three transects, with 1200 between each transect. 3. Intersecting transect design (NRI) (Figure 5b). Rules 3.1 For instructions on establishing an NRI in- tersecting transect plot, see the NRI Grazing Land On-Site Data Collection Handbook of Instructions (http://www.nrisurvey.org/nrcs/ Grazingland/2014/instructions/instruction. htm). The NRI instructions are updated an- nually. Substitute “2014” for the current year when visiting this handbook. 3.2 Two 50 m (150 ft) transects are laid out per- pendicular to each other. The tapes should in- tersect at the 25 m (75 ft) mark (see the Plot Design box). 3.3 Be careful to minimize trampling inside the plot, as the plot center is also part of the data collection area. 3.4 When collecting Line-point intercept measure- ments on a crossed-transect design, make sure that the point at 25 m (75 ft), where the tran- sects meet, is only included once in indicator calculations. 4. Parallel transect design (Figure 5c). Rules 4.1 Identify the azimuth of the slope or a randomly selected azimuth. 4.2 Extend the tape in the azimuth direction to es- tablish a base transect. 4.3 Systematically place transects perpendicular to the base transect. 4.4 Anchor both ends of each transect with a stake. SINGLE TRANSECT PLOT DESIGNS 5. Single transect upland design (Figure 5d). Rules 5.1 Anchor and mark the 0 m end of the transect. 5.2 Using a randomly selected azimuth (compass direction: 0° to 359°), extend the tape in the azimuth direction to establish the transect. 5.3 Anchor the far end of the transect with a stake. 6. Single transect linear feature (e.g., stream, pipe- line, road) design (Figure 5e). Rules 6.1 Anchor and mark the 0 m end of the transect. Ensure the 0 m end is placed such that the transect will cross the linear feature perpen- dicular to the feature, and the 0 m end is 5 m beyond the feature. 6.2 Extend the tape perpendicular to the linear fea- ture. 6.3 Anchor the far end of the transect with a stake. How to Establish a Monitoring Plot 1/21/2015 8 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY PLOT DESIGNS TRANSECT LAYOUT DESCRIPTION (a) Spoke Design 25 m spoke design covers ~0.3-hectare (~0.7 acres). 50 m (~75 ft) spoke design covers a 1 hectare (~2.35 acres) area. Transects begin 5 m (15 ft) from the plot’s center to focus trampling around center stake and minimize disturbance effects on transects. (b) Intersecting Design The NRI intersecting transect design covers ~0.2 hectares (~0.4 acres). Two 50 m (150 ft) transects intersect at the 25 m (75 ft) mark at plot center. The transect arms are oriented 45 degrees in both directions from magnetic north. (c) Parallel Transect Design Standard transect length is 25 m (75 ft). Parallel transects are evenly spaced. Transects may run perpendicular to the slope or perpendicular to a randomly selected azimuth. (d) Single Transect Design Standard transect length is 25 m (75 ft); a multiple single transect design is often used to maximize replication at landscape scale. (e) Linear Feature Design (e.g., riparian) Standard transect length is 25 m (75 ft); a multiple single transect design is often used to maximize replication at landscape scale. Length may vary depending on linear feature size, extent, or potential impact. QUALITY ASSURANCE ☐Avoid disturbing vegetation and the soil surface in the transect area. ☐Keep the transect tape as close to the ground as possible by threading the tape under vegetation yet do not disturb the soil surface while doing so. ☐If needed, use additional stakes at various intervals to secure the tape close to the ground, especially where wind is a consideration. ☐GPS coordinates for the plot location and transect start points (where required) are recorded on the Plot Characterization Data Sheet. ☐Always walk on the same side of the transect tape. How to Establish Monitoring Plots Figure 5. Example plot layout designs. Plot layouts may be adjusted to meet monitoring objectives so long as the number of measurements taken remains the same. 1/21/2015 9Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY The power of monitoring data cannot be over- stated. As data are applied to land management deci- sions and research questions, the utility of the data are amplified. A data error in the field can be com- pounded as analysis and interpretation of the data progresses, and can ultimately affect results and con- clusions. Conversely, high quality data will be strengthened by strict adherence to protocols and procedures to minimize sampling error. For this rea- son, correct and consistent technique among field observers and careful attention of data recorders is critical. A carefully planned sequence of quality assurance and quality control steps will ensure the integrity and accuracy of the data. TYPES OF ERROR IN MONITORING Several types of data errors can occur in a moni- toring project. Sampling error occurs when your estimate of an indicator is different than the actual (true) value because you have sampled only a portion of the entire population. Good sample design (see Volume II, Chapter 5) ensures that sampling errors only affect the precision of the estimate without affecting its accuracy (i.e., no bias). Good sample design also allows you to calculate and minimize sampling error. Measurement error is a type of non- sampling error that occurs when the value recorded is different than the true value for an object being observed. This could be because the object was mea- sured incorrectly by the observer or because the object was recorded incorrectly by the data recorder. Measurement errors can affect both precision and accuracy, resulting in biased results. This section dis- cusses minimizing measurement errors in monitoring data. WHAT ARE QA AND QC? Quality assurance (QA) and quality control (QC) are processes of ensuring data integrity and minimiz- ing measurement errors throughout the monitoring process, from planning your monitoring objectives to data collection to data analysis and interpretation. Quality assurance is a proactive process employed to maintain data integrity. Training, calibration, proper technique, standardized data organization, on-plot data review, readjustments in response to data review, and communication between the data manager and data gatherers are all components of quality assurance. Quality assurance is a continuous effort to prevent, detect, and correct measurement errors throughout the monitoring project. Quality control is a reactive process to detect mea- surement errors after the data collection process is complete. Quality control will also determine com- pliance with applicable standards and can be project or protocol specific. Users of monitoring data pre- determine the amount of variability or error they are willing to accept for certain measurements. A prop- erly designed QC protocol describes the level of error in a data set. Defects detected in the data set are often resolved by deleting data that are not suitable for analysis. Data corrections or replacements are rare and must be substantiated by other data sources. Good habits in QA will minimize the effort and data deletion associated with QC. WHERE DO QA AND QC OCCUR? Quality assurance takes place in a unique way at nearly every step of the project: planning, training, calibration, data collection, data compilation, and data review. Quality control takes place in the office or at a time and place removed from the data collection event. QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL Figure 6. Careful establishment of a plot is one step in the quality assurance process. 1/21/2015 10 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY WHEN DO QA AND QC OCCUR? Quality assurance is an all-encompassing process from the beginning of the monitoring project until its conclusion. Daily QA to clean data and correct technique takes place in the field. Errors detected during QA are corrected immediately as you are in the same time and place as the actual plot conditions. Quality control occurs after all field decisions (good and bad) have taken place. Error corrections during QC are limited because plots cannot be revis- ited with the exact conditions that occurred during data collection. WHO IS RESPONSIBLE FOR QA AND QC? Everyone involved in a monitoring project is responsible for a portion of QA and QC (see page 4). The land manager provides clear communication of the monitoring objectives and methods so that data are collected appropriately. The land manager pro- vides expert-level training and support, organization, calibration and justification of personnel expertise, field observer oversight, and quality control checks. Since QC is an inspecting/checking process, it can be performed by anyone, as long as they know the limits and parameters of the data they are checking. Sometimes a brief training session is necessary for QC personnel, so they know how to identify errors. Once identified, the data manager makes the deci- sion what to do next. If an error is unexplainable, this is called nonconformity, and the data are deleted. Occasionally, an investigation can help decipher an error, and the data can be retained. Data recorders and observers are in the most pow- erful position to ensure data integrity, as they are the plot experts. It is the role of the field team to record an accurate portrayal of the plot for the land man- ager. A well-defined QA plan is the most effective way for the data gatherer to ensure the data set is utilized to its potential. ARE QA AND QC REQUIRED? Yes. QA and QC are an integral part of monitor- ing to ensure data consistency and accuracy. QUALITY ASSURANCE ACTIVITIES THROUGHOUT THE DATA COLLECTION PROCESS FREQUENCY ACTIVITY Continuously • Practice proper technique. • Maintain data organization. • Document errors. • Keep the ecological context in mind. • Solicit expert advice if needed. • Back up your data. Daily • Review data sheets for completeness and correctness. If errors are found, return to the plot to collect the correct data. • Upload and name photos. • Identify unknown plant species. • Back up your data after corrections have been made. Weekly • Review data for completeness and errors with an ecosystem expert or team leader. • Identify any remaining unknown plant species. • Back up your data. Monthly AND upon change to a new ecosystem • Calibrate data gatherers for each method in the protocol. • Review data for completeness and errors with an ecosystem expert or team leader. • Back up your data. Quality Assurance and Quality Control 1/21/2015 11Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY ARE QA AND QC THE SAME FOR EACH METHOD AND PROJECT? No. The general principles of QA and QC apply throughout the project, but practical QA activities will vary by method. For each method in this manual, quality assurance methods are also explained. See page 57 for a description of QC procedures in more detail. STANDARD METHODS (RULE SET) 1. Begin project metadata (see Volume II). Rules 1.1 Define monitoring objectives and project area. 1.2 Determine indicators and appropriate data col- lection methods. 1.3 Document sample design. 1.4 Determine the acceptable range of error for data collection. This includes the maximum range of variation permissible in the GPS co- ordinates and crew calibration. 1.5 Determine plot rejection criteria. 1.6 Describe project plot layout. Be sure to docu- ment the required number, length, and loca- tion of transects within the plot. 2. Provide training to field data collection crews. Rules 2.1 Train crews in the appropriate data collection methods as described in this manual and de- veloped in Step 1. 2.2 Utilize expert trainers and online method videos (http://jornada.nmsu.edu/monit- assess/training) to provide consistent and correct training. 2.3 Provide QA procedure training to all field crews. 3. Calibrate all field crews. Rules 3.1 Lay out a measuring tape exactly as you would for a monitoring transect. 3.2 Select an area with a diverse assortment of fea- tures that will represent the ecosystem being monitored. Consider the vegetation diversity, soil surface features, and heterogeneity. 3.3 Each observer collects data along the same transect, following the method rules and QA for each method. 3.4 Be especially careful not to move the transect tape for these exercises. An immobile tape will help reflect the data gatherer's effort, rather than variability due to a moving tape. 3.5 Encourage data gatherers to step lightly around the transect tape, otherwise the area around it will be heavily trampled. 3.6 Calculate the indicator summaries. It may be helpful to record results into a table (Tables 2, 3, and 4). 3.7 Assess the range of variation among data gath- erers (Table 1). Is it acceptable? 3.8 If data gatherers are not within the acceptable range of variation, examine the data sheets to identify where discrepancies occur. Walk the transect as a group and note unique and problematic features along the line. Discuss the methodology, quality assurance rules and repeat Steps 3.3-3.7. 4. Quality Assurance and Quality Control CALIBRATION Calibration of data gatherers is an integral component of the quality assurance process. Calibration ensures that a data gatherer collects data accurately each time and that data are collected consistently with other data gatherers, including the training expert. Calibration of all data gatherers occurs immediately following training, each time data collection begins in a new ecosystem, and at regular intervals throughout the monitoring season. During each calibration, the expert data collector or trainer observes each data gatherer for proper technique and corrects methodological problems immediately. 1/21/2015 12 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY METHOD CALIBRATION CRITERIA Line-point intercept Gap intercept All observers must be within 10% absolute of one another for each indicator. For example, if calculated indicators are 23%, 24.5%, 30.5%, and 32%, then calibration criteria have been met. However if calculated indicators are 89%, 79%, 84%, and 90%, then calibration criteria have not been met. Vegetation height Count the number of vegetation heights in each category. The number of plant heights in each category should not differ by more than 2. Species inventory The number of species recorded by each observer should differ by no more than 2 species Table 1. Calibration criteria for each field method that can be calibrated. Quality Assurance and Quality Control 5. Begin data collection. Rules 5.1 Follow data collection methods completely and consistently. 5.2 Review data sheets for completeness and cor- rectness. If errors are identified, return to the plot to collect the correct data. 5.3 Back up your data early and often. 6. Recalibrate field crew. Rules 6.1 Recalibrate crews once per month or upon transitioning to data collection in a new eco- system, whichever comes first. 6.2 Follow calibration methods described in Step 3. 7. Archive calibration data. 8. Complete data collection. 9. Review data for completeness and correctness. If errors are identified, return to the plot to collect the correct data. 10. If data were collected on paper data sheets, enter data into a digital format (e.g., Access database or Excel spreadsheets). See page 58 for data entry methods. 11. Conduct QC, page 58. 12. Complete project metadata. Rules 12.1 Note which plots were sampled. 12.2 Note which plots were visited but rejected, and list the reason(s) for plot rejections. 12.3 Note which plots were never visited. 1/21/2015 13Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY LINE-POINT INTERCEPT CALIBRATION Name % Foliar Cover % Bare Ground % Basal Cover % Litter Cover % Rock Fragments Alan 10 8 2 34 3 Marla 27 12 4 28 5 Roberta 24 9 4 30 6 James 22 11 6 9 1 Min 10 8 2 9 1 Max 27 12 6 34 6 Table 2. Example data from a Line-point intercept calibration. Orange highlights designate indicators that need to be discussed among the observers before recalibration. GAP INTERCEPT CALIBRATION Name # of gaps 25-50 cm % of line gaps 25-50 cm # of gaps 51-100 cm % of line gaps 51-100 cm # of gaps 101-200 cm % of line gaps 101-200 cm # of gaps >200 cm % of line gaps >200 cm Alan 603 12.1 1454 29.1 508 10.2 0 0 Marla 786 15.7 1214 24.3 1058 21.2 0 0 Roberta 865 18.3 1019 20.4 529 10.6 0 0 James 1067 23.6 1342 22.9 630 11.4 0 0 Min 603 12.1 1019 20.4 508 10.2 0 0 Max 1067 23.6 1454 29.1 1058 21.2 0 0 Table 3. Example of a calibration indicators table for Gap intercept. Orange highlights designate indicators that need to be discussed among the observers before recalibration. VEGETATION HEIGHT CALIBRATION Name Total Woody Heights Total Herbaceous Heights 0 to 50 cm 50 cm to 2 m 2 to 5 m > 5 m 0 to 50 cm 50 cm to 2 m 2 to 5 m > 5 m Alan 4 2 4 N/A 9 1 N/A N/A Marla 3 6 1 N/A 9 1 N/A N/A Roberta 4 4 2 N/A 8 2 N/A N/A James 5 2 3 N/A 10 0 N/A N/A Min 3 2 1 N/A 8 0 N/A N/A Max 5 6 4 N/A 10 2 N/A N/A Table 4. Example of a calibration indicators table for Vegetation height. Orange highlights designate indicators that need to be discussed among the observers before recalibration. Quality Assurance and Quality Control 1/21/2015 14 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY PLANT IDENTIFICATION Species identification is critical to successfully completing the Line-point intercept, Vegetation height, and Species inventory methods. Whenever possible, plants are identified to species in the field. Many regions have detailed field guides, plant keys, and identification resources available in both paper and digital formats. If you are unable to identify a plant in the field, collect a plant specimen for later identification. Some projects and areas have regula- tions that govern where and how specimens are col- lected. Consult with the landowner to confirm that specimen collection is permissible. Where herbari- um-level specimen collection is not required, the simple plant collection procedure below can be fol- lowed to preserve your unknown plant specimen until it is identified. Once a specimen is identified, it may be discarded, if preferred. MATERIALS • Paper for mounting (thick paper is best, but typing paper will work, size 8.5" x 11", or A4) • Pencil • Paper for drying during pressing (newspapers are best) • Clear tape • Camera • Plant press, two heavy books, or small bricks • Binder with removable plastic sleeves • Plant ID card labels (optional) • Unknown Plant Tracking Sheet (Appendix B) STANDARD METHOD (RULE SET) WHERE FIELD IDENTIFICATION IS NOT POSSIBLE 1. Assign an unknown plant ID number. Rules 1.1 If genus is known, but not species, use either the PLANTS Database genus code (in the U.S., http://plants.usda.gov) or record an un- known plant code and note the genus at the bottom of the data sheet. 1.2 If genus and species are unknown, use the following codes, adding sequential numbers as necessary: AF# = Annual forb (also includes biennials) PF# = Perennial forb AG# = Annual graminoid PG# = Perennial graminoid SH# = Shrub TR# = Tree 2. Take photographs of the plant. Rules 2.1 Capture diagnostic features of the plant in situ. 2.2 Use the "macro" feature of the camera to cap- ture details. 2.3 Include a photo ID card for scale and record the plant ID number on the card. 2.4 For photos where using an ID card is not prac- tical, record the digital camera's default photo number on a separate data sheet or field note- book so photos can be linked to plants later. GENERAL INFORMATION Unknown Plant ID:Date: Plot Name :Collector: Photo number(s): SPECIMEN INFORMATION Tree / Shrub / Sub-shrub / Forb / Grass / Cactus / Succulent (circle)Woody / Herbaceous (circle) Approximate height : cm / in / ft / m Abundance: Flowers? (Y/N)Seeds? (Y/N) General Description: EXAMPLE OF AN UNKNOWN PLANT ID CARD Table 5. A simple plant ID card can guide the plant identification process. Project protocols will determine the information collected for each unknown plant species. 1/21/2015 15Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Plant Identification 6. Optional: Record additional plot and species information (see Table 5). Rules 6.1 Name of collector, date, plot name. 6.2 Photo number(s). 6.3 Brief description of the plant--growth habit, height, reproductive parts, variation noted between plants, abundance on the plot, color and location relative to other plant species (e.g., under a shrub, in a rocky area). 6.4 Plant family or genus (if known). 7. Store specimens in plastic sleeves inside a binder. This is a convenient way to aggregate unknown plants for future identification. Binders are portable and easy to take to the field. In humid environments, it is possible to preserve the dry plant specimens in sealable clear plastic bags or with lamination to protect the specimens from moisture damage. Add dessicant packages to the bags if necessary. 8. Create a master list of unknown plants to keep track of them between plots. 9. Identify the plant with the assistance of dichot- omous keys, a botanist, or websites (e.g., http:// plants.usda.gov in the U.S.) as resources. 10. Once a plant is identified, replace the unknown codes with the species code on the Line-point intercept, Vegetation height, and Species in- ventory data sheets. If using paper, be sure to update both paper and digital versions of data sheets. 3. Collect the plant. Rules 3.1 Ensure that you have the land owner’s permis- sion, and the laws allow you to collect speci- mens. Be aware of rare plants and do not col- lect those species. 3.2 Finish all measurements on the plot before col- lecting specimens. 3.3 If possible, collect a specimen of the unknown plant species from outside the plot. 3.4 If the plant species can only be found inside the plot, collect a sample only if more than 10 individuals exist on the plot. 3.5 Collect as many features of the unknown specimen as possible: root, stems, branching, leaves, flowers, fruits, and seeds. 4. Place the plant between several pieces of news- paper. The layers of paper will absorb moisture and allow quicker drying. Prevent leaves, stems and flowers from folding back onto themselves or from laying on top of other parts of the spec- imen. Spread the plant out as much as possible. Rules 4.1 Place the prepared plant in a press or between 2 heavy books, small bricks, or flat surfaces and allow to air-dry. 4.2 Check periodically that drying is occurring and mold is not forming on the plant. Before a plant is completely dried and while it is still malleable, it can be repositioned on the drying paper if necessary. 4.3 Change out damp newspaper as necessary. 5. After the plant has completely dried, move it from the press or drying paper and position it on a piece of mounting paper (Figure 5). Rules 5.1 Tape the plant down securely in discrete places so that diagnostic features are visible (e.g., leaves, flowers, stems). It is acceptable to cut the plant to preserve these features. 5.2 Attach a label to a corner of the paper. In- clude the plot name, unknown plant ID number, and the date on the label. Figure 7. Example of a pressed plant specimen. 1/21/2015 16 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY (WHEN BASELINE DATA ARE COLLECTED) Basic information describing locations where monitoring data are collected must be recorded in order for data to be compared or combined with data from other locations. Plot characterization informa- tion includes features of the plot that will not change between visits, and therefore only needs to be com- pleted upon plot establishment. Features of the plot that may change (e.g., precipitation information, erosion, management use) are recorded during each visit using the Plot Observation Data Sheet (Appendix B). All of this information is used to inform data analysis and interpretation. Plot characterization and observations are com- pleted in three basic stages: (1) prior to field data collection, (2) at the plot, and (3) as part of the qual- ity control process. Plot climate and information about known disturbances are recorded before visit- ing the plot. While at a plot, GPS locations, soils, land use, and observed disturbance are described. Standard locations and distinctive elements of the plot are photographed. After data collection, plot characterization and observations are reviewed for clarity, completeness and accuracy. MATERIALS • Electronic device for paperless data collection (preferred) OR clipboard, Plot Characterization Data Sheet (Appendix B) and pencil(s) • GPS • Compass • High resolution camera (at least 5 megapixel resolution; higher resolution may be required if photos will be used for quantitative analysis) • Photo ID board (chalk or whiteboard) or Photo ID card (Appendix B) on a clipboard • Thick dry-erase marking pen • Measuring tape • Clinometer • Shovel (sharpshooter or tile spade preferred) • 10 cm (~4 in) or larger diameter, 2 mm sieve with pan or receptacle tray • Spray bottle with clean water • Small hand towel • Knife or trowel with a blade ~10 cm (~4 in) long (dulled to prevent injury) • 500 ml plastic measuring cup with volume markings • 1 N or 1 M HCl (hydrochloric acid) in a dropper bottle (optional) • Munsell soil color chart or mobile phone soil color app (optional) • Ecological site descriptions and soil map unit descriptions (where available) Table 6. Example of the general plot information and location section from the Plot Characterization Data Sheet. Site: Little Mesa Pasture Ownership: BLM Date: 4/27/2013 Plot ID: LM 25-1 Observer(s): Simon Montero, Johanna Reiter, Mariko Cinta GPS Coordinate System: Decimal degrees Datum : NAD83 Zone (if applicable): NA Elevation ☐ m ☐ ft Latitude Longitude Plot Center 41.125180 -112.558853 1349 Transect Azimuth Length ☐ m ☐ ft Transect Start Aspect Latitude Longitude 1 0 25 41.125180 -112.558853 420 2 120 25 41.125180 -112.558853 Slope (%) 3 240 25 41.125180 -112.558853 17% PLOT CHARACTERIZATION 1/21/2015 17Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY STANDARD METHODS (RULE SET) 1. Record general plot information (Tables 6 and 7). Rules 1.1 Record site or management unit and land own- ership. 1.2 Record plot name (Plot ID). Once a plot name is established it is permanent and can never be changed. 1.3 Record plot establishment and/or visit date and the plot observer(s). 1.4 Describe layout of the plot including number, length and orientation of transects. Draw a rough plot sketch to approximate scale. Label the start and end of each transect. Indicate slope and aspect, and draw prominent land- scape features, human and animal impacts. 2. Describe the location of the plots (Tables 6 and 7). Rules 2.1 Record GPS coordinates of plot center (re- quired) and transect starts (optional), includ- ing coordinate system and datum. Verify that data are complete and accurate, and make sure to allow the GPS enough time to maximize its accuracy by locating as many satellites as possible. It is also a good idea to mark the plot center with a GPS waypoint to upload to a computer at a later date. 2.2 Record the elevation of the plot using the GPS elevation in the field (preferred), or based on a digital elevation model (DEM) prior to visit- ing the plot. 2.3 Describe travel directions to the plot, including both driving and walking parts of the journey. Be complete and concise, and note landmarks, permanent features, road names, landowner- ship issues, and segment distances. Table 7. Example of the general plot information and location section from the Plot Characterization Data Sheet. Draw the plot (include transect locations relative to plot center, soil pit location, roads, power lines, etc.). Draw on back of sheet if needed: Directions to the plot (or location where GPS track log is stored): From the West Springs field office, take State Route 23 west toward Delbourne. Take the Gradin Dam Exit and turn left at the stop sign. After 1.75 km turn left, cross the cattle guard and turn right onto County Road 17. Drive 7.5 km and turn left on Ranch Road. Travel 14.3 km. Park on the side of the road, and hike west 1 km to the plot center. *GPS coordinates and track log are stored on the central server in the "Landscape Monitoring" folder, subfolder "Little Mesa", subfolder "Plot Locations". File name "Little_Mesa_25-1.dbf". plot center soil pit Ranch Roadrailroad tracksLittle Mesa Pasture water trough horse trail 1 23 25 m Plot Characterization 1/21/2015 18 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY (a) Down slope shape (vertical) (b) Across slope shape (horizontal) linear convex concave linear convex concave Vertical (Down) Slope Shape ☐Convex ☐Concave ☐Linear \ Horizontal (Across) Slope Shape ☐Convex ) ☐Concave ( ☐Linear))\3. Describe the topography of the plot (Tables 6 and 8). Rules - For all 3 of these rules, consider the entire area encompassed by the transects, plus an area several meters (~25 m) outside that area. This whole area is considered one unit (the plot). Do not be overly concerned with microtopographical variation within the plot. Those can be recorded in the plot sketch and notes. 3.1 Record the vertical (down slope) and horizon- tal (across slope) shape (linear, concave, or convex) (Figure 8, Table 8). Always record vertical shape first in the coding system, then horizontal shape. 3.2 Record the slope (in percent) in the direction that overland water would flow through the plot center (Table 6). Slope can be determined using a clinometer. 3.3 Record the aspect of the slope (facing downslope) in degrees (e.g., 1800) based on magnetic north (Table 6). Correct for declina- tion in the office if necessary. Table 8. Example of the topography section from the Plot Characterization Data Sheet. Figure 8. Slope shape walking down (vertically) the longest slope (a) and across (horizontally) the longest slope (b). Plot Characterization 1/21/2015 19Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY 4. Describe the landscape unit and position (hills/ mountains, alluvial fan, floodplain/basin, ter- race, flat/plain, playa, or dunes) (Figure 9, Ta- ble 9). Rules 4.1 If the plot is located on a hill/mountain, se- lect the appropriate hillslope profile position: summit, shoulder, or backslope (Figure 7). 4.2 If the plot is located on a terrace, indicate whether it is on the riser (fairly short, steep, linear slope that forms the sideslope of the terrace) or the tread (a broad, relatively level planar portion forming the top of the terrace that can extend laterally for great distances). 4.3 Use the following sources for more information: A. The Field Book for Describing and Sampling Soils, (http://soils.usda.gov/ technical/fieldbook/)(Schoeneberger et al. 2012) B. Landforms of the Basin and Range Province (Peterson 1981) C. Geomorphology of Soil Landscapes (Wysocki and Zanner 2003) D. National Soil Survey Handbook, Part 629, Glossary of Landform and Geologic Terms, (http://soils.usda.gov/technical/ handbook/detailedtoc.html#629) (USDA-NRCS 2003). 5. Dig a small, 50 cm (~1.5 ft) diameter soil pit. Rules 5.1 Decide on the appropriate location to describe the soil, avoiding any unusual, sensitive, or protected features on the site (e.g., rodent mounds, livestock disturbances, cultural or historical resources). Normally, the soil pit is located somewhere near the center of the plot, as it is intended to represent the whole plot. 5.2 Dig one small hole (2-3 shovel widths in diam- eter) with vertical sides to a depth of at least 70 cm (~30 in). Cut a clean face on one side, being careful to avoid disturbing the soil sur- face at the top of this one side of the pit. Do not step even a single time on that preserved side of the pit. If disturbed, simply shave off the face of the profile back to the point of no disturbance. 5.3 Position a tape measure along the profile depth, with the zero-mark of the tape at the top of the profile (i.e., the soil surface). Take a verti- cal photograph of the profile face created in step 6.2 (Figure 10). Hold the camera as low as possible in order to capture all of one side of the pit, in focus from surface to bottom. Ideally, the entire face is completely in the sun or shade, and the entire face is captured in one photo. If necessary, take two photos, one with and without flash. Figure 10 shows the type of photo that needs to be taken. Record the photo number on the data sheet. 6. Identify soil horizons. If soil horizon identifica- tion is not possible, use the following standard depths: 0-1 cm (0-0.5 in), 1-10 cm (0.5-4 in), 10-20 cm (4-8 in), 20-50 cm (8-20 in), and 50- 70 cm (20-28 in). Table 9. Example of the landscape unit/position section from the Plot Characterization Data Sheet. Plot Characterization LANDSCAPE UNIT/POSITION ☐ Hill/Mountain1 ☐ Summit2 ☐ Shoulder3 ☐ Backslope4 ☐ Alluvial Fan5 ☐ Terrace6 ☐ Tread7 ☐ Riser8 ☐ Floodplain/basin9 ☐ Flat/Plain10 ☐ Playa11 ☐ Dunes12 ☐ Other 1 5 6 9 10 11 12 2 3 4 7 8 1/21/2015 20 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPYtreadrisersummitshoulderbackslopeMountain/HillAlluvial fanTerraceFlood plain/BasinFlat/Low rolling plainPlayaDunes>100 m100 m to 10 km10 m to ~300 km100 m to ~3 km >1 km>300 m Nearly level sink or depression where water collects with no visible outletHill of loose granular material (sand), either barren and capable of movement from place to place, or stabilized by vegetation but retaining its shapeLow, outspread mass of loose materials and/or rock material deposited by water, commonly with gentle slopes, shaped like an open fan or a segment of a coneStep-like surface, bordering a valley floor or shoreline that represents the former position of a flood plain, lake or sea shore. Nearly level plain that borders a stream and is subject to inundation under flood-stage conditionsExtensive region of comparatively smooth, level and/or gently undulating landElevated area, usually with a summit area surrounded by bounding slopes and generally with steep sides, may occur as an isolated mass or in a rangeFigure 9. Generic landscape units (mountains/hills, alluvial fan, terrace, flood plain/basin, flat/low rolling plain, playa, dunes) and the relative landscape position for mountains/hills and terraces. The approximate scale of each landscape unit will vary based on local topography. Landscape unit definitions are adapted from the NRCS National Soil Survey Handbook (http://soils.usda.gov/technical/handbook).Plot Characterization 100 m to ~ 3 km 1/21/2015 21Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Figure 10. Example photo of a soil pit. Figure 11. Removing samples by horizon from the soil pit allows the observer to easily describe the color, texture, effervescence, and percent clay content for each horizon. Table 10. Effervescence classes. Reaction of 2 mm sieved soil to the addition of a few drops of 1 M HCl. EFFERVESCENCE CLASS CODE VISIBLE CRITERIA Non-effervescent NE No bubbles form. Very slightly effervescent VS Few bubbles form. Slightly effervescent SL Numerous bubbles form. Strongly effervescent ST Bubbles form a low foam. Violently effervescent VE Bubbles rapidly form a thick foam. 7. Describe the soil profile (Table 11). For each identified mineral horizon (or standard depth), determine and record the following properties: Rules 7.1 Horizon depth (starting from soil surface, which is zero cm(in)). 7.2 Rock fragment content: % volume by size class (i.e. % soil + % rock fragments = 100%). 7.3 Texture as determined by hand (Figure 11, Ap- pendix A). 7.4 Percent clay of each texture sample (horizon). 7.5 OEffervescence class (using 1 N or 1 M HCl) (Table 10). 7.6 Optional: Soil color using a Munsell soil color chart or mobile phone application. Specify if the soil color was taken using dry or moist soil. 7.7 Optional: Soil structure. 7.8 Any unusual features such as redoximorphic features (mottles), CaCO3 (caliche) nodules and coatings on fragments, concretions, ex- panding clays, salt accumulation, presence and type/size of roots, evidence of compac- tion, etc. Plot Characterization 1/21/2015 22 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Soil Horizon Depth ☐cm ☐in Rock fragment type & vol (%) Texture % Clay Eff. Color☐dry☐moist Structure Notes Gravel2-76 mm Cobbles76-250 mm Stones250-600 mm A 0-5 10 NA NA fine sandy loam 8 NE 10YR 6/2 granular Rock in Bq is tightly packed. Exposed cobble on soil surface is common around site, surface crust is weak. Root restrictive below 57 cm, very little soil between rocks Bw1 5-20 8 NA NA loam 10 NE 10YR62 sub-angular blocky Bw2 20-36 55 20 NA fine sandy loam 18 NE 10YR7/2 sub-angular blocky Bq 36-66 35 40 NA fine sandy loam 19 NE 10YR6/3 sub-angular blocky Bqk1 66-86 20 50 NA very fine sandy loam 21 NE 2.5YR 6/2 sub-angular blocky Table 11. Example soil pit description section of the Plot Characterization Data Sheet. The soil characteristics in "grey" are optional. 8. Use the information recorded on this form to identify the soil map unit component and eco- logical site or other ecological unit (e.g., USFS ecological types) in areas where soil maps are available. Confirm that the soil and topographic information recorded to characterize the plot are consistent with the soil map unit component and ecological site. If soils have not been mapped or ecological sites do not exist in the study area, plot characterization data can be used independently to support data analysis. Plot Characterization QUALITY ASSURANCE ☐Notes are as complete, yet concise as possible. ☐Abbreviations are defined. ☐Notes are exact (e.g.,"1.2 km from the road" rather than "just over a km from the road"). ☐GPS coordinates, coordinate system, and datum are recorded correctly, and in conformance with organization data standards. ☐All required fields are filled out. 1/21/2015 23Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY (EACH TIME DATA ARE COLLECTED) In addition to standard, required elements described in the plot characterization section, every plot visit should include observations of other fea- tures of the plot that are not captured by the core methods described in the rest of this manual. Plot observations are completed during each visit to the plot, as they describe dynamic features of the plot which may change between data collection visits. Supplement your observations and notes with photo- graphs of distinctive elements of the plot. MATERIALS • Electronic device for paperless data collection (preferred) OR clipboard, Plot Observation Data Sheet (Appendix B) and pencil(s) • Photo ID board (chalk or whiteboard) or Photo ID card (Appendix B) on a clipboard • Thick marking pen • Completed Plot Characterization data sheet STANDARD METHODS (RULE SET) 1. If the plot characterization form has already been completed, verify that the characterization is correct and complete. 2. List data collection methods and citations, in- cluding date (e.g., Lutes et al., 2006) for any methods or observations that are not described in this manual. Modifications to the core meth- ods are discouraged as they limit the ability to combine and compare datasets. However, if methods are modified, precisely describe plot- PLOT OBSERVATION SIGNS OF EROSION CLASS 5 CLASS 4 CLASS 3 CLASS 2 CLASS 1 Rills ☐ Widespread (>10) AND long (>0.5 m) ☐ Common (>5) AND long (>0.5 m) ☐ Common (>5) OR long (>0.5m) ☐ Very few (<5) AND short (<0.5 m)☐ None Gullies ☐ Active headcut, unstable sides ☐ Active headcut, partially stable sides ☐ Active headcut, stable sides ☐ Inactive. Stable throughout ☐ None Pedestals ☐ Widespread throughout area. Common exposed roots ☐ Common in flow paths. Occasional exposed roots ☐ Common in flow paths. Roots rarely exposed ☐ Few in flow paths and interspaces only. No exposed roots ☐ None Deposition/ Runoff ☐ Dominates the plot ☐ Widespread ☐ Common ☐ Rare ☐ None Water Flow Patterns ☐ Very long (15 m); numerous; unstable with active erosion; almost always connected ☐ Long (5-15 m), very common, and usually connected ☐ Moderately long (1.5-5 m), rare, common, and often connected ☐ Very short (<1.5 m), rare, and occasionally connected ☐ None Sheet Erosion ☐ Dominates the plot ☐ Widespread ☐ Common ☐ Rare ☐ None Other: N/A ☐ Dominates the plot ☐ Widespread ☐ Common ☐ Rare ☐ None Recent Weather Precip. ☐ cm ☐ in Data Source Past 12 Months ☐ Drought ☐ Normal ☐ Wet 13.4 NOAAPast 13-24 Months ☐ Drought ☐ Normal ☐ Wet 22.4 Table 12. Example of the climate data section from the Plot Observation data sheet. Table 13. Example of the erosion section from the Plot Observation Data Sheet. 1/21/2015 24 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Table 14. Example of the land use section from the Plot Observation Data Sheet. Describe management history (e.g., grazing plan, prescribed fire, shrub control, seeding, plowing, water units): Office records show that the site burned in 2002. A shrub/perennial bunch grass mix was seeded aerially as part of the rehabilitation. Describe wildlife use (note types, species identified, and condition): Saw 6 wild horses while hiking to the plot. Horse trail intersects Line 1. Observed herd of ~20 pronghorn ~ 1 km north of the plot. Describe livestock use (note species, evidence, and intensity): Cattle in area but not directly on plot. A livestock watering trough is located 500 m NE of the plot. Describe off-site influences (e.g., transmission lines, mines, roads): Ranch Road, a graded dirt road, is 1.2 km east of the plot, railroad tracks run parallel to Ranch Road Additional visible disturbances and remarks (e.g., invasive species, evidence of fire, pests and pathogens): Invasive species (BRTE, HAGL) are dominant on the plot. The area burned as part of the James Fire in 2002. specific changes to the method. Project level modifications should be documented in the project description document (see Volume II). 3. Describe the weather (events affecting plots that day) of the plot (Table 12). Do this prior to visiting the plot, using data from sources such as the Western Regional Climate Center (http://www.wrcc.dri.edu), PRISM (http:// prism.orgeonstate.edu), or NOAA (http://www. ncdc.noaa.gov), and then describe any on-site evidence (e.g., evidence of a large, recent runoff event) that would appear to confirm or contra- dict online information. Rules 3.1 Record annual precipitation for the past 12 months and the past 13 to 24 months. 3.2 Note whether these are normal, drought, or wet conditions. 3.3 Record the precipitation data source. 4. Note signs of erosion (if any) (Table 13). Rules 4.1 Note signs of water movement over the plot (e.g., gullies, rills, litter dams, vegetation or rock pedestals, water flow patterns, sheet ero- sion). 4.2 Note signs of wind erosion (e.g., wind-scoured blow outs, soil deposition around plants). 5. Describe previous land use, treatments, distur- bances or other known management actions on the plot. For repeat (monitoring) visits, focus on change in management or other disturbanc- es since the last visit (Table 14). 6. Describe current land use of the plot area (Table 14). Be sure to photograph unusual features. Rules 6.1 Note wildlife or evidence of wildlife (e.g., ro- dent burrows, droppings). 6.2 Note evidence and intensity of livestock use. 7. Describe off-site influences such as roads, wa- ter sources, mining, and housing developments (Table 14). Plot Observation QUALITY ASSURANCE ☐Notes are as complete, yet concise as possible. ☐Abbreviations are defined. ☐Notes are exact (e.g.,"10 year old native grass seeding treatment is 200 m north of the plot " rather than "seeding treatment next to plot”). ☐Notes are descriptive (e.g.,"cattle trailing on SW corner of plot" rather than "trailing on plot"). 1/21/2015 25Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Use Photo points to qualitatively monitor how vegetation changes over time. Repeat photographs of a landscape are useful for detecting changes in vegeta- tion structure, major soil redistribution patterns, and for visually documenting measured changes. Photos are also vital for relocating a plot or transect on subse- quent visits. Another important role of photos is to aid in verification and interpretation of quantitative data back in the office. Take at least one photo of each tran- sect before collecting other measurements. If you take digital photos, be sure to back-up and securely archive the image files. You may also want to print and store photos in plastic photo storage sheets. Slide the Photo ID card (Appendix B) behind the photo in the plastic storage sheet. For more information on photo point monitoring, see the USFS Photo Point Monitoring Handbook (www.fs.fed.us/pnw/pubs/gtr526/). MATERIALS • Tape measure (5 m (15 ft) minimum) • Compass • High resolution camera (at least 5 megapixel capacity) • Photo ID board (chalk or whiteboard) or Photo ID card (Appendix B) on a clipboard • Thick marking pen or dry-erase marker in a dark color • One 1.5 m (5 ft) long, 3/4-in diameter PVC pipe STANDARD METHODS (RULE SET) 1. Set up first photo (Figure 12). Rules 1.1 Prepare a legible Photo ID board and rest it against the transect stake at the beginning of the first transect. Make sure all written letter- ing is thick and clear. Ensure no vegetation obstructs writing on the ID board. If neces- sary, a colleague may hold the ID board so that it is visible in front of vegetation, staying as low and unobtrusive as possible. 1.2 Stand back 5 m (15 feet) from the start of the transect. This is the camera location, and is in line with the bearing of the transect. 1.3 If project protocols allow, mark the camera point using a rebar stake, metal post, PVC pipe, rock cairn, or other permanent, unob- structive marker. A permanent camera marker will enable higher precision in positioning and repeating the photo in succeeding years. 2. Take first photo (Figures 12 and 13). Rules 2.1 Set camera body on top of the 1.5 m (5 ft) PVC pipe and point the camera lens toward the first transect such that the photo will be taken in landscape orientation. The bottom of the pipe should rest on the ground. 2.2 Place lower edge of photo ID board at the photo’s bottom center, but leave a tiny amount of space below the board. This dem- onstrates to future viewers that all data on the board has been photographed, and has not been cut off. 2.3 Signal data collection crew to exit the field of view. 2.4 Adjust the camera's field of view to minimum zoom and infinite focus settings. Do not use a flash, if possible. A flash will distort the foreground appearance and is ineffective past a few meters out. It is best to take photos with ample daylight, but if forced to photo- graph in low-light conditions, increase the exposure settings on the camera rather than use flash. 2.5 If photos were taken on the plot in the past, make sure current photos are taken at the same distance from the transect, compass bearing, and with the same horizon as pho- tos from the past. 2.6 Take photo and immediately check that it saved to the camera's memory card. (Figure 10). 2.7 If tall vegetation or large rocks obstruct all of the transect from the original camera setup point, take a second photo at a location fur- ther down the transect, pointing in the same direction. Note the new camera position on the ID board Figure 12. Photo point layout. PHOTO POINTS 1/21/2015 26 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY 6. Optional: Photograph plot features: ecological site boundary changes, noxious weeds, burns, gullies, rills, water and wind erosion patterns, evidence of plant disease, invasive species, con- servation practices, seeding, water develop- ments, fence line contrasts, etc. Rules 6.1 Include a photo ID board in each photo. 6.2 Include a short written explanation on the Plot Observation data sheet. Figure 13. Example photo point picture. Transect tape is straight and threaded below vegetation, Photo ID board is in the bottom center of the photograph, and the horizon is in the background. 3. Record photo information. Rules 3.1 Record photo number (default number as- signed by the camera), transect number and compass bearing of the transect on the Plot Observation data sheet. Camera brand, mod- el, lens focal length and zoom setting can also be recorded. 3.2 If recording plot data in a database, be sure to link photos to the database according to proj- ect protocols. 4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for each additional transect on the plot. 5. If time allows, take a photo of each transect from the opposite end, using the same setup rules. Photo Points RIPARIAN NOTE At riparian sites, take additional photos. Stand in mid-channel if water flow allows, hold camera 1.5m (5 ft) above the channel bed and position bottom of viewfinder on a point located 5 m (15 ft) away. Take one photo facing upstream and one downstream. If possible, find a vantage point above the riparian area and capture a photo of the stream channel from above. NRI Refer to the On-Site Grazing Handbook for instructions (http://www.nrisurvey. org/nrcs/Grazingland/2014/instructions/ instruction.htm). Update "2014" to the year of interest. QUALITY ASSURANCE ☐Photos are in landscape orientation with the horizon in the background. ☐Photo ID board is in the photo and includes date, plot number, line number, transect bearing. ☐Writing on the Photo ID board is legible. ☐Photo is in focus and has correct exposure. ☐Photo numbers (assigned by camera) are recorded on plot metadata sheet. 1/21/2015 27Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Line-point intercept is a rapid, accurate method for quantifying soil cover, including vegetation, lit- ter, rocks and biological crusts. These measurements are related to wind and water erosion, water infiltra- tion, and the ability of the site to resist and recover from disturbance. Line-point intercept can be mea- sured together with Vegetation height, which describes vertical vegetation structure. For a detailed discussion of this and other methods for measuring plant cover and/or composition, see Elzinga et al. 20012. MATERIALS • Measuring tape (length of transect)—if using a tape measure in feet, use one marked in tenths of feet • Two steel stakes for anchoring tape • One pointer—a straight piece of wire or rod, such as a long pin flag, at least 75 cm (2.5 ft) long and 1 mm (0.04 in) or less in diameter • Electronic device for paperless data collection (preferred) OR clipboard, Line-point Intercept Data Sheet (Appendix B) and pencil(s) STANDARD METHODS (RULE SET) 1. Pull out the tape and anchor each end with a steel stake. See the instructions on stringing a tape on page 6. 2. As you move from one end of the tape to the other, always stand on the same side (the south side for NRI) of the transect for all methods and measurements. Move to the first point (0 mark) on the tape. 2 Elzinga, C.L., D.W. Salzer, J.W. Willoughby and J.P. Gibbs. 2001. Monitoring Plant and Animal Populations, Blackwell Publishing. 368 pp. 3. Drop a pin flag to the ground from a standard height next to the tape (Figure 14). Rules 3.1 Keep the pin vertical. 3.2 Make a "controlled drop" of the pin from the same height each time. Position the pin so its lower end is several centimeters above the veg- etation, release it and allow it to slip through the hand until it hits the ground. A low drop height minimizes “bounces” off of vegetation but increases the possibility for bias. 3.3 Do not guide the pin all the way to the ground. It is more important for the pin to fall freely to the ground than to fall precisely on the tran- sect tape mark. 3.4 A laser with a bubble level can be used instead of the pin. This tool is useful in ecosystems where plant layers may be above eye level. See Appendix A (Monitoring tools) in Volume II for suppliers. 4. Once the pin flag is flush with the ground, re- cord every plant species it intercepts (Tables 15 and 16). Rules 4.1 Record the species of the uppermost or first stem, leaf or plant base intercepted in the “Top layer” column, using the PLANTS Da- tabase species code (http://plants.usda.gov), a code based on the first two letters of the genus and species, or the common name. Figure 14. Point falling on bare soil (N/S). LINE-POINT INTERCEPT HELPFUL TIP If Gap intercept is also measured, it is most efficient to measure Gap intercept starting from "0" to the end of the transect, and for Line-point intercept to be read from the end of the transect back to "0". 1/21/2015 28 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY 4.2 If no leaf, stem or plant base is intercepted or touches the pin, record “N” for none in the “Top layer” column. 4.3 Record all additional species intercepted by the pin, in the order that they are intercepted, from top to bottom. 4.4 Record herbaceous litter as "HL", if pres- ent. Herbaceous litter is defined as detached stems, roots, leaves, haybales, and dung. Re- cord “WL” for detached woody or succulent litter that is greater than 5 mm (or ~1/4 in) in diameter. Record "NL" for non-vegetative lit- ter (e.g., plastic, metal, decomposing animal matter). 4.5 Record each plant species only once, the first time it is intercepted, even if it is intercepted several times. 4.6 If a plant species is not known, use the following codes, adding sequential numbers as necessary: AF# = Annual forb (also includes biennials) PF# = Perennial forb AG# = Annual graminoid PG# = Perennial graminoid SH# = Shrub TR# = Tree If necessary, collect a sample of unknown plants off the transect for later identification (see page 14) for voucher specimen collection protocols). 4.7 If the genus is known, but not the species, either use the PLANTS Database genus code (http:// plants.usda.gov) or record an unknown plant code as described above and note the genus at the bottom of the data sheet. 4.8 Foliage can be live or dead (see inset box), but only record each species once in at each pin drop. If both live and dead canopy for the same species is hit on the same point, record the live canopy. 4.9 Record vagrant lichen as "VL" or by its species in the lower layer columns. 4.10 In environments where deposited soil over a plant base occurs (Figures 15-16), push the pin below the soil surface. Gently move the pin from side to side to feel for buried plant bases. If resistance from the plant base is en- countered, record deposited soil as "DS" in the lower canopy and record the spe- cies basal hit in the "Soil Surface" column. 5. Record a species code (if the pin flag intercepts a plant base, Figure 16) or another soil surface code in the “Soil surface” column (Table 15). Rules 5.1 For unidentified plant bases, use the codes list- ed under Rule 4.6. 5.2 An intercept with a plant base is defined as when the end of the pin rests either on, or immediately adjacent to and touching, liv- ing or dead plant material that is rooted in the soil. Carefully scrutinize if the pin is touching small, single-stemmed plants. 6. Optional: Add more specific soil surface categories. 6.1 Record “CY” or dark cyanobacterial crust. 6.2 If mosses and lichens are identified to species, record the species code in the "Soil surface" column. Line-Point Intercept NRI Measure in English units RECORDING DEAD VS. LIVE Distinguishing dead vs. live plant parts is important for many objectives. A pin intercept is a standing dead hit if the pin touches a dead plant part. • Annual vegetation which grew in the current growing season is alive while rooted annual vegetation from the previous growing season is dead. I• Perennial and woody plant parts which support live vegetation are alive.• Points where only dead plants or plant parts are intercepted can be recorded on paper by circling the species on paper data sheets, or electronically (by using the optional checkbox in the DIMA Line-point intercept form (http:// jornada.nmsu.edu/monit-assess/). 1/21/2015 29Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Figure 15. Deposited soil over a bunch grass (STIPA/DS/ STIPA). R = Rock (> 5 mm or ~1/4 inch in diameter) (A category for coarse fragments functionally resistant to movement by raindrop impact) We recommend the following specific size classes be used in place of "R". This is required where data will be used to develop classification systems, such as ecological sites. GR =Gravel (5 - 76 mm) CB =Cobble (> 76 - 250 mm) ST =Stone (> 250 - 600 mm) BY =Boulder (> 600 mm) BR =Bedrock D =Duff M =Moss LC =Visible lichen on soil crust (do not record if it is attached to a rock substrate) W =Water S =Soil that is visibly unprotected by any of the above Line-Point Intercept QUALITY ASSURANCE ☐Each data sheet is complete. All points, observer, recorder, date, line, and plot name are recorded. Scan every entry to make sure they are legible. ☐Each pin drop is made as close to vertical as possible, and observers avoid leaning too far over the line in either direction in order to avoid parallax. Parallax issues can increase variability year-to-year because different amounts of plant canopy are measured among years. ☐Every Top layer and Soil surface cell has an entry. Each species may occur a maximum of once in the first four columns. ☐Fill every cell with its appropriate data; do not draw vertical lines down through multiple cells or columns to indicate repeating values. ☐% bare ground + % foliar cover + % between plant ground cover = 100%. ☐Cover values are consistent with plot observations. ☐Species recorded are appropriate for plot. Species cannot be added to or altered on data sheets after leaving a site, unless they are accounted for with an unknown plant code. ☐Species codes are complete, correct and consistent with project plant coding system. ☐Unknown plants are described according to unknown plant protocols, photographed and voucher specimens collected when possible. ☐During calibration, there may be slight differences at points along the vegetation measurement line as pin hits will not be repeated exactly (especially in windy conditions or if plants have small or single-stemmed bases or ), but in aggregate over a plot each indicator is detected consistently between data gatherers. 7. Repeat Steps 3-6 at regular intervals along the transect. 1/21/2015 30 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Table 15. A list of columns that can be populated as part of Line-point intercept, along with a list of permitted options for each column. Following these protocols facilitates simple calculations on paper data sheets, and consistent calcula- tions with electronically recorded data. LPI COLUMN PERMITTED OPTIONS SOURCE/CODE DESCRIPTION Top layer codes N Indicates no foliar cover. Plant code From PLANTS Database Foliar cover.Unknown plant code User assigned code Lower codes Plant code From PLANTS Database Foliar cover.Unknown plant code User assigned code Litter HL - herbaceous litter (including dung and haybales) Litter cannot be entered above the first plant code or in the Top layer. WL - woody or succulent litter > 5 mm diameter NL - other litter such as plastic, metal, and decomposing animal matter OptionalOtherwise, record: Deposited soil DS S on Soil surface Soil deposition overlying a plant base. Water W W on Soil surface Water or ice present at the time of measurement. May be permanent or ephemeral. Vagrant lichen*VL Litter Lichens that are loose, never attached to any substrate. Rock fragment GR - gravel GR or R on soil sur face Rock fragments 5 - 76 mm, but only when overlying a buried plant base. CB - cobble CB or R on soil surface Rock fragments 76 - 250 mm, but only when overlying a buried plant base. ST- stone ST or R on soil surface Rock fragments 250 - 600 mm, but only when overlying a buried plant base. Soil surface codes Plant code From PLANTS Database Indicates pin on hit a plant base. Plant bases have no minimum height, record a foliar hit of the same species above any plant basal hit even when no apparent pin contact is made with a leaf or stem.Unknown plant User assigned code Soil S Indicates bare soil, mineral soil, or soil with no detectable biological crust. Lichen LC (or species code if known*)Visible lichen crust attached to soil surface. Record if attached to soil, but not if on rock. Moss M (or species code if known*) Duff D Partially decomposed plant litter with no recognizable plant parts. Water W Permanent water Rock fragment R All rock fragments > 5 mm (do not use GR,CB, ST, or BY because R represents all of these).OptionalOtherwise, record: Cyanobacteria CY S For consistency with NRI bare ground calculations, both "N/S" and "N/CY" pin hits constitute bare ground. Embedded litter EL L in lower canopy and S on the Soil surface Embedded woody litter > 5 mm in diameter GR - gravel R Rock fragments 5 - 76 mm. CB - cobble R Rock fragments 76 - 250 mm. ST - stone R Rock fragments 250 - 600 mm. BY- boulder R Rock fragments > 600 mm. BR - bedrock R Line-Point Intercept 1/21/2015 31Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Pin flag Bluegrass (live) Clover (live) Litter SoilGravel Fescue (live) Fescue (dead) Pin flag Litter Soil Fescue (dead) Point 2 Table 16. Sample data sheet for examples illustrated below. Points 1 and 2 show the first two points on a transect. In Point 1, the pin flag is touching dead fescue (FERU2), live bluegrass (POPR), clover (TRRE3), live fescue, litter, and a rock. Record fescue only once, even though it intercepts the pin twice. In Point 2, the flag touches fescue, then touches litter, and finally the fescue plant base. Gravel Figure 16. Area defined as plant base and included as basal cover. Point 1 PT.TOP LAYER LOWER LAYERS SOIL SURFACECODE 1 CODE 2 CODE 3 1 FERU2 POPR TRRE3 HL R 2 FERU2 HL FERU2 3 FERU2 HL S 4 N S etc. Plant base Basal cover Deposited soil Line-Point Intercept RIPARIAN NOTE Line-point intercept collected perpendicular to the channel is often used to monitor riparian zone width. A modified point intercept method is used to monitor “greenline” vegetation along the channel’s edge (Volume II). 1/21/2015 32 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY LINE-POINT INTERCEPT INDICATOR CALCULATIONS Foliar cover (as calculated here) does not include bare spaces within a plant’s canopy. 1. Percent foliar cover. Rules 1.1 Count the total number of plant intercepts in the “Top layer” column and record this num- ber in the blank provided. 1.2 Plant intercepts include all points where a plant is recorded in the “Top layer” column. Do not include points that have a “N” in the “Top layer” column. 1.3 Divide the number of plant intercepts by the total number of pin drops and record % foliar cover in the blank provided. 2. Percent bare ground. Rules 2.1 Count the total number of points along the line that have bare ground and record this number in the blank provided. 2.2 Bare ground occurs only when: A. There are no plant intercepts (N is recorded in the “Top layer” column). B. There are no litter intercepts (“Lower layers” columns are empty). C. The pin only intercepts bare soil (“S” recorded in the “Soil surface” column)1*. * For 50 points per line. See formulas for other transect designs on page 59 of "Data Entry and Quality Control."** In standard NRI calculations, pin intercepts of only cyanobacterial crust are also considered bare ground. 2.3 Divide the total number of bare ground hits by the total number of pin drops and record % bare ground in the blank provided. 3. Percent basal cover. Rules 3.1 Count the total number of plant basal inter- cepts in the “Soil surface” column and record this number in the blank provided. 3.2 Plant basal intercepts occur anytime the pin in- tercepts a live or dead plant base (species code recorded in “Soil surface” column). 3.3 Divide the total number of basal intercepts by the total number of pin drops and record % basal cover in the blank provided. 4. Vegetation composition Rules 4.1 Count the total number of intercepts where rooted vegetation occurs in at least one layer (Top, Lower, or Soil Surface layers). 4.2 Count the total number of intercepts where Species A occurs in at least one layer. 4.3 Divide the count from 4.2 by the count from 4.1. Multiply by 100% and record this as the composition of Species A. 4.4 Repeat for Species B, C, D,....N. 4.5 Sum the percent composition of each species. The total composition should equal 100%. Line-Point Intercept 1/21/2015 33Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY LINE-POINT INTERCEPT BASIC INTERPRETATION Line-Point Intercept Increases in foliar cover are correlated with increased resistance to degradation. Basal cover is a more reliable long-term indicator. Basal cover is less sensitive to seasonal and annual dif- ferences in precipitation and use. Increases in bare ground nearly always indicate a higher risk of runoff and erosion. Where species composition1 changes may be occurring, calculate basal and foliar cover for each major species. Foliar cover usually is used for shrubs, trees and sometimes grasses. Basal cover is used for perennial grasses. When calcu- lating foliar cover of a single species, count each time the species is intercepted, regardless of whether it is in the top or lower layer (only count it once in cases where it occurs in an upper layer and the soil surface for the same pin drop). Use these indicators together with the indicators 1Foliar cover is often used to estimate species compo- sition. It must be recognized, however, that in dense, complex vegetation systems, foliar cover estimates of species composition based on only the first hit on each species (as described in this manual), are less strongly correlated with biomass-based species com- position than estimates where multiple pin intercepts are recorded. from Gap intercept and Soil stability tests to help determine whether observed erosion chang- es are due to loss of cover, changes in vegetation spatial distribution, or reduced soil stability. Use these indicators together with Plant density data to track changes in species composition. For more information about how to interpret these indicators, please see Chapter 21, Volume II. TYPICAL EFFECT ON EACH ATTRIBUTE OF AN INCREASE IN THE LINE-POINT INTERCEPT INDICATOR VALUE Indicator Attributes Soil and site stability* Hydrologic function** Biotic integrity Foliar cover % Bare ground % Basal cover % 1/21/2015 34 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Data entry Date Error check Date Page 1 of 1 Plot: 3 Line: 2 Observer: Jane Mendez Recorder: David Stein Azimuth: 120º Date: 10/15/2002 Intercept (Point) Spacing Interval: 100 ☐ cm ☐ in : : : : : : ☐ cm ☐ in PT.TOP LAYER LOWER LAYERS SOIL SURFACE PT.TOP LAYER LOWER LAYERS SOIL SURFACECODE 1 CODE 2 CODE 3 CODE 1 CODE 2 CODE 3 1 BOER4 BOER4 26 PRGL BOER4 S 2 BOER4 S 27 N HL S 3 AF01 BOER4 S 28 BOER4 LC 4 BOER4 S 29 AF01 BOER4 S 5 N S 30 YUEL HL S 6 BOER4 LC 31 BOER4 S 7 N HL S 32 N R 8 N S 33 BOER4 PG02 S 9 BOER4 S 34 N HL S 10 BOER4 HL S 35 BOER4 S 11 BOER4 HL S 36 BOER4 HL BOER4 12 BOER4 S 37 BOER4 HL S 13 N S 38 BOER4 HL S 14 BOER4 S 39 N S 15 N HL S 40 N HL S 16 N R 41 BOER4 S 17 BOER4 S 42 PRGL AF01 S 18 BOER4 BOER4 43 PRGL S 19 N R 44 AF01 S 20 BOER4 S 45 N S 21 BOER4 S 46 BOER4 S 22 AF01 S 47 BOER4 BOER4 23 BOER4 HL S 48 BOER4 HL S 24 N HL S 49 N HL S 25 N HL S 50 BOER4 GUSA S LINE-POINT INTERCEPT DATA SHEET % foliar cover = 34 top layer pts (1st col) x 2 = 68 % % bare ground* = 5 pts (w/N over S) x 2 = 10 % % basal cover = 4 plant base pts (last col) x 2 = 8 % Top layer codes: Species code, common name, or N (no cover). Lower layers codes: Species code, common name, HL (herbaceous litter), WL (woody litter, > 5 mm (~1/4 in) diameter), NL (non-vegetative litter), VL (vagrant lichen). * For NRI, bare ground occurs ONLY when Top layer = N, Lower layers are empty (no litter), and Soil surface = S or CY. Shaded cells for calculations UNKNOWN SPECIES CODES: AF#=annual forb PF#=perennial forb AG#=annual graminoid PG#=perennial graminoid SH#=shrub TR#=tree SOIL SURFACE (DO NOT USE LITTER): R =Rock** (≥ 5 mm or ~ 1/4 in diameter) BR =Bedrock D =Duff M =Moss LC =Visible lichen on soil S =Soil Data entry JES Date 11/5/2002 Error check JMP Date 11/9/2002 ** Optional: use rock fragment classes in place of "R": GR (5-76 mm), CB (76-250 mm), ST (250 mm-600 mm), BY (>600 mm) 1/21/2015 35Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Data entry Date Error check Date Data entry AFS Date 8/11/2009 Error check RWD Date 8/12/2009 Page 1 of 1 Plot: Big Juniper 3 Line: 1 Observer: Adam Johnson Recorder: Daniel Lee Azimuth: 00 Date: 7/13/2009 Intercept (Point) Spacing Interval:100 ☐ cm ☐in Height: ☐ cm ☐in PT.TOP LAYER HT.LOWER LAYERS SOIL SURFACE PT.TOP LAYER HT.LOWER LAYERS SOIL SURFACE CODE 1 CODE 2 CODE 3 CODE 1 CODE 2 CODE 3 1 N S 26 POSE HL R 2 PSSP6 LC 27 N HL M 3 N S 28 CHVI8 HL CHVI8 4 CHVI8 S 29 CHVI8 HL S 5 BRTE M 30 N WL HL S 6 BRTE PSSP6 PSSP6 31 N HL LC 7 N S 32 PSSP6 WL S 8 BRTE HL M 33 N R 9 CHVI8 HL LC 34 POSE HL LC 10 PSSP6 HL S 35 PSSP6 HL R 11 N HL LC 36 N HL S 12 BRTE HL M 37 POSE HL S 13 PSSP6 HL PSSP6 38 PSSP6 CHVI8 S 14 N HL S 39 N D 15 PSSP6 HL S 40 LUSE4 D 16 PSSP6 HL S 41 PSSP6 HL PSSP6 17 N HL S 42 BRTE HL S 18 BRTE HL R 43 N HL S 19 PSSP6 HL LC 44 N HL R 20 CHVI8 BRTE R 45 PSSP6 HL S 21 BRTE HL R 46 N HL R 22 PSSP6 HL S 47 HECO26 HL R 23 CHVI8 HL R 48 PSSP6 BRTE R 24 N HL WL R 49 N HL R 25 PSSP6 HL S 50 POSE BRTE S LINE-POINT INTERCEPT WITH HEIGHT DATA SHEET WOODY WOODY HERB. 0 12823 18 5 220 51 23 28 13 0 17 827 2854 230 HERB. % foliar cover = 33 top layer pts (1st col) x 2 = 66 % % bare ground* = 3 pts (w/N over S) x 2 = 6 % % basal cover = 4 plant base pts (last col) x 2 = 8 % Top layer codes: Species code, common name, or N (no cover). Lower layers codes: Species code, common name, HL (herbaceous litter), WL (woody litter, > 5 mm (~1/4 in) diameter), NL (non-vegetative litter), VL (vagrant lichen). * For NRI, bare ground occurs ONLY when Top layer = N, Lower layers are empty (no litter), and Soil surface = S or CY. Shaded cells for calculations ** Optional: use rock fragment classes in place of "R": GR (5-76 mm), CB (76-250 mm), ST (250 mm-600 mm), BY (>600 mm) UNKNOWN SPECIES CODES: AF#=annual forb PF#=perennial forb AG#=annual graminoid PG#=perennial graminoid SH#=shrub TR#=tree SOIL SURFACE (DO NOT USE LITTER): R =Rock** (≥ 5 mm or ~ 1/4 in diameter) BR =Bedrock D =Duff M =Moss LC =Visible lichen on soil S =Soil 1/21/2015 36 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY tape. Using the disc as a guide, determine the tallest living or dead woody (when present) AND living or dead herbaceous plant (when present) parts intersecting a projected 30 cm (12 in) diameter cylinder tangent to the line (Figure 17). 1.2 All plant materials existing inside the project- ed cylinder are considered, whether they are rooted inside or outside the 30 cm (12 in) cir- cular area (Figure 18). It doesn't matter where plants are rooted, only plant materials within the cylinder are observed. Vegetation height is measured as the height of the tallest plant part within a 30 cm (12 in) diameter cylinder projected tangent to the transect. It is mea- sured vertically from the soil surface at the center of the cylinder (Figure 17). Vegetation height provides plot-level vertical structure information necessary to predict soil erosion from wind and characterize wild- life habitat. Vegetation height is usually measured at the same time as Line-point intercept because it is more efficient, but can be measured separately. MATERIALS • Measuring tape (length of transect)—if using a tape measure in feet, use one marked in tenths of feet • Two steel stakes for anchoring tape • Graduated survey rod or height measuring stick with graduations in centimeters (or 0.5 in) and meters (or ft) • 30 cm (12 in) diameter disc or ruler (optional) • Clinometer or extendable range pole • Electronic device for paperless data collection (preferred) OR clipboard, Line-point Intercept with Height Data Sheet OR Vegetation Height Data Sheet (Appendix B) and pencil(s) STANDARD METHODS (RULE SET) 1. Measure plant heights at regular intervals (5 m (10 ft) recommended) for a minimum of 28 height measurements per plot. Distribute the total number of height measurements evenly among all transects. Rules 1.1 At each designated transect mark, hold the edge of the disc on the opposite side of the Figure 17. Measuring vegetation height. 7.5 m 10m shrub forb 5 m 30 cm Figure 18. Example of vegetation height measurement intervals and the area tangent to the line in which the tallest woody and herbaceous plant elements are measured. Plant canopy (top-down view) observer stands on this side plant base transect edge VEGETATION HEIGHT 1/21/2015 37Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY 1.3 Do not stretch or move any plant parts. Ignore any part of the plant that is outside the cylin- der. 1.4 Height is determined as the perpendicular dis- tance (relative to the earth's center, regardless of slope) from the soil surface at the center of the cylinder to the tallest plant element con- tained within the cylinder. 1.5 Record height from the center of the cylinder at the soil surface, even if the soil surface is uneven, mounded or bumpy (Figure 19, Table 17). Woody or herbaceous litter are not mea- sured. 2. Record the height of plants 0-2 m (6 ft) tall to the nearest centimeter (1 in). Record the height of plants that exceed 2 m (6 ft) in height to the nearest 30 cm (~1 ft). Plants greater than 18 m (60 ft) should be recorded as 18 m (60 ft) tall. Rules 2.1 Record the height of the tallest part of the plant inside the cylinder. Record only one height for each plant type (woody or herbaceous) if pres- ent. Where no woody or herbaceous vegeta- tion is present, mark "0" on the data sheet. 2.2 If vegetation is taller than 3 m (~10 ft), a cli- nometer, phone application, or geometric technique can be used to estimate height. For the geometric option, step back from the cylinder far enough so the tallest point of the plant in the cylinder can be seen. Measure (a) the horizontal distance to that point and (b) the angle (from the soil surface where the ob- server is standing) to that point. Calculate the height using the following formula: Height = (distance to plant) x (tangent of angle from soil surface). Be sure to measure and set cal- culators to ‘degrees’ when using this equation. 3. Record the plant species of each woody and her- baceous height measurement. 4. Optional: Record if the plant element is alive or dead. Vegetation Height RIPARIAN NOTE No changes are needed for this method in riparian systems. QUALITY ASSURANCE ☐Each data sheet is complete. All points, observer, recorder, date, line, and plot name are recorded. ☐Vegetation heights are collected at the correct intervals on the transect. ☐Observers only measure plant elements within the cylinder tangent to the line. ☐Species, if recorded, are included in the species list. ☐Species names or codes are complete, correct and consistent with project plant coding system. ☐Unknown plants are described according to unknown plant protocols, photographed and voucher specimens collected when permissible. NRI Record vegetation height separate from Line-point intercept. If data are recorded on paper data sheets, use the Vegetation Height Data Sheet (Appendix B) instead of the Line-point Intercept with Height Data Sheet. 1/21/2015 38 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Point 12.5 30 cm CRAC2 POSE deposited soil ARTRW8 5 cm transect edge 17 cm Figure 19. Example of woody and herbaceous height measurements at 4 points along a transect. Height is measured from the surface center point of the cylinder even if the point is on a slope (Point 10), a rock (Point 7.5), or where deposited soil occurs (Point 12.5). Where no woody or herbaceous vegetation is present, mark "0" on the data sheet. Table 17. Vegetation height data sheet associated with Figure 19. POINT SPECIES WOODY HT SPECIES HERBACEOUS HT 5 ARTRW8 31 CRAC2 31 7.5 ARTRW8 33 CRAC2 23 10 ARTRW8 29 CRAC2 34 12.5 N 0 POSE 17 POSE CRAC2 30 cm Point 5 5 cm transect edge 31 cm 31 cm ARTRW8 ARTRW8 POSEROCK 30 cm Point 7.5 5 cm transect edge 23 cm 33 cm CRAC2 CRAC2 Point 10 transect edge 29 cm 34 cm ARTRW8 5 cm 30 cm Vegetation Height Height Measurement Interval:2.5 ☐ m ☐ ft Height: ☐ cm ☐ in 1/21/2015 39Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY VEGETATION HEIGHT INDICATOR CALCULATIONS Vegetation height calculations are computed for two reasons: (1) to describe overall height structure on a plot and (2) to describe the heights of the veg- etation on the plot. Overall height structure on a plot, described in Steps 1, 2, and 3, is the average height recorded at all measurement intervals includ- ing measurements where no vegetation was present and height was recorded as "0". To describe the veg- etation height by structural group (woody or herba- ceous) or by species, average the heights recorded when those species or groups occur. Keep in mind that estimating vegetation height only where vegeta- tion was measured (height > 0) may result in variable number of height measurements between plots. 1. Calculate the average woody height for all mea- surements (woody vertical structure). Rules 1.1 Add together all woody species height values. Divide this sum by the number of samples in this group. Record this value as the average woody height on your data sheet. 2. Calculate the average herbaceous height (herba- ceous vertical structure). Rules 2.1 Add together all herbaceous species height mea- surements. Divide this sum by the number of samples in this group. Record this value as av- erage herbaceous height on your data sheet. 3. Calculate the average vegetation height (vertical structure) for all measurements. An example is shown in Table 18. Rules 3.1 Add together all height measurements, regard- less of species. Divide this sum by the number of samples in this group. Record this value as average overall height on your data sheet. 4. Optional: Calculate average of woody or herba- ceous heights including only heights > 0. Table 18. Vegetation height data sheet example showing vegetation height measurements along a 25 m line and the resulting indicator calculations. POINT SPECIES WOODY HT SPECIES HERBACEOUS HT 2.5 CHVI8 23 BRTE 8 5 ARTRW8 18 PSSP6 5 7.5 N 0 HECO26 22 10 ARTRW8 51 BRTE 23 12.5 CHVI8 28 N 0 15 CHVI8 27 BRTE 12 17.5 ARTRV 48 POSE 35 20 N 0 POSE 28 22.5 ARTRV 25 PSSP6 21 25 CHVI8 34 PSSP6 25 Vegetation Height Average vegetation height = 21.7 cm Average woody height = 25.4 cm Average herbaceous height = 17.9 cm Height Measurement Interval:2.5 ☐ m ☐ ft Height: ☐ cm ☐ in 1/21/2015 40 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY HABITAT TYPE Breeding Brood-rearing Winter Sagebrush Height (cm)40-80 40-80 25-35 Canopy (%)15-25 10-25 10-30 Forb/Grass Height (cm)> 18 variable N/A Canopy (%)≥ 25 > 15 N/A Table 19. Sage grouse canopy cover and vegetation height habitat requirements, adapted from Connelly et al. 2000**. * Okin, G.S. 2008. A new model of wind erosion in the presence of vegetation. Journal of Geophysical Research 113: F02S10.** Connelly, J.W., M.A. Schroeder, A.R. Sands, and C.E. Braun. 2000. Guidelines to manage sage grouse populations and their habitats. Wildlife Society Bulletin 28:967-985. Woody and herbaceous height can be impor- tant indicators of vertical vegetation structure, especially when interpreted together with Gap intercept and Line-point intercept data. Woody and herbaceous vegetation structure, together with canopy gap size and distribution, are used to characterize wildlife habitat to determine if the site provides adequate thermal, hiding, and/or nesting cover for species of management interest (Table 19). Vegetation height and canopy gaps are also indicators of potential wind erosion on a site. A site with large canopy gaps and short vegetation is more susceptible to wind erosion than a site with smaller canopy gaps and taller vegetation. Models have been developed that predict wind erosion based on vegetation height, foliar cover and cano- py gaps (e.g., Okin 2008*). For more information about how to interpret these indicators, please see Volume II, Chapter 21. VEGETATION HEIGHT BASIC INTERPRETATION Vegetation Height 1/21/2015 41Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Gap intercept measurements provide information about the proportion of the line covered by large gaps between plants. Large gaps between plant canopies are important indicators of potential wind erosion, weed invasion, and wildlife habitat, including wild- life hiding cover and thermal environment. Together with vegetation height, canopy gap measurements can be used to characterize vegetation structure. Large gaps between plant bases are important indica- tors of runoff and water erosion. MATERIALS • Measuring tape (length of transect)—if tape is in feet, use one marked in tenths of feet • Two steel stakes for anchoring tape • Meter stick, other stiff stick, or straight piece of wire 0.75 - 1 m long • Electronic device for paperless data collection (preferred) OR clipboard, Gap Intercept Data Sheet (Appendix B) and pencil(s) STANDARD METHODS (RULE SET) 1. Pull out the tape and anchor each end with a steel stake. See the instructions on stringing a tape on page 6. 2. Begin at the "0" end of the line. Rules 2.1 Record the start position. 2.2 Always stand on the same side of the line, orient- ed so the numbers on the tape are seen upright. 3. Work from left to right if starting at 0 m, or right to left if starting at the end of the line, and move to the first piece of vegetation (annual or perennial) encountered along the line. Rules 3.1 Look straight down on the tape, on one edge of the tape, preferably the side with marked graduations. Use a meter stick or other stiff stick to project a line vertically to the ground. Do not change sides of the tape during mea- suring. 3.2 Do not consider gaps or vegetation that occur off the ends of the tape. In other words, do not record numbers less than "0" or greater than the maximum length of the tape. 3.3 The measurement area for this method theo- retically has no width, so the area under the tape is not observed with this method. 3.4 Apply the same rule each year. Figure 20. A canopy gap. GAP INTERCEPT STEPS 1-4 FOR BOTH CANOPY AND BASAL GAP INTERCEPT HELPFUL TIP If Line-point intercept is also measured, it is most efficient to measure Gap intercept starting from "0" to the end of the transect, and for Line-point intercept to be read from the end of the transect back to "0". 1/21/2015 42 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY 4. Record the beginning and end of each gap be- tween plant canopies longer than 20 cm (~1 ft) (Figure 20). Rules 4.1 Canopy occurs any time 50% of any 3 cm (0.1 ft) segment of tape edge intercepts live or dead plant canopy, based on a vertical projection from canopy to ground. Always read on the graduated side of the tape. 4.2 Both living and dead plant stems and leaves stop a gap if they qualify under rule 5.1. 4.3 Record the start and end of a gap to the nearest centimeter (or 0.1 ft). 4.4 Dead plant bases count as canopy, even when they have no measurable height. 4.5 Litter and woody litter(detached stems and leaves) are not canopy, regardless of size. 4.6 Canopy overhead (~> 2.5 m) can be measured in different ways: a) If canopy is relatively short (2-3 m above ground) a straight wire can be raised by hand to determine canopy edges; b) A right-angled mirror with cross- hairs can be placed over the transect tape, so the observer can look through the mirror to determine canopy edges; or c) A laser pointer can be placed over the transect tape and aimed upwards at the canopy. Be careful to protect your eyess. 5. Optional (recommended): Repeat steps 2-4 and record gaps between perennial vegetation. Rules 5.1 The core method is to include annual grasses and annual forbs to stop a gap. 5.2 Annuals may be ignored in ecosystems where they have little effect on reducing wind and water erosion and/or where their occurrence is extremely variable among years. 5.3 Repeat the same method each year. 6. Record the beginning and end of each gap be- tween plant bases longer than 20 cm (~1 ft). Rules 6.1 A plant base is any plant stem emerging from the soil surface, along the graduated edge of the tape, that when disregarding bumps in the soil surface itself, would disrupt a straight line of light emitting from a laser pointer shooting in a horizontal direction (minimum diameter of stem = 1 mm or ~1/25 in). 6.2 A basal gap occurs any time there is at least 20 cm (~1 ft) of intercept without a plant base. Therefore, there should always be at least 20 cm (~1 ft) between basal gap starts and basal gap ends. 6.3 Plant bases can stop a gap whether live or dead, even when they have no measurable height. 6.4 Plant bases may be live or dead, but they must be rooted in the ground. Litter or embedded litter is not a plant base. 6.5 Record the start and end of a gap to the nearest centimeter (or ~0.1 ft). Two abbreviated Canopy gap and Basal gap scenarios are illustrated in the following pages. Example data from Figure 21 are presented in Table 20, and data from Figure 22 are presented in Table 21. Gap intercept FINAL STEP FOR CANOPY GAP INTERCEPT NRI Record canopy gaps > 1 ft or 30 cm. Data collected with a 20 cm (0.66 ft) minimum gap can be grouped with 30 cm minimum gap data by discarding the 20-30 cm gaps. In this manual, the minimum canopy gap will be noted as 20 cm (~1 ft), for compatibility with both the traditional 20 cm minimum gap size and NRI. Canopy gap is recorded twice for each transect. One measurement records all canopy gaps (including annuals) and the other measurement records gaps between perennial plants only. Follow rules 1-5 for each measurement. FINAL STEP FOR BASAL GAP INTERCEPT 1/21/2015 43Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Gap intercept Figure 21. Example of canopy gap intercepts (above the line) and basal gap intercepts (below the line) for 1 m (100 cm) of a 25 m line. Canopy gaps: There is a gap between 40 and 77 cm because the plant canopies present do not cover more than 50% of any 3 cm segment. Basal gaps: There is a basal gap between 8 and 34 cm. Because the three small plant bases between 34 cm and 86 cm are all within 20 cm of an adjacent plant base, there are no canopy gaps even though there is a basal gap. Not a canopy gap (< 20 cm) Basal gap from 8 to 34 cm Canopy gap from 40 to 77 cm 100 cm Plant canopy (top-down view) Plant base (top-down view) 0 cm 50 cm Note: Each hatch mark is 10 cm. Canopy gaps: Minimum size = _____ ☐cm ☐ft Basal gaps: Minimum size = _____ ☐cm ☐ft Start End Gap size (cm)25-50 51-100 101-200 > 200 Start End Gap size (cm)25-50 51-100 101-200 > 200 40 77 37 37 8 34 26 26 Table 20. Gap intercept data form example associated with Figure 20. QUALITY ASSURANCE ☐Each data sheet is complete. Observer, recorder, date, plot name, line, line length, and minimum gap size are recorded. If no gaps exist, note that on the data sheet. ☐Gaps do not extend beyond either end of transect. ☐Each number recorded is larger than the previous number, the difference between all start and end gaps is at least the designated minimum gap size for the site ☐The minimum difference between any canopy end gap reading and the succeeding start gap reading is 2 cm (the closest 1 cm increment that is nearest to 1.5 cm, or 50% of a 3 cm piece of vegetation). ☐It is possible to end a basal gap and start the succeeding gap at the same number. ☐Size and number of gaps is consistent with plot observations. ☐Keep an observation point directly above the tape edge to avoid parallax. Parallax problems can cause inconsistency among observers because a different area of ground would be measured each observer. 20 20 1/21/2015 44 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Figure 22. Example of canopy gap intercepts (above the line) and basal gap intercepts (below the line) for 1 m (100 cm) of a 25 m line. Canopy gaps: Look at the plant canopy intercept between the 20 and 30 cm marks on the transect. Because each canopy intercept covers less than 50 percent of a 3 cm segment of the line, it does not count as Basal gaps from 0 to 76 cm and from 77 to 99 cm. 0 cm 100 cm Not a canopy gap because there is < 20 cm of gap along the measured area, even though the gap is 20 cm long (remember to disregard vegetation and gaps beyond the transect ends). Plant canopy (top-down view) Plant base (top-down view) 50 cm Canopy gap from 13 to 68 cm Table 21. Gap intercept data form example associated with Figure 21. Gap intercept Note: Each hatch mark is 10 cm. Canopy gaps: Minimum size = _____ ☐cm ☐ft Basal gaps: Minimum size = _____ ☐cm ☐ft Start End Gap size (cm)25-50 51-100 101-200 > 200 Start End Gap size (cm)25-50 51-100 101-200 > 200 13 68 55 55 0 76 76 76 20 20 HELPFUL TIP When using feet instead of meters, use the decimal (1/10 ft) side of the tape. Some long tape measures include inches on one side and tenths of feet on the other. Using tenths of a foot designations makes indicator calculations much easier. 1/21/2015 45Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Circle one: includes only perennial vegetation OR includes annual and perennial vegetation Canopy gaps: Minimum size = _____ ☐cm ☐ft Basal gaps: Minimum size = _____ ☐cm ☐ft Start (cm/ft) End (cm/ft) Gap (cm) size (ft) 25-50 51-100 101-200 > 200 Start (cm/ft) End (cm/ft) Gap (cm) size (ft) 25-50 51-100 101-200 > 200 1-2 2.1-3 3.1-6 > 6 1-2 2.1-3 3.1-6 > 6 40 60 20 27 64 37 37 101 202 101 101 70 264 194 194 237 963 726 726 269 459 190 190 4704 4754 50 50 3560 4684 1124 1124 4761 4925 164 164 4720 4813 93 93 4931 5000 69 69 4817 5000 183 183 SUM (cm/ft)50 69 265 726 SUM (cm/ft)37 93 567 1124 LINE LENGTH (cm/ft)5000 5000 5000 5000 LINE LENGTH (cm/ft)5000 5000 5000 5000 SUM ÷ LINE LENGTH 0.01 0.014 0.053 0.145 SUM ÷ LINE LENGTH 0.007 0.019 0.113 0.225 x 100 x 100 x 100 x 100 x 100 x 100 x 100 x 100 % of line in gaps 1.0%1.4%5.3%14.5% % of line in gaps 0.7%1.9%11.3%22.5% Gap intercept GAP INTERCEPT INDICATOR CALCULATIONS 1. Canopy gaps: Calculate the percentage of the line covered in gaps 25-501 cm (optional), 51- 100 cm, 101-200 cm and greater than 200 cm long (Table 22). Rules 1.1 Calculate each Gap size in centimeters (Gap end minus Gap start) for each canopy gap en- tered on the data sheet. 1.2 If a gap is 25-50 cm long, record its “Gap size” (cm) under the “25-50” column. Repeat this for all gaps for the remaining size classes (51- 100, 101-200 and > 200). 1.3 Add the gaps for each shaded column and re- cord this value next to “SUM” at the bottom of the column. This is the total amount of the line (in centimeters) covered by gaps in size classes 25-50, 51-100, 101-200, and > 200 cm. 120 cm minimum gap sizes are more easily distinguished in the field, but reporting of gap sizes traditionally begins with gaps >25 cm. 1.4 Record the “LINE LENGTH” in centimeters on the data sheet. Line length in centimeters is equal to the length of the line (in meters) multiplied by 100. 1.5 Starting with the gaps 25-50 cm, divide the “SUM” by the “LINE LENGTH” and mul- tiply this value by 100 to obtain the percent of the line covered in gaps 25-50 cm. Record this value under the appropriate column next to “% of line in gaps”. Repeat this for gaps 51- 100, 101-200, and > 200 cm. 2. Basal gaps: Calculate the percentage of the line covered in gaps 25-50 cm, 51-100 cm, 101-200 cm, and greater than 200 cm long (Table 22). Rules 2.1 Follow steps 1.1 through 1.5 above for basal gaps. 3. Optional for canopy and basal gaps: Use a dif- ferent color or pattern to mark a slice of the pie chart for each gap’s size class. The dark blue sec- tion represents the area covered by plants and gaps less than 25 cm (Figure 23). Table 22. Gap intercept data form example showing part of a 50 m line and associated indicator calculations. 20 20 1/21/2015 46 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY 1% 25-50 cm 1.4% 51-100 cm 77.8 % in canopy and/or in canopy gaps smaller than 25 cm 61.6% in plant bases and/or in basal gaps smaller than 25 cm 14.5% > 200 cm 5.3% 101-200 cm 0.7% 25-50 cm 1.9% 51-100 cm 11.3% 101-200 cm 24.5% > 200 cm Canopy Gap Pie Chart Basal Gap Pie Chart Figure 23. Examples of how to present gap intercept data in pie charts. Size of each pie slice is proportional to the area cov- ered by each type of gap. Gap intercept GAP INTERCEPT BASIC INTERPRETATION Increases in the proportion of the line covered by canopy gaps are related to increased risk of wind erosion. For example, wind velocities in most areas of the western United States are capa- ble of moving loose, disturbed soil in 50 cm (20 in) gaps in grasslands. Disturbed soil in gaps 1-2 m (3-6 ft) in diameter is nearly as susceptible to wind erosion as soil with no vegetation cover (all gap). Minimum gap size required to cause wind erosion increases with vegetation height. Increases in the proportion of the line covered by large basal gaps reflect increased susceptibility to water erosion and runoff. Plant bases slow water movement down slopes. As basal gap sizes increase, there are fewer obstacles to slow water flow, so runoff and erosion increase. Increases in the size of large basal gaps have a greater effect where rock and litter cover are low, since they are the only obstacles to water flow and erosion. Use these indicators together with the cover indicators from Line-point intercept and the soil structure indicators from Soil stability tests to help determine whether observed erosion chang- es are due to loss of cover, changes in spatial dis- tribution of vegetation, or reduced soil stability. Where gaps are approximately circular, typical gap diameter is approximately 1.3 times the gap intercept. For more information about how to interpret these indicators, please see Volume II, Chapter 21. TYPICAL EFFECT ON EACH ATTRIBUTE OF AN INCREASE IN THE LINE-POINT INTERCEPT INDICATOR VALUE Indicator Attributes Soil and site stability Hydrologic function Biotic integrity Canopy gaps (%)i i i 1/21/2015 47Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY The Soil stability test provides information about the degree of soil structural development and erosion resistance. It also reflects soil biotic integrity, because the “glue” (organic matter) that binds soil particles together must constantly be renewed by soil organ- isms and plant roots. This test measures the soil’s stability when exposed to rapid wetting. The soil surface stablity test is a standard method which must be completed on any site where soil ero- sion is a current or potential future resource concern. This applies to virtually all locations except wetlands and other areas where runoff and exposure to erosive winds is virtually non-existent due to flat topogra- phy, high infiltration rates and consistently high ground cover even under high grazing pressure and following fire (e.g. most Florida rangelands). Sub- surface stability is an optional method which should be included where (a) disturbance is common and sub-surface stability differs from surface (e.g. where biological crusts dominate), or (b) there is particular interest in sub-surface organic matter inputs and cycling (e.g. for restoration projects). Stability is affected by soil texture, so it is impor- tant to limit comparisons to similar soils that have similar amounts of sand, silt and clay (see Appendix A, page 60 for a simple field procedure to determine soil texture). We recommend viewing the soil stabil- ity training video (http://jornada.nmsu.edu/monit- assess/training/videos) in addition to reading the methods described below. MATERIALS • Complete soil stability kits • Deionized water (or distilled or reverse osmosis) 1 L (~32 oz) • Electronic device for paperless data collection (preferred) OR clipboard, Soil Stability Test Data Sheet (Appendix B) and pencil(s) • Stopwatch Figure 24. Excavate small trench. Take sample here Take sample here Figure 25. Collect surface sample.Figure 26. Place sample in sieve. STANDARD METHODS (RULE SET) 1. Randomly select 18 sampling points and decide whether you will collect surface samples only (1 box), or surface and subsurface samples (2 boxes). Rules 1.1 Use 18 randomly selected points along the transects used for Line-point and Gap inter- cept measurements. 1.2 Record sampling locations (points) under “Pos” on the data sheet. 1.3 Always sample one box length from any vegeta- tion measurement line. 1.4 Collect an additional set (9 or 18) of subsurface samples if you are interested in soil erodibility after disturbance. 2. Determine the dominant soil canopy class over at least 50% of the random point and enter this into the “Veg” column on the data sheet. Rules 2.1 The area to be classified is effectively as large as the sample area (6-8 mm (~1/4 in) in diam- eter). 2.2 Record the presence or absence of vegetation canopy over the sample (Table 23). Canopy is recorded as present if there is at least 50 per- cent canopy over the sample. 3. Collect a Surface Sample. Rules 3.1 Excavate a small trench (10-15 mm (1/2 in) deep) in front of the area to be sampled. Make the trench as long and wide as the sample scoop (Figure 24). If litter is resting over the sample point, carefully remove it before sam- pling. 3.2 Gently push the sample scoop horizontally into SOIL STABILITY TEST 1/21/2015 48 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Figure 27. Ensure correct sample size. the 10-15 mm deep exposed vertical face of the small trench, lift out a soil fragment and trim it (if necessary) to the correct size (Figure 25). 3.3 The soil fragment needs to be 2-3 mm (< 1/8 in) thick and 6-8 mm (1/4 in) in diameter (Figures 27, 28, and 29). This is the diameter of a wood pencil eraser. Try to fit sample in this dot (6-8 mm diameter). 3.4 Collect samples at the exact point. Move the sample point only if it has been disturbed during previous measurements or the soil sur- face is protected by a rock or embedded litter. Move the point a standard distance (e.g., 15 cm, 0.5 ft) and note this change on the data sheet. 3.5 Minimize shattering by: a) slicing the soil around the sample before lifting; b) lifting out a slightly larger sample than required, and SOIL CANOPY CODE ACTION No perennial plant canopy (including lichen) NC=No cover Sample Perennial plant canopy C=Cover ----------OR----------G = perennial grass canopy and grass/ shrub canopy mixtureF = perennial forbSh = shrub canopyT = Tree Canopy Root mat Moss Duff Water M = "root mat" Do not sample, record a stability value of "6" Table 23. Record the soil canopy cover code for each soil sample point. For some canopy covers, no soil sample is collected and a value of "6" is recorded on the data sheet. Figure 28. Samples are 2-3 mm (<1/8 in) thick. Soil Stability Test RIPARIAN NOTE No changes are needed for this method in riparian systems. 1/21/2015 49Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY trimming it to size in the palm of your hand; and/or c) misting the sample area before col- lection (see 3.6). 3.6 If the soil sample is too weakly structured to sample (falls through the sieve), mist it light- ly with deionized water (use an atomizer or equivalent) and then take a sample. Perfume and plastic hair spray bottles work well for this. If the sample still will not hold together, record a “1” on the data sheet. Do not assume that a soil is unstable before spraying. Coarse textured soils and disturbed surfaces may ap- pear unstable when dry but could be stable when wet. 3.7 If the soil surface is covered by a lichen or vis- ibly darkened cyanobacterial crust, include the crust in the sample. Roots may also be in- cluded in the sample. 3.8 Gently place the sample upright in a dry sieve (Figures 26, 27, 32); place sieve in the appro- priate cell of a dry box (Figure 31). Leave box lid open (Figure 31). 4. Optional: collect a subsurface sample (see Step 1). Rules 4.1 Sample directly below the surface sample. 4.2 Use the flat, square (handle) end of the scoop to gently excavate the previous trench (in front of the surface sample) to a depth of 40-50 mm (1 1/2 - 2 in). 4.3 Directly below the surface sample, remove soil so that a “shelf” is created with the top step 25 mm (1 in) below the soil surface (Figure 30). 4.4 Use the scoop to lift out a subsurface sample from below (Figure 30). 4.5 The soil fragment must be 2-3 mm (< 1/8 in) thick and 6-8 mm (1/4 in) in diameter (Fig- ures 28 and 30). 4.6 See steps 3.5-3.6. If you encounter a rock, re- cord “R” and move to the next sample. 4.7 Place the sample upright in a dry sieve; place sieve in appropriate cell of a dry box. Leave box lid open (Figure 32). 2-3 mm 25 mm Figure 29. Excavate trench for subsurface sample Figure 30. Collect subsurface sample. Figure 31. Sample in sieve, drawn to scale. Sample shape may vary from round to square to slightly irregular as shown above. Soil Stability Test 1/21/2015 50 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Soil Stability Test 5. Make sure all surface and subsurface samples are dry. Rules 5.1 Samples must be dry before testing. If samples are not dry after collecting, allow to air dry with the lid open. 5.2 Do not leave lid closed on sunny days. Exces- sive heat can artificially increase or decrease stability. 6. Fill the empty (no sieves) box with deionized or distilled water (Figure 32). Rules 6.1 Fill each compartment to the top. 6.2 The water should be approximately the same temperature as the soil. Figure 32. Place first sample in water. Figure 33. Complete soil stability kit with water and samples. QUALITY ASSURANCE ☐Each data sheet is complete. Observer, recorder, position, vegetation cover category and soil stability values are recorded. ☐Samples are correct diameter and thickness, and are dry at the beginning of the test. ☐Samples are not broken or have not flipped over on the sieve before the test. Re-take a sample if it is accidentally broken by mis-handling. ☐Soil stability values make sense relative to plot observations. NRI • If the NRI data collection method is selected, collect 9 surface samples: • If the plot can be used for ESD documentation, collect 18 surface samples. • 5 samples from the NE/SW transect • 4 samples from the NW/SE transect 1/21/2015 51Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Soil Stability Test Stability class Criteria for assignment to stability class 1 50% of structural integrity lost (melts) within 5 seconds of immersion in water, AND < 10% remains after 5 dipping cycles, OR soil too unstable to sample (falls through sieve). 2 50% of structural integrity lost (melts) 5-30 seconds after immersion AND < 10% remains after 5 dipping cycles. 3 50% of structural integrity lost (melts) 30-300 seconds after immersion, OR < 10% of soil remains on the sieve after five dipping cycles. 4 10–25% of soil remains on the sieve after five dipping cycles. 5 25–75% of soil remains on the sieve after five dipping cycles. 6 75–100% of soil remains on the sieve after five dipping cycles. Table 24. Stability class ratings. Percent soil remaining on the sieve for stability classes 4-6 refers to the percentage of the total volume remaining for the original size of the sample before immersion. See Figure 34 for photos illustrating stability classes 1, 4, 5 and 6. 7. Test the samples. Rules 7.1 Lower the first sieve with the sample into the respective water-filled compartment—upper left corner of sample box to upper left corner of water box (Figure 32). 7.2 From the time the sieve screen touches the wa- ter surface to the time it rests on the bottom of the box, 1 second should elapse. 7.3 Start the stopwatch when the first sample touches the water. Use Table 24 to assign sam- ples to stability classes. 7.4 Follow the sequence of immersions on the data sheet, adding one sample every 15 seconds, re- quiring a total of 10 minutes for 18 samples. Beginners may want to immerse a sample ev- ery 30 seconds, and then dip samples at 30 second intervals. This allows nine samples to be run in 10 minutes, or 20 minutes to test one box of 18 samples 7.5 Observe the fragments from the time the sam- ple hits the water until 5 minutes (300 sec- onds) has elapsed, then assign a stability class based on Table 24. 7.6 After 5 minutes has elapsed for each sample, in sequence, raise each sieve completely out of the water and then lower it to the bottom without touching the bottom of the tray. Re- peat this immersion and dipping a total of five times for each sieve. Do this even if you have already rated the sample a 1, 2 or 3 (it is pos- sible to increase the rating if after sieving, > 10% of soil remains on sieve). Assign a stabil- ity class based on Table 24. 7.7 For the dipping rate, it should take 1 second for each sieve to clear the water’s surface and 1 second to return to near the bottom of the box. The process is strictly timed so dipping 5 times takes 10 seconds, allowing an additional 5 seconds to write the value on the data sheet before processing the next sample. 7.8 Hydrophobic samples (float in water after at- tempting to push under) are rated 6 and cir- cled on the data sheet. 1/21/2015 52 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Figure 34. The photos above illustrate the key steps of testing a soil sample for four different stability rankings. Important note: Original size of peds shown in these samples is 7 mm x 7 mm. The samples may swell or appear larger under water. Be sure to follow the size guidelines (6-8 mm or 1/4 in) in Rule 3.3 and Figure 30. SEQUENCE FOR STABILITY CLASS = 1. SEQUENCE FOR STABILITY CLASS = 4. SEQUENCE FOR STABILITY CLASS = 5. SEQUENCE FOR STABILITY CLASS = 6. Original sample Original sample Original sample Original sample After 5 seconds After 5 seconds After 5 seconds After 5 seconds After 5 minutes After 5 minutes After 5 minutes After 5 minutes After 5 dips After 5 dips After 5 dips After 5 dips Soil Stability Test 1/21/2015 53Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Figure 35. Data form and calculations example for soil surface samples. SOIL STABILITY INDICATOR CALCULATIONS 1. Calculate the average stability for all samples. Rules 1.1 Add together all stability values. Divide this sum by the total number of samples taken. Record this value as the average stability for “All samples” on your data sheet. 2. Calculate the average stability for protected samples (Veg = C or G, F, Sh,T). Rules 2.1 Add together all values that were protected by canopy (Veg = C or G, F, Sh, T). Di- vide this sum by the number of samples in this group. Record this value as the aver- age stability for “Protected samples” on your data sheet. 3. Calculate the average stability for unprotected samples (Veg = NC). Rules 3.1 Add together all stability values that were clas- sified as no canopy (Veg = NC). Divide this sum by the number of samples in this group. Record this value as the average stability for “Unprotected samples.” 4. Averages must be calculated separately for sur- face and subsurface samples. See Figure 35 for an example. Surface Line 1 In time Dip time Class Line 1 In time Dip time Class Line 2 In time Dip time Class Line 2 In time Dip time ClassPosVegPosVegPosVegPosVeg 7 NC 0:00 5:00 3 28 NC 0:45 5:45 3 6 F 1:30 6:30 5 24 G 2:15 7:15 6 14 Sh 0:15 5:15 5 35 Sh 1:00 6:00 4 12 NC 1:45 6:45 1 30 Sh 2:30 7:30 3 21 G 0:30 5:30 6 42 G 1:15 6:15 5 18 Sh 2:00 7:00 4 36 NC 2:45 7:45 1 Notes: Line 2 Position 12 sample collected 1 m SE from original position due to a boulder on the transect Line All samples Protected samples (Samples with Veg = G, F, Sh, or T) Unprotected samples (Samples with Veg = NC) Surface Subsurface Surface Subsurface Surface Subsurface 1 4.3 5.0 3.0 2 3.3 4.5 1.0 Plot Avg.3.8 4.8 2.0 Soil Stability Test 1/21/2015 54 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY * Large increases in water repellency (after a very hot fire) can negatively affect soil and site stability by increasing the amount of runoff water available to erode soils downslope. ** Usually positive, but can be negative for hydrophobic (water-repellent) soils. TYPICAL EFFECT ON EACH ATTRIBUTE OF AN INCREASE IN THE SOIL STABILITY INDICATOR VALUE Indicator Attributes Soil and site stability* Hydrologic function** Biotic integrity All samples  Veg = C  Veg = NC  SOIL STABILITY TEST BASIC INTERPRETATION Soil Stability Test Increases in stability of both surface and sub- surface samples reflect increased soil erosion resis- tance and resilience. Surface stability is correlated with current erosion resistance, while subsurface stability is correlated with resistance following soil disturbance. Sites with average values of 5.5 or higher generally are very resistant to erosion, par- ticularly if there is little bare ground and there are few large gaps. Maximum possible soil stability values may be less than 6 for very coarse sandy soils. High values usually reflect good hydrologic function. This is because stable soils are less likely to disperse and clog soil pores during rainstorms. High stability values are also strongly correlated with soil biotic integrity. Soil organisms make the “glue” that holds soil particles together. In most ecosystems, soil stability values decline first in areas without cover (Veg = NC). In more highly degraded systems, soil stability values also decline in areas with cover (Veg = C or G, F, Sh, T). Use these indicators together with the indica- tors from Line-point intercept and Gap inter- cept to help determine whether observed erosion changes are due to loss of cover, changes in vegeta- tion spatial distribution or reduced soil stability. For more information about how to interpret these indicators, see Volume II, Chapter 21. 1/21/2015 55Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY A plot-level species inventory provides a rapid estimate of species richness. A thorough search of the plot can detect less-frequently occurring species that may not have been recorded in cover measurements (e.g., Line-point intercept). For a more intensive spe- cies richness measurement, see the modified Whitaker species richness method described in Volume II, Chapter 12. MATERIALS • Measuring tapes (transect lengths) • Stopwatch • Pin flags to mark unknown plants • Plant identification keys and books • Four 1.5 m (5 ft) PVC pipes (optional) • Compass • Electronic device for paperless data collection (preferred) OR clipboard, Species Inventory Data Sheet (Appendix B), and pencil(s) • STANDARD METHODS (RULE SET) 1. Set up the species inventory plot. Rules 1.1 The species inventory area is within at least a portion of the area covered by the Line-point intercept transects. 1.2 A square (Figure 36a) or rectangular sub-plot (Figure 36b) shape created by connecting the ends of the plot transects is recommended for a systematic species search. Lay out the tran- sect tape on at least one side of the square or rectangle to define the sub-plot boundaries so that the data recorder can see the boundaries within which to conduct the reconnaissance for species inventory. Record both the size and shape of the plot searched. 1.3 Optional: For compatibility with NRI, the cu- mulative species inventory plot area is 1,641 m2 (17, 662 ft2) (Figure 36c). 1.4 Always inventory the same plot area for all plots within a project and for repeat visits to plots. Figure 36. Three species inventory plot layout options to achieve an area of 1,641 m2: (a) a single square species inventory plot with a side of 40.5 m (132.9 ft), (b) three 10.9 (35.7 ft) x 50 m (164 ft) rectangular sub-plots, and (c) a 22.9 m (75 ft) radius, circular plot. Dashed lines represent the path walked by the observer. Transect 1 Transect 2 40.5 m 40.5 mSearch Transect 1Transect 2 22.9 mSearch 50 m Transect 2 Transect 3 Transect 1 (a) (b) (c) Plot boundary Sub-plot boundary Plot boundary 10.9 28.6 mPLANT SPECIES INVENTORY 1/21/2015 56 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY 2. Systematically and uniformly search the entire plot for 15 minutes. Rules 2.1 Area is searched by one individual, although a recorder may stand off-plot to record data. Do not re-search any areas already searched. 2.2 Area search occurs after Vegetation height, Line-point, and Gap intercept measurements on transects are complete. 2.3 Work from the corners of the plot toward the sub-plot center in a systematic, or zig-zag search pattern (Figure 36). If external bound- ary tapes are not used, it may be helpful to attach a PVC pipe to the end of each transect to identify plot corners, and then use compass bearings to ensure position within the sub- plot. 3. Record each species found within the plot. Rules 3.1 At least 50% of a plant base must be rooted inside the plot boundary to be recorded. 3.2 Record each species found within the plot in the "Species" column of the data sheet using (a) a national standard species code (in the U.S. use the PLANTS database (http://plants. usda.gov), (b) scientific name or (c) common name. Each species is listed only once. 3.3 Mark unknown plant species with a pin flag and return to identify them after the search time has expired. Do not spend any of the 15 minute search time deliberating about species identification, or looking through plant spe- cies lists or books to identify unknowns. As- sign a personal, temporary ID to questionable plants if necessary (e.g., "Yellow Aster 1", "Yel- low Aster 2", "Spikey grass", "Black stemmed shrub", etc.), and write out their full identifi- cations after the 15 minute search period to save time. If field identification is not possible, take geotagged (except for NRI) photographs of the unknown plant. Be sure to include a photo ID card in the photo. If possible, col- lect and press a plant specimen from nearby, but off-plot, for later identification (see Plant Identification, page 14). This specimen needs to include as many potentially identifying el- ements as possible, including leaves, stems, flowers, and fruits. 3.4 If species is not known, use the following codes and add sequential numbers as necessary: AF# = Annual forb (also includes biennials) PF# = Perennial forb AG# = Annual graminoid PG# = Perennial graminoid SH# = Shrub TR# = Tree Plant Species Inventory QUALITY ASSURANCE ☐Each data sheet is complete. Observer, recorder, date, plot name, sub-plot area, sub-plot shape, and search time are recorded. ☐Unknown plants are described according to unknown plant protocols, photographed, and a specimen collected when possible. ☐Data collection team confirms species list is complete and correct. ☐Number and type of species are consistent with plot observations. ☐Boundaries of search area are clearly marked. ☐A recorder, in addition to recording species, can also ensure the observer is moving through the plot quickly enough to cover the entire search area in 15 minutes. 1/21/2015 57Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY SPECIES INVENTORY INDICATOR CALCULATIONS 1. Count the total number of species recorded. Rules 1.1 Only count each species once. 1.2 Count every plant species, even if its identifica- tion is unknown (e.g., PG01, PG02). 1.3 Only include species recorded in other meth- ods (e.g., Line-point intercept, Vegetation height) if (a) they were also captured during the species inventory or (b) the transects are wholly contained within the species inventory sub-plot. 2. Determine functional groups (e.g., shrubs, pe- rennial grasses). Record the number of species in each functional group. 3. Identify potential species of management con- cern for the plot and record presence or absence of these species. SPECIES INVENTORY BASIC INTERPRETATION Species inventories detect the presence of rare or invasive species which may not be detected by cover or density measurements along transects due to their infrequent occurrence, rarity, or recent establishment. This method can identify areas where additional plant surveys are needed. A plot- level species inventory also provides information on species richness, one indicator of biodiversity. Plot biodiversity indicators must be evaluated within the context of the ecological potential of the plot (e.g., as defined by an ecological site description). Consequently species richness, like bare ground and other indicators, cannot be directly compared among sites with different soils and climate. Ecological heterogeneity can also affect rich- ness: a plot that spans several soil types will likely have higher biodiversity than a plot located on a single soil. Similarly, a plot that includes several ecological states on the same or different soils is likely to have more species. Species richness may even be higher in a somewhat disturbed or degraded state than in an undegraded state as invasives colonize, but do not entirely replace spe- cies native to the area. Within-plot comparisons over time must be carefully interpreted for the same reasons. Consequently, caution should be used when comparing plots using species richness as an indi- cator of site biodiversity. Interpretation of species richness should always be made in an ecological context together with indicators derived from Line-point intercept, Gap intercept, and Soil sta- bility. For more information about how to inter- pret these indicators, please see Volume II, Chapter 21. Plant Species Inventory 1/21/2015 58 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Following data collection, data sets must be checked for errors in the process of quality control (QC). Quality control is checking or inspecting something to make sure it has met a pre-defined standard. Anyone can perform QC if they are given a descriptive set of rules, because QC actions only find errors. It is then the responsibility of project personnel (data managers, field crews, local experts, etc.) to determine if errors are correctable or if data must be eliminated. Quality control measures deter- mine the level of completeness, correctness, and consistency of data. General methods are outlined below, while specific QC instructions need to be developed for each project. If data were entered directly into a digital format such as DIMA (http:// jornada.nmsu.edu/monit-assess), skip Steps 3 and 4. Steps 5-8 need to be performed by a local or quali- fied expert or data manager, with the assistance of field crew members. STANDARD METHODS (RULE SET) 1. Check data for completeness. Rules 1.1 Account for all data on all data sheets, plus all photographs. Make a list of missing sheets and photos. Circle or highlight cells on sheets that have obvious missing values. 1.2 On the QA and QC Data Sheet, note miss- ing data and if possible explain why data are missing. 1.3 Check photos to make sure the correct file names were recorded on the plot observation data sheet. 2. Backup your data early and often. Rules 2.1 If data were digitally recorded, make sure the backup is stored on an alternate source such as a second hard drive or backup service. 2.2 If the data were recorded on paper, create PDF files of all data sheets. This can be done by scanning data sheets or by taking a digital photo of each data sheet. Store these images appropriately as a backup. 3. Enter data into a digital format (e.g., Excel spreadsheet or Access database). Rules 3.1 Make sure data entry procedures are under- stood. Clarify with the project manager the specific details that might be unique to the project's data. 3.2 One hour is the maximum suggested time to enter data in one sitting. Move away from the computer after that to break up the monoto- ny of data entry. 3.3 Because data entry errors will be checked later, it is more efficient for one person to enter data into electronic media, and not have one person reading aloud while the other types. 3.4 Frequently save data to the hard drive during data entry, and to an external hard drive if possible. 3.5 If indecipherable or questionable data are found on paper data sheets, mark them with a highlighter so they can be addressed later by the field technician who collected them. 3.6 On the bottom of each paper data sheet, write "Entered", the day's date, and initials of the data entry person. 4. Check for data entry errors. Rules 4.1 Before beginning data error-checking, make sure everyone understands how data should have been entered for each method. Clarify with the project manager the specific details that might be unique to the project data. 4.2 Always error-check data as a two-person team. If possible, the person that entered the data should not be one of the two error-checkers. 4.3 One person reads the paper data sheet out loud to the person checking data at the computer; not the other way around. 4.4 One hundred percent of all entered data are recited again and checked for errors. 4.5 A maximum of one hour should be spent er- ror-checking data in a single sitting. Move away from the computer as a break. 4.6 If indecipherable or questionable data are DATA ENTRY AND QUALITY CONTROL 1/21/2015 59Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY found on paper data sheets, mark them with a highlighter so they can be addressed later by the field technician who collected them. 4.7 On the bottom of each paper data sheet, write “Error checked”, the day's date and both indi- viduals' initials. 5. Update unknown plant species if identified from a sample specimen, and maintain the proj- ect species code standards. Both digital and pa- per records need to be updated. 6. Map GPS locations collected in the field and compare them to the pre-selected sample loca- tions. Rules 6.1 Measure distances between points on a map- ping program. Distances need to match those recorded in the field, within an acceptable range defined by the project. 7. Create data summary reports in graph or table formats, depending on the method (see Table 25). Rules 7.1 Compare the indicator values to the range of expected values for the ecosystem and ecologi- cal condition of the plot. 7.2 Look for outliers in the data. If found, examine the raw data for incorrectly entered values. 8. Complete plot metadata sheet. Include a brief description of QC procedures and document data set errors. 9. Errors detected in quality control must be doc- umented but most cannot be corrected unless plant specimens, photographs, or specific field notes can substantiate the correction. Data Entry and Quality Control 1/21/2015 60 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY METHOD DATA SUMMARY CALCULATION Line-point intercept Species list Summarize list of species detected in Line-point intercept Percent bare ground [(# of points with "N" in the top canopy, empty lower canopies, and Soil surface = "Soil") ÷ (# of points)] x 100 Percent foliar cover [(# of points with a plant code in the top layer) ÷ (# of points)] x 100 Percent foliar cover by species [(# of points with at least one hit of Species A) ÷ (# of points)] x 100 Percent basal cover [(# of basal vegetation hits) ÷ (# of points)] x 100 Percent litter cover [(# of points with at least one hit of litter) ÷ (# of points)] x 100 Percent rock fragment cover [(# of rock fragment hits) ÷ (# of points)] x 100 Vegetation height Average height by group (woody and herbaceous) [(Sum of woody vegetation heights) ÷ (# of points)] [(Sum of herbaceous vegetation heights) ÷ (# of points)] Average height by species (if applicable) [(Sum of Species A heights) ÷ (# of points of Species A)] x 100 Gap intercept Number of gaps of different size classes for canopy and basal gap # of gaps in size class A Percent of gaps in different size classes for canopy and basal gap [(Sum of gaps in size class A) ÷ (total length of line)] x 100 Soil stability Average surface soil stability [(Sum of all surface soil stability values) ÷ (# of samples)] Average soil stability for protected samples [(Sum of soil stability values from protected samples) ÷ (# of samples protected samples)] Average soil stability for unprotected samples [(Sum of soil stability values from unprotected samples) ÷ (# of unprotected samples)] Average subsurface soil stability [(Sum of subsurface soil stability values) ÷ (# of subsurface samples)] Species inventory Species list Summarize list of species detected in Species inventory Table 25. Example of plot data summaries by method used in quality control. Data Entry and Quality Control 1/21/2015 61Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY APPENDIX A: ADDITIONAL RESOURCES FOR PLOT CHARACTERIZATION SOIL TEXTURE CHART Place approximately 25 g rams in palm. Add water dropwise and knead the soil to break down all aggregates. Soil is at the proper consistency when plastic and moldable, like moist putty. Does soil remain in a ball when squeezed?Is the soil too dry?Is the soil too wet?Sand Place ball of soil between thumb and forefinger, gently push the soil with the thumb, squeezing it upw ard into a r ibbon. For m a r ibbon of uniform thickness and width. Allow the r ibbon to emerge and extend over the forefinger, breaking from its own weight. Does the soil f orm a r ibbon?Loam y Sand Does soil mak e a w eak ribbon less than 1 inch long before breaking? Does soil mak e a ribbon 1 inch long bef ore breaking? Does soil make a strong ribbon 2 inches or longer bef ore breaking? Excessiv ely w et a small pinch of soil in palm and rub with forefinger. Sandy Loam Silt Loam Loam Sandy Cla y Loam Silt y Clay Loam Clay Loam Sandy Cla y Silt y Cla y Cla y Does soil feel ver y gritty? Neither gritty nor smooth? Does soil feel ver y gritty? Does soil feel ver y smooth? Neither gritty nor smooth? Does soil feel ver y gritty? Does soil feel ver y smooth? Neither gritty nor smooth? Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Does soil feel ver y smooth? Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No Add dry soil to soak up water No No Yes Yes NoNo No No No No YesYes 1/21/2015 62 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Appendix A: Additional resources for plot characterization SOIL TEXTURE TRIANGLE 1/21/2015 63Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY APPENDIX B: DATA SHEETS The data sheets which accompany the methods described in this Core Methods volume are: • Equipment Checklist • Plot Checklist • Unknown Plant Record • QA and QC • Plot Characterization • Plot Observation • Photo points • Line-point intercept • Line-point intercept with height • Vegetation height • Gap intercept • Soil stability • Species inventory Electronic data forms and the Database for Inventory, Monitoring, and Assessment (DIMA) are available at http://jornada.nmsu.edu/monit-assess. 1/21/2015 64 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY EQUIPMENT CHECKLIST All items included in this list are required each time measurements are made, except for those items found only in the "Plot Characterization Equipment" list. Add columns for supplementary methods and rows for additional equipment. PLOT ESTABLISHMENT AND DESCRIPTION EQUIPMENT HAVE? Clinometer Hammer for pounding in stakes Metal tape measure (for soil depth) Rebar (1 m or 3 ft) with cap or other stakes for marking transect ends Shovel (sharpshooter or tile spade preferred) Soil knife Atomizer/spray bottle with clean water 10 cm (4 inch) or larger, 2 mm sieve with pan or receptacle tray 500 ml plastic measuring cup with volume markings Small hand towel 1 M HCl (hydrochloric acid) for effervescence (only needed where soil carbonates used for soil identification). Caution: HCl can cause burns. If used, obtain a MSDS (Materials Safety Data Sheet) and follow all safety guidelines. Munsell soil color chart (optional) Ecological site descriptions and soil map unit descriptions (where available) BASIC EQUIPMENT (NEEDED FOR NEARLY ALL DATA COLLECTION) The Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna: Core Methods Volume Compass GPS unit with waypoints entered, or map of monitoring plots Keys and gate combinations Landowner notified (if necessary) Measuring tape (transect length) - at least 1, ideally 3 for "spoke" layout Steel stakes for tape anchors (2-6) Camera (5 megapixel minimum) Photo ID board or Photo ID card with thick marking pen Electronic device for paperless data recording (preferred) OR clipboard, data sheets, pencils Digital resources--(e.g., plant guides, method guides, maps) ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR EACH MEASUREMENT/METHOD EQUIPMENT PHOTO POINTS LINE-POINT INTERCEPT VEG. HEIGHT GAP INTERCEPT SOIL STABILITY TEST SPECIES INVENTORY OTHER OTHER PVC pole: 1.5 m (5 ft) long X Pin flag or other pointer (tip <1 mm [1/25 in] diameter) X Meter stick, pinning stake or other stiff stick or rod X X 30 cm (12 in) diam. disc X Soil stability kit X Deionized water: 1 liter (32 oz) per test (18 samples) X Stopwatch X X Laser pointer (optional) Other 1/21/2015 65Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY PLOT CHECKLIST To be completed at each plot after methods are complete ☐Plot Characterization ☐Plot Observation ☐Photo points # of photos ______ ☐Line-point intercept Transect % bare ground % total foliar cover % between plant ground cover ☐Vegetation height Transect Woody Ht. Min Woody Ht. Max Herbaceous Ht. Min Herbaceous Ht. Max ☐Gap intercept Transect % 25-50 cm % 51-100 cm % 101-200 cm % >200 cm ☐Soil stability All samples Avg.Protect Surface Avg.Unprotected Surface Avg. ☐Species inventory # of species ______ Comments 1/21/2015 66 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPYProject:Field Season: Collector(s):Page ____ of ____Unknown Plant IDPlant CodeScientific NameFamilyCommon NamePlot IDNotesUNKNOWN PLANT TRACKING SHEETData entry Date Error check Date 1/21/2015 67Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL DATA SHEET Plot: Date Monitored: Methods Performed: PeopleData Manager(s): Data Recorder(s)/Observer(s): Data Entry: Error Check: Name:Calibration Date: QA and QC Notes: 1/21/2015 68 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Site:Ownership:Establishment Date: Plot ID:Visit Date: Observer(s): GPS Coordinate System: Datum :Zone (if applicable):Elevation ☐m ☐ftLatitudeLongitude Plot Center Transect Azimuth Length ☐m ☐ft Transect Start Slope (%)Latitude*Longitude Aspect Directions to the plot (or location where GPS track log is stored): Draw the plot (include transect locations relative to plot center, soil pit location, roads, power lines, etc.). Draw on back of sheet if needed: Landscape Unit/Position ☐ Hill/Mountain1 ☐ Summit2 ☐ Shoulder3 ☐ Backslope4 ☐ Alluvial Fan5 ☐ Terrace6 ☐ Tread7 ☐ Riser8 ☐ Floodplain/Basin9 ☐ Flat/Plain10 ☐ Playa11 ☐ Dunes12 ☐ Other - Soil Horizon Depth** ☐cm ☐in Rock fragment type & vol (%) Texture % Clay Eff. Color ☐dry ☐moist Structure NotesGravel 2-76 mm Cobbles 76-250 mm Stones 250-600 mm - - - - - - - Map Unit Component:Ecological Site: * Grey text indicates that the information is recommended but not required. Data availability and observer qualifications will determine if the boxes in grey are completed. * *If soil horizon identification is not possible, use the following standard depths: 0-1 cm (0-0.5 in), 1-10 cm (0.5-4 in), 10-20 cm (4-8 in),20-50 cm (8-20 in), 50-70 cm (20-28 in). PLOT CHARACTERIZATION DATA SHEET Complete when plot is established 1 5 6 9 10 11 12 2 3 4 7 8 Vertical (Down) Slope Shape ☐Convex ☐Concave ☐Linear \ Horizontal (Across) Slope Shape ☐Convex ) ☐Concave ( ☐Linear))\Data entry Date Error check Date Page of 1/21/2015 69Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Complete each time data are recorded at each plot Describe management history (e.g., grazing plan, prescribed fire, shrub control, seeding, plowing, water units): Describe wildlife use (e.g., type, species identified, and condition): Describe livestock use (e.g., species, evidence, and intensity): Describe off-site influences (e.g., transmission lines, mines, roads): Additional visible disturbances and remarks (e.g., invasive species, evidence of fire, pests and pathogens): Recent Weather Precip. ☐cm ☐in Data Source Past 12 Months ☐ Drought ☐ Normal ☐ Wet Past 13 - 24 Months ☐ Drought ☐ Normal ☐ Wet Signs of Erosion Class 5 Class 4 Class 3 Class 2 Class 1 Rills ☐ Widespread (>10) AND long (>2') ☐ Common (>5) AND long (>2') ☐ Common (>5) OR long (>2') ☐ Very few (<5) AND short (<2`)☐ None Gullies ☐ Active headcut, unstable sides ☐ Active headcut, par- tially stable sides ☐ Active headcut, stable sides ☐ Inactive. Stable throughout ☐ None Pedestals ☐ Widespread throughout area. Common exposed roots ☐ Common in flow paths. Occasional exposed roots. ☐ Common in flow paths. Roots rarely exposed ☐ Few in flow paths and interspaces only. No exposed roots ☐ None Deposition/Runoff ☐ Dominates the plot.☐ Widespread ☐ Common ☐ Rare ☐ None Water Flow Patterns ☐ Very long (50'); numerous; unstable with active erosion; almost always connected ☐ Long (20-50'), very common, and usually connected ☐ Moderately long (5-20'), rare, common, and often connected ☐ Very short (<5'), rare, and occasionally connected ☐ None Sheet Erosion ☐ Dominates the plot ☐ Widespread ☐ Common ☐ Rare ☐ None Other:☐ Dominates the plot ☐ Widespread ☐ Common ☐ Rare ☐ None Observer(s):Visit Date: Data collection methods, citations, and modifications: Plot Photos Photo # Description PLOT OBSERVATION DATA SHEET Data entry Date Error check Date Page of 1/21/2015 70 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Site: Date: Plot: Line #: Direction: Photo ID Card 1/21/2015 71Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Page of Plot: Line: Observer: Recorder: Azimuth: Date: Intercept (Point) Spacing Interval: ☐ cm ☐ in PT.TOP LAYER LOWER LAYERS SOIL SURFACE PT.TOP LAYER LOWER LAYERS SOIL SURFACECODE 1 CODE 2 CODE 3 CODE 1 CODE 2 CODE 3 1 26 2 27 3 28 4 29 5 30 6 31 7 32 8 33 9 34 10 35 11 36 12 37 13 38 14 39 15 40 16 41 17 42 18 43 19 44 20 45 21 46 22 47 23 48 24 49 25 50 LINE-POINT INTERCEPT DATA SHEET % foliar cover = top layer pts (1st col) x 2 = % % bare ground* = pts (w/N over S) x 2 = % % basal cover = plant base pts (last col) x 2 = % Top layer codes: Species code, common name, or N (no cover). Lower layers codes: Species code, common name, HL (herbaceous litter), WL (woody litter, > 5 mm (~1/4 in) diameter), NL (non-vegetative litter), VL (vagrant lichen). * For NRI, bare ground occurs ONLY when Top layer = N, Lower layers are empty (no litter), and Soil surface = S or CY. Shaded cells for calculations UNKNOWN SPECIES CODES: AF#=annual forb PF#=perennial forb AG#=annual graminoid PG#=perennial graminoid SH#=shrub TR#=tree SOIL SURFACE (DO NOT USE LITTER): R =Rock** (≥ 5 mm or ~ 1/4 in diameter) BR =Bedrock D =Duff M =Moss LC =Visible lichen on soil S =Soil Data entry Date Error check Date ** Optional: use rock fragment classes in place of "R": GR (5-76 mm), CB (76-250 mm), ST (250 mm-600 mm), BY (>600 mm) 1/21/2015 72 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Page of Plot: Line: Observer: Recorder: Azimuth: Date: Intercept (Point) Spacing Interval: ☐ cm ☐in Height: ☐ cm ☐in PT.TOP LAYER HT.LOWER LAYERS SOIL SURFACE PT.TOP LAYER HT.LOWER LAYERS SOIL SURFACE CODE 1 CODE 2 CODE 3 CODE 1 CODE 2 CODE 3 1 26 2 27 3 28 4 29 5 30 6 31 7 32 8 33 9 34 10 35 11 36 12 37 13 38 14 39 15 40 16 41 17 42 18 43 19 44 20 45 21 46 22 47 23 48 24 49 25 50 LINE-POINT INTERCEPT WITH HEIGHT DATA SHEET WOODY WOODY HERB.HERB. Shaded cells for calculations % foliar cover = top layer pts (1st col) x 2 = % % bare ground* = pts (w/N over S) x 2 = % % basal cover = plant base pts (last col) x 2 = % Top layer codes: Species code, common name, or N (no cover). Lower layers codes: Species code, common name, HL (herbaceous litter), WL (woody litter, > 5 mm (~1/4 in) diameter), NL (non-vegetative litter), VL (vagrant lichen). * For NRI, bare ground occurs ONLY when Top layer = N, Lower layers are empty (no litter), and Soil surface = S or CY. UNKNOWN SPECIES CODES: AF#=annual forb PF#=perennial forb AG#=annual graminoid PG#=perennial graminoid SH#=shrub TR#=tree SOIL SURFACE (DO NOT USE LITTER): R =Rock** (≥ 5 mm or ~ 1/4 in diameter) BR =Bedrock D =Duff M =Moss LC =Visible lichen on soil S =Soil Data entry Date Error check Date ** Optional: use rock fragment classes in place of "R": GR (5-76 mm), CB (76-250 mm), ST (250 mm-600 mm), BY (>600 mm) 1/21/2015 73Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Page of Plot: Line: Observer: Recorder: Azimuth: Date: Intercept (Point) Spacing Interval: ☐ cm ☐in Height: ☐ cm ☐in Data entry Date Error check Date VEGETATION HEIGHT DATA SHEET POINT SPECIES WOODY HT SPECIES HERBACEOUS HT Average vegetation height = ____________________Average woody height = __________________________ Average herbaceous height = ___________________ 1/21/2015 74 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY Circle one: includes only perennial vegetation OR includes annual and perennial vegetation Canopy gaps: Minimum size = _____ ☐cm ☐ft Basal gaps: Minimum size = _____ ☐cm ☐ft Start (cm/ft) End (cm/ft) Gap (cm)25-50 51-100 101-200 > 200 Start (cm/ft) End (cm/ft) Gap (cm)25-50 51-100 101-200 > 200 size (ft)1-2 2.1-3 3.1-6 > 6 size (ft)1-2 2.1-3 3.1-6 > 6 SUM (cm/ft)SUM (cm/ft) LINE LENGTH (cm/ft)LINE LENGTH (cm/ft) SUM ÷ LINE LENGTH SUM ÷ LINE LENGTH x 100 x 100 x 100 x 100 x 100 x 100 x 100 x 100 % of line in gaps % of line in gaps Example: If SUM 25-50 = 1,573, Line Length = 5,000 cm, then % of line in gaps 25-50 cm = 100 x (SUM 25-50/line length) = 100 x (1,573/5,000) = 31.5%. GAP INTERCEPT DATA SHEET Plot: Line: Observer: Recorder: Azimuth: Date: Line length: ☐ m ☐ ft Shaded cells for calculations Data entry Date Error check Date Page of 1/21/2015 75Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPYShaded cells for calculationsData entry Date Error check Date SOIL STABILITY TEST DATA SHEETVeg = NC (no perennial canopy), G (grass or grass/shrub mix), F (forb), Sh (shrub), T (tree). # = Stability value (1-6). Circle value if samples are hydrophobic.SurfaceLine ___IntimeDip timeClassLine ___IntimeDip timeClassLine ___In timeDip timeClassLine ___In timeDip timeClassLine ___IntimeDip timeClassLine ___IntimeDip timeClassPosVegPosVegPosVegPosVegPosVegPosVeg0:005:000:455:451:306:302:157:153:008:003:458:450:155:151:006:001:456:452:307:303:158:154:009:000:305:301:156:152:007:002:457:453:308:304:159:15Notes: SubsurfaceLine ___IntimeDip timeClassLine ___IntimeDip timeClassLine ___In timeDip timeClassLine ___In timeDip timeClassLine ___IntimeDip timeClassLine ___IntimeDip timeClassPosVegPosVegPosVegPosVegPosVegPosVeg0:005:000:455:451:306:302:157:153:008:003:458:450:155:151:006:001:456:452:307:303:158:154:009:000:305:301:156:152:007:002:457:453:308:304:159:15Notes: Average Soil Stability = Sum of Rankings (i.e., #) / Total Number of Samples TakenLineAll samplesProtected samples(Samples with Veg = G, F, Sh, or T)Unprotected samples(Samples with Veg = NC)SurfaceSubsurfaceSurfaceSubsurfaceSurfaceSubsurfacePlot Avg.Plot Observer Recorder Date Page of 1/21/2015 76 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY NO.SPECIES FUNCTIONAL GROUP NOTES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 SPECIES INVENTORY DATA SHEET Total number of species: Non-natives spp. Rare species # Tree spp. # Shrub spp. # Grass spp. # Forb spp. # Perennial spp. ________ # Annual/Biennial spp. ________ Page of Search Time: Plot: Observer: Recorder: Date: Plot Shape: Inventory Area: ☐ m2 ☐ ft2 Data entry Date Error check Date Notes (e.g., 15 minute search captured 75% of species diversity) 1/21/2015 77Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY 1/21/2015 78 Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland and Savanna Ecosystems 2nd Edition ADVANCE COPY 1 Vegetation Monitoring Program Utilizing Assessment, Inventory and Monitoring (AIM) Strategy Recorded Within Database for Inventory, Monitoring and Assessment (DIMA) 2 Contents Basic DIMA Concepts: ........................................................................................................................................................... 2 Geographic Information........................................................................................................................................... 3 Species Lists ............................................................................................................................................................. 3 Running DIMA with different versions of Access ..................................................................................................... 4 Add names to the people list ................................................................................................................................... 4 Creating Species Lists ............................................................................................................................................... 7 Creating a Site ....................................................................................................................................................................... 9 Creating Plots within a Site .............................................................................................................................................. 10 Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................................... 15 Entering Field Data ........................................................................................................................................................... 15 Line-point Intercept with Height ........................................................................................................................ 16 Plot-level Species Richness .................................................................................................................................... 19 Gap Intercept (Canopy and/or Basal)..................................................................................................................... 21 Plant Density .......................................................................................................................................................... 23 Data Deliverables ................................................................................................................................................................ 24 Quality Control using DIMA ................................................................................................................................................ 25 1 Resources: The Landscape Toolbox – is a joint project between the USDA Agricultural Research Service’s Jornada Experimental Range and the Idaho Chapter of The Nature Conservancy. • Getting Started in DIMA (Fieldwork) o http://www.landscapetoolbox.org/training/webinars/ • Monitoring Manual, 2nd Edition o http://www.landscapetoolbox.org/manuals/monitoring-manual/ • Tutorials for Using DIMA o http://www.landscapetoolbox.org/training/resources/tutorials-for-using-dima/ o Entering field data o Quality control using DIMA o Core Indicator Reports o Troubleshooting DIMA 2 Basic DIMA Concepts The Database for Inventory, Monitoring and Assessment (DIMA) is a highly-customized Microsoft Access database for collecting data electronically in the field and for organizing, storing, and reporting those data for vegetation monitoring and assessment of reclamation sites. DIMA is particularly well suited to collecting data for the BLM’s Assessment, Inventory and Monitoring (AIM) Strategy following the BLM Core Indicators and Methods. It is much easier to use DIMA if you have a basic understanding of what data are being stored in it and how they are organized. Sites, Plots and Lines There are three basic objects within DIMA: sites, plots, and lines (i.e., transects). A Site is a large geographic unit that defines a management area of interest, and you must create at least one site before you can enter data. For Caerus vegetation monitoring purposes, a site is the well pad, facility, road or pipeline ROW. In DIMA, sites have only a minimal set of information associated with them and do not have any explicit geographic information – they are just used as a way to organize the data. A Plot is an area within a site where measurements are made. There are usually several or many plots per site. Plots contain specific information, such as; directions for how to get there, a species list, and precise geographic coordinates. Certain methods such as species richness and soil sampling pertain to the plot itself. For Caerus vegetation monitoring purposes, a plot is either the cut slope, fill slope or transition zone between the cut and fill slopes. A Line or Transect is a sub-measurement of a plot, and there can be multiple transects per plot. For many indicators (e.g., vegetation cover or composition), it is not possible to reliably measure or estimate the indicator for the entire plot at once. In this case it is common to sample smaller areas within a plot and use those measurements to estimate the indicator’s value for the entire plot. One way of sub-sampling the plot is with measurements along transects or sub-plots along transects. 3 Methods A method is a specific technique used to estimate the value of an indicator. For the AIM strategy, the methods are: Line-point intercept with vegetation height, plot-level species inventory, canopy gap intercept, and soil stability. Caerus does not require a soil stability evaluation during the vegetation monitoring process. Of these methods, line-point intercept with height and canopy-gap intercept are performed along transects. The plot- level species inventory and soil stability methods are performed at the plot level. Geographic Information In DIMA, precise geographic coordinates can be recorded for plot centers and for the start and stop locations of transects. When collecting data following the AIM protocol, it is sufficient to record only the plot center location. DIMA can be set up to interface directly with a GPS unit for automated capture of coordinate values. Alternatively, the coordinate values can be typed in. While DIMA will allow you to record locations using any coordinate system, it is highly recommended that you 1) use the same coordinate system for all your locations, and 2) use the geographic (decimal degrees) coordinate system with the WGS84 datum. This will ensure that locations are consistently recorded and make it easier to merge datasets from different areas. Species Lists Collecting data in the field is fast and easy using DIMA because expected species lists can be loaded. Caerus has preloaded into DIMA the Colorado species list. When you create a plot, you can then copy the Colorado species lists or copy the species list from another plot. Don’t worry about having an exhaustive species list for your plot before you start – you can always add plants while you’re recording data without too much of an interruption. The more plots you visit, the better your species lists will get and the faster DIMA will be to use in the field. Tips for successfully using DIMA Close vs. Cancel buttons On many of the DIMA forms, you will notice buttons that say “Close” or “Cancel” but rarely buttons that say “OK” or “Apply.” This can be confusing to some users. • Close will save the data on the current form and close it, returning you to the previous form. • Cancel will close the current form without saving any data on the form 4 Running DIMA with different versions of Access DIMA was developed for Access 2003. It will run without problem on Access 2007, but there are some compatibility issues with Access 2010. The BLM is currently working through these problems and releasing incremental updates to DIMA as problems are fixed. For all of the Access 2010 problems, however, Access may crash if certain buttons are clicked, but this DOES NOT CAUSE DATA LOSS OR CORRUPTION. Using a GPS with DIMA and Windows 7 The GPSTools.dll file that creates a connection between DIMA and an attached GPS unit was written for Windows XP. In order to use the GPS tools with DIMA on a computer with a Windows 7 operating system, you will need to run Access in “XP Compatibility mode.” For more information, see http://windows.microsoft.com/en-US/windows-vista/Make-older-programs-run-in-this-version-of-Windows The DIMA Home Page Pre-Field DIMA Work Add names to the people list DIMA records the names of people who have participated in data collection, review, and editing. When using DIMA in the field, the data entry forms will be locked until the people who are observing and recording the data are specified. The names and contact information of people using DIMA should be entered before going out in the field. 5 1. Click Support Tables from the DIMA Home Page 2. Click the People button from the Support Tables page 3. Click New to add a person to the database. 6 4. Fill in information about the person who will be using DIMA and their roles. At a minimum, a name must be provided. Click Close when finished to save the information and return to the People Listing page. 5. To edit or delete an existing person listing, click on the square button to the left of the person’s name. 6. Click Close on this page and the Support Tables page to return to the DIMA Home Page. 7 Creating Species Lists List of species found at particular sites or for plant communities are a central part of the DIMA database. As you collect more and more data for plots in a site, the species lists for that site will become more complete and you can just copy lists between similar plots (this saves a lot of time). Initially, though, it pays to spend some time setting up a good species list to use for a plot. This section covers creating a community species list, but the technique is the same if you are creating a plot species list from scratch within the Plot Description page. 1. Click on Support Tables from the DIMA Home Page 2. Click on the Community Species Lists button. 3. Click on the New List button to create a new species list. In the Plant Community Species List page, give the list a name. You are now ready to start adding species to the list. 4. Enter the plant species code in the Add Code(s) text box. You can enter multiple plant codes at once by separating them with semicolons (DO NOT INCLUDE SPACES BETWEEN THE CODES). Click Add to add the plant species to the species list. Note that you must use the official plant codes recognized in the USDA PLANTS Database. 8 5. If you do not know the plant species codes or need to search for plant species, click the search species/add multiple button. This will open a window where you can search by plant code, scientific name, or common name. 6. Type the first letters of a name or plant code in the Beginning with: text box and click Go. This will return a list of matching plants. 7. Find the species you’re looking for and click the square button to the left of its name to add it to the Selected codes: list at the top. 9 8. Search for additional plants and click on their square buttons to add them to the selected codes list. 9. When you are finished adding codes, click OK to add these species to your species list. 10. From the Plant Community Species List, you can do additional operations like copying a list from an existing plot, sorting the species in the list to put common species at the top, or delete species from the list. 11. Click Close when you are finished to save the list and return to the Support Tables page. Creating a Site In order to collect data on a plot or transect in DIMA, a site must first be created. Caerus has prepopulated the list of Sites in DIMA. If you have to add an additional location, this is a simple process that can either be done in the office or in the field. A plot can only be associated with a single site. Tags can be used in addition to the site if you need to categorize a plot multiple ways. All the existing sites in a DIMA database are listed in the Quick Data View window of the DIMA Home Page. 1. Click the New Site button from the DIMA Home Page. 2. Provide at least a Site ID and a Site Name. • Caerus’ required Nomenclature: Facility name (found on the provided asset list). Examples: J5 or Divide Creek Unit 26 10 3. Click Close when you are finished to save and close the form and return to the DIMA Home Page. In-field DIMA Work Creating Plots within a Site Once sites have been created, you can then create plots and begin recording data in the field. The New Plot button on the DIMA Home Page will only become active when you have selected a site in the Data Quick View window. 11 1. Click the New Plot button in the DIMA Home Page 2. Specify the number of transects that will be associated with this plot (for Caerus’ purposes, when conducting the Single Line Transect on Interim Reclaim locations 1 transect per plot is sufficient. For Final Reclaims you will implement the Spoke Design that has 3 associated transects) and click OK. This will automatically create transects and associate them with the plot you are creating. 3. Give the plot an ID number in the Plot Description Page and fill in any other attributes in the General fields (e.g., county, state, ecological site). Provide text directions to the plot also. • Caerus’ required Nomenclature: Facility name I.R. cut, Facility name I.R. fill, Facility name I.R. transition area, Facility name I.R. road, Facility name F.R., Facility name F.R. pipeline, Facility name F.R. road o I.R. = Interim Reclaimed o F.R. = Final Reclaimed Off County Road 215 J25W I.R. Cut The yellow boxes areas that can be populated in the office. The red boxes areas not required to be filled in. The green boxes are areas to be filled out in the field. 12 4. Click on the GPS/Lines button and record the GPS coordinates for the center of the well pad, road or pipeline. Make sure to record the coordinate system and datum as well. If you transcribe the coordinates, double check them for error. The start and end points will be recorded for each transect line, along with the azimuth. 5. Click on the Disturbances/Mgt History button to record current site observations and disturbance impacts. J25W I.R. Cut 13 6. Click on the Species Lists button to create a species list to use for data collection at this site. You can either create a new list by selecting species from the state species list or copy an existing list from another plot or one of the DIMA community species lists you created previously. See the section above on creating species lists for more information. • If you are unable to identify a plant in the field: o Click add generic code  Add as many generic codes as you need per plot  Take a sample of plant back to office to determine what it is • Admin tools – are used to replace generic code with the species code by plot • Copy Species List from this Plot: o Allows you to copy over other plot lists easily • Search species / add multiple o Click button to the left to select multiples o Click OK o Click Add • Search by Code: 14 • Double click each species that is in the Plot Species List to review the Scientific and Common Name. • Click the Maintain Species “Stabilization” and/or “Woody” button to add the following: o Species Definition:  Add growth habit and duration 15 7. Click Close to save the plot information and return to the DIMA Home Page. Procedure • Line-point Method will be used on all Interim Reclaims, roads and pipelines • Spoke Method will be used on all Final Reclaims o Do not use when there is strong evidence of seed rows. Preferred method is then Line-point. • 25-meter-long transects, with 50 cm intervals • Every 2.5 meters, or 5th point, take vegetation height measurement specifying species • Identify canopy gaps greater than 20 cm along transect • Plant Species Inventory (species richness) is completed during the 15-minute plot walk. Walking pattern will vary based on the monitoring method. Entering Field Data The process for entering data for any of the methods starts the same way, by selecting a plot and specifying the method for entering the data. 1. Click the Enter/Edit Data button to open the Enter/Edit Data page 16 2. Select the site and plot you want to enter data for and select the method being used to collect the data. The list at the bottom of the page will be blank if there are no data already collected for the method you selected. Once data have been collected at a plot, summaries of the data will be displayed. 3. Click the New button to start collecting data for the selected method. The following sections describe data entry for each method separately. Line-point Intercept with Height After clicking New on the Enter/Edit Data page, you must first specify the plot-default values for line-point intercept and then start entering the data. 1. Verify the correct values for the line-point intercept attributes (e.g., metric or English units, line length, point spacing interval). 17 2. Set the Height Option to “ad hoc”. This will allow you to enter height information. Caerus requires at 2.5 meters, or 5th point, take vegetation height measurements and specify species. 3. Click OK to proceed to the data entry screen. 4. Specify the transect number, recorder, and observer. The data entry controls on this form will be locked until these three attributes are filled in. 5. You can enter LPI data directly in this screen by using the drop-down boxes that correspond to the point along the transect (Pos) and the canopy layer (e.g., Top, Lower Code 1, Soil Surface). Refer to the Monitoring Manual (Herrick et al. 2009) for details on how data should be collected and recorded. Heights for each canopy layer may be recorded as well. While this default form is convenient for viewing and quickly verifying LPI data, it is cumbersome for actually entering the data. The Quick Data Entry form works much better for entering LPI data in the field. 18 6. Click on the Quick Data Entry button to open the quick data editor. The quick data editor is organized very differently from the standard LPI form. The page displayed on the Quick Data Editor corresponds to a single point along the transect. The point (position) number is displayed at the top-left of the page. 7. Click on plant species codes to add them to the current point’s data record. If you only hit soil (S), your top layer must be “None”. If plant canopies are encountered, a top canopy must be specified and then additional canopy layers in order from one to four. 8. Clicking on a plant species code will add it to the Current Data box for that layer and promote it to the top of the species list. Over time, the most common species will tend to be toward the top of the lists. 9. Click Next to go to the next LPI point on the transect. You can use the Next, Previous, and Go to position # controls to navigate to different points along the transect. • The “Same As Last” button will copy the previous hits to the next position. 10. Record the height of the different canopy layers. Record Woody and Herbaceous Species every 2.5 meters or every 5th point. They are measured in centimeters. You must enter a zero (0) if there is no Woody or Herbaceous Species present. 11. Click on the Modify Plot’s Species List button if you encounter a species that is not in the plant list. You can modify the plot species list and add new species encountered. 12. Click Help on Codes for explanation of the standard LPI codes (e.g., L, BR, S, R). 19 13. Click on the square button below each canopy layer data box to clear the data entry for that canopy layer. 14. Click Close when you have recorded data for all points along the transect. This will return you to the standard LPI form. 15. Click Close when you are done entering the LPI data for that transect to return to the Enter/Edit Data page. • If not, all points have been collected, a warning will appear: 16. Repeat these steps, if required, for the additional transects. • You will only have one (1) transect per plot for the Single Line Design for Interim Reclaims. • You will have three (3) transects per Spoke Design. There will only be a single plot for Final Reclaims. Plot-level Species Richness The total list of species occurring on a plot is one of the core indicators of the AIM strategy. This is accomplished by a plot-level inventory after the LPI data have been collected. 1. Select the Species Richness method and the appropriate site and plot in the Enter/Edit Data page. 2. Click New to create a species richness record for the plot. This will open the richness Plot Defaults page. 3. Choose “Custom 2” from the Method drop-down list and set the # of Sub-Plots to “1”. Check the box under Container Sub-Plot, change the shape based on the below guidance: • Spoke o Shape:  Circle – add dimensions  Add the dimensions of the sub-plot – radius of the circle o Process:  Walk the arc between the lines for 15 minutes • Single Line o Shape:  Rectangle – add dimensions  Add the dimensions of the sub-plot – length of sides 20 o Process:  Walk back and forth along the transect for 15 minutes 4. Click OK to open the Richness data page. 5. Enter the Recorder, Observer, and Line. The data entry fields on the form will be locked until these are filled in. In the case of the AIM protocol, richness is estimated at the plot level, and not for individual transects. In this case, just choose line (transect) 1 for recording the richness data, but actually count species over the entire plot. 1. Utilize the timer to track monitoring time. 6. Click on species in the plot species list (center column) that you observe in the plot. The plant codes for these species will be recorded in the plot richness field at the left. 21 7. Click Computations/Notes or Computations by Species to review the data and see results 8. Click Close when you are done recording species that occur in the plot. Gap Intercept (Canopy and/or Basal) Canopy gap intercept is also a core method of the AIM strategy. This method is implemented on the same transects as LPI and can be done quickly following LPI by reading the transect backwards (i.e., LPI starts from 0 and reads along increasing distances, gap intercepts starts at the maximum distance away from the origin and reads back down the tape toward the plot center). 1. From the selected site and plot, select the Gap Intercept method from the Enter/Edit Data page. 2. Click New to create a gap intercept record for the plot. This will open the gap intercept Plot Defaults page. 22 3. Set the Data to be Collected drop-down box to “Canopy Gap only.” 4. Click OK to go to the gap intercept data collection page. 5. Enter the transect number, observer, and recorder to unlock the gap intercept form. 6. Check the Canopy Gap data direction settings. If reading the transect backwards after reading LPI, set this to “High to Low.” 7. Record the start and stop locations (i.e., distance from the origin of the transect) of canopy gaps in the form. Every time you enter values for a canopy gap a new row is added to the form. NOTE THAT THE CANOPY GAP FORM RECORDS GAPS IN CENTIMETERS OR INCHES. 8. Click Computations/Notes to check the data. 23 9. Click Close to save your data and return to the Enter/Edit Data page when you have finished recording canopy gaps for the transect. Plant Density This method is implemented on the same transects as LPI. The intent of this method is to document the presence of a species and comment on the growth stage of the majority of the identified species (seedlings or mature growth). Therefore, you will only see one SubQuad Size class A. 1. From the selected site and plot, select the Plant Density method from the Enter/Edit Data page. • Species must be entered into the Density Species list from the Plot Description page before you can complete this method 2. Click New to create a Plant Density record for the plot. This will open the Plant Density Plot Defaults page. 3. Click OK to go to the plant density data collection page 4. Enter the Line number, observer, and recorder to unlock the gap intercept form. 5. In the Set SubQuad Size for all Species, type 50 and select sq m from the drop down. 6. From the Classes and Default SubQad Sizes tab, click Change ALL Species to this size button. 24 7. Click the Data tab 8. Follow the Belt Transect Procedure as provided in the manual. 9. To add the count, presence of a species, you can type the overall number in the box or click the +1 button below the box. • Additional species can be added to the Density Species list by clicking on the Edit Species/Plot button at the top of the Plant Density Page. 10. On the Computations/Notes tab, click the Reclac Now… button to calculate the results. • Please add notes as to the observed growth stage of the identified species (seedlings or mature growth). 11. Click Close to save your data and return to the Enter/Edit Data page when you have finished recording Plant Density for the transect. Data Deliverables 1. A same day phone call or email to Caerus is required when any Colorado List A weed is identified or an infestation, that threatens to take over a reclaim. 2. Weekly status emails are requested. In the emails, list the locations by route and site name that were completed during the week. 3. Refer to the Request for Proposal (RFP) for Final report(s) due date and submittal requirements. 4. Final submittal would consist of a USB flash drive with the complete DIMA for each awarded area and companying photos. Photos are to be in pdf format and all photos for one site in a single pdf file. • Photo pdf required nomenclature:  YYYYMMDD (ex. 20170201)_Location(D20 566)_ Reclamation Photos 25 Quality Control using DIMA Quality control (QC) is the process of checking or inspecting a data set to make sure that it is complete, and that the data meet pre-defined data quality standards. Good habits in quality assurance efforts will minimize the effort needed during the QC process. For more information on how the QA and QC are part of the monitoring process, see the Monitoring Manual for Grassland, Shrubland, and Savanna Ecosystems, 2nd ed. In this manual, we will describe the QC process using DIMA. Step 1: Enter data, if needed. See the Quality Control section of the Monitoring Manual for data entry instructions. Step 2: Check the data set for completeness. Each plot should have: ☐ Plot Description Information ☐ Core Methods • Many of these completeness checks can be accomplished using the reporting function in DIMA. From the main screen select Reports 26 • Switch between the tabs to ensure that the plot layout information is entered. In the plot below, driving directions and azimuth information were not recorded. 27 ☐ Plot observation notes • Examine the Disturbances/Management History tab. No weather information is recorded. If it is not present elsewhere, I will look up this information using NOAA or PRISM. Step 2.2 Check for complete core methods ☐ Line-point intercept for each transect ☐ Canopy gap intercept for each transect ☐ 1 species richness form • In the Reports Manager window, select the Method Tracking Report and select Go. • When the Excel spreadsheet opens, select the Field Sampling tab. 28 For each plot, the total number of transects as well as the number of forms for each method is present. Note that AL-13 only has 2 Line-point intercept forms. I will add this to the list of missing data to pursue. Step 2.4: Check that all species recorded are present in the State Species List Run the Method Species Recorded Report to make sure that all your codes are in the state species list. Codes like BRASSAF01 may need to be added manually. Maintain a list of codes that need to be added so that I can add them to the master list that will be used for future DIMA updates. 1. Select Report. 2. For selected method select “Species Reports” 3. Select All Sites 4. Under the select report Tab Select Method Species Recorded 5. Select Go 6. An Excel document will open in a new tab (may take several minutes to open). Any entry that has ‘()’ or a Scientific Name is currently listed in your State Species list (Table 1). Table 1. Any entry that has no value in column B (Table 2) is not on your current State Species List. Table 2. 7. Check that all codes in your Method Species Recorded Report are in the state species list (have “ ()” or a scientific name in the excel output, see Table 1 and 2) and meet the standard unknown code format. 29 8. For codes that do not follow protocols, use the mass update of species code function to change it 9. All species codes that are in the list without a value in Column B need to be added to the States Species list. • Do this by opening the species list from any random plot. • Type the Code (eg BRASSAF01) into the Add Code(s) • Select Add • When prompted to add to table select ‘Yes’. • Do this for all of the codes without a value in column B in Table 2 from the Method Species Recorded Step 2.5: Check that all species have growth habit assignments: 1. Open DIMA and Select ‘Report’. 2. Under “Select Method” choose the “Species Richness” 3. Select All Sites and plots 4. Under the Select Report Tab Select Species List-Vertical. 5. Click Proceed with Report (this may take several minutes). 30 Table 3. 6. If any of your species don’t have a growth habit, sub-code, and duration you will need to update this information into your DIMA database (eg. ARTR2) using the classes listed in bullets below. Use the growth habit categories listed below. With any questions you have about classifying these plant codes do not hesitate to contact the GBI state office. Also see the growth habit assignment protocol for assignment rules based on USDA plants categories. 7. Any sub-Code that does not have one of the following categories will also have to be changed: The growth habit categories we are using for AIM are: • Graminoid-Annual • Graminoid-Perennial-Not Invasive • Forb-Annual-Not Invasive • Forb-Perennial-Not Invasive • Shrub-Not Sagebrush • Sagebrush • Tree • Succulent • Invasive Plus a few old codes from when growth habits were not assigned: • Forb-Duration Unk • Grass-Duration Unk • Unknown Please make sure the categories Forb/herb, Shrub, Subshrub, and Graminoid - DIMA defaults - are NOT used 19 Appendix H – Seeding Equipment and Performance Photos Reclamation Equipment and Performance Photos Appendix D Chisel Plowing and Disc Soil Prep: 6” to 8” Depth Drill Seeding: Range Type Drill with Chain Drags Broadcast and Drag Applications Broadcast spreader: can be used for seed or dry amendments Flexible Harrow for Amendment or seed incorporation Hydraulic Application: Seed/Amendments and Mulch Cannon Turret Hose work: Certified Weed-Free Straw Mulch Application: Typically 4000 lb. per acre Large bale equipment Small bale equipment Straw Mulch Crimp Disc: Anchoring Mulch Vertically into Soil Weed Management: Mechanical: Brush-hog mowing Chemical: Boom application 9 Topsoil Conservation: Planning to Initial Construction Initial Construction: Topsoil Conservation and Stormwater BMPs. Earthwork: Mass Soil Placement and Land-Forming (Interim Reclaim) 12 Landforming: Visual Resource Management Landforms used as contrast reduction Interim Reclamation: Multiple BMPs in Place, Hydraulic Seeding and Mulch Mechanical Surface Roughening: Hydro -Mulch (no shadowing) Hand & Track Hoe Bucket Tooth Pocking Track hoe pocking first followed by hand pocking. Notice the shadows! This is our standard BMP for slopes that interface native run-on. 16 Road & Pipeline Construction •Topsoil Conservation •Vegetation Conservation •Stormwater Management Access Road Construction Graveled, Cut-slope pocking Multiple BMPs for stabilization Final Reclamation: Re -contouring, Roughening, with use of Available Slash and Transplanting Final Reclamation: Extreme Slopes, Correct Landform, Multiple BMPs, Transplanting. Finished Product: BLM Approved FAN (Final Abandonment Notice)